MT WF-C878R WF-C878Ra Rev.D

SERVICE MANUAL
Color Inkjet Printer
EPSON WF-C878Ra
WF-C878R
CONFIDENTIAL
SEMF19-012
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being
informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2020 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

P • CS Quality Assurance Department
Confidential
Safety Precautions
All safety procedures described here shall be strictly adhered to by all parties servicing and maintaining this product.
DANGER
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply could result in serious bodily injury or loss of life.
1. Always disconnect the product from the power source and peripheral devices when servicing the product or performing maintenance.
2. When performing works described in this manual, do not connect to a power source until instructed to do so. Connecting to a power source causes high voltage
in the power supply unit and some electronic components even if the product power switch is off. If you need to perform the work with the power cable
connected to a power source, use extreme caution to avoid electrical shock.
WARNING
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or loss of life.
1. Always wear protective goggles for disassembly and reassembly to protect your eyes from ink in working. If any ink gets in your eyes, wash your eyes with
clean water and consult a doctor immediately.
2. When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such products containing flammable gas is
prohibited.
PRECAUTIONS
Strictly observe the following cautions. Failure to comply may lead to personal injury or damage of the product.
1. Repairs on Epson product should be performed only by an Epson certified repair technician.
2. No work should be performed on this product by persons unfamiliar with basic safety knowledge required for electrician.
3. The power rating of this product is indicated on the serial number/rating plate. Never connect this product to the power source whose voltages is different from
the rated voltage.
4. Replace malfunctioning components only with those components provided or approved by Epson; introduction of second-source ICs or other non-approved
components may damage the product and void any applicable Epson warranty.
Confidential
5. In order to protect sensitive microprocessors and circuitry, use static discharge equipment, such as anti-static wrist straps, when accessing internal components.
6. Immediately after turning the product power off, internal electrical parts are electrically charged. For this reason, follow the procedure at "7.1.1 Precautions of
repairing the product (p302) " to discharge the electrical parts before performing repair work.
7. Do not tilt this product immediately after initial ink charge, especially after performing the ink charge several times. Doing so may cause ink to leak from the
product because it may take some time for the waste ink pads to completely absorb ink wasted due to the ink charge.
8. Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water immediately. If you have a skin
irritation, consult a doctor immediately.
9. When disassembling or assembling this product, make sure to wear gloves to avoid injuries from metal parts with sharp edges.
10. Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer.
11. Observe the specified torque when tightening screws.
12. Be extremely careful not to scratch or contaminate the following parts.
 Nozzle plate of the print head
 Gears
 Rollers
 LCD
 Scanner Sensor
 Exterior parts
13. Never use oil or grease other than those specified in this manual. Use of different types of oil or grease may damage the component or give bad influence on the
printer function.
14. Apply the specified amount of grease described in this manual.
15. Make the specified adjustments when you disassemble the printer.
16. When cleaning this product, follow the procedure described in this manual.
17. When transporting the product with ink filled in the print head, take precautionary measure against ink leak before packing the product.
18. Make sure to install antivirus software in the computers used for the service support activities.
19. Keep the virus pattern file of antivirus software up-to-date.
Confidential
About This Manual
This manual, consists of the following chapters, is intended for repair service personnel and includes information necessary for properly performing maintenance
and servicing the product.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

Describes the feature of the product.
CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

Describes the basic specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 3. STRUCTURE
Explains about components and operating principles of the product.
CHAPTER 4. INSTALLATION
Describes how to install and set up the product.
CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

Explains about the service support mode.
CHAPTER 6. TROUBLESHOOTING
Provides information for identifying causes of errors/problems from the symptoms or events, and the procedure for troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 7. REPAIR WORK

Describes how to disassemble and reassemble the product, and describes required adjustments.
CHAPTER 8. MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Provides cautions, points to be checked and procedure for maintaining and inspecting the product.
CHAPTER 9. APPENDIX
Provides additional information for reference.
Confidential
Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, would result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of,
equipment.
C H E C K May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information
P O IN T that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components in
question may be adversely affected.
A D J U S T M E N T Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
R E Q U IR E D
Confidential
Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description

A February 14, 2020 First release
Revise the content
 Chapter 7
 Corrected description of ink discharge"o Maintenance" (p.315).
 Corrected description of Ink Supply Unit"Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table (Printer)" (p.316).
B March 24, 2020  Added description of Check Point" Ink Discharge [Head Ink Discharge: C08][Supply Ink Discharge: C09][Ink System Ink Discharge:
C10]" (p.372).
 Added description of ink discharge" Before Repair Operation [B90] (Print Head)" (p.374).
 Corrected description of ink fill" After Repair Adjustment [B80] (Print Head)" (p.376).
 Added description of ink discharge" Before Repair Operation [B91] (Ink Supply Unit)" (p.377).
 Added description of Caution"7.3.4.5 Ink Supply 2" (p.444).
Revise the content

 Chapter 5
 Added new menu " ROM Board Temporary Repair: MENU " "5.1.2 Service mode menu configuration" (p.128)
and "5.1.3 Service Support Menu Screen Transition" (p.129).
 Chapter 7
C June 3, 2020  Corrected items and targets in the adjustment table"Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table (Printer)" (p.316).
 Added description of detailed process " After Repair Adjustment [B80] (Print Head)" (p.376).
 Added MTTR for some parts "7.3.4 Repair Work Details" (p.406).
 Corrected minor typos and link mistakes.
 Chapter 9
 Corrected description of Total number (Service Status Sheet) "9.3 Status Sheet Information" (p.760).
Confidential
Revision Date of Issue Description
Revise the content
 Chapter 2
 Corrected the Power consumption value " Power consumption" (p.14)
 Chapter 3
 Added description of Check Point " Replace the Driven Roller" (p.81)
 Chapter 6
 Added description about Recovery mode" Recovery mode display" (p.151)
D August 7, 2020
 Added description about System Error" System error" (p.162)
 Added CRCM FFC image " CRCM fuse blown error (Error code:033001)" (p.191)
 Added CRCM FFC image " CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR" (p.192)
 Chapter 7
 Corrected description of the menu name to be executed" Adjustment after replacing the Print Head (Inspection& Ink Charge)" (p.578).
 Chapter 9
 Added description of CRCM FFC and CSIC board "9.1 Connection Diagram" (p.756).
Confidential
EPSON WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R Revision D
Contents
Chapter 1 Product Outline 3.3.3 Ink Supply Mechanism .............................................................................. 42
3.3.4 Ink System Mechanism ............................................................................. 46
1.1 Product Summary ............................................................................................... 12 3.3.5 Paper Loading/Paper Feed ......................................................................... 51
3.3.6 Scanner/ADF mechanism .......................................................................... 63
Chapter 2 Product Specifications
3.4 Life Management .............................................................................................. 66
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications ...................................................................... 14 3.4.1 Periodic replacement parts ......................................................................... 66
3.4.2 Periodic Maintenance ................................................................................ 68
2.2 Printing Specifications ....................................................................................... 18
2.3 Copying Specifications ...................................................................................... 18 Chapter 4 Installation
2.4 ADF Specifications ........................................................................................... 19
4.1 Overview of Installation .................................................................................... 87
2.5 Scanner Specifications ....................................................................................... 20
4.1.1 Installation Work Flow ............................................................................ 87
2.6 Options Specifications ....................................................................................... 20 4.1.2 Installation Environment .......................................................................... 88
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications ....................................................... 21 4.1.3 Installation ................................................................................................ 90
4.1.4 Unpacking and checking items included in package ................................ 90
Chapter 3 Configuration 4.1.5 Removing the protective tape and protective material ............................. 91
4.1.6 Installation ................................................................................................ 91
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) ..................................................... 23 4.1.7 Ink information display setting ................................................................. 99
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications ......................................... 29 4.1.8 Firmware update ..................................................................................... 100
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors) ........................................................................ 30 4.1.9 Main Unit Settings .................................................................................. 101
3.2.2 Printer Main Unit 4.2 Printing/operation checks ............................................................................... 121
(Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors) .............................. 31
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids) ..................... 32 Chapter 5 Service Support Mode
3.2.4 Printer Main Unit
(Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids) ................. 33 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 125
3.2.5 Printer Main Unit 5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures ...................................... 125
(Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids) .................. 34 5.1.2 Service mode menu configuration ........................................................... 128
3.2.6 Options (Motors) ....................................................................................... 35 5.1.3 Service Support Menu Screen Transition ................................................ 129
3.2.7 Options (Sensors) ....................................................................................... 36
3.2.8 Scanner (Motors and Sensors) ................................................................... 37 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
3.2.9 ADF (Motors and Sensors) ........................................................................ 38
6.1 Troubleshooting Workflow ............................................................................. 132
3.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES ............................................................................. 39
3.3.1 Print Head .................................................................................................. 39 6.2 Error Display and Solution .............................................................................. 134
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism .................................................................................. 40 6.2.1 Indications, Causes, and Solutions when Normal Errors Occur ............. 134
6.2.2 Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom ................................................ 199
9
Confidential
6.3 Individual Action Check Function .................................................................. 236 8.4 Printer Status Information ................................................................................ 747
6.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 236 8.5 USB F/W Update .............................................................................................. 748
6.3.2 Precautions for startup (error display) .................................................... 237
8.6 Product Swap ................................................................................................... 751
6.3.3 How to perform individual action checks ............................................... 240
8.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 751
6.4 FAX Troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 248 8.6.2 Working procedure of Product Swap ...................................................... 752
6.4.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting ...................................................... 248
6.4.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX .................................................................. 248 Chapter 9 APPENDIX
6.4.3 FAX Error Code ..................................................................................... 265
6.4.4 Fax-Related Telephone Line Check Mode ............................................. 267 9.1 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 756
6.4.5 FAX Service Parameter .......................................................................... 275 9.2 Part Names Conversion Table .......................................................................... 757
6.4.6 Fax related user special parameters ........................................................ 291 9.3 Status Sheet Information .................................................................................. 760
6.4.7 Fax related troubleshooting .................................................................... 294
9.4 WebConfig Reference Information .................................................................. 780
Chapter 7 Repair Work 9.4.1 Checking Operation of Main Unit Information Transmission Function (Web-
Config) .................................................................................................... 780
7.1 Repair work summary ...................................................................................... 302 9.4.2 How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time (WebConfig) 781
7.1.1 Precautions of repairing the product ........................................................ 302 9.4.3 Checking Number of Print Sides (WebConfig) ....................................... 783
7.1.2 Repair Workflow ..................................................................................... 303
7.1.3 Tools ........................................................................................................ 304
7.2 Adjustment and Inspection Work ..................................................................... 305
7.2.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview ..................................................... 305
7.2.2 Adjustment and Inspection List ............................................................... 306
7.2.3 Adjustment and Inspection Table ............................................................ 316
7.2.4 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections ............................................... 319
7.2.5 Software Adjustments and Inspections .................................................... 325
7.3 Repair Work Procedure .................................................................................... 384
7.3.1 Parts/Components Location ..................................................................... 384
7.3.2 How to Read This Chapter ...................................................................... 402
7.3.3 Preparation for Servicing ......................................................................... 404
7.3.4 Repair Work Details ................................................................................ 406
Chapter 8 Maintenance/Inspection
8.1 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 741
8.2 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 741
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions ......................................................... 742
8.3 Periodic Replacement Parts .............................................................................. 744
8.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................. 744
8.3.2 How to Reset the Counter for Periodic Replacement Parts ..................... 744
10
Confidential
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT OUTLINE
Confidential
1.1 Product Summary

This printer is a successor model of WF-C878R/WF-C878Ra. The functions
for the items described below have been improved from its predecessors.
* : The ADF/SCN mechanism, carriage mechanism, paper feeding and paper

conveying mechanism are same as in WF-C869Ra/C869R.
 Improvement in serviceability
 Mechanical structure changes for improving serviceability.
• Torque driverless for Print Head replacement.
• Long driverless for Ink System replacement.
 Improvement in usability
 Adopts a telescopic output stacker.
 Built-in ink pack (width reduced 166 mm compared to its predecessor) Figure 1-1.
 Improved printing speed.
Product Outline Product Summary 12

Confidential
CHAPTER
2
PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Confidential
2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

 Hardware specifications
Item Specification
Stored 621 mm (W) x 650 mm (D) x 641 mm (H)
Printer only
Printing (maximum dimension) 621 mm (W) x 862 mm (D) x 719 mm (H)
Basic model Stored 621 mm (W) x 656 mm (D) x 768 mm (H)
(Main unit + one additional cassette) Printing (maximum dimension) 621 mm (W) x 862 mm (D) x 846 mm (H)
Fully set model Stored 772 mm (W) x 797 mm (D) x 1107 mm (H)
(Main unit + three additional cassettes + printer
stand) Printing (maximum dimension) 772 mm (W) x 877 mm (D) x 1185 mm (H)
Without consumables and options 59.7 kg

Weight
With consumables 63.4 kg
LCD 5 inch touch panel
Touch panel Optical touch panel
Power supply rating 100 to 240 VAC
Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
Rated current 1.3 to 0.7 A
Maximum rated current 2.0 to 1.0 A
Rated frequency range 50 to 60 Hz
Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz
Copying Approx. 40 - 42 W
Power consumption Ready mode Approx. 17 W
*It depends on the input voltage. Sleep mode Approx. 1.3 - 1.4 W
Power off mode Approx. 0.1 - 0.3 W
Operating Temperature 10 to 35 degrees C
Humidity (without
20 to 80% RH
condensation)
Altitude 3,000 m or lower
Environmental
Stored Temperature -20 to 40 degrees C
Humidity (without
5 to 85% RH
condensation)
Altitude ---
Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Confidential
Item Specification
Paper cassette (C1) 250 sheets
Paper loading
capacity
Rear paper feed tray (Rear ASF Unit) 85 sheets
Plain paper (0.11 mm thickness, 64 g/m2
250 sheets
paper) Default
Plain paper (0.11 mm thickness, 64 g/m2
Output tray capacity 250 sheets
paper) Draft
Photo paper (A4/Letter/8”x10”/5”x7”) 20 sheets
Postcard 20 sheets
Large BK T05B1
Size
C T05B2
M T05B3
Y T05B4
Replacement ink cartridges
Standard BK T05A1
Size
C T05A2
M T05A3
Y T05A4
Replacement Maintenance Box T6714
Product lifetime 600,000 sheets

Confidential
 Paper handling
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Postcard Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
Paper with both sides made of
A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
high-quality paper (recycled paper)
Preprinted paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Cassette Letterhead paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(C1)
Recycled paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Colored paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Business plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Thick paper 1 A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 91 to 150 g/m2
Plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
Preprinted paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Cassette Letterhead paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
(C2 to C4) Recycled paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Colored paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Business plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2
Thick paper 1 A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 91 to 150 g/m2
Thick paper 2 A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, User-defined sizes 151 to 200 g/m2

Confidential
Paper weight
Paper
Paper types Paper sizes (grams per
source
square meter)
Plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Postcard Reply-paid card, Postcard, Postcard for inkjet printers ---
NAGAGATA No.3/No.4/No.40, Envelope #10, Envelope DL 75 to 90 g/m2
Envelopes YOGATA No.1/No.2/No.3/No.4 75 to 100 g/m2
KAKUGATA No.2/No.20 80 to 100 g/m2
A3, A4 92.5 g/m2
Superfine postcard Postcard 175 g/m2
Superfine
A4 167 g/m2
label sheet
Glossy photo paper A3+, A3, 11 x 17 in., 11 x 14 in., 10 x 12 in., Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in.,
255 g/m2
16:9 wide, 4 x 6 in., 3.5 x 5 in., card
Semi-gloss photo paper A3+, A3, Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in., 3.5 x 5 in. 250 g/m2
Rear tray Photo matte paper A3+, A3, 11 x 14 in., Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in. 167 g/m2
(Rear ASF Photo matte paper for pigment ink A3+, A3, A4 189 g/m2
Unit)
Double-sided matte paper Letter, A4 176 g/m2
Superfine paper A3+, A3, Letter, A4, 102 g/m2
CRISPIA high-gloss photo paper A3+, A3, Letter, A4, 8 x 10 in., 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in., 3.5 x 5 in. 300 g/m2
Photo paper light sheer gloss A3+, A3, 11 x 17 in., Letter, A4, 5 x 7 in., 4 x 6 in., 3.5 x 5 in. 200 g/m2
Preprinted paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Letterhead paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Recycled paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 g/m2
Colored paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 64 to 90 gm2
Business plain paper A3, 11 x 17 in., B4, Legal, Letter, A4, Executive, B5, A5, A6, B6, User-defined sizes 73 g/m2

Confidential
2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications

Item Specification Item Specification
Print method Serial inkjet Flatbed 300dpi x 600dpi, 600dpi x 600dpi
Scan resolution
Paper ejection Face up ADF 300dpi x 300dpi, 600dpi x 600dpi
Paper feed method Friction feed method Print resolutions 600dpi x 600dpi, 600dpi x 1200dpi
Print head μTFP Flatbed KG to A3/Ledger
Document size
Number of Black 800 ADF A6 Portrait (LEF) to A3/Ledger
nozzles Color 800 for each color Number of pages that can be stored for collate
320
Minimum ink droplet size 4.6 ng copy
Number of ink colors 4 color  Standard copy

 One-sided document --> 2-sided copy
Black Pigment ink
Ink type  2-sided document --> One-sided copy
Color Pigment ink  2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
Black ink pack is on the bottom line.  2-Up copy
Order of Ink Packs Yellow, Magenta, Cyan ink packs are on the upper line of Copy features  One-sided document --> 2-sided copy
the left side.  2-sided document --> One-sided copy
Number of Ink Packs 4  2-sided document --> 2-sided copy
 ID card copy (Scanner glass)
Maintenance Box User-replaceable
 Collate copy
Maximum print resolution 4800dpi x 1200dpi  Copying of mix documents
Durability 600,000 sheets
Print speed One side 25/24ipm
(monochrome
/color) 2-sided 17/16ipm
Printer languages ESC/P Raster, ESC/P-R, ESC/P-RJ, Postscript3
Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Confidential
Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications

Number of copies 1 to 999 sheets
Custom 25% to 400% Item Specification
Zoom
Auto fit Yes Sensor type CIS
 One-sided -> One-sided Light source LED
 One-sided -> 2-sided Maximum optical resolutions (main scan x sub scan) 600dpi x 600dpi
2-Sided
 2-sided -> One-sided Document setting Centering
 2-sided -> 2-sided
Document set orientation Face up
Density
-4 to +4 Auto 2-sided scanning 1 path for 2-sided
Adjustment
Contrast -4 to +4 300dpi Color 0.7 msec/line
Image
adjustm Color balance -4 to +4 300dpi monochrome 0.7 msec/line
Copy settings Scan speed
ent Sharpness Yes 600dpi Color 0.8 msec/line
Remove 600dpi monochrome 0.8 msec/line

Yes
background Plain paper, High-quality paper,
Document paper type
Recycled paper
 Text
 Text and Image Size A6 Portrait to A3/Ledger
Document type (Quality) Document paper size
 Ultra fine Paper weight 52 to 128 g/m2
 Photo Sheet feeding capacity (plain paper (high-quality paper/
50 sheets or 5.5 mm or less
Dry time for 2-sided copy 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec recycled paper) 64 g/m2, 80 g/m2)
Copy density restriction ADF durability 90,000 sheets
Yes
for 2-sided copy
Margin Yes (3mm)
Preview Yes
Product Specifications ADF Specifications 19

Confidential
2.5 Scanner Specifications 2.6 Options Specifications

Item Specification Item Specification
Scanner type Flatbed Model C12C932611/PXA3CU2
Sensor type CIS (monochrome) Optional cassettes Dimension 567 (W) x 576 (D) x 160 mm (H)
Light source LED Weight 11.7 kg
Optical resolution 600 x 600dpi Model C12C934321/PR3PS1
Maximum optical resolutions 1,200 x 2,400dpi Dimension 772 (W) x 797 (D) x 116 mm* (H)
Printer Stand
Maximum scan area 297 x 438.1 mm *During installation: 83 mm
Maximum document size A3, LGR Weight Approx. 30.5 kg
Document setting Far left corner
300dpi Color 1.4 msec/line
300dpi monochrome 0.9 msec/line
Scan speed
30,000 reciprocating operations
Scanner durability
(scanner carriage)
PDF, JPEG, TIFF, Multi-TIFF,
Output file format
BMP (Win), PNG
 Scan to Email
 Scan to Folder
Additional features  Scan to Memory
 Scan to Cloud
 Scan to Document Capture Pro
Product Specifications Scanner Specifications 20

Confidential
2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  FAX specifications

Item Specification
 Network specifications
Standard analog telephone lines (PSTN), PBX (Private
Support lines
Item Specification Branch Exchange) telephone systems
 10Base-T (IEEE802.3i) Standard: 8 pixels per mm x 3.85 pixels per mm
 100Base-TX (IEEE802.3u) Fine: 8 pixels per mmx 7.7 pixels per mm
Wired Ethernet standards Monochrome
 1000Base-T (IEEE802.3ab) Resolution Super Fine: 8 pixels per mmx 15.4 pixels per mm
 IEEE802.3az (energy save type)
Ultra Fine: 16 pixels per mm x 15.4 pixels per mm
 IEEE802.11b
Color 200 x 200dpi
 IEEE802.11g
Wi-Fi standards  IEEE802.11n Speed Up to 33.6kbps
 IEEE 802.11a Encoding Monochrome MH, MR, MMR
 IEEE802.11ac method Color JPEG
Security protocol TCP/IPv4, TCP/IPv6 Communication mode CCITT/ITU-T Group 3, Super Group 3 (V34)
 Infrastructure mode Document sizes A5 to A3/Ledger
Coordination modes
 Wi-Fi Direct (Simple AP mode) Paper sizes to print faxes HLT/A5/B5/A4/LT/LGL/B4/11x17/A3
 WEP (64bit/128bit) Approx. 3 sec (ITU-T standard document, Monochrome
Wireless security  WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES) Transmission time
Standard mode, Super Group 3)
 WPA3-SAE (AES)
Page memory for received faxes Up to 550 pages or 200 faxes
Frequency range 2.400 to 2.4835GHz
Speed dial and group dial together up to 2,000 contents.
Speed dial/
(Up to 200 contacts can be included from speed dial in
Group dial
one group)
Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

Confidential
CHAPTER
3
CONFIGURATION
Confidential
3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) No. Name Explanation

Used to perform printer operations and settings.
1 Operation Panel
Also displays the printer status.
USB Port for External Device
2 Used to insert the external memory.
Connection Port
3 Print Head (Nozzle) Discharges ink.
4 Paper Ejection Guide Holds the printed paper.
Holds the printed paper. Can be pulled out by
5 Output Tray hand. Can be put back for storage by pressing
with hand.
6 Manual Holder Used to place the manuals.
7 Front Cover (A) Opened to remove the paper trapped inside.
8 Cleaning Cloth Holder Used to place the cleaning cloth.
9 Cleaning Cloth Used to clean the surface of the scanner glass.
Figure 3-1.
Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

Confidential
No. Name Explanation

1 Paper Cassette 1 (C1)
Used to set paper.
2 Paper Cassette 2 (C2)
3 Paper Cassette 3 (C3) Used to set paper. Optional additional cassette.
4 Paper Cassette 4 (C4) Can be used when options are installed.
An exclusive printer stand (with casters) to

5 Exclusive Printer Stand prevent overturning. Can be used when options
are installed.
Guide for feeding the paper in an absolutely
6 Paper Guide straight manner.
Matched with the sides of the paper.
7 Paper Cassette Used to set paper.
8 Ink Pack Tray Used to set the ink packs.
9 Cover Lock Used to lock the ink pack cover.
10 Ink Pack Cover (P) Opened when replacing the ink pack.
Figure 3-2.

Confidential

Blocks the light from outside during scanning of
1 Document Cover
documents.
Used to set the document. Even documents that
2 Scanner Glass have a certain thickness, such as envelopes and
books that cannot be fed by ADF can be set.
ADF (Auto Document Feeder) Opened to remove the documents trapped in
3
Cover (F) ADF.
Guide for feeding the document in an absolutely
4 ADF Document Guide straight manner. Matched with the sides of the
document.
5 ADF Tray Automatically sends the documents.
Prevents the documents ejected from the ADF
6 Stopper
output tray from falling.
7 ADF Output Tray Holds the documents ejected from ADF.
Figure 3-3.

Confidential

1 Paper Support Supports the set paper.
2 Manual Feed Tray (B) Used to set paper.
3 Paper Guide straight manner. Matched with the sides of the
paper.
Prevents foreign objects from entering inside.
4 Paper Source Cover
Usually closed during use.
5 Paper Guide straight manner.
Matched with the sides of the paper.
Figure 3-4.

Confidential

1 Duplex Print Unit (D2) Removed when taking out the trapped paper.
2 Power Connector Used to connect the power cable.
Opened to replace the maintenance box or
3 Rear Cover (D1)
remove the paper trapped inside.
4 Rear Cover (D3)
Opened to remove the trapped paper.
5 Rear Cover (E)
Collects the waste ink discharged at the time of
6 Maintenance Box
cleaning or printing.
7 Service Port Generally not used. Do not peel off the seal.
8 LINE Port Used to connect the telephone line.
9 EXT. Port Used to connect an external telephone.
10 LAN Port Used to connect the LAN cable.
Used to connect the USB cable for connecting to
11 USB Port
the computer.
Figure 3-5.

Confidential
No. Explanation
Used to turn the power ON/OFF.
1
Before pulling out the power cable, make sure the power lamp is lit out.
2 Displays the home screen.
Used to log off from the printer when [User access control] is enabled.
3
When [User access control] is disabled, this icon is also disabled.
Displays the [Help] screen. The actions to take in the case of a problem, or the basic
4
operating procedures of the printer can be checked.
Used to suspend a job in progress, and interrupt and execute another job. If you press
5 this button after the interrupt operation has ended, the suspended operation is
resumed.
Used to return the setting during the operation to the state prior to change. If the user
6 default settings have not been made, this button returns the settings to those at the
time of purchase.
Displays the [Address book] search screen. Addresses can be registered, edited, and
7
deleted.
Figure 3-6. 8 Used to clear the numerical settings such as the number of copies, etc.
9 Used to enter numbers, alphabets, and symbols.
Displays the [Job/State] menu. The state of the printer and the job history can be
checked.
 Error lamp (left)
10
Flashes or lights up when an error occurs.
 Data lamp (right)
Flashes when data is being processed. Lights up when there is a standby job.
Displays the [Paper settings] screen. The size and type of paper can be set for each
11
feeder.
12 Used to suspend the operation that is currently in progress.
Displays items and messages.
If no operation is performed for a fixed period of time, the sleep mode is activated
13 and the display is cleared. The display can be restored by tapping on the touch panel.
Depending on the settings, it is possible to return to the original brightness from the
sleep mode by pressing a button on the operation panel.
14 Used to return to the previous screen.
Lights up when an unprocessed (unread, not printed, or not saved) document is
15
received.

Confidential
3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

This section shows the positions and specifications of the motors, sensors, and
solenoids used in the product.
 Printer main unit
 Motors (p. 30)
 Ink detection and cover detection system sensors (p. 31)
 CR mechanism sensors and solenoids (p. 32)
 Paper feed and conveyance system sensors and solenoids (p. 33)
 Paper cassette detection and other sensors and solenoids (p. 34)
 Options
 Motors (p. 35)
 Sensors (p. 36)
 Scanner
 Motors and sensors (p. 37)
 ADF
 Motors and sensors (p. 38)
Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 29

Confidential
3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors)

Table 3-1. Printer main unit (motor)
ASF Motor
Name Function Type
DC motor
CR Motor Used as CR operation drive.
(42 VDC ± 5%) APG Motor CR Motor
Used as the paper feeding or paper DC motor
PF Motor
ejection roller drive. (42 VDC ± 5%)
Used as a drive for the paper feeding
mechanism. PF Motor
 Pickup Roller DC motor
ASF Motor
 Rear ASF Unit (42 VDC ± 5%)
 Automatic Duplex Print Unit
(Intermediate roller)
Used to provide drive for the up/down DC motor
Lift Motor
operation of the hopper of paper cassette. (42 VDC ± 5%)
Used as a drive for the height change
DC motor
APG Motor mechanism of PG in accordance with the
(42 VDC ± 5%)
print settings and paper type.
Used to supply ink to the ink supply unit DC motor
Supply Pump Motor
from the ink pack. (42 VDC ± 5%)
Lift Motor
Supply Pump Motors
Figure 3-7. Printer Main Unit (Motors)

Confidential

Paper Jam Clear
(Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors) Cover Open Sensor
Ink End Sensor
Table 3-2. Ink Supply/Exterior System Sensors
Ink Cartridge
Name Function Type Sensor (yellow) Rear Cover
Ink Cartridges Sensor Open
Used for ink pack recognition. CSIC Sensor
(x4)
Maintenance Box Sensor Used for maintenance box recognition. CSIC
Transmission type
Ink End Sensor (x4) Detects the end of the ink. photo interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Detects the open/closed state of the rear
Rear Cover Open Sensor contact
cover.
(3.3VDC±5%) Front Cover
Mechanical Sensor
Paper Jam Clear Cover Detects the open/closed state of the paper
contact
Open Sensor jam clear cover.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Detects the open/closed state of the front
Front Cover Sensor contact
cover.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Ink Pack Cover Open Checks the open/closed state of the ink
contact
Sensor pack cover.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Maintenance
Ink Cartridge Box Sensor
Sensor (magenta)
Ink End Sensor
Ink Pack Cover Ink Cartridge Ink Cartridge

Open Sensor Sensor (black) Sensor (cyan)
Figure 3-8. Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors

Confidential
3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids)

Table 3-3. CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids
APG Encoder
Name Function Type
Transparent type
Used in CR operation control (CR scale
CR Encoder photo interrupter CR Encoder
reading). APG Phase Sensor
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
Used to control the APG motor
APG Encoder photo interrupter
operation.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Reflective type
Used to detect the leading edge of the
PW Sensor photo interrupter
paper, and the paper width.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
APG Phase Sensor Used to detect the APG phase. photo interrupter
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Used in the PW shutter opening/closing Solenoid (42 VDC
PW Solenoid
operation. ± 5%)
PW Solenoid PW Sensor
Figure 3-9. CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids

Confidential

(Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids) Hopper Up/down Duplex Unit Paper
Sensor Detector
Table 3-4. Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids
Name Function Type
Transparent type
Used to control the paper feed drive (PF
PF Encoder photo interrupter
motor).
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type Rear ASF Solenoid
ASF Encoder Used to control the ASF motor operation. photo interrupter
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type ASF Encoder

Used to detect paper conveyance from
Feed Sensor photo interrupter PE Sensor Feed Sensor
the pickup roller to the PE sensor.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Feed Sensor of Ink Supply
Used to detect paper conveyance from Transparent type
Feed Sensor of Ink PF Encoder
the 2nd intermediate roller to the feed photo interrupter
Supply
sensor. (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Used to detect the existence of paper in Transparent type
Duplex Unit Paper
the Duplex Unit when a paper jam photo interrupter
Detector
occurs. (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Used to detect the paper leading edge and Reflective type
PE Sensor the paper trailing edge at the time of photo interrupter
paper conveyance. (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Used to perform switching of the ASF
Solenoid (42 VDC
Rear ASF Solenoid motor drive transmission to the rear ASF
± 5%)
unit.
Transparent type
Used to detect the phase of the lift motor
Lift Phase Sensor photo interrupter
drive.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
Hopper Up/Down Sensor Used to detect the hopper up/down state. photo interrupter
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Lift Phase Sensor
Figure 3-10. Paper Feed and Conveyance System Sensors and Solenoids

Confidential

(Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids)
Table 3-5. Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids Intermediate Nip Intermediate
Release Sensor Release Solenoid
Name Function Type Cassette
Papersize
Paper Detector Used to detect the existence of paper in
Transparent type Sensor (1) Paper Detector
photo interrupter (Rear ASF Unit)
(Paper Cassette (C1)) the paper cassette. SMAP Phase
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Sensor
Transparent type
Paper Detector Used to detect the existence of paper in
photo interrupter Paper Detector
(Rear ASF Unit) the Rear ASF Unit.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%) (Paper Cassette
Mechanical (C1))
Used to detect whether a paper cassette
Cassette Sensor contact (3.3 VDC
has been inserted.
± 5%)
Used to detect the size of the paper set in Mechanical
Cassette Papersize Cassette
the paper cassette. (Detects the paper contact (3.3 VDC
Sensor (1) Sensor
length at the end guide position.) ± 5%)
Used to detect the size of the paper set in Transparent type
Cassette Papersize
the paper cassette. (Detection of paper photo interrupter
Sensor (2)
width) (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Intermediate Release Releases the nip of the intermediate
---
Solenoid roller.
Transparent type Cassette Papersize
Intermediate Nip Release Detects the condition of nip of the
Sensor intermediate roller.
photo interrupter Sensor (2)
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
SMAP Phase Sensor Transparent type
(PF eccentricity Detects the phase of the SMAP roller. photo interrupter
correction) (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Measures the temperature and humidity, Humidity Sensor
Humidity Sensor and sets the print dry time to the ---
appropriate time.
Analog sensor Ink Leak
Ink Leak Sensor (x3) Used to detect an ink leakage. Sensor
(3.3VDC ± 5%)
Figure 3-11. Paper Cassette Detection and Other Sensors and Solenoids

Confidential
3.2.6 Options (Motors)

Table 3-6. Options (Motors)
Name Function Type
Used for driving the feed mechanism. ASF Motor Lift Motor
DC motor (Optional Cassette) (Optional Cassette)
ASF Motor  Pickup Roller
(42VDC±7%)
 2nd Separation Roller
Used for the up/down operation of the DC motor
Lift Motor
paper cassettes. (42VDC±7%)
Lift Motor
(Optional Cassette)
ASF Motor
(Optional Cassette)
Figure 3-12. Options (Motors)

Confidential
3.2.7 Options (Sensors)

Feed Sensor
Table 3-7. Options (Sensors) Hopper Up/down
Name Function Type Sensor
Transmission type
ASF Encoder Used for ASF motor operation control. photo interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmission type
Used for detecting the phase of lift motor
Lift Phase Sensor photo interrupter
driving.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Transmission type
Hopper Up/down Sensor Detects the up/down state of the hopper. photo interrupter
(3.3VDC±5%) Cassette Paper
Size Detector (2)
Transmission type
Used for paper conveyance detection
Feed Sensor photo interrupter
from the pickup roller.
(3.3VDC±5%) Paper Detection Sensor
Transmission type Cassette

Detects whether or not there is paper
Paper Detection Sensor
inside the paper cassette.
photo interrupter Detection Sensor Paper Jam Clear
(3.3VDC±5%) Cover Sensor
Mechanical
Cassette Detection Detects the insertion state of the paper
contact
Sensor cassette.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Mechanical
Paper Jam Clear Cover Detects the open/closed state of the rear
contact
Sensor cover.
(3.3VDC±5%)
Detects the size of the paper loaded in the Mechanical
Cassette Paper Size
paper cassette. (Paper length is contact
Detector (1)
determined from the end guide position.) (3.3VDC±5%)
Transmission type
Cassette Paper Size Detects the size of the paper loaded in the ASF Encoder
photo interrupter
Detector (2) paper cassette. (Paper width detection) Cassette Paper Size
(3.3VDC±5%)
Detector (1)
Lift Phase Sensor
Figure 3-13. Options (Sensors)

Confidential
3.2.8 Scanner (Motors and Sensors)

Table 3-8. Scanner (motor / sensor)
Name Function Type
DC motor
Scanner Motor Used as a drive for the scanner carriage.
(42 VDC ± 5%)
Used for scanning documents on the
CIS Module scanner glass, and also for scanning CIS image sensor
documents on the ADF surface. Scanner Motor
CIS Module
Transparent type
Used to control the scanner motor
SCN Encoder photo interrupter
operation. ADF Half Closed
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Sensor
Reflective type
SCN Document Size Used to detect the size of the document
photo interrupter
Sensor set on the scanner glass. SCN Encoder
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
ADF Close
photo interrupter
Sensor
Used to detect the open/close state of the (3.3 VDC ± 5%)
ADF Unit. Transparent type
ADF Half Closed
photo interrupter
Sensor
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
SCN Document Size Sensor
ADF Close Sensor
Figure 3-14. Scanner (Motors and Sensors)

Confidential
3.2.9 ADF (Motors and Sensors)

Table 3-9. ADF (Motors and Sensors)
Name Function Type
ADF Pickup Used as a drive for the document feeding DC motor
ADF PF Encoder
Motor mechanism. (42 VDC ± 5%)
Used as a drive for the document DC motor
ADF PF Motor
conveyance mechanism. (42 VDC ± 5%)
Used for scanning the reverse side during CIS image
CIS Module
2-side scanning. Sensor
Transparent type ADF PF Motor
ADF Pickup Used to control the ADF Pickup Motor
photo interrupter
Encoder operation.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%) ADF Document Sensor
Transparent type ADF PE Sensor A/B/C
Used to control the ADF PF Motor
ADF PF Encoder photo interrupter
operation.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
ADF Pickup Motor
Transparent type ADF Document Size
Detects the existence of a document in
ADF PE Sensor A
the paper feed path.
photo interrupter Sensor
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
ADF PE Sensor B photo interrupter
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
ADF PE Sensor C photo interrupter
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
ADF Document Detects whether a document has been set
photo interrupter
Sensor in the ADF Document Support.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Transparent type
ADF Document Size Detects the size of the document set in ADF Pickup Encoder
photo interrupter
Sensor the ADF Document Support.
(3.3 VDC ± 5%)
Mechanical
ADF Cover Open/Close Used to detect the open/close state of the
contact (3.3 VDC
ADF Cover Open/Close
Sensor ADF Cover. Sensor
± 5%) CIS Module
Figure 3-15. ADF (Motors and Sensors)

Confidential
3.3 OPERATING PRINCIPLES The nozzle arrangement of the mTFP4 head mounted on this printer differs
from that of the traditional printers. The nozzles of the same color are not
arranged next to each other.
3.3.1 Print Head
The nozzle layout as seen from behind the Print Head is shown below.
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R feature the brand new Print Head: mTFP4 head.
The mTFP4 head features dense nozzle pitches (600 dpi); denser than the
traditional heads. In addition, the number of nozzles per row is also greater
with the row length of 1.33 inches. Row B Row D Row F Row H
(Cyan) (Bk) (Magenta) (Yellow)
Row A Row C Row E Row G
These features contribute to higher image quality and faster printing by (Yellow) (Magenta) (Bk) (Cyan)
increasing both the quantity and the density of ink droplets per shot. The
mTFP4 head also features excellent durability; twice as good as the traditional
Paper feed direction

Print Heads.
The following table lists the Print Head specifications.
Table 3-10. Nozzle Configuration

Printhead type μTFP4
Black (B: 2 row), Cyan (C: 2 row)
Color
Magenta (M: 2 row), Yellow (Y: 2 row)
Number of nozzles 3200 nozzles (400 nozzles per row)
1/600inch
Nozzle pitch 0.042 mm (1/600 inch)
Full digit side Carriage movement direction 0 digit side
Figure 3-17. Nozzle layout

This product uses off-carriage type ink supply mechanism. Therefore, the Print
Head is equipped with self-sealing valves1 so that the amount of ink fired from
the Print Head is not affected by variation in pressure inside the ink path caused
by movements of the carriage or ink supply operations.
Figure 3-16. Print Head Appearance

1. This valve opens only when the pressure of the output side drops below a specified value. Because of this character-
istic of the valve, pressure variation in the input side does not affect the output side.
Configuration OPERATING PRINCIPLES 39

Confidential
3.3.2 Carriage Mechanism

The carriage mechanism of this product consists of the, CR Unit, CR Encoder CR Scale
Sensor, CR Scale, CR Motor, CR Timing Belt, and etc. The carriage
mechanism is a key mechanism to ensure stable print quality because printing APG Unit CR Encoder
Sensor
is performed by moving the CR Unit from side to side.
The CR Unit is supported by the CR Shaft on the lower part and by the CR
Guide Frame on the top.
The CR Unit is attached to the CR Timing Belt that is moved by the CR Motor
so that the assy can move from side to side to print. The position and speed of
the CR Unit are always monitored by the CR Encoder Sensor and CR Scale,
and the CR Motor is controlled in accordance with the information acquired by
the CR Encoder Sensor.
To protect the PW Sensor from ink mist, the PW sensor shutter mechanism is
mounted on the bottom of the CR Unit. CR Shaft
CR Timing Belt
CR Motor
CR Unit
Figure 3-18. Carriage mechanism

Confidential
3.3.2.1 PW Sensor Shutter Mechanism

Not electrified Solenoid Electrified
To reduce the influence of ink mist on the PW Sensor, WF-C878Ra/WF-
C878R are equipped with the PW sensor shutter mechanism.
PW sensor shutter mechanism is composed of the Knock Cam on the bottom of
the CR Unit, the PW Sensor Shutter, and the CR Solenoid Assy at the end of Shutter
the 130 digit side (Left side of printer). Lever
 Operating Principles
The PW sensor shutter mechanism is opened and closed by the Knock Cam
mechanism1 .The Shutter Lever of the CR Solenoid Assy pushes the Knock
Shaft, and the PW Sensor Shutter at the end of the shaft slides open where the PW Sensor
Lever functions
accordingly. The PW Sensor Shutter slides shut in the reverse process.
The CR Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Shutter Lever by
electrifying the solenoid2 . The relationship of the electrifying status of the
Solenoid and the sticking-out/retracted status of the Shutter Lever is as follow.
Table 3-11. Electrifying status of the Solenoid and the sticking-out/retracted

status of the Shutter Lever CR Solenoid
Assy
Electrifying status of the Solenoid Electrified Not electrified
CR Unit
Shutter Lever Sticking out Retracted
By moving the CR Unit to the end of the left side of the printer (where the PW
Bottom of CR Unit
Sensor Lever functions) with the Shutter Lever sticking out, the PW Sensor
Shutter is opened or closed. PW Sensor Shutter CLOSED PW Sensor Shutter OPEN
When printing normally, the Solenoid is not electrified, so if the CR Unit to the PW Sensor Shutter
end of the Left side of printer (where the PW Sensor Lever functions), the PW
Sensor Shutter does not operate at all.
Only when the PW Sensor detects paper, the PW Sensor Shutter is opened.
Soon after the PW Sensor detects the paper, the PW Sensor Shutter is closed.
Knock Shaft Rotor PW Sensor
1. This mechanism is composed of the Knock Shaft, Rotor, and the Knock Cam. It is used mainly for the knock shift Figure 3-19. PW sensor shutter mechanism
mechanism of knock type ball point pens. In this case, the CR Unit plays a role of the Knock Cam.
2. Equipped with a pull type Solenoid in which the magnetic body id pulled by the electromagnetic force.

Confidential
3.3.3 Ink Supply Mechanism

The ink supply mechanism consists of the Decompress Pump Unit and the Ink
Supply Unit that is composed of the Ink Supply Tube, Diaphragm Pump1 ,
Buffer, and Ink Cartridge Holder.
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R mounts the Ink Pack Unit instead of ink cartridges,
and ink is supplied through the ink tube to the Ink Supply Unit from the large
capacity ink pack installed in the Ink Pack Unit.
According to the quantity of ink discharged from the Print Head, ink is sucked
from the ink cartridges/ink packs by the Decompress Pump Unit, Diaphragm Ink tube
Pump and Buffer. The ink path from the Buffer through the ink tube to the
selfsealingvalve in the Print Head is always kept pressurized even after the
power is turned off by the check valves and the Diaphragm Pump. Therefore, Ink Supply Unit
ink can be supplied stably during high-volume printing. Ink Supply Unit (M)
(Y)
Decompression
Pump Unit
Ink Supply Unit

(Bk)
Ink Supply Unit

Decompression (C)
Pump Unit
Figure 3-20. Ink supply mechanism

1. The diaphragm pump is a pump equipped with a diaphragm and check valves in both input and output sides. Up-and-
down movements of the diaphragms change volume of the pump, and this causes ink to be sucked or ejected.

Confidential
3.3.3.1 Ink Supply Mechanism Operating Principles

Ink path simplified model Piston valve
In the case of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R, ink supply becomes ready by installing
the ink pack into the Ink Pack Unit. The Ink Pack Unit also mounts the CR Self-sealing valve (in printhead)
Contact Module. Ink Tube
Print Head
The diaphragm is operated when the Decompress Pump Unit reduces the
Ventilation Ventilation
pressure inside the Diaphragm Pump, and it sucks ink from the ink cartridges/ valve valve
Decompre Decompre
ink packs Ink is supplied through the Buffer and ink tube to the Print Head. ss pump ss pump
Air
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R feature two Decompress Pumps and connected with chamber Spring
Ink Diaphragm
the two Diaphragm Pumps in the ink path. These two Decompress Pumps and charger
Piston valve Spring Piston valve
Diaphragm Pumps supply sufficient ink needed for the quantity of the Print
Head's ink discharge in high speed printing with high image quality.
Check Check
Ink pack valve Diaphragm pump valve Buffer Gum choke valve
Rear
Ink Tube
Ink Supply Unit (color)

Diaphragm pump/Buffer/
Gum choke valve
Prin Head
Decompress
pump
Ink Supply Unit (black)

Decompress Diaphragm pump/Buffer/
pump Gum choke valve
Figure 3-21. Ink supply mechanism

Confidential
3.3.3.2 Ink Pack Unit

The WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R uses large-capacity Ink Packs. The Ink Pack
Unit for mounting the Ink Packs is provided inside the printer.
The Ink Pack Unit is connected to the Print Head by the Ink Tubes via the Ink
Supply Unit, and the ink in the Ink Packs is supplied to the Print Head.
Ink Channel
The amount of remaining ink is monitored by the Ink End Sensors and the ink
consumption counter of the firmware. The Ink End Sensors are mounted inside
Print Head
the ink packs and the Ink Supply Unit.
Therefore, if the ink channel between the Ink Pack Unit and Print Head is
blocked, the error (ink end) occurs.
Also, Piston Valves are provided at the connections of the Ink Tubes, Ink
Supply Unit and Print Head. These valves are designed to close when the Ink Ink Tube
Tubes have been removed. This structure prevents ink from dripping, for
Ink Pack Unit (C)
example, from the Ink Tubes.
Ink Pack Unit (M)
Ink Pack Unit (Y) Ink Pack Unit (Bk)
Figure 3-22. Ink Pack Unit

Confidential
3.3.3.3 Ink leak detection function

A sensor for detecting an ink leak is provided in this product in order to enable
the quick detection of an ink leak when an ink leak occurs from the ink supply
path due to an abnormality in the product.
The Ink Leak Sensor Assy is provided inside the Ink Pack Unit, and detects an
ink leak by the adherence of ink on it (Ink Porous Pad, 1) when an ink leak
occurs. It also generates an ink leak error in the printer.
Ink Leak Sensor Assy Ink Leak Sensor Assy
Ink Porous Pad
Figure 3-23. Ink leak sensor Assy

Confidential
3.3.4 Ink System Mechanism

3.3.4.1 Overview
The ink system mechanism of the WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R is composed of the
Maintenance Unit, and Maintenance Box.
The configuration of each unit/assy is as follows.
Table 3-12. Configuration of the ink system mechanism

Power Source and
Unit/Assy Configuration
Control
· Cap mechanism
· Wiper mechanism · PF Motor
· Carriage lock mechanism · PF Scale/ Maintenance Box
Ink System Assy PF Encoder
Pump mechanism
Waste Ink Tube ---
Maintenance Box Waste Ink Pad ---
The ink sucked by the Cap mechanism and Pump mechanism from the Print
Head is drained via the Waste Ink Joint Tube and into the Waste Ink Pad in the
Maintenance Box. The amount of waste ink is controlled by the counter in the
firmware taking the amount of evaporation into account so as not to let the ink
leak out of the printer because the waste ink exceeds the limit of the storage
capacity.
The Maintenance Box of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R is removable11 , so the user
can replace the Maintenance Box for themselves when the maintenance error
has occurred.
Ink System Assy
Additionally, serviceability of Maintenance Unit is improved because
Maintenance Unit is unitized.
Figure 3-24. Ink System Mechanism
1. The Maintenance Box has a CSIC to store the counter value. Therefore, the actual amount of waste ink is kept mon-
itored by the counter if the Maintenance Box is removed before the time for replacement.

Confidential
3.3.4.2 Drive Path Since the protrusion on the Cap Slider1 is engaged with the hole on the
The wiper mechanism, carriage lock mechanism, pump mechanism, and ink Intermittent Gear normally, the Intermittent Gear is fixed and the PF Motor's
system mechanism is driven by the PF Motor's drive force. The drive path is as drive force is not transmitted to the wiper mechanism or carriage lock
follows. mechanism.
 Wiper Mechanism/Carriage Lock Mechanism If the position of the Cap Slider is changed for capping or the like, the
protrusion on the Cap Slider is disengaged from the hole on the Intermittent
The PF Motor's drive force is transmitted from the IS Driven Gear on the end Gear. Therefore, the Intermittent Gear rotates together with the IS Clutch Gear.
of the PF Roller to the IS Spur Gear/IS Compound Gear/IS Clutch Gear/CR In this state, the PF Motor's drive force is transmitted up to the wiper
Lock Gear/CR Lock Cam via the ES Gear, and drives the wiper mechanism mechanism and carriage lock mechanism.
and the carriage lock mechanism. The transmission of the PF Motor's drive
force to the wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism is controlled by the Intermittent Gear secured Intermittent Gear of IS Clutch Gear
cap mechanism and the IS Clutch Gear.
Hole
Table 3-13. Wiper/Carriage Lock mechanisms by PF Motor's rotational direction
PF Motor's rotational direction Clock Counter
wise clock wise
IS Clutch Gear/
Wiper mechanism Down Up
Intermittent Gear
Carriage lock mechanism CR Lock Cam Down Set Down
Cap Slider Protrusion
Sideview of Cap Unit IS Clutch Gear/Intermittent Gear
The protrusion on the Cap Slider
engages with the hole on the
IS Driven Gear Intermittent Gear released Intermittent Gear, and the
Intermittent Gear is fixed.
ES Gear
CR Lock Cam
Figure 3-26. Drive control of the wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism
IS Spur Gear IS Compound Gear CR Lock Gear
Figure 3-25. Drive path of the wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism
1. The operation of the Cap Slider is carried out by the cap mechanism. For the details, see Capping Mechanism (p. 48).

Confidential
 Pump Mechanism 3.3.4.3 Operation of Each Mechanism

The PF Motor's drive force is transmitted from the IS Driven Gear on the end  Capping Mechanism
of the PF Roller to the ES Compound Gear/Pump Compound Gear/Pump When the CR Unit moves to the home position, the Cap Slider is pushed up by
Driven Gear via the ES Gear, and drives the pump mechanism. the CR Unit and caps the Print Head. When the CR Unit moves away from the
The PF Motor's drive force is always transmitted to the pump mechanism. home position, the Cap Slider falls and the capping is released (vented to
atmosphere). The ink system mechanism of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R does not
Table 3-14. Rotational direction of the PF Motor and the operation of have any venting valves, but this Cap Slider's operation in conjunction with the
the pump mechanism CR Unit's movement realizes the performance of the traditional venting valves.
PF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Capping is released Capping
Operation of the pump mechanism Released Sucking
CR Unit
IS Driven Gear
Cap Slider
ES Compound Gear
Cap
Cap Unit
Figure 3-28. Operation of the cap mechanism

The Cap of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R has a structure which can move up and
down and to the right and to the left following the inclination of the Print Head.
Because of this structure, accurate capping can be done even the alignment of
ES Gear the Print Head is changed after the head angular mecha adjustment1 done. In
addition, the operation of the cap mechanism controls the drive force to the
Pump Compound Gear wiper mechanism and carriage lock mechanism.
Pump Driven Gear
Figure 3-27. Pump mechanism drive path 1. For the details, see Wiper Mechanism/Carriage Lock Mechanism (p. 47)

Confidential
 Wiper Mechanism  Carriage Lock Mechanism

The wiper mechanism is operated by the rotation of the Intermittent Gear of the  Carriage lock drive mechanism
IS Clutch Gear. When the Intermittent Gear rotates, the protrusion of the Wiper The carriage lock mechanism is operated by the rotation of the CR
Holder moves along the groove on the Intermittent Gear to move the Wiper Lock Cam. When the CR Lock Cam rotates, the protrusion of the CR
Lock Lever moves along the groove on the CR Lock Cam to move the
Holder up and down.
CR Lock Lever up and down.
When Wiper is down Carriage unlocked

Groove on the
Protrusion Intermittent Gear
Wiper Holder
Protrusion
Intermittent Gear CR Unit
CR Lock Lever Groove
CR Lock Cam
When Wiper is up
Carriage locked
Figure 3-29. Operation of the wiper mechanism Figure 3-30. Operation of the carriage lock mechanism

Confidential
 CR lock lever mechanism  Pump Mechanism

The CR lock lever is composed of the CR lock lever holder, CR lock
The pump mechanism sucks ink from the Print Head during cleaning.
lever and spring, and it is a structure that the CR locking lever can be
released by pushing the CR locking lever even in the state of the The drive force from the Pump Driven Gear is transmitted to the Pump Shaft
carriage lock. because the two hooks on the Timing Plate are engaged in turn by the rotation
Therefore, CR lock can be released by pushing the CR lock lever when of the Pump Driven Gear. Because of the Timing Plate, the starting point of
the CR lock drive part is damaged and CR lock can not move Pump Driven Gear's rotation and that of the Pump Shaft differ so that the pump
condition.
operation starts after the PF Motor's rotation reaches the predetermined degree.
CR Lock Lever When the PF Motor rotates counterclockwise, the drive force transmitted via
the Pump Driven Gear rotates the Pump Pulley while the pulley presses the
tube flat, sucking is made (negative pressure is generated). When the PF Motor
rotates clockwise, the Pump Pulley rotates without pressing the tube flat, the
negative pressure is not generated (released).
PF motor counterclockwise rotation (suction) PF motor clockwise rotation (release)

Spring
CR Lock Lever
Spring Holder Rotates flattening
the tube
Rotates without
flattening the tube
Pump Pulley Pump Unit structure
Pump Frame
CR Lock can be
released by pushing Pump Frame Pump Shaft
the CR Lock Lever. Pump Shaft
Pump Cam Pump Driven Gear
Pump Pulley
Figure 3-31. CR lock lever mechanism

Timing Plate
Figure 3-32. Scanner mechanism

Confidential
3.3.5 Paper Loading/Paper Feed Rear paper loading mechanism

3.3.5.1 Overview ASF Motor Pick-up mechanism
The components of the paper loading mechanism and the loading method are
as follows.
Feeding Direction Configuration Power Source and Control Intermediate feeding

mechanism (duplex
· Cassette Assy printing mechanism)
· Lift-up
mechanism · Lift-up Motor Paper feed
Standard · Pick-up · Lift-up Encoder/Lift-up Scale mechanism
cassette mechanism · ASF Motor (Including the
· Intermediate · ASF Encoder/ASF Scale PF Motor)
feeding
Front mechanisma
paper · 2nd Cassette
loading Assy
· 2nd Lift-up Motor
· 2nd lift-up
· 2nd Lift-up Encoder/2nd Lift-up Scale
mechanism
Optional · 2nd ASF Motor
· 2nd ASF
cassettes · 2nd ASF Encoder/2nd ASF Scale
mechanism
· ASF Motor
· Intermediate
· ASF Encoder/ASF Scale
feeding
mechanism
· Rear paper
loading
mechanism · ASF Motor Lift-up Motor
Rear paper loading
· Intermediate · ASF Encoder/ASF Scale
feeding
mechanism Cassette Assy
a. Uses the Duplex Unit's Intermediate Roller for feeding. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p.
57). Figure 3-33. Paper loading/paper feed (Other than the optional cassettes)
The paper feed mechanism is composed of the PF Motor, PF Roller, EJ Roller,
and Star Wheel Assy, etc. When performing automatic duplex printing, the
paper printed on one side is pulled back into the printer by the PF Roller and EJ
Roller, and then it is reversed and fed continuously in the Duplex Unit.

Confidential
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R optional cassettes can be added up to three cassettes.

The optional cassette has the 2nd lift-up mechanism and 2nd ASF mechanism 2nd pick-up mechanism
in it. When loading paper from the optional cassette, the 2nd lift-up mechanism
and 2nd ASF mechanism pick up paper and load it to the intermediate feeding 2nd Cassette Assy
mechanism. 2nd lift-up mechanism
2nd ASF Motor
2nd Lift-up Motor
Figure 3-34. Paper loading/paper feed (Optional cassettes)

Confidential
3.3.5.2 Paper Loading/Feed Path  Rear Feed

 Feeding From The Front Cassette The rear loading mechanism2 starts operating by the printing command from
The drive force of the Lift-up Motor is transmitted to the Lift-up shaft, and the the print driver and the ASF Motor rotates the LD Roller. The paper set on the
Lift-up shaft raises the Cassette Hopper. The paper set in the Cassette Assy is Hopper is fed by the LD Roller to the Intermediate Roller. The paper fed to the
also raised together by the Cassette Hopper and comes in contact with the Intermediate Roller is fed up to the paper detection position of the PE Sensor
Pickup Roller. and printing is made in the same way as feeding from the Front Cassette.
The ASF Motor drives the Pick-up Roller and feeds the paper to the Separation
Roller. The paper (the top sheet) fed to the Separation Roller is separated by the LD Roller
Separation Roller and Retard Roller from the second sheet and passes the paper Duplex Unit Paper Intermediate
detection point of the Rear PE Sensor, and to the Intermediate Roller. Print Head Detector Roller
The paper fed to the first Intermediate Roller is fed by the two Intermediate EJ Roller PF Roller
Rollers up to the paper detection position of the PE Sensor.
PE Sensor
When the PE Sensor detects the paper, skew correction11 is carried out
according to printing conditions. After skew correction, the paper is fed by the
PF Roller up to the print start position and printing starts. After printing is
complete, the paper is ejected by the PF Roller and EJ Roller.
Feed Sensor
Separation Roller
Pick-up
Roller
Retard Roller
Front cassette feeding path

Rear feeding path
Figure 3-35. Paper loading/feed path (1)
1. See Paper Feed Mechanism (p. 60) for the details. 2. See Rear Feeding Mechanism (p. 58) for the details.

Confidential
 Feeding From The Optional Cassette Intermediate Roller. The paper fed to the Intermediate Roller is fed by the
Intermediate Roller (Duplex Unit) just before the paper detection point of the
The drive force of the 2nd Lift-up Motor is transmitted to the 2nd Lift-up shaft, PE Sensor and reversed.
and the 2nd Lift-up shaft raises the 2nd Cassette Hopper. The paper set in the
After feeding the paper just before the paper detection point of the PE Sensor
2nd Cassette Assy is also raised together by the 2nd Cassette Hopper and and reversing it, the 2nd drying is carried out. After the drying is complete, the
comes in contact with the 2nd Pick-up Roller. paper is fed by the Intermediate Roller up to the paper detection point of the PE
Sensor and printing is made in the same way as the front face printing.
The 2nd ASF Motor drives the 2nd Pick-up Roller and the Separation Roller
feed the paper to the 2nd Intermediate Roller. The paper (the top sheet) fed to
the 2nd Intermediate Roller is fed up to the paper detection point of the Rear Duplex Unit Paper
PE Sensor. Detector
Intermediate
Print Head Roller
When the Rear PE Sensor detects the paper, the ASF Motor starts driving and
the Intermediate Roller feeds the paper up to the paper detection point of the EJ Roller PF Roller
PE Sensor and printing is made in the same way as feeding from the Front
Cassette. PE Sensor
 Automatic Duplex Printing
AUTOMATIC DRYINGPORTED PN Feed

Sensor
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R's automatic duplex printing features the auto drying
time detection so as to prevent the wet printed face from rubbing with
something. If the printer judges the printed front face must be dried after the
front face printing, a two-step drying is carried out on the Stacker and inside
the Duplex Unit1 .
2nd Separation Roller
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R sets the optimum drying time according to the usage
environment by Temperature and Humidity sensor.
As a result, improving the throughput. 2nd Pick-up
Roller
BACK FACE PRINTING DURING THE AUTOMATIC DUPLEX PRINTING
If the printer judges the printed front face must be dried during the automatic
duplex printing, the first drying is carried out on the Stacker after the front face 2nd Intermediate Roller
printing. Then, the paper is pulled back into the printer and fed to the Automatic duplex printing feeding path
Feeding path from the Optional Cassette
1. The printer stops operation and waits until the specified drying time has passed. Figure 3-36. Paper Loading/Feed path (2)

Confidential
3.3.5.3 Drive Path

 Lift-up Mechanism Cassette Assy
This mechanism raises the paper set on the Cassette Assy up to the paper
pickup position of the pick-up mechanism. Cassette Hopper
Lift-up mechanism operates the drive force of the Lift-up Motor. The Lift-up
Motor's drive force is transmitted via the Compound Gear A, and to the Lift
One Way
Gear Group on the Cassette Assy, and rotates the Lift-up shaft. Clutch
Compound
Table 3-15. Lift-up Motor's rotational directions and operation of the Lift-up shaft
Gear A
Lift-up Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Operation of the Lift-up shaft Rises Not rotates
On the shaft of the Compound Gear A, the One Way Clutch is mounted. When
the Lift-up Motor rotates CCW, the drive force is cut off by the One Way
Clutch, so the Lift-up shaft does not rotate.
Lift Gear Group
Lift-up Motor
Lift-up shaft
Figure 3-37. Lift-up mechanism

Confidential
 Front Feeding Mechanism

Separation Roller One Way Clutch
The front feeding mechanism is composed of the Pick-up mechanism and the
intermediate feeding mechanism.
PICK-UP MECHANISM Pick-up gear group
This mechanism picks up paper from the Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the
intermediate feeding mechanism. The retard separation method is used for
paper separation.
The ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism. ASF Motor's drive force is
transmitted via the ASF Compound Gear A, then through the Pick-up Gear
Group, and rotates the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller.
Table 3-16. ASF Motor's rotational directions and the operation of Retard Roller
the Pick-up mechanism
Pick-up Roller
ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
ASF Compound Gear A
Operation of the Pick-up mechanism Feeds paper Not rotates
On the shafts of the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller, the One Way Clutch
is mounted. When the ASF Motor rotates CCW1 , the drive force is cut off by ASF Motor
the One Way Clutch, so neither the Pick-up Roller nor Separation Roller
rotates.
Figure 3-38. Pick-up mechanism/manual sheet feed mechanism
1. Rotational direction for skew correction or when operating in synchronization.

For the details, see Paper Feed Mechanism (p. 60).

Confidential
When the ASF Motor rotates counterclockwise1 its rotational direction is the same as the engaging
INTERMEDIATE FEEDING MECHANISM direction of the One Way Clutch mounted on the Clutch Gear A so the Clutch Gear A rotates the
ASF Driven Shaft and transmits the ASF Motor's drive force to the ASF Compound Gear B. Mean-
This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the Cassette Assy or MSF Unit to the while, the Clutch Gear B rotates in the rotational direction opposite to the engaging direction of the
One Way Clutch, so it does not transmit any drive force.
paper feed mechanism. The paper is fed by the Duplex Unit's Intermediate
Roller. Clutch Gear A/B One way drive mechanism
The intermediate feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor. The ASF One Way Clutch
Motor's drive force is transmitted via the ASF Gear Group to the one way drive Clutch Gear B
mechanism. The drive force of the one way drive mechanism is transmitted via
ASF Driven
the Duplex Unit's Intermediate Roller Gear Group to the Intermediate Roller. Shaft
Table 3-17. ASF Motor's rotational directions and the operation of
the intermediate feeding mechanism
ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise ASF Compound Gear B
Operation of the intermediate feeding mechanism
ASF Compound Gear B Clutch Gear A
Normal feeding Normal feeding
One way drive mechanism Intermediate Roller

There are two drive paths from the ASF Motor to the one way drive mecha- Spur Gear (1)
nism, one is the path via the ASF Compound Gear A, Spur Gear (1), and ASF
Spur Gear (2) to the Clutch Gear A, and the other is the path via the ASF Compound Spur
Compound Gear A and Spur Gear (3) and to the Clutch Gear B. Because of Gear A Gear (2)
this mechanism, the Clutch Gear A and Clutch Gear B rotates in the direc- ASF Motor:
tions opposite to each other. CW (Clockwise)
Table 3-18. ASF Motor's rotational directions and Clutch Gear A/B's rotational directions
Clutch Gear A's rotational direction Counterclockwise Clockwise
Clutch Gear B's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise Spur ASF Motor:
The shafts on the Clutch Gear A/B, the One Way Clutch is mounted. Gear (3) CCW (Counterclockwise)
Regardless of the ASF Motor's rotational directions, they rotate the Interme- One way drive
mechanism
diate Roller in the feeding direction (one way). When the ASF Motor
rotates clockwise, its rotational direction is the same as the engaging direc- ASF Motor
tion of the One Way Clutch mounted on the Clutch Gear B, so the Clutch
Gear B rotates the ASF Driven Shaft and transmits the ASF Motor's drive
force to the ASF Compound Gear B. Meanwhile, the Clutch Gear A rotates Figure 3-39. Intermediate feeding mechanism
in the rotational direction opposite to the engaging direction of the One Way
1. Rotational direction for skew correction or when operating in synchronization.
Clutch, so it does not transmit any drive force. For the details, see Paper Feed Mechanism (p. 60).

Confidential
 Rear Feeding Mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper set on the Hopper to the intermediate feeding
mechanism. The retard separation method is used for paper separation.
Cam of LD Roller
REAR FEEDING MECHANISM DRIVE PATH Hopper
The rear feeding mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor. The ASF Motor's
drive force is transmitted via the ASF Compound Gear B then through the Rear
ASF Spur Gear, and rotates the LD Roller via the ASF Clutch Gear. The
Hopper and the Paper Back Lever Right/Left are driven together by the cams Rear ASF Solenoid Assy
LD Roller
on both the right and the left sides of the LD Roller.
ASF Clutch Gear
Table 3-19. Rear feeding operations by ASF Motor's rotational directions Cam of LD Roller
Operation of the rear feeding Feeds paper Feeds paper
mechanism
The drive path from the ASF Motor to the rear feeding mechanism is partly the
Paper Back
same (from the ASF Motor to the ASF Compound Gear) as that of the Paper Back Lever Right
intermediate feeding mechanism.1 Therefore, even the ASF Motor rotates Lever Left
counterclockwise (opposite to the paper feeding direction), the LD Roller Retard Roller
rotates in the paper feeding direction. Rear ASF Spur Gear
Since the ASF Motor drives the pick-up mechanism and intermediate feeding
mechanism, the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy turn the drive
force ON/OFF so that the LD Roller rotates during the rear feed only. ASF Compound Gear B
Sideview of ASF Motor

rear feeding Solenoid
mechanism Figure 3-40. Rear feeding mechanism drive path
Change Lever Rear ASF Spur Gear
LD Roller
ASF Clutch Gear
1. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p. 57).

Confidential
OPERATION OF THE REAR FEEDING MECHANISM paper set on the Hopper is separated by the LD Roller and Retard Roller and
fed to the intermediate feeding mechanism.
This section explains the operation of rear feed and how the ASF Motor's drive When the LD Roller rotates once, the Change Lever engages with the hook
force is controlled by the ASF Clutch Gear and Rear ASF Solenoid Assy. on the ASF Clutch Gear and the roller is locked. Then, the ASF Motor's
drive force to the LD Roller is cut off and the rear feed process is complete.2
Rear Feeding Mechanism Drive Path
The Rear ASF Solenoid Assy controls the operation of the Change Lever by Sideview of rear feeding Solenoid
mechanism: Locked
electrifying the Solenoid1 . The relationship of the electrifying status of the
Solenoid and the status of the Change Lever is as follow. Hook
Table 3-20. Electrifying status of the Solenoid and the operation of the Change Lever Change Lever
Electrifying status of the Electrified Not electrified
Solenoid
Change lever Unlocked Locked ASF Clutch Gear
When the Change Lever engages with (or locks) the hook on the ASF Sideview of rear feeding
Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear is cut off and the ASF Motor's mechanism: Unlocked
drive force is not transmitted to the LD Roller.
When the Change Lever releases (unlocks for driving the rear feeding) the
hook on the ASF Clutch Gear, the clutch of ASF Clutch Gear engages and
the ASF Motor's drive force is transmitted to the LD Roller.
When performing the rear feed The lock of the Change Lever is disengaged
When the printer starts performing the rear feed, the Solenoid of the Rear Sideview of rear feeding
ASF Solenoid Assy is electrified and the Change Lever is pulled toward the mechanism: When Rear
Deed is driven
rear of the printer. Then the clutch of the ASF Clutch Gear engages and the
drive force of the ASF Motor is transmitted to the LD Roller. After the lock
is released, the ASF Motor drives the ASF Clutch Gear and LD Roller to
move the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear away from the lock position.
Therefore, when electrifying the Solenoid is stopped and the Change Lever
is back to the original position, the hook on the ASF Clutch Gear is posi-
tioned lower than the Change Lever due to the rotation of the LD Roller and Figure 3-41. Operation of the rear feeding mechanism
not going to be locked again.
After electrifying the Solenoid is stopped, the ASF Motor rotates clockwise
further and the LD Roller rotates in the paper feed direction. A sheet of
2. The LD Roller is D-shaped. This shape allows the LD Roller and Retard Roller to release the paper when the
paper reaches the intermediate feeding mechanism so as not to affect the paper feeding process of the inter-
1. Equipped with a pull type Solenoid in which the magnetic body id pulled by the electromagnetic force. mediate feeding mechanism.

Confidential
 Paper Feed Mechanism

This mechanism feeds the paper fed from the intermediate feeding mechanism
into the printer. The paper feed mechanism is driven by the PF Motor's drive
force. The drive force of the PF Motor is transmitted by the PF Timing Belt to PF Roller
the PF Roller. The drive force is then transmitted forward to the Ink system
mechanism1 and EJ Roller.
PF Scale
The PF Encoder scans the PF Scale located beside the PF Roller Drive Gear, and PF Encoder
the scanned results are used to control the drive force of the PF Motor to PF Motor
precisely control rotation of the PF Roller.
EJ Roller
Table 3-21. PF Motor's rotational direction and the operation of the paper feed mechanism
PF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Operation of the paper feed mechanism Normal feeding Reverse feeding
According to the rotational direction of the PF Motor, the PF Roller and EJ
Roller rotate in the same direction.
When feeding paper, the paper feed mechanism and the intermediate feeding
mechanism are driven to perform skew correction2 and to feed paper up to
the print start position.
PF Timing Belt
The PF Roller and Intermediate Roller of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R are driven
separately by the dedicated drive motors. Therefore, so as not to apply too Figure 3-42. Paper feed mechanism
much back tension or front tension to the paper during loading and feeding,  Duplex Printing Mechanism
the mechanisms are driven by synchronizing the PF Motor and ASF Motor.
This mechanism reverses the paper fed back by the paper feed mechanism after
Driving by synchronizing the PF Motor and ASF Motor is called the printing on the front face and feeds the reversed paper back into the paper feed
synchronized drive, and performed when loading, feeding, and ejecting paper. mechanism.
The duplex printing mechanism is driven by the ASF Motor. The drive path
1. For the details, see Ink System Mechanism (p. 46).
2. Appropriate skew correction type is determined from the following four types according to the print conditions. and the operation are the same as those of the intermediate feeding
No skew correction: Loads paper as is without skew correction
Reverse and tap correction: Feeds paper by the Intermediate Roller in normal rotation and the PF Roller in reverse
mechanism3 .
rotation, then after the paper has reached the PF roller, the above condition is kept for a specified time to warp the
paper to correct the skew.
Catch-and release skew correction: Once loads paper up to the PF roller, then stops the Intermediate Roller and re-
verses the PF roller to warp the paper to correct the skew.
Tapping Method: Feeds paper by the forward rotation of the Intermediate Roller while the PF roller is stopped. Even
after the paper reaches the PF roller and stops with the top edge pressed against the roller, the roller force is still ap-
plied to the paper for a predetermined time making the paper slightly arch to correct the paper skew. 3. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p. 57).

Confidential
 Option Cassette Loading Mechanism

This mechanism is composed of the 2nd lift-up mechanism and 2nd ASF
mechanism.
2ND LIFT-UP MECHANISM
This mechanism lifts the paper loaded on the 2nd Cassette Assy up to the paper
pickup position. 2nd Cassette Assy
2nd Cassette Hopper
The 2nd lift-up mechanism is driven by the drive force of the 2nd Lift-up
Motor. The 2nd Lift-up Motor's drive force is transmitted via the 2nd Lift-up
Gear Group to the 2nd Lift-up shaft and rotates the 2nd Lift-up shaft.
Table 3-22. 2nd Lift-up Motor's rotational direction and the operation of the 2nd
lift-up mechanism
2nd Lift-up Motor's rotational direction Clockwise ---
Operation of the 2nd lift-up mechanism Lift-up ---
The 2nd Lift-up Motor drives the 2nd lift-up mechanism only. Therefore, the
2nd Liftup Motor never rotates counterclockwise.
2nd Lift-up Shaft
2nd Lift-up Motor
Figure 3-43. 2nd lift-up mechanism

Confidential
2ND ASF MECHANISM Table 3-24. Rotational direction of 2nd ASF Motor and Clutch Gear C/D
This mechanism picks up paper on the 2nd Cassette Assy and feeds it up to the 2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
intermediate feeding mechanism on the printer. The retard separation method is used Clutch Gear C's rotational direction Counterclockwise Clockwise
for paper separation; the same method as for the Cassette Assy. Clutch Gear D's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
The 2nd ASF mechanism is composed of the 2nd pick-up mechanism and 2nd
One Way 2nd Separation Roller
intermediate feeding mechanism and driven by the drive force of the 2nd ASF Motor.
Clutch 2nd Intermediate Roller
The 2nd ASF Motor's drive force is transmitted via the 2nd ASF Compound Gear and
to the 2nd Pick-up Gear Group and 2nd Intermediate Gear Group, and rotates the 2nd 2nd Pick-up Gear Group
Pick-up Roller, 2nd Separation Roller, and 2nd Intermediate Roller.
Table 3-23. 2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction and the operation of
the 2nd ASF mechanism
2nd ASF Motor's rotational direction Clockwise Counterclockwise
Retard Roller
2nd pick-up mechanism Feeds paper Not rotates
Operation of the 2nd 2nd Pick-up Roller
ASF mechanism 2nd intermediate feeding Normal feeding Normal feeding
mechanism
2nd ASF Compound Gear
2nd pick-up mechanism
On the shafts of the Pick-up Roller and Separation Roller, the One Way
Clutch is mounted. When the 2nd ASF Motor rotates counterclockwise, the
drive force is cut off by the One Way Clutch, so neither the 2nd Pick-up 2nd Intermediate
2nd ASF Motor Gear Group
Roller nor 2nd Separation Roller rotates.
2nd intermediate feeding mechanism One way drive mechanism

Clutch Gear C
The Clutch Gear C, Clutch Gear D, 2nd ASF Spur Gear, and 2nd ASF Clutch Gear D
Driven Shaft on the drive path between the 2nd ASF Motor and 2nd Inter-
mediate Roller are the same configuration as of those in the one way drive 2nd ASF
Spur Gear
mechanism1 .Therefore, the 2nd Intermediate Roller rotates in the feeding
direction only regardless of the rotational direction of the 2nd ASF Motor.
2nd ASF
Driven Shaft
One Way Clutch
1. For the details, see Intermediate Feeding Mechanism (p. 57). Figure 3-44. 2nd ASF mechanism

Confidential
3.3.6 Scanner/ADF mechanism

3.3.6.1 Scanner mechanism overview
The scanner mechanism1 of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R is composed of the CIS
Modules and the Scanner Motor2 for driving the Scanner Carriage. As the light
source for scanning, an LED is used for its long life and less power
consumption.
To support document scanning of up to A3, seven reflective photo-interrupters
are mounted for document size detection.
Scanner Unit Reflective photo-interrupter
CIS Module
Scanner Motor
Figure 3-45. Scanner mechanism
1. Some models do not have scanner mechanism.

2. Because the scanner motor is a DC motor, there are an encoder and scale to control the motor installed.

Confidential
3.3.6.2 ADF Mechanism

 Overview ADF Unit Document Support
The ADF mechanism of WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R is composed of the pick-up

mechanism and the document feed mechanism, and they are driven by the ADF
Pick-up Motor and by the ADF PF Motor in the written order respectively. Transmissive photo-interrupters
Table 3-25. Configuration of the ADF mechanism

Mechanism Configuration Power Source and Control
· Pick-up Assy ADF PF Motor
· ADF Pick-up Motor
Pick-up · ADF Pad Assy
mechanism · ADF Intermediate Roller
· ADF Pick-up Scale/ ADF PE Sensor A
Encoder
· ADF PE Sensor A
ADF
mechanism · ADF 1st PF Roller ADF PE Sensor C
· ADF 2nd PF Roller
Paper Feed · ADF PF Motor
· ADF PE Sensor B
Mechanism · ADF PF Scale/Encoder
· ADF PE Sensor C
· ADF EJ Roller
Pick-up Assy
The ADF mechanism1 of this printer features duplex scanning. The CIS
Module on the fixed scanner mechanism and the CIS Module on the ADF
mechanism read both sides of the document at the same time. ADF EJ Roller
The pad separation method is used for paper separation. To support document
ADF Intermediate
feeding up to A3, four transmissive photo-interrupters are mounted in the Roller
Document Support for document size detection. ADF 2nd PF Roller
ADF PE Sensor B
CIS Module
ADF 1st PF Roller ADF Pick-up Motor
Figure 3-46. ADF mechanism
1. Some models do not have ADF.

Confidential
 Document Feed Path

The document feed path of the documents to be read is as follows.
Lever of ADF PE Sensor A

Pick-up Roller
ADF Intermediate Roller Lever of ADF PE Sensor C
ADF 2nd PF Roller ADF EJ Roller
ADF 1st PF Roller CIS Module (ADF)
CIS Module (Scanner)

Figure 3-47. Document feed path
WF-C878Ra/WF-C878R are equipped with the CIS Modules in the ADF
mechanism. Since the document is not needed to be reversed any more, the
tapping1 skew correction is performed after the ADF PE Sensor A detects the
document.
1. Feeds paper by the rotation of the Pick-up Roller while the ADF 1st PF Roller is stopped. Even after the paper reaches
the ADF 1st PF Roller, keeps feeding as is to make the paper arch for a predetermined time to correct the paper skew.

Confidential
3.4 Life Management
3.4.1 Periodic replacement parts

Continuation Operation after continuation
Part name Model End of life detection Remedy Part lifespan
of use of use
Displays near end indication
(Near end) 1. When end job with which specified
Press the OK button to turn every 300 sheets until reach
number of sheets reached Possible
off the error LED. number of sheets of lifespan.
Main Unit 2. When power turns on
(Reset when end of life reached) 200,000
Cassette PXPFR3A
 Replace part sheets
Feed Roller (End) 1. When end job with which specified number Displays end indication every
Turn off the power and replace
of sheets reached Possible 300 sheets until reach number of
the periodic part.
2. When power turns on sheets of lifespan.
 Continue use
Additional 2. When power turns on
(Reset when end of life reached) 200,000
Cassette PXPFR3B
 Replace part Turn off the sheets
Feed Roller (End) 1. When end job with which specified number Displays end indication every
power and replace the
periodic part.
 Continue use
Configuration Life Management 66

Confidential
Continuation Operation after continuation

Part name Model End of life detection Remedy Part lifespan
of use of use
2. When power turns on
Refer to (Reset when end of life reached) 50,000
Rear ASF Unit
parts List*1  Replace part Turn off the sheets
(End) 1. When end job with which specified number Displays end indication every
power and replace the
periodic part.
 Continue use
2. When power turns on
Periodic (Reset when end of life reached)
Maintenance*2 (End) 1. When end job with which specified number 300,000
---
(Ink System of sheets reached sheets
Displays end indication every
Assy, etc.) 2. When power turns on Refer to 3.4.2 Periodic
Possible 300 sheets until reach number of
* If the periodic maintenance has been performed, Maintenance (p. 68)
sheets of lifespan.
no indication is displayed even when 300,000
sheets are reached.
*1: Regarding the parts number, refer to part list of applicable product.
*2: To ensure stable print quality until the product reaches the end of its service life (printing of 600,000 pages), perform the periodic maintenance (p. 68) when printing of 300,000 pages is
reached (an end error is displayed). when printing of 300,000 pages is reached (an end error is displayed).

Confidential
3.4.2 Periodic Maintenance

Periodic maintenance is needed in this product to secure the product life (600,000 pages).
 Periodic Maintenance List
Maintenance Overview
Replace the Maintenance Unit
Maintenance Unit is replaced as correspondence to Pump life of Maintenance Unit wears.
(Ink System Assy)
Cleaning the PF Scale The PF scale cleaning is executed as correspondence to the PF scale reading defective by the ink mist accumulation of the PF scale.
As the CR Unit bearing wears, the PG value is changes.
Readjust the PG Adjust Cam
Move the cam one notch upward as correspondence to the PG value changing.
As bearing part of Carriage Unit deteriorates, the load on Bearing part of Carriage Unit increases.
Attach the Grease to CR Shaft
As a countermeasure to the above, clean the CR Shaft and applying the new grease.
Replace Paper Guide Upper Roller Paper Guide Upper Roller is replaced as correspondence to the Driven Roller wears.
As a countermeasure to degradation of paper feed precision resulting from degradation of the Paper Feed Rollers and to fluctuation of the PG value
Readjustment related to Paper feed and
resulting from degradation of the CR Unit Bearing, readjust the paper feed and print related adjustment items. Perform adjustments after periodic
printing
maintenance in the service support mode.

Confidential
 Periodic maintenance procedure

Perform the periodic maintenance operation according to the following operation flow.
Start
A1 Preparation work before A9 Front Middle Frame A16 Cleaning the PF Scale A22 Reassemble the Product
repair Ink System (→P.70) (→P.74) (→P.78) (→P.84)
A2 Right SC Cover A10 Right Housing A17 Readjust the PG A23 Routine Maintenance
(→P.70) (→P.75) Adjust Cam (→P.79) adjustment (→P.85)
A3 Left SC Cover A11 IS Holder Plate

(→P.71) (→P.75)
A4 Open the ADF/SCN A12 Ink System Assy A18 Move the Panel Unit
Unit (→P.71) (→P.76) (→P.79)
A5 Front Right Cover A19 Front Housing Assy

(→P.72) (→P.80)
A6 Stacker Assy A13 Left Housing A20 Replace the Driven

(→P.73) (→P.77) Roller (→P.81)
A7 Cassette Assy A14 Left PG Cam Screw

(→P.73) Holder (→P.77)
A8 Front Right Housing A15 Anti Static Brush Plate A21 Attach the Grease to
(→P.74) (→P.78) CR Shaft (→P.82)

Confidential
A1 A2
Preparation work before repair Ink System Right SC Cover
Dent Tabs
Right SC Cover
No. Screw Type

S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Perform the “Preparation work before repair Maintenance Unit”. 1. Remove one screw (S1: ).
(Refer to Before Repair Operation [B92] (Ink System Assy) (p. 379)) 2. Slide the Right SC Cover while pushing the dent of Right SC Cover, and release the three
tabs.
3. Remove the Right SC Cover.

Confidential
A3 A4
Left SC Cover Open the ADF/SCN Unit
Lower SC Reinforcing
Plate Attachment Position Lower SC Reinforcing Plate
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right side
Lower SC Reinforcing Plate
No. Screw Type No. Screw Type

S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
S4 C.SHOULDER S-TITE,3X5
1. Remove one screw (S1: ) 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate.
2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it. 2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the
screw (S1: ).
3. Remove the screw (S4: ).

Confidential
Open the ADF/SCN Unit

A5
Front Right Cover
ADF/SCN Unit
Front Right Cover
Support Stand
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type
Switch S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the
5. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the hook, and remove the front right cover. and remove the front right cover.
ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
Make sure that the support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two triangle
marks face to each other.
C H E C K When closing the ADF/SCN Unit, hold down the switch on the support stand and
P O IN T
raise the ADF/ SCN Unit in the direction of the arrow to disengage the two hooks,
then fold the support stand.

Confidential
A6 A7
Stacker Assyy Cassette Assy
Cassette Assy
Stacker Assy
1. Remove the Stacker Assy. 1. Remove the Cassette Assy.

Confidential
A8 A9
Front Right Housing Front Middle Frame
Front Middle Frame

Front Right Housing

S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S7 C.C.S-TITE-SCREW-3x5-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing. 1. Remove the four screws (S7: ), then remove the Front Middle Frame.

Confidential
A10 A11
Right Housing IS Holder Plate
Dowel
Right Housing IS Holder Plate
Hook B
Hook A
Rib
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the IS Holder Plate in the direction of the arrow.
2. Release the hook A.
3. Remove the two dowels.
4. Release the four hooks B.
5. Remove the Right Housing while removing the rib.

Confidential
Ink System Assy

A12
Ink System Assy
Right side
Screwdriver Insertion Hole
Ink System Assy Ink System Assy
1. Insert the screwdriver into the hole and turn each of the two screws that secure the Ink 2. Remove the Ink System Assy frontward.
System Assy until you feel the screw is spinning free.
C H E C K  Before removing the Ink System Assy, make sure to unlock the CR Unit and move
P O IN T
the unit to the center of the product.
 Because the screws are captive screws, they do not come off.

Confidential
A13 A14
Left Housing Left PG Cam Screw Holder
Dowel
Left Housing
Hook
Left PG Cam Screw Holder
Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
Rib S22 C.C.SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Left Housing. 1. Remove the screw (S22: ), then remove the Left PG Cam Screw Holder with the screw.
3. Remove the rib on the front side while lifting up the Left Housing.
4. Remove the rib on the back side while lifting up the Left Housing, release the hook and
then remove the Left Housing.

Confidential
A15 A16
Anti Static Brush Plate Cleaning the PF Scale
Front face Rear face
Anti Static Brush Plate
PF Scale
No. Screw Type

S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C PF Gear
1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the Anti Static Brush Plate. 1. Sork the Polyester Swab with alcohol (Ethanol)
2. Rotate the PF Gear counterclockwise by hand and clean the scaled part on the PF Scale
with the Polyester Swab.
 Make sure not to add strong force to PF Scale.
 Clean the PF Scale until contamination does not adhere to the Polyester Swab.

Confidential
A17 A18
Readjust the PG Adjust Cam Move the Panel Unit
Left PG Cam
Front Cover Assy Panel FFC
FFC Clamp
Guide
Right PG Cam Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type
1. Remove the screws of Left PG Cam and Right PG Cam. 1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). (Tightened together with the panel grounding wire at
2. Move the each PG Cam one notch in the direction in which PG increases. some locations)
2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
Note that at some locations, the Panel Grounding Wire is tightened together with the
Panel Unit fixing screws.

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

A19
Front Housing Assy
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type

S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer. 1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy.

Confidential
Driven Roller
A20
Replace the Driven Roller
Gear
Driven Roller Driven Roller
Paper Guide CR Unit Paper Guide

Paper Guide Paper Guide
1. Move the CR Unit to the center. C H E C K By rotating (clockwise) the gear on the left side of the product, the angle of the paper
P O IN T
2. Hold up the Paper Guide Upper Left or Paper Guide Upper Right by finger, and push the guide becomes larger and the driven roller can be easily replaced.
edge of Driven Roller (two position).
When removing the driven roller, make sure the shaft of the driven roller does not fall
inside the product.
Also, confirm the check points on the next page before removing the driven roller.

Confidential
Driven Roller
A21
Driven Roller
APG Drive Assy
CR Shaft
Push the edge
1. Put the Driven Roller aligned in Paper Guide Front. 1. Wipe off the Grease from CR Shaft with dry clean cloth.
2. Hold up the paper Guide Upper Left or paper Guide Upper Right, and move the
Driven Roller to installing position.
C H E C K Make sure wipe off the Grease on back side surely too.
P O IN T
3. Push the edge of Driven Roller (two position), and install the Driven Roller. CR Shaft can be rotate by rotate the APG Drive Assy Gear.
Driven Roller has installation direction.
Therefore, make sure to install the Drive Roller correct direction.
(The White part of Drive Roller faces the center)

Confidential
Attach the Grease to CR Shaft Attach the Grease to CR Shaft
Lubrication Position Lubrication Position
Minimum Standard Maximum Standard
2. Attach the Grease (G-97) to the all face of CR Shaft. 3. Attach the Grease (G-97) on all around of the CR Shaft.
2-1. Move the CR Unit to Home Position (Right side of printer). 3-1. Move the CR Unit to center.
2-2. Attach the Grease to CR Shaft by using the writing brush. 3-2. Attach the Grease to two position of the CR Shaft.
2-3. Move the CR Unit to Full side (Left side of printer). (Regarding the lubrication amount, refer to above figure)
2-4. Rotate the APG Drive Assy Gear, and make the back side of the CR Shaft visible. • Ful side (Left side of printer)
2-5. Repeat Step2-1 to Step2-3, and attach the Grease to Back side of CR Shaft. Position is between the Paper Guide Upper Left and the Paper Guide Upper Center.
• Home postion side (Right side of printer)
Postion is between the paper Guide Upper Right and the Paper Guide Upper Center.

Confidential

A22
Reassemble the Product
Maximum Standard
Maximum Standard
4. Move the CR Unit two reciprocations. 1. Assemble the product up to the product state (state where it can be activated).
5. Confirm the Grease remained on “Bearing part of CR Unit” and “edge part of CR Shaft”.
(If remained grease is more than maximum standard, make ure to remove the remaind
grease.)

Confidential
A23
Routine Maintenance adjustment
1. Start the Pritner by Service Support Mode.

(Refer to Before Repair Operation [B92] (Ink System Assy) (p. 379))
2. Select the “ Adjustment: MENU” Select from service support mode menu.
3. Select the ”Routine Maintenance: MENU” from adjustment menu.
4. Select the Adjust After Maintenance [B70] (p. 383)

Confidential
CHAPTER
4
INSTALLATION
Confidential
4.1 Overview of Installation 4.1.1 Installation Work Flow

In this section, product introduction and installation is explained.
Checks before installation (p.88)
 Make sure to update the firmware to newest version
Unpacking Installation (software)
when installing the printer.
Checking the items included in the package (p.90) Ink information display setting (p.99)
 Make sure to install or update the printer driver /scanner
driver of newest version. Removing the packing material (p.91) Updating the firmware (p.100)
In this timing, obtain the customer's agreement.
Installation (hardware)
Product settings (date and time settings/
Installing the additional cassette and ink charging) (p.101)
exclusive printer stand (optional) (p.91)
Network settings (p.102)

Installing the clamp (p.98)
FAX settings (FAX model only) (p.118)

Installing the ink packs (p.98)
Checking the print operation (p.121)
Attaching the power cable (p.98)
Installing the output tray/manual holder/

cleaning cloth holder (p.98)
Figure 4-1. Overall Flow of Introduction and Installation
Installation Overview of Installation 87

Confidential
4.1.2 Installation Environment Table 4-2. Basic model (Printer main unit + one additional cassette)
Install this product at a site that satisfies the following conditions: External dimensions  Stored
 Width: 621 mm
 Well-ventilated site
 Depth: 656 mm
 Site where ventilation ports are not blocked  Height: 768 mm
 Site where an exclusive power outlet can be secured  Printing
 Site where paper can be loaded and printed paper can be removed without  Width: 621 mm
exerting unnecessary force  Depth: 862 mm
 Height: 846 mm
 A level site capable of withstanding the following weight and ensuring the
following space Mass 75.0 Kg
(For detailed specifications, refer to Chapter 2 "Product Specifications"
(P. 13).) Table 4-3. Fully set model (Basic model + full options)
External dimensions  Stored
Table 4-1. Printer only
 Width: 772 mm
External dimensions  Stored
 Depth: 797 mm
 Width: 621 mm
 Height: 1058 mm
 Depth: 650 mm
 Printing
 Height: 641 mm
 Width: 772 mm
 Printing
 Depth: 941 mm
 Width: 621 mm
 Height: 1226 mm
 Depth: 862 mm
Mass 128.8 Kg
 Height: 719 mm
Mass 63.4 Kg

Confidential
Table 4-4. Required space

Item Dimensions Item Dimensions
A 1555 mm D 523 mm
B 1324 mm E 100 mm
C 772 mm F 529 mm

Confidential
4.1.3 Installation 4.1.4 Unpacking and checking items included in package

When moving the main unit, be sure to perform the work in When unpacking, check that the following items are included.
accordance with the following points.
No. Name Remark
 The printer is heavy so the work to unpack and move it
(1) Printer main unit
must be carried out by at least four people.
One for each color
 When lifting up the printer, lift it up with your hands (2) Ink pack
(Black, cyan, yellow, and magenta)
placed in the locations indicated in the diagram below.
Be sure to hold the printer as indicated because there is a (3) Power cable
risk of dropping it or trapping your fingers when (4) Paper size label
lowering it if other parts are held when lifting up the (5) User's guide
printer. (6) Precautions on using the product
 To prevent the printer from dropping or falling, do not (7) FAX Guide
tilt the printer when moving it. (8) Software disc (CD-R)
(9) Stacker (output tray)
(10) Document holder
(11) Cleaning cloth
(12) Cleaning cloth holder
(13) Cable clamp 4 pcs
Figure 4-2.

Confidential
4.1.5 Removing the protective tape and protective 4.1.6 Installation

material 4.1.6.1 Attaching additional cassette unit and printer stand (option)
Remove the protective tape and protective materials attached to the printer. C H E C K  Perform this procedure if an additional cassette and a
Be careful because there is in particular the risk of forgetting to remove P O IN T printer stand (option) need to be attached.
the following.  For details on moving the printer, refer to the following.
• MOVING A PRINTER WITH ADDITIONAL
CASSETTE UNIT (p. 96)
• MOVING A PRINTER WITH PRINTER STAND (p.
97)
The printer stand is heavy so the work to unpack and move it
must be carried out by at least four people.
[CR fixing material] [2nd cassette packing material]

1. Preparing the additional cassette and a printer stand
Figure 4-3.
Check that the following items are included in the package.
 Make sure to remove the CR fixing material (plastic) and  Additional Cassette Unit
CR upper fixing material (Styrofoam) form CR Unit.
Name Remark
 Make sure to remove the all fixing material, because fatal
(1) Additional cassette unit
error is occurred by remaining the fixing material.
(2) Paper size label
(3) Cassette number label
(4) Additional cassette fixing screw For fixing front (x2), for fixing back (x2)
4 2
3
Figure 4-4.

Confidential
 Printer Stand (Option) 2. Assembling the Printer Stand (Option)

Name Remark 2-1. Insert the overturn prevention legs frame into the inside of the caster.
(1) Cabinet main unit
(2) Overturn prevention legs frame 1 for each of left and right Overturn prevention legs frame
(3) Side decorative plates 1 for each of left and right
(4) Front decorative plate
(5) Reinforcing bars For front (short), for rear (long)
(6) Coupling plate (metal fitting) 2 pcs
(7) Cable Clamp 2 pcs Caster
(8) Overturn prevention leg fixing screw 18 pcs
(9) Additional cassette fixing screw Additional cassette fixing screw Caster Overturn prevention legs frame
2 3
Figure 4-6.
1 2-2. Attach the overturn prevention frames and secure them in place with
5 the fourteen screws and coupling plates (metal fittings).
9
Side decorative plates
4
6
8
7
Figure 4-5.
Side decorative plates
overturn prevention frames
Figure 4-7.

Confidential
2-3. Attach the reinforcing bars, then fix them in place with the four 2-5. Install the front decorative plate onto the overturn prevention legs
screws. frame.
Reinforcing bar
Reinforcing bar
Front decorative plate
Overturn prevention legs frame
Figure 4-10.
2-6. When installing the printer onto the printer stand, draw out the Ink
Pack Tray for the black ink, and when installing an additional
Figure 4-8.
cassette unit, draw out the paper cassette.
2-4. Place the printer stand at a level location, and lock the two casters at
the front.
Printer Stand
Ink Pack Tray Paper Cassette
Figure 4-11.
Caster lock
Figure 4-9.

Confidential
2-7. Gently lower the printer or additional cassette unit into place while 3. Attaching Additional Cassette Unit
ensuring that it is aligned with the four corners of the printer stand,
3-1. Place the additional cassette unit at the installation site.
and fix it in place with the two screws.
3-2. Pull out the Ink Pack Tray for the black ink and paper cassette.
Printer
Additional
Cassette Unit Paper Cassette
Figure 4-12. Ink Pack Tray

2-8. Turn the printer around, and fix the printer or additional cassette unit
in place with the metal fittings and screws. Figure 4-14.
3-3. When using two or more additional cassette units, stack all of the
additional units on top of each other, and fix them in place with the
Printer Additional screws.
Cassette Unit
Additional
Cassette Unit
Figure 4-13.
2-9. Install the Ink Pack Tray or paper cassette that was removed in
Step 2-6.
Figure 4-15.

Confidential
3-4. Gently lower the printer into place while ensuring that it is aligned 3-5. Turn the printer around, and fix the rear of the printer to the
with the four corners of the additional cassette unit, and fix it in additional cassette unit with the metal fittings and screws.
place with the screws.
Printer
Printer
Additional
cassette unit
Figure 4-18.
Figure 4-16. 3-6. Insert the paper size label of the paper size to load into the additional
When placing the printer on the additional cassette and cassette unit in the label holder.
cabinet, there is a risk of damaging the connector of the
additional cassette, so be sure to lower it down vertical while
aligning the four corners of the printer and the additional
cassette.
Paper size label
Be careful not to damage
when connecting
Holder
Figure 4-17. Figure 4-19.

Confidential
3-7. Load the Ink Pack Tray for the black ink and the paper cassette. MOVING A PRINTER WITH ADDITIONAL CASSETTE UNIT
3-8. Attach the cassette number indicator label.
Before moving the printer, draw out cassettes 2, 3 and 4 and perform the
following.
Cassette number
indicator label 1. Remove the metal fittings fixing the printer to the additional cassette unit at
the rear.
Rear
Printer
Figure 4-20.
Figure 4-21.
2. Remove the printer from the additional cassette unit.
Printer
Additional cassette unit
Figure 4-22.

Confidential
MOVING A PRINTER WITH PRINTER STAND 3. Remove the reinforcing bars.
Before moving the printer, remove the overturn prevention legs on the printer Reinforcing bar
stand by the procedure below.
1. Remove the front decorative plate from the overturn prevention legs frame.
Reinforcing bar
Printer Stand Figure 4-25.

Front decorative plate 4. Remove the coupling plates (metal fittings).
Figure 4-23. Coupling plate (metal fitting)
2. Place the printer stand at a level location, and unlock the two casters at the
front.
Coupling plate (metal fitting)
Figure 4-26.
5. Remove the overturn prevention legs frame.
Caster lock
Figure 4-24.
Overturn prevention legs frame
Figure 4-27.

Confidential
4.1.6.2 Attaching clamps 4.1.6.3 Attaching ink packs

Peel away the blindfold seals, and route wiring through the clamps as shown in Open the ink pack tray and attach the ink packs.
the figure below.
 Before attaching the ink packs, shake them in
the horizontal direction about 20 times.
 Make sure to remove the packing material from bottom
face of ink pack.
 Do not touch the chip part of the ink packs.
4.1.6.4 Connecting the power cable

Connect the power cable to the printer.
4.1.6.5 Attaching output tray, document holder and cleaning cloth

holder
Clamp Cleaning cloth holder

Clamp
Output tray
Figure 4-28.
Document holder
Figure 4-29.

Confidential
4.1.7 Ink information display setting 3. Select the applicable menu from the Ink Info Change Mode menu.
In this section, explain the setting procedure of ink information display setting. In the ink info change mode, operation with the following
C H E C K
P O IN T buttons.
SETTING PROCEDURE
 Move the menu (move to upward) : [2] button
1. Press hold down the power button while pressing the [# button] from the  Move the menu (move to downward) : [8] button
power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD.  Perform : [#] button
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8] Ink Info Change Mode

SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#] Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
1. Ink Rest Disp Change
_ 2. Ink Low Disp Change
Figure 4-30. Procedure of ink information display setting (1) Figure 4-31. Procedure of ink information display setting (2)
2. Enter ID number of “Ink Info Change Mode”, and start the Ink Info 4. Select the applicable menu from the following menu.
Change Mode.
Ink Low Dis Change
C H E C K  Regarding the ID Number of Ink info Change Mode. Ink Low Disp?
P O IN T Contact to the Service support.
DISP: Press [＊] button
 ID number input method is belows. NON DISP: Press [Reset] button
 Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button Nochange: Press [Power] button
 Number input (move in descending order): [8] button
 Input digit shift : [6] button
 Execute : [#] button
Figure 4-32. Procedure of ink information display setting (3)

Confidential
5. The following screen is displayed after changing the setting. 4.1.8 Firmware update
Confirm the applicable item is changing, and turn off the printer.
Make sure to update the firmware to the newest version.
Ink Low Dis Change Regarding the procedure of firmware update, refer to"8.5
Ink Disp Change is Complete! USB F/W Update" (p. 748)
Ink Rest: DISP
Ink Low: NON DISP
Press [Power] Button to finish.
Figure 4-33. Procedure of ink information display setting (4)

Confidential
4.1.9 Main Unit Settings 3. Select the time display format.
4.1.9.1 Setting the date and time

Turn on the power and then configure the date and time settings.
The date must be set correctly.

If the date is not set correctly, the automatic counting data
might not be processed correctly.
So, be sure to set the date correctly.
1. Select [Date Format].

4. Enter the time.
2. Enter the date.
C H E C K After setting the date, check that the date and time that are
P O IN T displayed in the menu screen are correct.

Confidential
4.1.9.2 Performing of initial ink filling 4.1.9.3 Network setting

Initial ink filling is performed automatically after the power is turned on.  When configuring the network settings, make sure there
is no physical connection.
 Do not turn off the power during initial ink filling.
 The settings will not be able to be configured if the
 Do not open any of the covers.
combination of network addresses is incorrect.
 Do not remove an ink pack form the printer.
 Wireless and wired settings cannot be used together on
EPSON printers.
 Printer IP address settings

 Moving to the network settings screen
1. Switch the panel to the Home screen.
2. Tap the network icon.
Figure 4-34. Network Icon

3. Tap “Description”.
Figure 4-35. Network Connection Settings

Confidential
4. Tap “How to change an IP address”.  How to set a static IP address

1. Switching the network address setting method
1-1. If TCP/IP is set to “Auto”, tap “Auto”.
Figure 4-36. How to Change IP Address

5. Tap “Settings”.
Figure 4-39. Switching to Manual Setting (1)
1-2. Tap “Auto” of “Obtain IP address”.
Figure 4-37. Go to Settings

6. Check that the Advanced Settings screen is displayed.
Figure 4-40. Switching to Manual Setting (2)

1-3. Check that “Obtain IP address” is “Manual”.
Figure 4-38. Advanced Settings Screen

• When setting a static IP address, refer to
How to set a static IP address (P. 103).
• When setting an address via DHCP (IPv4), refer to
How to set an IP address using DHCP (P. 107). Figure 4-41. Switching to Manual Setting (3)

Confidential
2. Setting the IP address 2-4. Check that the entered IP address is displayed.
2-1. Tap the IP address.
Figure 4-45. Setting IP Address (4)

2-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address based on the
hearing sheet.

2-3. When input is complete, tap “OK”.

Confidential
3. Setting the subnet mask 3-4. Check that the entered subnet mask is displayed.
3-1. Tap the subnet mask.
Figure 4-49. Setting Subnet Mask (4)

3-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the subnet mask based on
the hearing sheet.


Confidential
4. Setting the default gateway 4-4. Check that the entered default gateway is displayed.
4-1. Tap “Default Gateway”.
Figure 4-53. Setting Default Gateway (4)

Figure 4-50. Setting Default Gateway (1) 4-5. Setting Linked Services
4-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the default gateway based (Setting of the DNS server is required.)
on the hearing sheet. • For details on setting the DNS server, refer to “Setting the DNS server
(P. 111)”.
• For details on setting the proxy server, refer to “Setting a proxy server
(P. 114)”.


Confidential
5. Saving the settings  How to set an IP address using DHCP

5-1. Tap “Start Setup”. 1. Switching the network address setting method
1-1. If TCP/IP is set to “Manual”, tap “Manual”.
Figure 4-54. Starting Setup

Figure 4-56. Switching to Auto Setting (1)
5-2. Wait until the settings are reflected.
1-2. Tap “Manual” of “Obtain IP Address”.
5-3. Check that the Setup Complete screen is displayed.

Figure 4-55. Setup Complete Screen

Confidential
1-3. Check that the TCP/IP setting method is set to [Set Automatically]. 2. Saving the settings
2-1. Tap “Start Setup”.

1-4. Setting Linked Services Figure 4-59. Starting Setup
• For details on setting the DNS server, refer to “Setting the DNS server 2-2. Wait until the settings are reflected.
(P. 111)”.
• For details on setting the proxy server, refer to “Setting a proxy server 2-3. Check that the Setup Complete screen is displayed.
(P. 114)”.

Confidential
 Setting wireless LAN 1-3. Tap “Router”.

 How to set wireless LAN
1. Switching to the access point settings screen
1-1. Switch the panel to the Home screen.
Figure 4-63. Switching to Access Point Settings Screen (3)


1-2. Tap the network icon.

Confidential
2. Setting the SSID 2-5. Enter a password and tap “OK”.

2-1. Tap “Wi-Fi Setup Wizard”.
Figure 4-67. Setting SSID (5)

Figure 4-65. Setting SSID (1) 2-6. Tap “Start Setup”.
2-2. Wait for the access point to be searched.
2-3. Select an SSID.
2-4. Tap “Enter values.” of Enter password.
Figure 4-68. Setting SSID (6)

2-7. Wait until the settings are completed.
Figure 4-66. Setting SSID (4) 2-8. Print the network connection diagnosis report, and check that the
diagnosis result is [OK].

Confidential
 Wired settings  Setting Linked Services

1. Connecting a LAN cable
 When setting the IP address by DHCP, the DNS server
1-1. Connect a LAN cable. can be selected from either of automatic setting or manual
setting.
If the IP address is set manually, the DNS server can be
set only manually.
 The proxy server is set in a separate screen. When the IP
address or other setting has been changed, temporarily
save the setting before moving between screens.
 Setting the DNS server

1. Switching the DNS server setting method
1-1. If the DNS server is set to “Auto”, tap “Auto”.
Figure 4-69. Connecting a LAN Cable
2. Checking network icon
2-1. Check that the network icon is for a wired connection.
Figure 4-71. Switching DNS Server Setting Method (1)

1-2. Check that DNS server is “Manual”.
Figure 4-70. Checking Network Icon
Figure 4-72. Switching DNS Server Setting Method (2)

Confidential
2. Setting the primary DNS 2-4. Check that the entered IP address has been set as the primary DNS.
2-1. Tap the IP address of the primary DNS
Figure 4-76. Setting Primary DNS (4)

2-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address of a primary
DNS server based on the hearing sheet.


Confidential
3. Setting the secondary DNS 3-4. Check that the entered IP address has been set as the secondary
DNS.
3-1. Tap the IP address of the secondary DNS.
Figure 4-77. Setting Secondary DNS (1) Figure 4-80. Setting Secondary DNS (4)
3-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the IP address of a
secondary DNS server based on the hearing sheet.
Figure 4-78. Setting Secondary DNS (2)

Figure 4-79. Setting Secondary DNS (3)

Confidential
4. Saving the settings  Setting a proxy server

4-1. Tap “Start Setup”. 1. Switching to the proxy server settings screen
1-1. Tap “Do not use” of the Proxy Server.
Figure 4-81. Starting Setup)

4-2. Wait until the settings are reflected. Figure 4-83. Switching to Proxy Server Settings Screen
4-3. Check that the Setup Complete screen is displayed. 1-2. Check that the Proxy Server Settings screen is displayed.
Figure 4-82. Setup Complete Screen Figure 4-84. Proxy Server Settings Screen

Confidential
2. Setting use of proxy server 3. Setting the proxy server

2-1. Tap “Do not use” of the Proxy Server Settings. 3-1. Tap the URL of the proxy server
Figure 4-87. Proxy Server Setting (1)

Figure 4-85. Setting Use of Proxy Server (1) 3-2. Check that the input screen appears and then enter an URL or IP
2-2. Check that the Proxy Server Settings is “Use”. address.
Figure 4-86. Setting Port Number of Proxy Server (4) Figure 4-88. Proxy Server Setting (2)
3-3. Tap “OK”.

Confidential
3-4. Check that the proxy server setting has changed. 4. Setting the port number of the proxy server
4-1. Tap the port number.

Figure 4-91. Setting Port Number of Proxy Server (1)
4-2. The software keyboard appears. Enter the port number based on
the hearing sheet.

4-3. Tap “OK”.

Confidential
4-4. Check that the port number has changed. 5. Saving the settings

Figure 4-95. Starting Setup
5-2. Wait until the settings are reflected.?
5-3. Check that the Setup Complete screen is displayed.

5-4. Print the network status sheet and check the setting status.

Confidential
4.1.9.4 FAX Setting 4. Press [Start Setup] to execute the fax setup wizard.
C H E C K If the user does not use the FAX function, this work is
P O IN T unnecessary.
1. Connect the printer to the telephone line.

2. Select “Settings” from Home menu.
3. Select [General Settings] → [Fax Settings] → [Fax Setup Wizard] in that
order. 5. In the originator name input screen, enter the name of the sender (company
name, etc.).
6. In the originator number input screen, enter the fax number of the sender.

Confidential
7. In the Receive Mode Setting screen, select whether or not to connect the 9. In the Setting Confirmation screen, check the settings and press [Next].
telephone to the printer for use. To correct settings, press the [←] button and return to the previous screen.
 Use: Press [Yes] and go to the next step.
 Not use: Press [No] and go to step 9. The Receive Mode is set to
[Automatic].
10. Press [Start Diagnosis] and diagnose the fax functions.

When the print diagnosis result message is displayed, press the [Print]
button to print the fax functions diagnosis report.
8. In the Receive Mode Selection screen, select whether or not to receive

automatically.
 Receive automatically: Press [Yes]. The Receive Mode is set to [Fax/
Telephone Switching].
 Not receive automatically: Press [No]. The Receive Mode is set to
[Manual].

Confidential
C H E C K  When an error is displayed in the report, perform the

P O IN T required corrective action as instructed in the report.
 When the Select Connection Line screen is displayed,
select the connection line. When connected to a private
branch exchange (PBX) or terminal adapter, select
[Private Branch Exchange (PBX)].
 When the Dial Tone Detection Selection screen is
displayed, select [Do not detect]. Note, however, that when
[Do not detect] is set, the number starting the fax number
may not be dialed which might result in the wrong
number being called.
 To make individual settings without using the fax setup
wizard or to change items that have already been set in
the fax setup wizard, select [General Settings]→[Fax
Settings], and individually select and set the required
items in the [Fax Settings] screen.
 In environments such as offices that use extension
telephones that require an outside line access code such as
"0" or "9", set as follows:
1. From the home menu, select [Settings].
2. Select [General Settings]→[Fax Settings]→[Basic
Settings]→[Connection Line] in that order.
3. Select [Private Branch Exchange (PBX)].
4. In the Outside Line Access Code screen, select [Use].
5. Press [Outside Line Access Code], enter the currently
used outside line access code, and press the [OK]
button.
From here on, when faxing to an outside line, the call will
be sent with the actual outside line access code replaced
with a "#".

Confidential
4.2 Printing/operation checks 4. Load paper into the paper cassette (C1) and press [Start].
 Nozzle check print

1. Select [Settings] from the Home menu.
2. Select [Maintenance] from the Settings menu.
5. Check the check patterns and make sure that there are no nozzles missing
and all nozzles discharge ink correctly.
If all nozzles discharge ink correctly, press the [OK] button to end the
nozzle check. If any of the nozzles are missing, press the [NG] button to
execute head cleaning.
3. Select [Print Head Nozzle Check].
Installation Printing/operation checks 121

Confidential
 Copy function check If you cannot prepare the document (A3 size), perform
C H E C K
Confirm the following items in copy function check. P O IN T the following confirmation.
C H E C K
P O IN T  ADF Unit 1. Load paper (A4 size) into the paper cassette.
• Document feed operation confirmation 2. Load a any document (A4 size) vertically into
• Scan (Copy) image quality confirmation the ADF Unit.
 Scanner Unit
• Scan (Copy) image quality confirmation
6. Operation check of ADF Unit

1. Load paper(A3 size) into the paper cassette.
2. Load a any document (A3 size) into the ADF unit.
3. Select [Copy] from the Home screen.
4. Press [2-Sided], select [2→2 Sided], and press the Start button to Put the document
execute copying. vertically.

4. Press [2-Sided], select [2→2 Sided], and press
the Start button to execute copying.

Confidential
7. Operation check of Scanner Unit

C H E C K If you cannot prepare the document (A3 size),
1. Load paper(A3 size) into the paper cassette. P O IN T perform the following confirmation.
2. Load a any document (A3 size) into the Flatbed. 1. Load paper (A3 size) into the paper cassette.
2. Load two documents (A4) into the flatbed like the
4. Press [2-Sided], select [1→1 Sided], and press the Start button to following figure.
execute copying.
Set two documents (A4) side by side

4. Change the Copy setting like the following setting,
and press the Start button to execute copying.
• Paper setting : A4
• Reduce/Enlarge : Auto
• 2-sided : 1→1 Sided
8. Installing the Printer driver/Scanner driver.

Confidential
CHAPTER
5
SERVICE SUPPORT MODE
Confidential
5.1 Overview 2. Enter ID number of Service Support Mode, and start the service support mode.
Service support mode is a service dedicated special mode that can be started by C H E C K Enter "98308" when starting service support mode
P O IN T
a special operation, and allows you to execute functions including adjustment,
inspection, and individual operation check functions.
5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures

UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]
There are two ways of starting up, from a power-off state (p.125) and from the
SHIFT: [6] / Fin: [#]
normal mode (user mode).
***_
How to start up from a power-off state
1. Press and hold down the power button while pressing the [#] button from the
power-off state until a message appears on the panel LCD.
Power button
Figure 5-3. ID number input screen (2)
 Operating procedure
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button
• Input digit shift : [6] button
• Execute : [#] button
[#] button
Figure 5-1. Star operation of panel
UP: [2] / DOWN: [8]

SHIFT: [6] / Fin : [#]
Figure 5-2. ID number input screen (1)
Service Support Mode Overview 125

Confidential
 ID number input procedure How to start up from the normal mode

1. Press a number input button ([2] button or [8] button) to enter a number from 1. Make sure that this device is started up in the normal mode. (Home Screen)
1 to 9.
2. Press the input digit shift button ([6] button) to shift to the next digit. 2. Hold down the [Home] button to display the ID input screen.
3. In the mode ID input screen, enter [98308] and press the [OK] button.
C H E C K  It is not possible to return to the previous digit after
P O IN T shifting digits. If you wish to correct the number of the
previous digit, proceed with the steps until after step 5
Home button
and then perform input again.
 Please note that the execute button is not enabled until at
least two digits have been entered.
3. Press a number input button ([2] button or [8] button) to enter a number from
1 to 9.
4. Repeat the above procedure to enter the specified ID number.
5. When all of the ID number is entered, press the execute button ([#] button). (A
confirmation message appears.)
6. Press the execute button ([#] button) to execute or press the input digit shift
button ([6] button) to enter the number again.
Service Support Mode

Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
Individual Action Check: MENU

ID Input Screen
Adjustment Main Unit: MENU
Maintenance: MENU
Printer Status Information
Swap Mech Unit: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU
ROM Board Temporary Repair: MENU
Figure 5-4. Service Support Mode Screen
Figure 5-5. ID Input Screen Display Operations

Confidential
Solution if enter and execute the wrong ID

 When a different mode starts:
If you enter the wrong ID and a different mode starts,
there is the possibility of changing important settings of
the unit, so press the power button to turn off the power
immediately and then perform the process again to enter
the correct ID number.
 When non-existent ID number:
The following panel LCD display appears and the power
is turned off automatically.
Input ID is not found!!

Please wait Poweroff...

Confidential
5.1.2 Service mode menu configuration

Back:[*] Run:[#]

Maintenance: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Figure 5-6. Service Support Mode: Top Menu Screen
Display Overview Usage situation Details

Allows you to check whether or not the various motors, sensors, and solenoids are "Individual Action Check
Individual Action Check: MENU Troubleshooting
operating normally. Function" (p. 236)
Adjustment Main Unit: MENU Allows you to make the adjustments required when replacing parts.
When performing repair work "Repair Work" (p. 301)
Maintenance: MENU Perform ink filling, cleaning, and other maintenance inside the ink supply system.
"USB F/W Update" (p.
Printer Status Information The printer status information can be displayed on the panel. Before troubleshooting and repair work
748)
Use this to back up the data from the old machine and restore the data on the new machine
Swap Mech Unit: MENU When exchanging product "Product Swap" (p. 751)
when exchanging the product.
CR Unlock Power Off Turn off the power of the printer in the CR unlock state. When performing repair work "Repair Work" (p. 301)
When updating the firmware, use this to update the firmware using external storage media "USB F/W Update" (p.
USB FW Update When updating firmware
such as a USB memory device. 748)
The periodic replacement part usage status can be checked in a list.
Counter Reset When performing repair work "Repair Work" (p. 301)
The counter can be reset individually for specific selected parts.
When performing analysis, copy the debug Log data to external storage media such as a
USB memory device connected to the main unit. When performing troubleshooting
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU ---
(Do not use this menu unless instructed otherwise by a person in charge of analysis in the analysis
service support department.)
ROM Board Temporary Repair: Do not use this menu unless instructed otherwise by a person in charge of the service When recovering a broken ROM Technical Information
MENU support department. temporarily (TE19-0081)

Confidential
5.1.3 Service Support Menu Screen Transition
Service Support Mode Top Menu

A
Individual Action Check: MENU Adjustment Main Unit: MENU (p.130)
□ A00 Input A No.-Individual □ B00 Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust

B10 Head ID Input
□ Output: MENU □ Main Parts Adjust: MENU
B14 Initialize-PW Sensor
A10 CR Motor ■ Print Head: MENU B90 Before Repair Operation
B16 Counter Reset
A11 PF Motor/Sensor B80 After Repair Adjustment
A12 APG Operation Check ■ Ink Supply Unit: MENU B91 Before Repair Operation B20 APG Operation Check
■ ASF Motor: MENU A13 C1 B81 After Repair Adjustment B21 CR Scale Check
A14 C2 ■ Ink System Assy: MENU B92 Before Repair Operation B22 Sensor Check-PW
A15 C3 B82 After Repair Adjustment B23 Sensor Check-PE
A16 C4 ■ Rear ASF Unit: MENU B83 After Repair Adjustment B24 Temp/hum. Sensor
■ Lift Motor/Sensor: MENU A17 C1 ■ Main Board: MENU B84 After Repair Adjustment B25 NIP Solenoid/Sensor
A18 C2 B72 Eject Tray Motor/Sensor
A19 C3 □ Simple Adjustment: MENU
A20 C4 B61 PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S) B26 Nozzle Noise Check
A21 Supply Pump Motor1 B62 Bi-d Adjust (S) B27 Nozzle Rank Categories
A22 Supply Pump Motor2 B63 Bi-d Band Adjust (S) B28 Nozzle Detect Check
A30 PW Sensor Solenoid B64 Band Feed Adjust (S) B29 Check Pattern (A4/LTR)
A31 Rear ASF Solenoid □ Periodic Maintenance:MENU B33 Check Pattern (A3)
A32 NIP Solenoid/Sensor B70 Adjust After Maintenance B30 RGB Pattern
A34 Main Eject Tray Operation Check B71 Display Setting B31 Ruled line pattern
□ Input: MENU B75 PE Sensor Check Pattern B32 Nozzle Check Pattern
A40 ALL Sensor Check □ Individual Adjustment: MENU
■ OP CHK-Feed/Eject: MENU A41 Simplex-C1 ■ Initial Setting: MENU B40 CR Motor Correct
A42 Simplex-C2 ■ Mech Check: MENU B41 PF Motor Correct
A43 Simplex-C3 ■ Printing Check: MENU B42 ASF Motor Correct C1
A44 Simplex-C4 ■ Mech Adjust: MENU B66 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C2
A45 Simplex-Rear ASF ■ Printing Adjust: MENU B67 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C3
A46 Duplex-C1 □ B29 Check Pattern (A4/LTR) B68 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C4
A47 Duplex-C2 □ B33 Check Pattern (A3)
A48 Duplex-C3 B43 Head Angular Adj. Mech
A49 Duplex-C4 B44 Head Angular Adj. Soft A
B69 Head Angular Adj. Soft B
■ Sensor CHK-Feed/Eject: MENU A50 C1
B45 PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust
A55 Shutter Check-PW A51 C2
B46 Bi-D Adjust
A56 APG Sensor A52 C3
B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
A57 Temp/hum. Sensor A53 C4
B49 PW Sensor Correct
A58 Ink End Sensor A54 Rear ASF
B52 PE Adjust (ASF)
A62 Ink Leak Sensor B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF)
□ A01 Auto Check B55 Band Feed Adjust
□ A02 CR Unlock Power OFF B65 A-B Band Adjust
Figure 5-7. Service Support Menu Screen Transition (1)

Confidential
Maintenance: MENU Printer Status Information

□ C00 Input C No._Maintenance
A □ Ink Fill: MENU
(p.129) C01 Head Ink Fill
C02 Initial Fill Swap Mech Unit: MENU
□ Head Cleaning: MENU □ Data Back Up
C03 CL1 □ Data Restore
C04 CL2 □ Data Delete
C05 CL3
C06 Strong CL
C07 Refresh CL
□ Ink Discharge: MENU CR Unlock Power Off
C08 Head Ink Discharge
C09 Supply Ink Discharge
C10 Ink System Ink Discharge
C11 Head Thermistor Check USB FW Update
□ C20 Status Sheet Print
Counter Reset
□ B16 Counter Reset

□ Debug Log Get
□ Config Data Set
□ Config Data Reset

□ ROM Board Restore
Figure 5-8. Service Support Menu Screen Transition (2)

Confidential
CHAPTER
6
TROUBLESHOOTING
Confidential
6.1 Troubleshooting Workflow
START
Service Request
Hearing
???? NO
?????
YES
??????? Refer to Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom (P. 199) and
?????????
isolate the trouble.
Identify the cause Refer to Fatal Errors (P. 160).

When an error other than a paper jam is occurring, refer to
NO Indications, Causes, and Solutions when Normal Errors Occur (P. 134).
Assisting
the customer
required?
YES
Assist the customer
Problem NO
solved?
YES
END A B
Figure 6-1. Troubleshooting Workflow (1)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow 132

Confidential
A B
Troubleshooting when performing repair work
Check parts that must replace

or better to replace to prevent CE??
the problem from recurring Refer to Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom (P. 199) and
isolate the trouble.
Dispatch CE ????? Refer to Fatal Errors (P. 160).
When an error other than a paper jam is occurring, refer to
Indications, Causes, and Solutions when Normal Errors Occur (P. 134).
Repair support
END
Figure 6-2. Troubleshooting Workflow (2)
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Workflow 133

Confidential
6.2 Error Display and Solution

6.2.1 Indications, Causes, and Solutions when Normal Errors Occur
C H E C K  Error codes are also assigned to normal errors with this product, and the occurrence history can be checked in the following ways.
P O IN T • Service information portal
• Service status sheet
 Unlike with a fatal error, the error code is not displayed on the panel when an error occurs.
Error
Error Code Error details Error solution
Name Path / ink color
Occurs if a paper jam has occurred in the printer Remove the paper jammed in the path.
920000 Paper jam error ---
mechanism. “ Paper Jam Error” (p. 152)
Occurs if mechanism initialization was not
performed normally because removal of the CR
920001 CR protective material removal forgotten error --- Remove the CR protective material.
protective material or protective tape had been
forgotten when the power was first turned on.
920021 Paper Cassette (C1)
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920023 Not feeding error Paper Cassette (C3) “ Not Feeding Error” (p. 158)
when paper feeding was executed.
920025 Rear tray
920041 Paper Cassette (C1) Check the feed roller attachment state and
Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor
920042 Paper Cassette (C2) reattach the feed roller.
when paper feeding was executed.
Not feeding error (feed roller replacement) * If this error occurs again later, isolate the cause
920043 Paper Cassette (C3) (Occurs only immediately after feed roller
as described in the remedy procedure for the not
maintenance.)
920044 Paper Cassette (C4) feeding error.
920061 Paper Cassette (C1) Occurs if separation of the paper with the Fan the paper and then reload the paper in the
920062 Paper Cassette (C2) separation roller could not be performed well, so paper cassette.
Stack collapsed error the second sheet is in a half fed state and in a
920063 Paper Cassette (C3) If this error subsequently occurs frequently, see “
position different from the original paper feed
Stack Collapsed Error” (p. 159)
920064 Paper Cassette (C4) start position.
Troubleshooting Error Display and Solution 134

Confidential
Error
Load paper into the corresponding cassette or
920202 Paper Cassette (C2) tray.
Occurs if there is determined to be no paper
920203 No paper error Paper Cassette (C3) If this error is not resolved, refer to the
when printing is executed.
920204 Paper Cassette (C4) following.
“ No paper error” (p. 155)
920205 Rear tray
920221 Paper Cassette (C1) Attach the paper cassette.
920222 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the specified paper cassette is If this error is not resolved, refer to the
No cassette error
920223 Paper Cassette (C3) determined to be not attached. following.
920224 Paper Cassette (C4) “ No Cassette Error” (p. 156)

Occurs if multiple sheets are fed at the same
920243 Double feeding error Paper Cassette (C3) Reload the paper and then try again.
time when manual duplex printing.
920245 Rear tray
920262 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the length of the paper loaded when
Match the main unit setting and actual paper
920263 Automatic duplex paper size mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3) automatic duplex printing differs from that of
size.
920264 Paper Cassette (C4) the setting.
920265 Rear tray

Occurs if the paper size when fax printing is Match the main unit setting and actual paper
920283 Fax paper length mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3)
determined to not match. size.
920285 Rear tray
920302 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if paper corresponding to the paper size
Match the paper size setting of the driver, etc.
920303 Paper size mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3) setting of the driver, etc. is not set on the main
and the actual paper size.
920304 Paper Cassette (C4) unit.
920305 Rear tray

Confidential
Error
920322 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if paper corresponding to the paper type
Match the paper type setting of the driver, etc.
920323 Paper type mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3) setting of the driver, etc. is not set on the main
and the actual paper type.
920324 Paper Cassette (C4) unit.
920325 Rear tray

Occurs if the paper size and paper type Match the paper settings (size and type) of the
920343 Paper size and type mismatch error Paper Cassette (C3)
mismatches occur at the same time. driver, etc. and the actual paper (size and type).
920345 Rear tray
Occurs if main unit settings / print settings and Match the main unit setting / print settings and
920363 Paper size mismatch error (physical) Paper Cassette (C3)
the actual paper size differ. actual paper size.
920365 Rear tray
920382 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if a paper size or paper type mismatch
Match the main unit setting / print settings and
920383 Duplex printing not possible error Paper Cassette (C3) occurs and the duplex reverse process is
actual paper size.
920384 Paper Cassette (C4) determined to be physically impossible.
920385 Rear tray

920402 Paper Cassette (C2) Occurs if the cassette fails and cannot perform
Cassette failure error operation appropriately during the paper lift up “ Cassette Failure Error” (p. 157)
920403 Paper Cassette (C3) operation due to cassette attachment.
920421 Paper Cassette (C1)  Temporarily turn the error display off (if will
920422 Paper Cassette (C2) continue use without replacing the part).
Occurs when printing ends or the power turns on
• Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
920423 Feed roller end of life reached error Paper Cassette (C3) if the print count of the corresponding cassette
(The error will be displayed later every 300
920424 Paper Cassette (C4) has reached the number of pages for its life.
sheets or when the power is turned on.)
920425 Rear tray  Replace the part and reset the internal counter.

Confidential
Error
920500 Front cover open error ---
920501 Rear cover open error --- Close the corresponding cover.
Occurs if the corresponding cover is in an open If this error is not resolved, refer to the
920502 Rear cover open error (additional cassette) ---
state. following.
920503 Ink case open error (P1) --- “ Cover Open Error” (p. 156)
920527 RIPS rear cover open error ---
The CR was left in a stopped state out of the
920550 Left outside CAP error --- home position for at least 30 minutes and the Press the [OK] button in the Warning screen.
process was canceled.
Occurs at the delineation between front and
Switch the paper and press the continue printing
920566 Paper Reload waiting error --- back (at timing when paper is switched) in
button (error release button).
manual 2-sided printing.
920601 Black
920602 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink goes
Ink end error Replace the ink pack.
920603 Magenta below the limit value.
920604 Yellow
920621 Black
920622 Cyan
Ink recognition read error
920623 Magenta
920624 Yellow Occurs if the ink pack is in a state in which it
“ Ink Recognition Error” (p. 158)
920641 Black cannot be recognized
920642 Cyan
Ink recognition write error
920643 Magenta
920644 Yellow
920661 Black
920662 Cyan
Ink not attached error Occurs if the ink pack is not attached. Attach the ink pack.
920663 Magenta
920664 Yellow
920681 Black
920682 Remaining amount of ink for initial filling Cyan Occurs if there is less than the amount of ink
Attach an ink pack for initial filling.
920683 insufficient warning error Magenta required for filling when initial filling starts.
920684 Yellow

Confidential
Error
920701 Black
920702 Cyan Occurs if an ink cartridge supplied with the
Attach other than the ink pack for initial filling
Error for initial filling I/C product was used for ink replacement for other
920703 Magenta (ASP ink pack).
than initial ink filling.
920704 Yellow
920721 Black
920722 Cyan Occurs if the inserted ink is unrecognizable
Ink recognition error (non-genuine) Attach the correct ink pack.
920723 Magenta because it is non-genuine ink.
920724 Yellow
920741 Black
920742 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of ink is
Attach an ink pack with the amount required for
Remaining amount of ink insufficient error insufficient when executing strong cleaning and
920743 Magenta cleaning.
ink replacement.
920744 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
920900 Maintenance box full error --- Replace the maintenance box.
box exceeded the limit value.
920901 No maintenance box error --- Occurs if there is no maintenance box attached. Attach a maintenance box.
920902 Maintenance box recognition error (read) --- Occurs if the maintenance box cannot be
“ M/B Recognition Error” (p. 157)
920903 Maintenance box recognition error (write) --- recognized.
Occurs if the remaining amount of the
Remaining amount of maintenance box Attach a maintenance box with the amount
920904 --- maintenance box is insufficient when executing
insufficient error required for cleaning.
strong cleaning and ink replacement.
Occurs when the following three conditions are
met when the number of print sides of the I/S
Maintenance Unit are at a certain threshold
value or below.
• Press the release key.
• When the threshold value or below is
reached • Replace the periodic replacement parts, then
920930 Maintenance Unit end error ---
reset the life counter of periodic replacement
• When the printer is started up at the
parts.
threshold value or below
• When the designated number of prints have
been printed after the previous end error has
been displayed

Confidential
Error
Occurs if page data that uses a large amount of
920980 Memory full error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory
capacity is exceeded.
Occurs if print data that uses a large amount of
920981 Memory insufficient error --- memory is sent and the main unit memory Reduce the amount of memory used for print
becomes insufficient. page data by, for example, splitting up the print
Memory insufficient error (number of print pages.
920982 --- Occurs if a number of print copies data of a data
copies)
size exceeding the free space is sent in the state
Memory insufficient error (resolution
920983 --- in which there is little free space in the main unit
reduction)
memory.
920984 Memory insufficient error (reverse printing) ---
Occurs if manual feeding is specified from the
920985 Manual feed error --- Load paper into the rear tray.
PCL driver and then printing is executed.
Occurs when the customize settings of the driver
920987 Driver mismatch error --- Press the error release key.
and the main unit are incompatible.
921002 Paper Cassette (C2) Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
Displayed at the point in time when the number
921003 Feed roller end of life approaching warning Paper Cassette (C3) of sheets for replacement of a periodically
replaced part has reached 97%. sheets or when the power is turned on until the
921004 Paper Cassette (C4) end of life of the part is reached.)
921005 Rear tray
921021 Paper Cassette (C1)  Temporarily turn the error display off (if will
921022 Paper Cassette (C2) continue use without replacing the part).
Occurs when printing ends or the power turns on
• Press the [OK] button in the Error screen.
921023 Feed roller end of life reached warning Paper Cassette (C3) if the print count of the corresponding cassette
921024 Paper Cassette (C4) has reached the number of pages for its life.
sheets or when the power is turned on.)
921025 Rear tray  Replace the part and reset the internal counter.
921201 Black
921202 Cyan Occurs if the remaining amount of the ink pack
Ink low ---
921203 Magenta has become near the limit value.
921204 Yellow
Occurs if the usage amount of the maintenance
921400 Maintenance box nearly full --- ---
box has become near the limit value.

Confidential
Error
Occurs when the following three conditions are
met when the number of print sides of the
Maintenance Unit are at a certain threshold
value or below.
• When the threshold value or below is reached
and printing ends Turn OFF the printer, and reset the counter after
921429 Maintenance Unit end warning ---
• When the printer is started at the threshold replacing the periodic replacement parts.
value or below
• When the stipulated number of sheets have
been printed since the last near-end warning,
and a demarcation has occurred with respect
to the next printing process
Occurs when the number of print sides is near
Close the message display, or set the life warning
921607 Product life near end warning --- the product life. Is repeated at regular intervals
display setting to OFF.
after it occurs.
Occurs when the number of print sides has
Close the message display, or set the life warning
921608 Product life end warning --- exceeded the product life. Is repeated at regular
display setting to OFF.
intervals after it occurs.
930000 ADF paper jam --- Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the ADF unit. Remove the paper jammed in the path.
930001 ADF cover open error --- Occurs if the ADF cover is in an open state.
Split up the document and send it in parts.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining when
940000 Send memory storage error --- Specify direct printing and then send the
fax scanning.
document.
Occurs if there is no memory remaining during
940001 Receive memory storage error --- fax receiving or if a document exceeding 100 Process the inbox data (print, cancel, or delete).
pages is received at one time.
Occurs if dialing the other party's fax number
940002 Sending incomplete (no dial tone) --- Check the telephone line and then try again.
failed because a dial tone could not be detected.
940003 Sending incomplete (busy) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because the other party's line was busy.
940004 Send incomplete (no response) --- Wait a while and then try again.
failed because there was no response.
Occurs if the modular cords are connected to
940005 Sending incomplete (reverse insertion) --- Connect them to LINE and EXT correctly.
LINE and EXT in reverse.
Occurs if the modular cord is not connected to Check the telephone line and connect the
940006 Sending incomplete (no connection) ---
the telephone line. modular cord.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server
940007 DNS error (email) ---
are invalid. Check the DNS settings of the printer.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save Check the DNS server settings.
940008 DNS error (folder) ---
destination are invalid.
 Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
940009 Authentication error (email) --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
Occurs if one of the following settings is Check the following.
invalid. • Folder path
940010 Authentication error (folder) --- • Save destination • User name
• User name • Password
• Password setting • Account name
 Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the POP3 server address and port.
 Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
 Check that the network cable is physically
Occurs if a communication error occurred
940011 Communication error (email) --- connected.
during email forwarding.
 Check whether or not the address is correct.
 Check the access point settings.
 Check the firewall settings.
 Check the server (possibility of server being
down).

Confidential
Error
 Check the folder path.
 Check that the network cable is physically
connected.
 Check the network settings (IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway).
940012 Communication error (folder) ---  Check the firewall settings.
during folder forwarding.
down).
 Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination has been left open.
 Check whether or not a file of the same name
in the save destination is write prohibited.
Check that the following save destination
settings are correct.
• Communication mode
Occurs if the specified save destination did not
940013 Destination invalid error (folder) --- • Folder path
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
Occurs if writing could not be performed
940014 Save destination space insufficient error --- because there is no free space in the save Free up space in the save destination.
destination folder.
Occurs if the received data the user is attempting
940015 No received data --- ---
to print again has been discarded.
Occurs if the preview button is pressed when
940016 Preview not possible --- Disable direct transmission.
direct transmission is in the enabled state.
Do the following depending on the intended use.
 When wish to transmit in color
Color transmission not possible for Occurs if transmission at a specified time is
940017 --- • Transmit without specifying a time.
transmission at specified time specified and then the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to specify a time and then transmit
• Select black and white and then transmit.
Color transmission not possible for polling Occurs if polling transmission is specified and
940018 ---
transmission then the color start key is pressed.
Select black and white and then transmit.
Color not possible when pending document Occurs if storage of pending documents is
940019 ---
storage specified and then the color start key is pressed.

Confidential
Error
Color transmission to multiple destinations not Occurs if multiple destinations are specified and
940020 --- • Transmit to one destination at a time.
possible then the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to perform fax broadcasting
Occurs if duplex scanning is specified and then
940021 Duplex color transmission not possible --- • Cancel duplex scanning.
the color start key is pressed.
 When wish to perform duplex scanning
Occurs if the color start key is pressed when the
940022 Color transmission not possible when ECM off --- • Enable the ECM setting.
ECM setting is in the disabled state.
 When the ECM setting cannot be changed
• Select black and white.
Occurs if the duplex scanning setting is enabled
Disable either the duplex scanning setting or
940023 Duplex direct transmission not possible --- and the direct transmission setting is enabled
direct transmission setting.
and then the color start key is pressed.
Occurs if the on-hook dial button is pressed Wait until the line becomes available and then
940024 Hook operation disabled ---
when the line is in use. try again.
Occurs if a number is input when the dial buffer Wait until the input dial data is processed and the
940025 Dial buffer ---
is full with on-hook dialing. buffer space becomes available.
940026 Off-hook fax use prohibited --- --- ---
Occurs if manual transmission is started in the
state in which transmission is not possible
940027 Transmission not possible error --- (during printing, while waiting to transmit at a Wait for the function to end and then try again.
specified time, during scanning, etc.) because of
another function.
Occurs if manually print report of print function
940028 Starting fax printing not possible --- Wait until printing ends and then try again.
diagnosis results during printing.
Occurs if fax printing is started when the set
940029 Paper size mismatch error --- paper size is smaller than the paper size of the Set the correct paper size.
fax data to be printed.
Occurs if the media is removed during saving or
940030 Media error (media removed) --- Connect the media and then try again.
creating a folder.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if media for saving received faxes is Connect media with free space and then try
940031 Media error (memory full) ---
inserted but the media has no free space. again.
Occurs if connected media for saving received
faxes and attempted to create a folder for saving  Cancel the media setting (write prohibited).
940032 Memory error (write prohibited) ---
received faxes in the storage media but the  Connect media that is not write protected.
media is write protected.
 Reconnect the media.
Occurs if a write error occurred during saving
940033 Media error (failure) ---  Connect different media. (A folder must be
received faxes.
created by storage dedicated folder creation.)
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings Make sure fax usage has finished before
940034 Fax function in use ---
while the fax function was in use. changing the settings.
Occurs if attempted to change the fax settings
Make sure changing of the fax settings from a
940035 PC in use --- while the fax settings were being changed from
PC has finished before changing the settings.
a PC.
Occurs if attempted to execute the fax function
Make sure the running function has finished
940036 Other function being executed --- when a function that cannot be executed at the
before trying again.
same time is running.
Occurs if email is selected in the forwarding
940037 Email server not set --- settings when the email server settings have not Configure the email server settings.
been configured.
Occurs when the fax board fails or the fax board
940038 Fax board failure --- Repair and restore by contacting service support.
is not connected.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the email server  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950000 DNS error for Scan to Email ---
are invalid.  Check the DNS server settings.

Confidential
Error
 Check the SMTP server address and port.
 Check the POP3 server address and port.
 Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
→ Perform email server connection diagnosis
(Scan to Email function only)
950001 Communication error for Scan to Email ---  Check that the network cable is physically
during Scan to Email execution.
connected.
 Check whether or not the address is correct.
down).
 Check the authentication method.
• Check the SMTP server address and port.
Occurs if the authentication settings of the email
950002 Authentication error for Scan to Email --- • Check the POP3 server address and port.
server are invalid.
 Check the account name.
 Check the password.
 Change the scan settings (increase the
maximum attachment file size).
Occurs if the size of the scanning data to be
 Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950003 Size exceeded for Scan to Email --- attached exceeded the maximum attachment file
the size by changing the resolution or
size.
compression ratio).
 Reduce the number of document pages.
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950004 Insufficient memory for Scan to Email ---
Email execution. before trying again.
ADF document removal required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be removed from
950005 --- Remove the document from the ADF.
Email the ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
ADF document loading required for Scan to Occurs if a document needs to be loaded in the
950006 --- Load the document in the ADF.
Email ADF unit during Scan to Email execution.
Occurs if the number of document scanning
Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
950007 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Email --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
S/MIME encryption certificate error for Scan to Occurs when the encryption certificate has Register a certificate with a valid expiry date as
950010 ---
Email expired in the encryption use settings. the encryption certificate.

Confidential
Error
S/MIME signature certificate error for Scan to Occurs when the signature certificate has Register a certificate with a valid expiry date as
950011 ---
Email expired in the signature use settings. the signature certificate.
Occurs if the DNS settings of the save  Check the DNS settings of the printer.
950020 DNS error for Scan to Folder ---
destination are invalid.  Check the DNS server settings.
 Check that the following save destination
• Folder path
• Connection mode
• Port number
Occurs if a communication error occurred  Check that the network cable is physically
950021 Communication error for Scan to Folder ---
during Scan to Folder execution. connected.
 Check the network setting related items.
• IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
down).
Occurs if any of the user name and password • Communication mode
950022 Authentication error for Scan to Folder --- settings for accessing the specified save • Folder path
destination is invalid. • User name
• Password
• Port number
 Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
save destination folder.
Occurs if the scanned data did not fit in the  Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
950023 Size exceeded error for Scan to Folder ---
folder of the save destination. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
950024 Insufficient memory for Scan to Folder ---
folder execution. before trying again.
Folder the ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.

Confidential
Error
Folder ADF unit during Scan to Folder execution.
950027 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Folder --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
addition function.
Occurs if the specified save destination did not • Folder path
950028 Destination invalid for Scan to Folder ---
exist.
• User name
• Password
• Port number
 Remove the file with the same name in the
Occurs if a file name in the save destination is save destination folder.
950029 File name duplicated for Scan to Folder ---
duplicated.  Set the file header to a different character
string and then execute again.
Occurs when the data size of one file has
Either lower the resolution or set a higher
950030 File size upper limit error for Scan to Folder --- reached its upper limit for a PDF/multi-page
compression ratio.
TIFF.
950040 Communication error for Scan to Cloud --- Check that there is a connection to the network.
during destination acquisition.
Occurs when the Epson Connect service of the Enable the service in Epson Connect settings of
950041 Service stopped for Scan to Cloud ---
printer is paused. the setup.
Occurs if the Epson Connect service is not Register the Epson Connect service to the
950042 Service not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
registered. printer.
Occurs if not connected to the Epson Connect
server due to one of the following reasons.
 When the login process is performed after  Check that there is a connection to the
950043 Not logged in for Scan to Cloud --- printer startup but a destination search is network.
started during the process.  Wait a while and then try again.
 When the login process failed due to
communication error
Cloud the ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.
Cloud ADF unit during Scan to Cloud execution.

Confidential
Error
Occurs if the scanned data exceeded the size of Reduce the number of document pages and then
950046 Size exceeded for Scan to Cloud ---
data that can be transmitted. try again.
Occurs if the destination is invalid.
(Occurs if the destination information on the
950047 Invalid destination for Scan to Cloud --- server is rewritten during the period from Set the destination again.
acquiring the destination list to transmitting the
data.)
Occurs if not even one destination is registered Register a destination to the Epson Connect
950048 Destination not registered for Scan to Cloud ---
to the server. service.
950049 Addition limit exceeded for Scan to Cloud --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
addition function.
950060 Communication error for AirPrint (eSCL) ---
950070 Communication error for Scan to WSD --- Occurs if a communication error occurred
Check that there is a connection to the network.
Communication error for Scan to Document during execution of each function.
950080 ---
Capture Pro
Check whether or not the destination is currently
PC in use error for Scan to Document Capture communicating with another printer.
950081 --- Occurs if the destination PC is busy.
Pro (If communication is in progress, make sure
communication has finished before trying again.)
No applicable PC for Scan to Document Occurs if not connected with a PC compatible Connect with a PC compatible with Document
950082 ---
Capture Pro with Document Capture Pro. Capture Pro.
Communication error for Scan to Document
950090 --- during Scan to Document Capture Pro Server Check that there is a connection to the network.
Capture Pro Server
execution.
Server in use error for Scan to Document
950091 --- Occurs if the server is busy. Wait a while and then try again.
Capture Pro Server
No response for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if a server compatible with Document Connect with a server compatible with
950092 ---
Server Capture Pro Server could not be found. Document Capture Pro Server.
No job error for Scan to Document Capture Pro Occurs if not even one job is registered to the
950093 --- Register a job on Document Capture Pro Server.
Server server.
 Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950100 Communication error for SMTP Server ---
during communication to SMTP Server.  Check mail sever setting
 Check that SMTP Server is operated correctly.

Confidential
Error
 Check that there is a connection to the
Occurs if a communication error occurred network.
950101 Communication error for POP3 Server ---
during communication to POP3 Server.  Check mail server setting
 Check that POP3 Server is operated correctly.
 Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950102 DNS error for mail server (SMTP) --- (SMTP Server Address)
SMTP Server.
 Check the connection state to DNS Server.
 Check mail server setting.
Occurs if trouble occurred during connection to
950103 DNS error for mail server (POP3) --- (POP3 Server Address)
POP3 Server.
 Check the connection state to DNS Server.
Occurs if authentication process is failure on Check following mail server setting.
950104 Authentication error for SMTP Server ---
SMTP Server.  Authentication method
Occurs if authentication process is failure on  Authentication account
950105 Authentication error for POP3 Server ---
POP3 Server.  Authentication password
Occurs if printer's date and time setting is
950106 Certificate error (Date/time) --- incorrect, or if you have a root certificate for the Check date and time setting of printer.
server, but it has expired.
Occurs if printer does not have a root certificate  Check that printer have route certificate
corresponding to the server or if the CA corresponding to the server.
950107 Certificate error (CA certificate) ---
certificate for verifying the partner server is not  Check that CA certificate for verifying the
imported. Partner server is imported.
Occurs if certificate obtained from the server is Check that certificate obtained from the server is
950108 Certificate error (other) ---
broken. correctly.
Occurs if mismatch SMTP connection setting on
Secure connection mismatch
950109 --- server and Client, or server is not support SMTP
(Server is not SSL)
Secure Connection (SSL Connection).
Secure connection mismatch
950110 --- server and client, or if Server request the SSL/ Check that secure connection setting on Sever
(Server is SSL/TLS)
TLS connection to SMTP Secure Connection. and Client are matched.
Secure connection mismatch server and client, or if Server request the
950111 ---
(Server is STARTTLS) STARTTLS connection to SMTP Secure
Connection.
SMTP server connection failure Check following mail server setting.
Occurs if printer communication by using the no
950112 (“Connection to server failed” of “Sever is not ---  SMTP server address
support protocol.
SMTP Server)  SMPT Server port number

Confidential
Error
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch Change the Authentication method of printer to
950113 ---
(SMTP-Auth is necessary) Occurs if mismatch the authentication method SMTP Authentication.
SMTP Server Authentication method mismatch on Server and client. Change the Authentication method of printer to
950114 ---
(SMTP-Auth is not necessary) POP before SMTP.
Occurs if source address specification is
950115 Source address specification error --- Check source address.
mistake.
Password encryption, power interruption during Occurs when occurrence of a power interruption Occurs when occurrence of a power interruption
950133 encryption/decryption, data corruption --- during encryption/decryption is listed only once during encryption/decryption is listed only once
occurrence as a history log. as a history log.
 Ensure there is sufficient storage area in the
storage media.
The storage media space for scanning data is  Reduce the size of the scanning data (reduce
990000 Insufficient space for Scan to External Memory ---
insufficient. the size by changing the resolution or
compression ratio).
Cancel the write prohibited settings of the
990001 Write prohibited for Scan to External Memory --- Occurs if the storage media is write prohibited.
storage media.
Occurs if a folder cannot be created in the
990002 Folder creation for Scan to External Memory --- Connect different media.
storage media.
The storage media was removed during Scan to
990003 Card removed for Scan to External Memory --- Connect the media.
External Media execution.
Insufficient memory for Scan to External Occurs if insufficient memory during Scan to Make sure the job being executed has finished
990004 ---
Memory External Memory execution. before trying again.
Try again.
Occurs if saving failed due to an error other than
990005 Other error for Scan to External Memory --- (If the same error occurs again after trying again,
the above.
contact service support.)
Addition limit exceeded for Scan to External Send and save the scanned data and then scan the
990006 --- sheets has reached the limit with the document
Memory remaining document sheets as a different job.
addition function.
Occurs if the connected media is not formatted
990100 External memory recognition not possible --- Connect different media.
or is in an unsupported format.
Occurs if attempted to execute the external
Simultaneous operation execution error for Make sure the running function has finished
990101 --- memory printing function when a function that
external memory printing before trying again.
cannot be executed at the same time is running.

Confidential
Error
Add the PC printing privilege for the
Occurs if user authentication was successful but
990200 Security (user restriction) print restriction --- corresponding user in WebConfig and
there is no PC printing privilege for that user.
NetConfig.
 Occurs if user authentication failed.
 Check that the user name and password are
 Occurs if the setting for permitting execution
correct.
of a job with no authentication information is
990201 Security (user restriction) authentication error ---  Set the setting for permitting execution of a
set to “Prohibit” when a print job with no
job with no authentication information to
authentication information (user name and
“Permit”.
password) is received.
990300 Memory full error for copying --- Split up the document and scan it in parts.
sheets exceeded the memory capacity.
Occurs when the settings of setting items that
Restart notification warning accompany require a restart have been changed.
991000 --- Restart.
changes to settings
• PC connection via USB
 Update the firmware again.
Occurs when the firmware update fails.  Check the connection of Optional cassettes
• Power off during update cable or SCN unit cable and update the
--- Recovery mode display ---
• Communication OFF during update firmware again.
• Incorrect connection between boards  Remove Optional cassettes or SCN unit and
update the firmware again.

Confidential
PAPER JAM ERROR
C H E C K  In this product, in order to improve the analysis of paper jam error, sub code is allocated for each paper jam occurrence factor.
P O IN T When a paper jam occurs, sub code is recorded simultaneously with a paper jam error.
(Regarding the detail of paper jam occurrence factor, refer to Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor.)
Table 6-1. Paper Jam sub code list

Paper Cassette (C1) Paper Cassette (C2) Paper Cassette (C3) Paper Cassette (C4) Duplex Rear Tray
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
001 C1 normal rotation 037 C2 normal rotation 073 C3 normal rotation 109 C4 normal rotation 145 Duplex normal rotation 181 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
002 C1 reverse 038 C2 reverse 074 C3 reverse 110 C4 reverse 146 Duplex reverse 182 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached PE sensor Unreached
003 C1 normal rotation 039 C2 normal rotation 075 C normal rotation 111 C4 normal rotation 147 Duplex normal rotation 183 Rear Tray normal rotation
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
004 C1 reverse 040 C2 reverse 076 C3 reverse 112 C4 reverse 148 Duplex reverse 184 Rear Tray reverse
PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off PE sensor not off
005 C1 PW sensor Unreached 041 C2 PW sensor Unreached 077 C3 PW sensor Unreached 113 C4 PW sensor Unreached 149 Duplex PW sensor Unreached 185 Rear Tray PW sensor
Unreached
007 C1 FE sensor Unreached 043 C2 FE sensor Unreached 079 C3 FE sensor Unreached 115 C4 FE sensor Unreached 151 Duplex FE sensor Unreached 187 Rear Tray FE sensor
Unreached
008 C1 FE sensor 044 C2 FE sensor 080 C3 FE sensor 116 C4 FE sensor 152 Duplex FE sensor 188 Rear Tray FE sensor
Unreached B Unreached B Unreached B Unreached B Unreached B Unreached B
009 C1 FE sensor not off 045 C2 FE sensor not off 081 C3 FE sensor not off 117 C4 FE sensor not off 153 Duplex FE sensor not off 189 Rear Tray FE sensor not off
010 C1 FE2 sensor Unreached 046 C2 FE2 sensor Unreached 082 C3 FE2 sensor Unreached 118 C4 FE2 sensor Unreached 154 Duplex FE2 sensor 190 Rear Tray FE2 sensor
Unreached Unreached
011 C1 FE2 sensor not off 047 C2 FE2 sensor not off 083 C3 FE2 sensor not off 119 C4 FE2 sensor not off 155 Duplex FE2 sensor not off 191 Rear Tray FE2 sensor not off
Unreached Unreached
Unreached Unreached
017 C1 CR Motor 053 C2 CR Motor 089 C3 CR Motor 125 C4 CR Motor 161 Duplex CR Motor 197 Rear Tray CR Motor
018 C1 PF Motor 054 C2 PF Motor 090 C3 PF Motor 126 C4 PF Motor 162 Duplex PF Motor 198 Rear Tray PF Motor
019 C1 ASF Motor 055 C2 ASF Motor 091 C3 ASF Motor 127 C4 ASF Motor 163 Duplex ASF Motor 199 Rear Tray ASF Motor
020 C1 ASF2 Motor 056 C2 ASF2 Motor 092 C3 ASF2 Motor 128 C4 ASF2 Motor 164 Duplex ASF2 Motor 200 Rear Tray ASF2 Motor
023 C1 NF error 059 C2 NF error 095 C3 NF error 131 C4 NF error 167 Duplex NF error 203 Rear Tray NF error

Confidential
Table 6-1. Paper Jam sub code list

Paper Cassette (C1) Paper Cassette (C2) Paper Cassette (C3) Paper Cassette (C4) Duplex Rear Tray
Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam Code Content of paper jam
024 C1 Stack collapsed 060 C2 Stack collapsed 096 C3 Stack collapsed 132 C4 Stack collapsed 168 Duplex Stack collapsed 204 Rear Tray Stack collapsed
026 Home seek failure
027 CR protective material
removal forgotten error
028 Emergency shutdown
029 Option connect error 065 Option connect error 101 Option connect error 137 Option connect error 173 Option connect error 209 Option connect error

Confidential
Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor Table 6-2. Detail of paper jam occurrence factor
Paper jam occurrence Paper jam occurrence
Detail Detail
factor factor
Normal rotation This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE sensor at FE4 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette (4th) does
PE sensor Unreached the time of feeding paper from the corresponding paper feeder. not detect the paper at the time of feeding the paper from
corresponding paper feeder.
Reverse PE sensor This error occurs when the paper does not reach the PE sensor at
Unreached the time of pulling in paper at duplex print from the corresponding FE4 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (4th) does not
paper feeder. becoming the off condition at the time of feeding the paper with
specified step after the paper reaches to the feed sensor of option
Normal rotation This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off condition
cassette (4th).
PE Sensor not off at the time of the printer fed the paper with specified step after
the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. CR Motor This error occurs when detecting the speed down of CR movement at
the time of feeding and printing the paper from corresponding paper
Reverse PE Sensor not This error occurs when PE Sensor is not becoming the off condition
feeder.
off at the time of the feeding the paper with specified step at duplex print
after the paper reaches to the PE Sensor. PF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of PF movement at
the time of feeding the paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
PW Sensor Unreached This error occurs when PW Sensor does not detect the paper edge at
the time of feeding the paper from with specified step after the paper ASF Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF movement
reaches to the PE Sensor. at the time of feeding the paper from the corresponding paper feeder.
FE Sensor Unreached This error occurs when feed sensor does not detect the paper at ASF2 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF movement
the time of feeding the paper with specified step from of option cassette (2nd) at the time of feeding the paper from the
the corresponding paper feeder. corresponding paper feeder.
FE Sensor Unreached B This error occurs when feed sensor of printer does not detect ASF3 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF movement
the paper at the time of feeding the paper from option cassette. of option cassette (3rd) at the time of feeding the paper from the
FE Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor does not becoming the off
condition at the time of the feeding the paper with specified step after ASF4 Motor This error occurs when detecting the excess load of ASF movement
the paper reaches to the feed sensor. of option cassette (4th) at the time of feeding the paper from the
FE2 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette (2nd) does
not detect the paper at the time of feeding the paper from NF Error This error occurs when the paper does not feed form the
corresponding paper feeder. corresponding paper feeder.
FE2 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (2nd) does not Stack collapsed This error occurs when separation of the paper with the separation
becoming the off condition at the time of feeding the paper with roller could not be performed well, so the second sheet is in a half fed
specified step after the paper reaches to the feed sensor of option state and in a position different from the original paper feed start
cassette(2nd). position.
FE3 sensor Unreached This error occurs when the feed sensor of option cassette (3rd) does Home seek failure This error occurs when the printer does not detect the contact to the
not detect the paper at the time of feeding the paper from CR Lock when performing the Home position seek.
corresponding paper feeder. CR protective material This error occurs when mechanism initialization was not performed
FE3 Sensor not off This error occurs when feed sensor of option cassette (3rd) does not removal forgotten error normally because removal of the CR protective material or
becoming the off condition at the time of feeding the paper with protective tape had been forgotten when the power was first turned
specified step after the paper reaches to the feed sensor of option on.
cassette (3rd). Emergency shutdown This error occurs when open the rear cover while printing.
Option connect error This error occurs when printer and optional cassette can not connect.

Confidential
NO PAPER ERROR  Troubleshooting

Step Check and measure Yes No
 Error name
1 Check the paper loading state Go to step 2 Reload the
 No paper error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920201) paper.
Check that the paper is correctly loaded in
 No paper error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920202) the cassette.
 No paper error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920203) 2 Check the paper detection sensor lever Go to step 3 Replace the
 No paper error (Paper Cassette (C4)) (Error code: 920204) Check that the paper detection sensor lever is paper
not damaged. detection
 No paper error (Rear tray) (Error code: 920205) sensor lever.
Is the result OK?
 Error occurrence condition 3 Check the paper detection sensor Replace the Replace the
 Occurs if there is determined to be no paper when printing is executed. Perform an individual action check and make main board paper
sure that there is no sensor output error. (If the trouble detection
 Trouble related parts and causes • A50 paper feed/paper ejection sensor - C1 is not sensor.
onwards resolved,
 Paper incorrectly loaded contact the
• A54 paper feed/paper ejection sensor - Rear
 Paper detection sensor failure ASF
service
support)
 Paper detection sensor lever failure

Confidential
NO CASSETTE ERROR COVER OPEN ERROR

 Error name  Error name
 No cassette (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920221)  Front cover open error (Error code: 920500)
 No cassette (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920222)  Rear cover open error (Error code: 920501)
 No cassette (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920223)  Rear cover open error (optional cassette) (Error code: 920502)
 No cassette (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920224)  Ink case open error (P1) (Error code: 920503)
 Error occurrence condition  Paper jam clear cover open error (Error code: 920527)
 Occurs if the specified paper cassette is determined to be not attached.  Error occurrence condition
 Trouble related parts and causes  Occurs if the corresponding cover is in an open state.
 Paper cassette incorrectly inserted  Trouble related parts and causes
 Paper cassette failure  Corresponding cover open state
 Paper cassette detection sensor failure  Corresponding cover damaged
 Troubleshooting  Corresponding cover open sensor failure

 Troubleshooting
1 Check the paper cassette insertion state Go to step 2 Reinsert Step Check and measure Yes No
Check that the paper cassette is correctly inserted. the paper
1 Close the cover Go to step 2 End
cassette.
Does the error occur when the front cover is in the
2 Check the paper cassette Go to step 3 Replace closed state?
Check that the paper cassette is not damaged. the paper
cassette. 2 Check the cover state Replace the Replace the
Check that the cover is not damaged. cover open cover.
3 Check the paper detection sensor Replace the Replace sensor.
Perform an individual action check and make sure main board the paper
that there is no sensor output error. (If the cassette
• A50 paper feed/paper ejection sensor - C1 trouble is detection
onwards not sensor.
resolved,
contact the
ASF
service
support))

Confidential
CASSETTE FAILURE ERROR M/B RECOGNITION ERROR

 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920401)  Maintenance box recognition error (read) (Error code: 920902)
 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920402)  Maintenance box recognition error (write) (Error code: 920903)
 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920403)  Error occurrence condition
 Cassette failure error (Paper Cassette (C4)) (Error code: 920404)  Occurs if the data written to CSIC of the maintenance box differs from
 Error occurrence condition normal or cannot be recognized.
 Occurs if lift up detection is not possible when the paper cassette is  Trouble related parts and causes
inserted due to a failure of the lift up sensor or lift up motor. (State in  Maintenance box attachment failure
which the operation of feeding from the corresponding cassette is not
 CSIC contact parts dirty (main unit side and maintenance box side)
performed.
* However, feeding and printing from the different cassettes is  Maintenance box CSIC defect
possible.  CSIC contact part failure
 Trouble related parts and causes  Troubleshooting
 Paper feed cassette hopper up mechanism failure Step Check and measure Yes No
 Lift gear train part damaged 1 Reattach the maintenance box Go to step 2 End
 Lift motor failure Does the error occur?
 Troubleshooting 2 Clean the CSIC contact parts Go to step 3 End

Clean the CSIC contact parts with a dust-free cloth.
Step Check and measure Yes No Does the error occur?
1 Check the paper cassette Go to step 2 Reconnect 3 Attach a new maintenance box Replace the End
Is the hopper up mechanism of the paper cassette the encoder Does the error occur? CSIC
damaged? cable. contact
Check the lift gear train parts parts.
2 Go to step 3 Replace the
The lift gear train parts must not be damaged or lift motor
become detached assembly.
3 Check the lift motor and lift encoder states Contact Replace the
Perform an individual action check and make sure service lift motor
that there is no sensor output error. support assembly.
• A50 paper feed/paper ejection sensor - C1
onwards
ASF

Confidential
INK RECOGNITION ERROR NOT FEEDING ERROR

 Ink recognition read error  Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920021)
• Black (Error code: 920621)  Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920022)
• Cyan (Error code: 920622)  Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920023)
• Magenta (Error code: 920623)
• Yellow (Error code: 920624)  Not feeding error (Paper Cassette (C4)) (Error code: 920024)
 Ink recognition write error  Not feeding error (Rear tray) (Error code: 920025)
• Black (Error code: 920641)  Error occurrence condition
• Cyan (Error code: 920642)
 Occurs if the paper did not reach the feed sensor when paper feeding
• Magenta (Error code: 920643)
• Yellow (Error code: 920644)
was executed.
 Error occurrence condition  Trouble related parts and causes
 Occurs if the data written to CSIC of the ink pack differs from normal  Caused by paper (paper type, paper bent, etc.)
or cannot be recognized.  Foreign object or paper jammed in paper feed path
 Trouble related parts and causes  Feed roller worn out
 Feed roller dirty
 Ink pack attachment failure
 Feed sensor lever operation defect or damage
 CSIC contact parts dirty (main unit side and maintenance box side)
 Feed sensor failure
 Ink pack CSIC failure
 CSIC contact part failure  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting Step Check and measure Yes No

1 Check for a foreign object and remaining Go to step 2 Remove the
jammed paper foreign object or
1 Reattach the ink pack Go to step 2 End Check that there is no foreign object or paper jammed paper.
Does the error occur? jam in the feed path.
2 Clean the CSIC contact parts Go to step 3 End 2 Check the paper feed operation using Go to step 3 Explain that the
Clean the CSIC contact parts with a dust-free cloth. genuine paper problem is caused
Does the error occur? Check the paper feed operation using genuine by the paper.
paper. Did the error occur?
3 Attach a new ink pack Replace the End
Does the error occur? CSIC 3 Check the feed roller state Go to step 4 Clean or replace
contact Check that the feed rollers are not dirty, the feed rollers.
parts. scratched, or damaged.

Confidential
Step Check and measure Yes No STACK COLLAPSED ERROR

4 Check the feed sensor lever operation Go to step 5 Reassemble or
Move the feed sensor lever by hand to check replace the feed  Error name
the operation and whether the lever is sensor lever.  Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C1)) (Error code: 920061)
damaged. There must be no lever operation
error or damage.  Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C2)) (Error code: 920062)
5 Check the feed sensor detection Contact Replace the feed  Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C3)) (Error code: 920063)
Check that the feed sensor detection operation service sensor.  Stack collapsed error (Paper Cassette (C4)) (Error code: 920064)
is performed correctly with “A40 All Sensor support
Check” of the individual action checks.  Error occurrence condition
 Occurs if separation of the paper with the separation roller could not be
performed well, so the second sheet is in a half fed state and in a
position different from the original paper feed start position.
 Trouble related parts and causes
 Caused by paper (paper type, paper bent, etc.)
 Feed roller worn out
 Feed roller dirty
 Cassette end guide position inappropriate
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the paper feed operation using genuine Clean or Explain that
paper replace the the problem
Check the paper feed operation using genuine feed rollers. is caused by
paper. the paper.
Did the error occur?

Confidential
6.2.1.1 Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details
procedure
Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details 000020 CR PID driving time error P. 168
procedure
000021 CR PID excess load error P. 169
100001 ADF PID excess speed detection P. 163
000022 CR PID excess speed error P. 169
100002 ADF PID reverse detection P. 164
000023 CR PID reverse error P. 169
100003 ADF PID lock detection P. 164
000024 CR PID lock error P. 169
100005 ADF PID excess load P. 164
000025 CR PID underspeed error P. 170
100006 ADF PID driving time P. 163
000027 CR PID excess load 2 error P. 169
100017 Contact detection distance exceeded P. 165
000030 CR load position driving time error P. 168
100033 ALD PID excess speed detection P. 163
000031 CR load position excess load error P. 169
100034 ALD PID reverse detection P. 164
000032 CR load position excess speed error P. 169
100035 ALD PID lock detection P. 164
000033 CR load position reverse error P. 169
100037 ALD PID excess load P. 164
000040 PF PID riving time error P. 171
100038 ALD PID driving time P. 164
000041 PF PID excess load error P. 172
100048 Scanner option error P. 166
000042 PF PID excess speed error P. 171
100050 MAIN-B ROM level mismatch error P. 166
Scanner 000043 PF PID reverse error P. 172
100053 Scanner illegal error P. 167
Printer 000044 PF PID lock error P. 172
100054 Paper jam error P. 168
000050 PF load position driving time error P. 171
100065 FB PID excess speed error detection P. 163
000051 PF load position excess load error P. 172
100066 FB PID reverse detection P. 164
000052 PF load position excess speed error P. 171
100067 FB PID lock detection P. 164
000053 PF load position reverse error P. 172
100069 FB PID excess load P. 164
000060 ASF PID driving time error P. 173
100070 FB PID driving time P. 164
000061 ASF PID excess load error P. 174
100073 FB BS+ excess sped detection P. 163
000062 ASF PID excess speed error P. 174
100074 FB BS+ reverse detection P. 164
000063 ASF PID reverse error P. 174
100075 FB BS+ lock detection P. 164
000064 ASF PID lock error P. 174
100077 FB BS+ excess load P. 164
000070 ASF load position driving time error P. 173
100078 FB BS+ driving time P. 164
000071 ASF load position excess load error P. 174
100094 Main-B board μSD recognition error P. 167
000072 ASF load position excess speed error P. 174
Match error between Main ROM and μSD
μSD(PDL) 205604 P. 198 000073 ASF load position reverse error P. 174
ROM (PDL Program)
000080 2nd ASF PID driving time error P. 179
000081 2nd ASF PID excess load error P. 180

Confidential
Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details Category Error code Error details
procedure procedure
000082 2nd ASF PID excess speed error P. 180 000543 ASF3 PID reverse error P. 180
000083 2nd ASF PID reverse error P. 180 000544 ASF3 PID lock error P. 180
000084 2nd ASF PID lock error P. 180 000550 ASF3 load position driving time error P. 179
000090 2nd ASF load position driving time error P. 179 000551 ASF3 load position excess load error P. 180
000091 2nd ASF load position excess load error P. 180 000552 ASF3 load position excess speed error P. 180
000092 2nd ASF load position excess speed error P. 180 000553 ASF3 load position reverse error P. 180
000093 2nd ASF load position reverse error P. 180 000560 ASF4 PID driving time error P. 179
000160 LFT1 PID driving time error P. 175 000561 ASF4 PID excess load error P. 180
000161 LFT1 PID excess load error P. 176 000562 ASF4 PID excess speed error P. 180
000162 LFT1 PID excess speed error P. 175 000563 ASF4 PID reverse error P. 180
000164 LFT1 PID lock error P. 176 000564 ASF4 PID lock error P. 180
000180 LFT2 PID driving time error P. 181 000570 ASF4 load position driving time error P. 179
000181 LFT2 PID excess load error P. 183 Printer 000571 ASF4 load position excess load error P. 180
000182 LFT2 PID excess speed error P. 182 000572 ASF4 load position excess speed error P. 180
000184 LFT2 PID lock error P. 183 000573 ASF4 load position reverse error P. 180
Printer 000200 LFT3 PID driving time error P. 181 030001 PE detector error P. 186
000201 LFT3 PID excess load error P. 183 030002 PW sensor light value adjust error P. 186
000202 LFT3 PID excess speed error P. 182 Emergency stop error caused by cover
030004 P. 187
000204 LFT3 PID lock error P. 183 opening
000220 LFT4 PID driving time error P. 181 031001 X-Hot detect error (pre printing) P. 184
000221 LFT4 PID excess load error P. 183 031002 X-Hot detect error (after flushing) P. 184
000222 LFT4 PID excess speed error P. 182 031003 Transistor temperature error P. 187
000224 LFT4 PID lock error P. 183 031004 Head temperature error P. 184
000480 PG PID driving time error P. 177 X-Hot detect error
031005 P. 184
(at ink replacement timing)
000481 PG PID excess load error P. 178
031006 Print head fuse blown error P. 184
000482 PG PID excess speed error P. 178
000483 PG PID reverse error P. 178
000484 PG PID lock error P. 178
000540 ASF3 PID driving time error P. 179
000541 ASF3 PID excess load error P. 180
000542 ASF3 PID excess speed error P. 180

Confidential
Table 6-3. Fatal Errors Table 6-3. Fatal Errors

Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Category Error code Error details Category Error code Error details
procedure procedure
Voltage not reduced as abnormal printing 034001 Home position seek error P. 193
031007 ---
temporary countermeasure error 034002 Deadlock avoidance P. 194
031008 VBS over-voltage error P. 185 034003 Impossible contact detection error P. 194
031011 HCS error P. 185 034008 Print error in non-print inspection mode ---
032001 Over adding connection error P. 188 034010 Motor runaway error P. 195
032002 Unsupported additional cassette connection error P. 188 034011 APG target position not reached error P. 195
032051 Addition setting state error 1 P. 189 034012 SMAP phase detection error P. 196
032052 Addition setting state error 2 P. 189 034016 PW detector failure error P. 196
032101 Addition recovery mode error P. 189 034017 PW sensor detected foreign object error P. 197
Printer
032151 Addition communication error 1 034018 3rd NIP release sensor failure error P. 197
032152 Addition communication error 2 Contact error at ink replacement timing
034500 ---
032153 Addition communication error 3 (power off)
032154 Addition communication error 4 034841 Ink leak error P. 198
032155 Addition communication error 5 060001 Error caused by other than printer device ---
Printer
032156 Addition communication error 6 Driver is not
P. 190 060002 Driver mismatch error
032157 Addition communication error 7 supported
032158 Addition communication error 8 060003 Error due to PCD verify command Main board failure
032159 Addition communication error 9 060008 PDL SOC version mismatch error ---
032160 Addition communication error 10 202620 Wi-Fi Board failure 1. Check
202623 NFC Board failure connection of
032161 Addition communication error 11
target part
032162 Addition communication error 12 203002 Optical touch panel failure
2. Replace target
033001 CRCM fuse blown error P. 191 System part
error 203201 PDL Board failure
033002 ASIC access error P. 191 3. Replace the
033003 CS rank setting out of range error --- main board
033004 Fatal error when sending SC P. 192 Other than the An abnormality has occurred in the Contact service
above firmware. support.
033006 Read parity error P. 192
033007 Write parity error P. 192
033008 Access inconsistency error ---

Confidential
C H E C K  Even if a fatal error occurs, the screen display may ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_1
P O IN T become a paper jam error. In this case, the fatal error
 Error name
generation history remains.
 ADF PID excess speed detection (error code: 100001)
The error codes 300000 to 399999 are error codes for
firmware failure analysis that occur when a process or  ALD PID excess speed detection (error code: 100033)
operation not assumed in design is performed in a process  FB PID excess speed detection (error code: 100065)
inside the firmware program. If this error occurs after  FB BS+ excess speed detection (error code: 100073)
restarting the product, or if the error tends to occur  Cause
frequently, it is necessary to check the user usage status,
collect firmware version, internal log, and other information. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
Contact EPSON Local Service Representatives.  Suspected cause
 Encoder cable disconnected
 ADF/SCN unit failure (motor driver failure)
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the connection state of the encoder cable Replace the Reconnect
Is the cable of the corresponding encoder correctly ADF/SCN the encoder
connected to the SCN main board? (CN30, CN31, unit. cable.
and CN32)

Confidential
ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 ADF PID excess time (error code: 100006)  ADF PID reverse detection (error code: 100002)
 ALD PID excess time (error code: 100038)  ADF PID lock detection (error code: 100003)
 FB PID excess time (error code: 100070)  ADF PID excess load (error code: 100005)
 FB BS+ excess time (error code: 100078)  ALD PID reverse detection (error code: 100034)
 Cause  ALD PID lock detection (error code: 100035)
 ALD PID excess load (error code:100037)
The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 FB PID reverse detection (error code: 100066)
 Suspected cause  FB PID lock detection (error code: 100067)
ADF/SCN unit failure (SCN main board failure)  FB PID excess load (error code: 100069)
 Troubleshooting  FB BS+ reverse detection (error code: 100074)
 FB BS+ lock detection (error code: 100075)
 FB BS+ excess load (error code: 100077)
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Not reproducible
Did the corresponding error occur? ADF/SCN (contact service  Cause
unit. supportservice  The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
supportservice
support)  When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
direction in reaction to it)
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does
not rotate at all
 Suspected cause
 Foreign object or jammed paper remaining
 Motor cable disconnected
 ADF/SCN unit failure (main board failure, drive part damaged)

Confidential
 Troubleshooting ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_4

 Error name
1 Check for a foreign object and jammed paper Go to step 2 Remove the
remaining foreign
 Contact detection distance exceeded (error code: 100017)
Check that there is no foreign object or paper jam object or  Cause
remaining in the document feed path. jammed
paper. Occurs if the SCN CIS module cannot correctly detect the origin position
2 Check the connection state of the motor cable Replace the Reconnect during the initial operation.
Is the corresponding motor cable correctly ADF/SCN the motor
connected to the SCN main board? (CN20, CN21, unit. cable.  Suspected cause
and CN22)  SCN CIS module FFC disconnected
 ADF/SCN unit failure (SCN unit failure)
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the connection state of the SCN CIS Replace the Reconnect
module FFC ADF/SCN the SCN
Is the SCN CIS module correctly connected to the unit. CIS module
SCN main board? (CN462 and CN463) FFC.

Confidential

 MAIN-B connection error (error code: 100048)  MAIN-B ROM level mismatch error (error code: 100017)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if communication is not possible between the SCN main board and Occurs if the main unit firmware and SCN firmware versions do not match.
main unit main board.
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause  Main unit firmware and SCN firmware version mismatch
 Faulty connection between SCN main board and main unit main board  Troubleshooting
(cable disconnected or broken)
 Update the firmware to match the main unit firmware and SCN
 ADF/SCN unit failure (SCN main board failure)
firmware versions.
 Main board failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the cable connection state Go to step 2 Reconnect
Are the 2 cables connected correctly between the or replace
SCN main board and main unit main board? the cables.
Furthermore, there must be no damage.
(SCN main board: CN432, CN458)
(Main unit main board: CN103, CN104)
2 Reinstall and check the ADF/SCN unit Replace the Replace the
Reinstall the ADF/SCN unit and check whether or main unit ADF/SCN
not the error occurs. Did the error occur? main board. unit.

Confidential

 Main-B board μSD recognition error (error code: 100094)  Scanner illegal error (error code: 100053)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if the μSD on the SCN board cannot be recognized. Occurs if enter a state that is not logically possible. (Does not occur
normally.)
 Suspected cause
 μSD disconnected  Suspected cause
 μSD failure  Entered a state that is not logically possible. (Not part failure, etc.)
 ADF/SCN unit failure (SCN main board failure)  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting  Turn the power off and then back on.
1 Check the μSD attachment state Go to step 2 Reattach the
Is the μSD attached correctly? μSD.
2 Check the operation after reinserting the μSD Replace the Replace the
Reinstall the μSD and check whether or not the ADF/SCN μSD.
error occurs. Did the error occur? unit.

Confidential
ADF/SCN RELATED FATAL ERROR_9 CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

 Paper jam error (error code: 100054)  CR PID driving time error (error code: 000020)
 Cause  CR load position driving time error (error code: 000030)
Occurs if a paper jam occurred in the document feed path of the ADF.  Cause
 Suspected cause The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Paper jam or foreign object  Suspected cause

 Troubleshooting  Main board failure
 Remove the jammed paper or foreign object.  Troubleshooting
Step Check and Measure Yes No
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
Did the corresponding error occur? main board service support

Confidential
CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 CR PID excess speed error (error code: 000022)  CR PID excess load error (error code: 000021)
 CR load position excess speed error (error code: 000032)  CR PID reverse error (error code: 000023)
 Cause  CR PID lock error (error code: 000024)
 CR PID excess load2 error (error code: 000027)
State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 CR load position excess load error (error code: 000031)
 Suspected cause  CR load position reverse error (error code: 000033)
 CR timing belt detached or broken
 Cause
 Motor failure
 State in which load of CR motor exceeds expected load
 When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
 Troubleshooting (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
direction in reaction to it)
1 Check the CR timing belt Replace the Reattach the CR
following parts in timing belt
not rotate at all
Is the timing belt detached or broken?
sequence or  Suspected cause
• CR motor Replace the CR
 Paper jam paper remaining
• Main board timing belt
(If the trouble is  Foreign object remaining
not resolved,  CR lock lever failure (Maintenance Unit failure)
inquire at service
support)  CR main shaft lubrication shortage
 PG error
 CR encoder failure
 CR motor failure
 Motor driver failure/main board failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting CR RELATED FATAL ERROR_4

 Error name
1 Check for paper jam paper Go to step 2 Remove the paper jam
remaining and foreign object paper and foreign
 CR PID underspeed error (error code: 000025)
There is no paper jam paper and object  Cause
foreign object in the CR scanning
section. When lower than the expected speed is detected
2 Check the CR lock lever operation Go to step 4 Go to step 3
 Suspected cause
Does the CR lock lever operate
correctly when the power is on?  Paper jam paper remaining
(Is the lowering operation performed  Foreign object remaining
correctly?)
 Troubleshooting
3 Check the CR lock lever gear train Go to step 4 Check the gear train of
Check the operation of the CR lock the CR lock Step Check and Measure Yes No
lever. Is the CR lock lever gear train or
damaged? 1 Check for paper jam paper Go to step 2 Remove the paper
Replace the
remaining jam paper
Maintenance Unit
There is no paper jam paper in the CR
4 Check the status of the CR main Go to step 5 Lubricate the CR main scanning section.
shaft shaft
2 Check for foreign object Inquire at service Remover the
Is the CR main shaft dirty from paper
There is no foreign object in the CR support foreign object
dust or mist? Is a lubrication shortage
occurring? scanning section.
5 Check the PG Go to step 6 Adjust the PG

Is the PG value the standard value?
Are the CR unit and platen in contact?
6 Check the CR operation Main board <When in runaway
Turn on the power and check the CR (If the trouble condition>
operation. is not resolved, Replace the CR
Is the CR operating normally? inquire at encoder (replace the
(Is it not in runaway condition? Is it service CR unit)
operating?) support) <When not operating>
Replace the CR motor

Confidential
PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 PF PID riving time error (error code: 000040)  PF PID excess speed error (error code: 000042)
 PF load position driving time error (error code: 000050)  PF load position excess speed error (error code: 000052)
 Cause  Cause
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time. State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.
 Suspected cause  Suspected cause
 Main board failure  PF timing belt detached or broken
 Troubleshooting  PF gear train part damaged
 Motor failure
1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
Did the corresponding error occur? main board service  Troubleshooting
support
1 Check the PF timing belt Go to step 2 Reattach the PF
Is the PF timing belt detached or not timing belt
broken? or
Replace the PF
timing belt
2 Check the PF gear train parts Replace the Replace the
Are the PF related gears damaged? following parts in damaged part
Also, is the gear train in the correct sequence
state? • CR motor
• Main board
(If the trouble is
not resolved,
inquire at service
support)

Confidential
PF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
Advance Check the stacker attachment state Go to advance Reattach the
 PF PID excess load error (error code: 000041) check 1 check 2 stacker
Is the stacker attached correctly?
 PF PID reverse error (error code: 000043)
Advance Check for paper jam paper remaining Go to advance Remove the
 PF PID lock error (error code: 000044) check 2 and foreign object check 3 paper jam
 PF load position excess load error (error code: 000051) There is no paper jam paper or foreign paper and
object remaining in the paper feed path. foreign object
 PF load position reverse error (error code: 000053)
Advance Check the timing of error occurrence Go to step 3 Go to step 1
 Cause check 3 At what timing does the error occur with
 State in which load of PF motor exceeds expected load the product? Does it occur when the power
is turned on?
1 Check the operation of the feed roller Go to step 2 Replace the
(There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite (upper paper guide) upper paper
direction in reaction to it) The feed roller is not damaged or worn out. guide.
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does Also, is it operating normally? (Does the
not rotate at all roller rotate?)
2 Check for damaged or broken part in Go to step 3 Remove the
 Suspected cause the paper feed path foreign object
 Stacker incorrectly set There is no damaged or broken part in the or
paper feed path. (There is nothing Replace the
 Paper jam paper remaining
hindering paper feeding.) damaged part
 Paper path damaged and feed roller worn out
 Gears locking due to foreign object
 PF gear train part damaged
 Maintenance Unit failure
 PF encoder failure
 PF motor failure

Confidential
Step Check and Measure Yes No ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

3 Perform PF motor operation check 1 Go to step 5 Go to step 4
Turn on the power and check the PF motor
 Error name
operation. Did the PF motor operate (rotate)?  ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000060)
4 Check the PF drive transmission gears Replace the PF Remove the  ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000070)
Are the PF drive transmission gears damaged? motor foreign object
Also, is there locking due to foreign object? assembly or  Cause
[Check points] (If the trouble Replace the
is not resolved,
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
1. Drive transmission gears in the vicinity damaged part
replace the
of the PF motor  Suspected cause
main board)
2. Maintenance Unit drive gears
5 Perform PF motor operation check 2 Replace the main Replace the PF
Is the PF motor operating abnormally? board encoder  Troubleshooting
(If the trouble is
not resolved,
inquire at service 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
support) Did the corresponding error occur? main board service
support

Confidential
ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000062)  ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000061)
 ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000072)  ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000063)
 Cause  ASF PID lock error (error code: 000064)
 ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000071)
 ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000073)
 Suspected cause
 Cause
 ASF gear train part damaged
 State in which load of ASF motor exceeds expected load
 ASF motor encoder failure
 Motor driver failure/main board failure (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
 Troubleshooting direction in reaction to it)
not rotate at all
1 Check the ASF gear train parts Replace the Reassemble the
Has an ASF gear train part dropped following parts in ASF gear train  Suspected cause
off or become detached? sequence parts.  Jammed paper remaining
• ASF motor
assembly  Paper path damaged and conveyance roller worn out
• Main Board  Gears locking due to foreign object
(If the trouble is not  Locked because ASF gear train part failure
resolved, inquire at
service support)  ASF motor encoder failure
 PF motor failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

 Error name
Aadvance Check for jammed paper remaining Go to advance Remove the
check 1 and foreign object check 2 jammed paper
 LFT1 PID driving time error (error code: 000160)
There is no jammed paper or foreign and foreign  Cause
object remaining in the paper feed path. object
Advance Check the timing of error occurrence Go to step 2 Go to step 1
The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
check 2 At what timing does the error occur with  Suspected cause
the product? Does it occur when the power
is turned on?  Main board failure
1 Check the feed roller and conveyance Go to step 2 Replace the  Troubleshooting
roller state feed roller.
A conveyance roller is not damaged or or Step Check and measure Yes No
worn out. Replace the Check the reproducibility
1 Replace the Inquire at
intermediate Did the corresponding error occur? main board service support
roller (duplex
print unit)
2 Check the ASF motor operation_1 Go to step 4 Go to step 3
Turn on the power and check the ASF
motor operation. Did the ASF motor
operate (rotate)?
3 Check the ASF gear train parts Replace the Remove the
Check that there is no damage to or ASF motor foreign object
foreign object on the ASF gear train parts. assembly. or
(If the trouble Replace the
is not ASF motor
resolved, assembly.
replace the
main board)
4 Check the ASF motor operation_2 Replace the Replace the
Is the PF motor operating abnormally? main board ASF motor
(If the trouble encoder.
is not
resolved,
inquire at
service
support)

Confidential
LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 LFT PID excess speed error (error code: 000162)  LFT1 PID excess load error (error code: 000161)
 Cause  LFT1 PID lock error (error code: 000164)
State in which driven at unexpected speed (fast) for control.  Cause

 The load became unexpectedly high with hopper lift driving.
 Suspected cause
 Lift gear train part damaged not rotate at all
 Lift motor encoder failure
 Suspected cause
 Paper incorrectly loaded or number of sheets loaded exceeds
 Troubleshooting maximum
Step Check and measure Yes No  Foreign object in paper cassette
1 Check the lift gear train parts Replace the main Reassemble the lift  Paper cassette failure
Has a lift gear train part dropped off or board gear train parts.  Damage to or foreign object trapped in lift gear train parts
become detached? (If the trouble is or
 Lift phase sensor failure
not resolved, Replace the lift
inquire at service motor assembly.  Lift motor failure
support)  Main board failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting APG RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

 Error name
1 Check the paper cassette_1 Go to step 2 Reduce the
number of sheets
 PG PID driving time error (error code: 000480)
Check that there is no foreign object in the
paper cassette and that more than the of paper loaded.  Cause
maximum number of sheets of paper is not or
loaded. Furthermore, is the paper loaded Remove the The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
correctly? foreign object
 Suspected cause
2 Check the paper cassette_2 Go to step 3 Replace the
Has the paper cassette failed? Is the hopper paper cassette.  Main board failure
mechanism of the paper cassette operating
 Troubleshooting
correctly?
3 Check the lift gear train parts Replace the Remove the Step Check and measure Yes No
Check the ASF gear train parts to make main board foreign object 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
sure that there is no foreign object on or (If the trouble or Did the corresponding error occur? main board service support
damage to them. is not resolved, Replace the lift
inquire at motor assembly.
service
support)

Confidential
APG RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 APG RELATED FATAL ERROR_3

 PG PID excess speed error (error code: 000482)  PG PID excess load error (error code: 000481)
 Cause  PG PID reverse error (error code: 000483)
 PG PID lock error (error code: 000484)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load
 APG gear train part damaged
 APG failure (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
 Main board failure direction in reaction to it)
 Troubleshooting  State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does
not rotate at all
 Suspected cause
1 Check the APG gear train parts Replace the Reassemble the
Has an APG gear train part dropped following parts in APG gear train  Disconnect APG Motor Sensor/APG Motor cable
off or become detached? sequence parts.  APG gear phase shift
• APG motor or
assembly  Gears locking due to foreign object
Replace the APG
• Main Board drive assembly  APG phase sensor or APG motor encoder failure
(If the trouble is  Damage to or foreign object trapped in lift gear train parts
not resolved,
inquire at service  APG gear train part damaged
support)  APG motor failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

 Error name
1 Check the APG Motor Sensor/APG Go to step 2 Connect the
Motor cable cable.
 2nd ASF PID driving time error (error code: 000080)
Check that the APG Motor Sensor/APG  2nd ASF load position driving time error (error code: 000090)
Motor Cable is not disconnect.  ASF3 PID driving time error (error code: 000540)
2 Check the APG motor operation Go to step 3 Replace the  ASF3 load position driving time error (error code: 000550)
Turn on the power and check the APG APG motor
motor operation. Did the APG motor assembly.  ASF4 PID driving time error (error code: 000560)
operate?  ASF4 load position driving time error (error code: 000570)
3 Check the APG motor sensor state Go to step 4 Replace the
 Cause
Did the APG motor operate abnormally APG motor
(runaway) when the power was turned on? sensor. The drive time of the motor exceeded the set time.
4 Check the APG gear phase Go to step 5 Match the APG
Is the APG gear phase correct? gear phase.  Suspected cause
5 Check the APG gear train parts Replace the Remove the  Additional main board failure
Check the APG gear train parts to make main board foreign object  Troubleshooting
sure that there is no foreign object on or (If the trouble is or
damage to them. not resolved, Replace the Step Check and measure Yes No
inquire at APG drive 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
service support) assembly or
Did the corresponding error occur? main board service
APG motor support
assembly.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_2 ADDITIONAL ASF RELATED FATAL ERROR_3
 2nd ASF PID excess speed error (error code: 000082)  2nd ASF PID excess load error (error code: 000081)
 2nd ASF load position excess speed error (error code: 000092)  2nd ASF PID reverse error (error code: 000083)
 ASF3 PID excess speed error (error code: 000542)  2nd ASF PID lock error (error code: 000084)
 ASF3 load position excess speed error (error code: 000552)  2nd ASF load position excess load error (error code: 000091)
 ASF4 PID excess speed error (error code: 000562)  2nd ASF load position reverse error (error code: 000093)
 ASF4 load position excess speed error (error code: 000572)  ASF3 PID excess load error (error code: 000541)
 Cause  ASF3 PID reverse error (error code: 000543)
 ASF3 PID lock error (error code: 000544)
 ASF3 load position excess load error (error code: 000551)
 Suspected cause  ASF3 load position reverse error (error code: 000553)
 Additional ASF gear train detached or damaged  ASF4 PID excess load error (error code: 000561)
 Motor failure  ASF4 PID reverse error (error code: 000563)
 Main board failure  ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000564)
 Troubleshooting  ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000565)
 ASF4 PID lock error (error code: 000566)
1 Check the additional ASF gear Replace the Reassemble the  Cause
train parts additional board additional ASF  State in which load of additional ASF motor exceeds expected load
Has an additional ASF gear train part unit. gear train parts.
dropped off or become detached? (If the trouble is  When rotated in the opposite direction to rotation direction
not resolved, (There was a sudden load error, and the motor rotated in the opposite
inquire at service direction in reaction to it)
support)
not rotate at all

Confidential
 Suspected cause ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_1

 Jammed paper remaining
 Error name
 Additional ASF motor encoder failure
 Paper path damaged and conveyance roller worn out
 Gears locking due to foreign object
 Locked because additional ASF gear train part failure
 Additional ASF motor failure  Cause
 Motor driver failure/additional main board failure The driving time of the motor exceeded the set time.
 Troubleshooting  Suspected cause
Step Check and measure Yes No  Additional main board failure
1 Check for jammed paper remaining Go to step 2 Remove the  Troubleshooting
There is no jammed paper remaining in the jammed paper.
paper feed path. Step Check and measure Yes No
2 Check the sensor state Go to step 3 Replace the 1 Check the reproducibility Replace the Inquire at
Turn on the power of the product and check additional ASF Did the corresponding error occur? additional service support
the feed operation. Check that the additional motor encoder. main board.
ASF motor does not operate abnormally.
3 Check the paper feed path and Go to step 4 Replace the
conveyance roller. conveyance
A conveyance roller is not damaged or worn roller.
out. Also, is it operating normally?
4 Check the 2nd ASF gear train parts Replace the Replace the
Check the ASF gear train parts to make sure main board damaged part
that there is no foreign object on or damage (If the trouble
to them. is not resolved,
inquire at
service support)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 Error name
 LFT2 PID excess speed error (error code: 000182)
 Cause
 Suspected cause
 Additional lift gear train detached or damaged
 Lift motor encoder failure
 Additional main board failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the additional lift gear train Replace the Reassemble the
parts additional board additional lift gear
Has an additional lift gear train part unit. train parts.
dropped off or become detached? (If the trouble is
not resolved,
inquire at service
support)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL LIFT RELATED FATAL ERROR_3  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Check the paper cassette_1 Go to step 2 Reduce the
 LFT2 PID excess load error (error code: 000181) number of
Check that there is no foreign object in the
 LFT2 PID lock error (error code: 000184) paper cassette and that more than the sheets of paper
maximum number of sheets of paper is not loaded.
 LFT3 PID excess load error (error code: 000201)
loaded. Furthermore, is the paper loaded or
 LFT3 PID lock error (error code: 000204) correctly? Remove the
 LFT4 PID excess load error (error code: 000221) foreign object
 LFT4 PID lock error (error code: 000224) 2 Check the paper cassette_2 Go to step 3 Replace the
Has the paper cassette failed? Is the hopper paper cassette.
 Cause mechanism of the paper cassette operating
 The load became unexpectedly high with additional hopper lift driving. correctly?
 State in which load of motor exceeds expected load, and motor does 3 Check the lift gear train parts Replace the Remove the
Check the ASF gear train parts to make additional main foreign object
not rotate at all
sure that there is no foreign object on them. board unit.
 Suspected cause (If the trouble is
not resolved,
 Paper incorrectly loaded or number of sheets loaded exceeds inquire at
maximum service support)
 Foreign object in paper cassette
 Damage to or foreign object trapped in additional lift gear train parts
 Additional lift phase sensor failure
 Additional lift motor failure
 Additional main board failure

Confidential
HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 X-Hot detect error (pre printing) (error code: 031001)  Print head fuse blown error (error code: 031006)
 X-Hot detect error (after flushing) (error code: 031003)  Cause
 Head temperature error (error code: 031004)
Occurs if the print head fuse has blown.
 X-Hot detect error (at ink replacementtiming) (error code: 031005)
 Suspected cause
 Cause
 Print head failure
Occurs if the head temperature exceeds a set temperature.
 Head FFC inserted slanted
 Suspected cause  Head FFC damaged
 Head FFC inserted slanted  Main board failure
 Print head failure  Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No 1 Check the head FFC connection state Go to step 2 Reassemble
1 Check the head FFC connection state Replace the Reassemble Check that the head FFC is not inserted slanted.
Check that the head FFC is not inserted slanted. print head 2 Check the head FFC state Go to step 3 Replace the
Check the head FFC state to make sure that the FFC head FFC.
is not damaged. (Head FFC connection part has
come off, FFC disconnected, etc.)
3 Check the main board fuse Replace the Replace the
Check that the head fuse (F701) on the main board print head main board
has not blown. (If the (If the
trouble is trouble is
not not
resolved, resolved,
also replace also replace
the main the print
board.) head.)

Confidential
HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_3 HEAD RELATED FATAL ERROR_4

 VBS over-voltage error (error code: 031008)  HCS error (error code: 031011)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs when an abnormal voltage is applied to the head drive circuit. Occurs if communication is not possible between the print head and main
unit.
 Suspected cause
 Print head failure  Suspected cause
 Main board failure  Print head failure
 Head FFC inserted slanted  Head FFC damaged
 Troubleshooting  Main board failure
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the head FFC state Replace the following parts in Replace the Step Check and measure Yes No
Check the head FFC state to sequence head FFC. 1 Check the head FFC state Replace the following parts in Replace the
make sure that the FFC is not • Print Head Check the head FFC state to sequence head FFC.
damaged. (Head FFC • Main Board make sure that the FFC is not • Print Head
connection part has come off, damaged. (Head FFC
(If the trouble is not resolved, also • Main Board
FFC disconnected, etc.) connection part has come off,
replace the head FFC. If the (If the trouble is not resolved, also
trouble is still not resolved, FFC disconnected, etc.) replace the head FFC. If the
contact service support.) trouble is still not resolved,
contact service support.)

Confidential
PE DETECTOR ERROR (ERROR CODE: 030001) PW SENSOR LIGHT VALUE ADJUST ERROR
(ERROR CODE:030002)
 Cause
 Cause
Occurs when PE detection can not be performed correctly due to failure
of PE sensor etc. Occurs when the paper presence can not be detected even if the maximum
light emission amount is increased in the adjustment of the light emission
 Suspected cause amount.
 PE sensor failure
 Suspected cause
 PW sensor failure
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No  Troubleshooting
1 Check the PE sensor cable connection state. Go to step2 Reassemble
Check that the PE sensor cable is properly Step Check and measure Yes No
connected. 1 Check the PW Sensor FFC connection state. Go to step2 Reassemble
2 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the Replace the Check that the PW sensor FFC is properly
Main Board. PE sensor. Main board. connected.
Replace main board with normal product and check 2 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the Replace the
operation. Main Board. PW sensor. Main board.
Did the error occur? Replace main board with normal product and check
operation.

Confidential
EMERGENCY STOP ERROR CAUSED BY COVER OPENING TRANSISTOR TEMPERATURE ERROR (ERROR CODE: 031003)
(ERROR CODE: 030004)
 Cause
 Error name
Occurs if an FET of the main board or head drive circuit exceeds a set
Occurs if the rear cover is opened during motor driving. temperature.
(Although the fatal error occurrence history is recorded to the main unit,
the main unit display indicates a paper jam error)  Suspected cause
 Cause
 Rear cover opened during motor driving
 Troubleshooting
 Rear cover open sensor failure
1 Did the corresponding error occur Replace the following End
Step Check and measure Yes No after the power was turned off and parts in sequence
1 Turn the power off and then back on. Replace the End then back on? • Print Head
Did the corresponding error occur after the power rear cover Turn the power off and then leave the • Main Board
was turned off and then back on? Does an open open sensor. product for a while. Did the error occur (If the trouble is not
error occur while the rear cover is in the closed when the power was turned back on?
resolved, contact
state? service support.)

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_1 ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_2

 Over-adding connection error (error code: 032001)  Unsupported additional cassette connection error (error code: 032002)
 Cause  Cause
State in which more than four additional cassettes connected  Occurs when an unsupported additional cassette is connected.
 More than the maximum number of additional cassettes connected  Unsupported additional cassette connected
 Troubleshooting  Troubleshooting
 Install within the specified number of additional cassettes.  Use supported additional cassettes.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_CONNECTION RELATED FATAL ERROR_3 ADDITIONAL CASSETTE RECOVERY MODE ERROR

(ERROR CODE:032101)
 Error name
 Cause
 Additional setting state error 1 (Error code: 032051)
 Additional setting state error 2 (Error code: 032052) Occurs when the recovery mode is entered due to a failure of the firmware
update of the additional cassette.
 Cause
 Suspected cause
Occurs when the condition that the connection terminal seems to be
defective connection is detected at the main unit and additional cassette  Additional cassette firmware update is failure
connection section.  Troubleshooting
 Suspected cause Step Check and measure Yes No
 Additional cassette installation failure 1 Re-update the firmware. Replace the End
 Foreign object (in connection part) Re-update the firmware in the error occurring state. additional
Did the error occur after updating the firmware? cassette
 Additional cassette connection part failure main board.
 Additional cassette main board failure (Update the
firmware
 Troubleshooting after
replacing
Step Check and measure Yes No the
1 Check the Additional Cassette installation state Go to step 2 Reassemble additional
Check that the Additional Cassette is properly the cassette
installed. Additional main board)
cassette
2 Check the foreign material in connection part Go to step 3 Remove the
Check that there is no foreign object trapped in the foreign
contact point between the main unit and the object from
extension cassette connection
part.
3 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the End
Connection part of additional cassette additional
Replace the connection part of additional cassette cassette
with normal product and check operation. main board.

Confidential
ADDITIONAL_COMMUNICATION RELATED FATAL ERROR  Troubleshooting

 Error name
1 Did the corresponding error occur after the Go to step 2 End
 Addition communication error 1 (Error code:032151) power was turned off and then back on?
 Addition communication error 2 (Error code:032152) Turn the power off and then leave the product for a
 Addition communication error 3 (Error code: 032153) while. Did the error occur when the power was
turned back on?
 Addition communication error 4 (Error code: 032154)
2 Check the operation after reinstalling the Go to step 3 Replace the
 Addition communication error 5 (Error code: 032155) additional cassette main board.
 Addition communication error 6 (Error code: 032156) Replace the additional cassette with normal product
and check operation.
3 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the End
 Addition communication error 9 (Error code: 032159) Connection part of additional cassette additional
 Addition communication error 10 (Error code: 032160) Replace the connection part of additional cassette cassette
with normal product and check operation. main board.
 Cause
 Communication data abnormality due to noise etc.
 Occurs when changing the number of stages of additional cassettes
while the power is on.
 Suspected cause
 Additional cassette connection part failure.
 Additional cassette main board failure.
 Main board failure.

Confidential
CRCM FUSE BLOWN ERROR (ERROR CODE:033001) ASIC ACCESS ERROR (ERROR CODE: 033002)
 Cause  Cause
CRCM fuse is blown Occurs if the CS rank setting value is not supported.
 CRCM FFC inserted slanted  PCD setting data is not set correctly or is damaged.
 CRCM FFC failure  Troubleshooting
Contact service support. (Rewriting of PCD data is required.)
CRCM FFC
Right side RIPS side
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the CRCM FFC connection state. Go to step 2 Reassemble
Check that the PE sensor cable is properly
connected.
2 Check the CRCM FFC state Replace the Replace the
Check the CRCM FFC state to make sure that the main board CRCM FFC
FFC is not damaged. (CRCM FFC connection part
has come off, FFC disconnected, etc.)

Confidential
FATAL ERROR WHEN SENDING SC (ERROR CODE: 033004) CRCM RELATED FATAL ERROR
 Cause  Error name
Occurs if SC sending fails.  Read parity error (error code: 033006)
 Write parity error (error code: 033007)
 Suspected cause
 Cause
 Main board failure (SOC abnormal operation on board)
 Troubleshooting Communication error when reading/writing data from the CRCM
Replace the main board  Suspected cause

 CRCM FFC detached
 CRCM FFC disconnected/damaged
 CRCM board failure
CRCM FFC
Right side RIPS side
 Troubleshooting

Confidential
Step Check and measure Yes No HOME POSITION SEEK ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034001)
1 Check the connection state of the Go to step 2 Reconnect the
CRCM FFC FFC.
 Cause
Check that the FFC between the Occurs if the home position seek failed.
main board and CRCM board is
connected correctly.  Suspected cause
2 Check whether the CRCM FFC is Go to step 3 Replace the  Paper jam or foreign object (in CR operation area)
disconnected/damaged CRCM FFC.
Check that there is no disconnection  CR lock lever failure (Maintenance Unit failure)
between the main board and CRCM  Ink System gear train damaged
and that the connector parts are not
bent up.  Troubleshooting
3 Check the operation after Replace the main board Replace the Step Check and measure Yes No
reinstalling the CRCM board CRCM FFC.
1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
Reinstall the CRCM board and
check whether or not the error Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object in jammed
occurs. the CR operation area. paper and
foreign
object
2 Check the CR lock lever operation Contact Replace the
Turn on the power and check that the CR lock lever service Ink System
is operating. support.

Confidential
DEADLOCK AVOIDANCE IMPOSSIBLE (ERROR CODE: 034002) IMPOSSIBLE CONTACT DETECTION ERROR (ERROR CODE:
034003)
 Cause
 Cause
Occurs when cannot return because state of the lock lever and CR
interference. Contact detection is not possible even when CR performs specified step
movement.
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause
 Paper jam or foreign object (in CR scanning area)
 CR lock lever failure (Maintenance Unit failure)  Paper jam or foreign object (in CR operation area)
 Ink System gear train damaged  CR lock lever failure
 Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting
1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
Check that there is no paper jam or foreign object in jammed 1 Check for paper jam and foreign object Go to step 2 Remove the
the CR operation area. paper and Check that there is no paper jam or foreign jammed paper
foreign object in the CR operation area. and foreign
object object
2 Check the CR lock lever operation Contact Replace the 2 Check the CR lock lever operation Replace the Replace the Ink
Turn on the power and check that the CR lock lever service Ink System Turn on the power and check that the CR main board System
is operating. support lock lever is operating. (If the trouble is
not resolved,
contact service
support.)

Confidential
MOTOR RUNAWAY ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034010) APG TARGET POSITION NOT REACHED ERROR
(ERROR CODE:034011)
 Cause
 Cause
Occurs when state of motor being driven even though a voltage is not
applied to the motor. Even if the APG reset operation is performed, it occurs when the home can
not be detected and the position becomes unknown
 Suspected cause
 Suspected cause
 APG phase sensor failure
 Troubleshooting
 Replace the main board
 Troubleshooting
1 Check the APG phase sensor state Replace the Replace the
Perform the ”Individual action check main board APG phase
(A56 APG Sensor check)”, and check the sensor
sensor state.
Is the sensor normal?

Confidential
SMAP PHASE DETECTION ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034012) PW DETECTOR FAILURE ERROR (ERROR CODE: 034016)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs if sensor detection was not possible when PF roller rotation phase Occurs when the output of the PW sensor is in a state lower than the
detection driving performed. prescribed condition and reflected light can not be obtained as expected.
 SMAP phase sensor failure  PW Shutter Solenoid failure
 Rotation member (flap) for detection damaged  PW Shutter failure
 Main board failure  PW sensor failure
 Troubleshooting  main board failure
 Dirt on reflection face of Platen.
1 Check the rotation member (flap) Replace the following Repair
 Troubleshooting
for detection parts in sequence impossible
Check that the rotation member • SMAP phase sensor (Contact
(flap) for detection is not damaged. service 1 Check the reflection face of platen. Go to step 2 Clean the
• Main Board
support.) Check that dirt does not adhere to the reflection face
(If the trouble is not of platen.
reflection face of platen.
resolved, contact service
support.) 2 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 3 Replace the PW
Solenoid Drive Shutter.
Perform “Individual action check (A30 PW
Sensor Shutter Solenoid)”, and check the
Solenoid State.
Is the Solenoid operation normal?
3 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 4 Replace the CR
Perform “Individual action check (A55 PW Unit.
Sensor Check)”, and check the PW shutter
operation.
Is the PW Shutter operation is normal?
4 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the PW Replace the
Main board Sensor. main board.
Replace the main board with normal
product and check operation.

Confidential
PW SENSOR DETECTED FOREIGN OBJECT ERROR 3RD NIP RELEASE SENSOR FAILURE ERROR
(ERROR CODE:034017) (ERROR CODE: 034018)
 Cause  Cause
Occurs when the output of the PW sensor is in a state lower than the Intermediate NIP Release sensor failure or Intermediate Release Solenoid
prescribed condition and reflected light can not be obtained as expected. failure.
 PW Shutter Solenoid failure  Intermediate NIP Release sensor failure
 PW Shutter failure  Intermediate Release Solenoid failure
 PW sensor failure  Main board failure
 Main board failure  Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure Yes No 1 Check the Intermediate Release Solenoid Go to step 2 Replace the
and Intermediate NIP release sensor_1 Intermediate
1 Check the reflection face of platen. Go to step 2 Clean the
Perform “Individual action check (A32 Nip release
Check that dirt does not adhere to the reflection face
Release Solenoid / Sensor)”. solenoid.
reflection face of platen. of platen.
Did you hear of the solenoid operation
2 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 3 Replace the PW sound?
Solenoid Drive Shutter.
2 Check the Intermediate Release Solenoid Replace the End
Perform “Individual action check (A30 PW and Intermediate NIP release sensor_2 Intermediate
Sensor Shutter Solenoid)”, and check the NIP Release
Perform “Individual action check (A32 Nip
Solenoid State.
Release Solenoid / Sensor). sensor.
Is the Solenoid operation normal? Is the check result is not good? (If the trouble is
3 Check the operation of PW Shutter Go to step 4 Replace the CR not resolved,
Perform “Individual action check (A55 PW Unit. replace the main
Sensor Check)”, and check the PW shutter board)
operation.
Is the PW Shutter operation is normal?
4 Check the operation after reinstalling the Replace the PW Replace the
Main board Sensor. main board.
Replace the main board with normal
product and check operation.

Confidential
INK LEAK ERROR Match error between Main ROM and μSD ROM (PDL Program)
 Error name  Cause
 Ink leak error (Error code: 034841) Occurs when the firmware version of the main firmware and the μSD (PDL
Program) do not match.
 Cause
 Suspected cause
Occurs when moisture or ink stick on the ink leak sensor.
 Firmware version of main firmware and the μSD (PDL Program) do
 Suspected cause not match.
 Ink leak  Troubleshooting
 Troubleshooting  Perform the firmware update, and matching the firmware version of
the Main firmware and μSD (PDL Program).
 Contact the Epson Service Support department.

Confidential
6.2.2 Troubleshooting from Failure Symptom

Table 6-4. Symptom List
Symptom Reference
Nozzles missing P. 200
ADF/scanner trouble P. 203
Ink bleed (characters distorted/blurred) P. 206
White or black bands (in feed direction) P. 209
Print position offset in CR operation direction P. 212
Print position offset in feed direction P. 214
Print smudges P. 216
Color deviation P. 219
Blank printout (blank paper ejected) P. 222
Stackability poor P. 224
Lines not smooth and ruled-line deviation P. 226
Paper damaged or bent P. 228
Double feeding P. 230
Abnormal sound P. 232

Confidential
NOZZLES MISSING
 Symptom
Nozzles missing
 Cause
 Nozzles clogged
Figure 6-3. Nozzles Clogged
 Ink system assy malfunction

 Air bubbles collected in ink tubes
 Head defective

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and Measure YES No

Check implementation of printing troubleshooting (answer and handing an incoming If not, this is to be dealt with by Get a service engineer to perform printing troubleshooting.
call) a service engineer. If the symptom is not resolved even after performing printing
1 Go to step 2
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting at an incoming call. troubleshooting, judge that this needs to be dealt with by a
Has printing troubleshooting been performed? service engineer, and go to step 2.
Check the nozzle check pattern End Obtain the information as follows from the service status
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. (No reproduction) sheet and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle
Nozzle condition is excellent? missing state check matrix table.
• Nozzles missing rank
2  Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the service
 Normal menu (User Menu) status sheet (p. 760) and execute head cleaning according
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] to the nozzle missing state check matrix table.
 Service Support Mode
If nozzle missing is not improved, go to step 3.
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 308)
Check the Ink system assy Go to step 4  When cap/wiper is dirty
Check the following point about the Ink system assy • Cleaning the cap surface / wiper part
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” from the Service Support mode (P. 125) in advance to  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
release the CR lock before checking the Ink system assy. • Replace the Ink system assy. (p. 544)
Ink system assy is correct condition?
 When the wiper part breakage / wiper operation failure is
confirmed
1. Check the cap parts
3 • Replace th Ink system assy. (p. 544)
• Check that the cap surfaces are not dirty.
• Hold the CR belt with a hand and move the CR to the home position and visually check If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
that the nozzle surfaces are capped properly. go to Step 4.
2. Check the wiper parts
• Check that there is not soiling or damage to the wiper parts
• With the cap sliders drawn to the right side, rotate the PF gears by hand and check that
the wipers move up and down
Check the ink tubes Go to step 5 Execute strong head cleaning and then check that the bubbles
Visually check that air bubbles have not collected in the ink tubes. have been removed from inside the tubes
4 (If there are parts where the color is unmistakably pale in the supply system ink tubes, air
bubbles may have collected.) If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
Ink tube is correct condition? go to Step 5.
Replace the print head Replace the print head. (p. 567)
5 If the symptom is not resolved even after performing the steps above, replace the print head. If the trouble is not resolved after replacing the Printhead, contact the Epson Service Support
department.

Confidential
 Nozzle missing state matrix table  How to view the nozzle missing state matrix table
Table 6-5. Nozzle Missing State Matrix Table 1. Check the cleaning history and nozzle missing state (rank). It can be
checked by remote monitoring or Status Sheet Print (P. 760).
Cleaning history Nozzles missing state
(strongest 1 (E1) F (EF)
cleaning within 3 0 (E0) 2 (E2) 3 (E3)
Total of 5 6 or more
days, out of 5 No nozzles 3 to 32 33 nozzles
nozzles or nozzles
history items) missing nozzles or more
less failed
A None A-0* A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4
B CL/CL2 B-0* B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4
C CL3 C-0* C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4
D Head
Cleaning D-0* D-1 D-2 D-3 D-4
Strong Figure 6-4. Cleaning History
2. Check the place where the checked cleaning history and nozzle
Note: Even if there were no missing nozzles in “Nozzle Verification Technology” detection,
missing state (rank) intersect in the matrix table.
execute when there are print defects (cleaning is not necessary if there are not).
Resolution examples:
3. Refer to the item at the intersecting place and perform the
A-0, 1 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL1
recommended measure.
A-2, 3 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL2
Example) If the strongest cleaning within 3 days was Head Cleaning
A-4, B-0~4 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning CL3
CL2 and the nozzle rank was 02, the place of intersection is B-2 so
C-0~4 : Recommended to execute Head Cleaning Strong
execute the recommended Head Cleaning CL3.
D-0~4 : Recommend to perform judgment before head replacement

Confidential
ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE
 Symptom
Does not occur during printing (printing from a PC) and occurs only when
copying from the ADF or scanning glass.
 Cause
 Glass dirty
 Scanning sensor dirty
 Feed path roller dirty/deteriorated
 Feed path foreign object/damaged
 ADF Hinge damaged
 ADF/SCN CIS module failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Image defect 1  ADF Unit If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Black line soiling Check the contamination of the ADF scan glass surface / ADF Unit because one of the CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be
reading part. broken. (p. 469)
[Measure] Clean the ADF scan glass surface/ADF reading part. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Epson Service Support department.)
 SCN Unit
Check the contamination of the SCN glass surface.
[Measure] Clean the SCN glass surface.
Image defect 2 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after procedure, replace the ADF/SCN
Some or all of an image is not scanned [Measure] Clean the glass surface of the ADF/scanning glass. Unit because one of the CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be
broken. (p. 469)
2. Check the scanner cable connection.
[Measure] Reconnect the Scanner cable correctly. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
3. If the scanned document and size recognized on the printer side do
not match, replace the ADF/SCN Unit.
Image defect 3 Scanning (CIS sensor) + glass back side dirty? If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF/SCN
Light [Measure] Clean the corresponding parts. Unit because one of the CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be
broken. (p. 469)
(If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Image defect 4 Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate in relation to the  Replace the hinges. (p. 469)
Image skewed on paper (only when ADF) scanning glass.  If the ADF position is offset from the scanning glass even after
(Image skewed only when copying) Check that the ADF is attached parallel to the scanning glass. replacing the hinges, replace the ADF/SCN Unit. (p. 469)
Image defect 5 1. Check the contamination of ADF/SCN glass surface. If the symptom continues to occur after procedure, replace the ADF/SCN
Image defects other than the above that occur [Measure] Clean the ADF/SCN glass surface. Unit because one of the CIS modules of the ADF/SCN Unit may be
only when copying 2. Check the scanner cable connection. broken. (p. 469)
[Measure] Reconnect the ADF/SCN cable correctly. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
Feed defect 1 Clean the ADF Pickup Roller Assy/ADF Pad. If the symptom continues to occur after cleaning, replace the ADF Pickup
Double Feeding Roller Assy and ADF Pad. (p. 489)
(If the symptom continues to occur after replacing the ADF Pickup Roller
and ADF Pad, replace the ADF/SCN Unit. (p. 469)
If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the

Confidential
Symptom Check and measure Correspondence after confirmation

Feed defect 2 Check that there is no foreign object or damage in the ADF feed path. If a part is found to be damaged, etc. after cleaning the path, replace the
Document bending corresponding part or ADF/SCN Unit. (p. 469)
Feed defect 3  Check that the ADF is closed correctly. Replace the ADF/SCN Unit. (p. 469)
Paper jam occurs when feeding from the ADF  Check that the height of the ADF is appropriate. (If the error continued after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, contact the
 Clean the ADF feed path. Epson Service Support department.)
 Clean the feed roller surfaces.

Confidential
INK BLEED (CHARACTERS DISTORTED/BLURRED)

 Symptom
Characters and images are distorted or blurred
Figure 6-5. Ink Bleed

 Cause
 ADF/SCN Unit failure
 Paper
 Ink
 Miss-match the Printer setting and print paper.
 Temperature and humidity sensors failure
 PG adjustment value deviation

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Step Check and measure YES No

Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with printing and
 Occurs with copying only
1 Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. copying.
Refer to ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE (→P. 203)
Go to the Step 2
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting (answer and handing an incoming Go to Step 3 Get a service engineer to perform printing troubleshooting.
call) If the symptom is not resolved even after performing
2
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting at an incoming call. printing troubleshooting, go to step 3.
Has printing troubleshooting been performed?
Check the settings (print settings, paper type) (answer and handing an incoming call) This is to be dealt with by a Tell the service engineer that print settings are wrong, and
Check the print settings from the service information portal. service engineer. get the service engineer to set them correctly.
3 Are print settings set correctly? Go to Step 4 If the symptom is not resolved even after performing
printing troubleshooting, judge that this needs to be dealt
with by a service engineer, and go to step 4.
Check the reproducibility of settings on genuine paper Go to Step 5 Explain that the phenomena is due to the paper, and
Print on standard paper (genuine paper), and check that there are no distorted or blurred recommend use of standard paper (genuine paper).
4
characters.
Did the corresponding phenomena occur?
Check the ink Go to Step 6 Recommend using genuine ink packs.
5 Check that genuine ink packs are attached. If the symptom continues to occur after changing to the
genuine ink packs, go to step 6.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to Step 7 Obtain the information as follows from the service status
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. sheet and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle
Nozzle condition is excellent? missing state check matrix table.
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the
 Normal menu (User Menu) service status sheet (p. 760) and execute head cleaning
6
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] according to the nozzle missing state check matrix
 Service Support Mode table.
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 308) If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles
Missing (→P. 200).
If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 7.

Check the PG Go to step 8 Perform the PG Adjustment (p. 306).
7 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value range If the symptom continues to occur after performing the PG
(1.35 ±0.05 mm). adjustment, go to step 8.

Confidential

Check the temperature Contact to service support. 1. Replace the print head (p. 567).
Check that the head thermistor and temperature and humidity sensor temperatures are
appropriate. If the symptom continues to occur,
1. B24 Temp/hum. Sensor Check (p. 307) 2. Replace the temperature and humidity sensors (p. 528).
8
2. C11 Head Thermistor Check (p. 315)
Appropriate temperature: (2) - (1) = -3 to +5[ºC]
* The head temperature becomes very hot after continuous printing so wait about 1 hour after
printing before performing the check.

Confidential
WHITE OR BLACK BANDS (IN FEED DIRECTION)

 Symptom
White or black (dark) bands occur in the horizontal direction on images.
Sub scanning line (feed) direction

Main scanning line (CR operation) direction
Figure 6-6. White or Black Bands

 Cause
 Paper settings/drive settings of main unit are inappropriate
 Nozzles missing
 Ink system assy
 Adjustment values are inappropriate
 Paper skewed

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check the settings Go to step 2 Change the settings.
1 Check that the paper type and size are appropriate.
Check that the rubbing avoidance mode is “off”.
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting (answer and handing an incoming If not, this is to be dealt with by a service Get a service engineer to perform printing
call) engineer. troubleshooting.
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting at an incoming call. Go to step 3. If the symptom is not resolved even after
2
Has printing troubleshooting been performed? performing printing troubleshooting, judge that
this needs to be dealt with by a service engineer,
and go to step 3.
Check the spacing of white or black bands  In the case_1  In the case_2
Check that there is no nozzles missing and Go to step 4
1. If occurs periodically at head length (33 mm) = Nozzles missing, adjustment values then perform print trouble resolutions.
3 2. If occurs in multiple places within the head length (33 mm) = Nozzles missing * However, if the trouble only occurs with
* If the spacing of bands is 66 mm and a white band and black band occurs alternately specific paper, perform the print trouble
or a dark white band and light white band or a dark black band and a light black band remedies for each paper.
appears alternately and repeatedly, contact service support.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 5 Obtain the information as follows from the service
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. status sheet and execute head cleaning according
Nozzle condition is excellent? to the nozzle missing state check matrix table.
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from
4  Normal menu (User Menu) the service status sheet (p. 760) and execute
• [Setting] ⇒ [Maintenance] ⇒ [Print Head Nozzle Check] head cleaning according to the nozzle missing
 Service Support Mode state check matrix table.
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 308) If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to
Nozzles Missing (→P. 200).

Confidential

Check the following point about the Ink system assy • Cleaning the cap surface / wiper part
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” from the “Service Support mode (P. 125)” in advance to  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is
release the CR lock before checking the Ink system assy. confirmed
Ink system assy is correct condition? • Replace the Ink system assy. (p. 544)
1. Check the cap parts  When the wiper part breakage / wiper operation
5 failure is confirmed
• Replace th Ink system assy.(p. 544)
• Hold the CR belt with a hand and move the CR to the home position and visually check
If nozzle missing is not improved after performing
that the nozzle surfaces are capped properly.
the above, go to Step 6.
• With the cap sliders drawn to the right side, rotate the PF gears by hand and check that
the wipers move up and down.
Check whether or not skewing Contact to service support If the Intermediate Release Solenoid does not
• Check that there is no paper skewing when feeding. operate, replace it (p. 669).
• Is there a difference between the banding on the left and right (left black and right white,
6
etc.)
• If there is skewing, check the paper loaded, paper feeding path, and solenoid operation
B25 NIP Release Solenoid/ Sensor (p. 307)

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN CR OPERATION DIRECTION

 Symptom
The image is offset in the main scanning direction (left and right margins
are not equal) and the left or right edge of the image is cut off.

Figure 6-7. Print Position Offset in CR Operation Direction

 Cause
 Paper load position offset
 Print start position process adjustment value deviation
 PW sensor is dirty or has deteriorated
 PW sensor adjustment value incorrect
 CR scale dirty, damaged, or defective

Confidential
 Troubleshooting

Check the paper cassette Go to step 2  Correct the guide position
1 Check that the paper size and guide position are appropriate.  Straighten the paper edges

Check the settings Go to step 3 Change the settings
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below.
Main unit settings: Check that the paper settings and automatic size detection
2
settings of the main unit are appropriate.
Driver: Check that a value other than 0 is not input for the offset in the extended
settings.
Check the print start position process adjustment value Go to step 4 Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment
Check that the print start position process adjustment value is appropriate. pattern.
3
(Execute the following item from the service support mode.)
• B47 PTS Position Adjust
Check the PW sensor Go to step 5  If trouble is occurred in “1”
(Execute the following items from the service support mode.) Replace the PW sensor
1. A55 Shutter Check-PW (p. 308)  In the “2”
4 select and enter an appropriate value from the
2. B49 PW Sensor Correct (p. 311)
adjustment pattern

Check the rollers Go to step 6 Reattach the rollers.
Check that the surfaces and attachment states of the intermediate rollers and feed If roller is damaged, replace any rollers.
5
rollers are appropriate.
(Locked part is askew, assembling of unit faulty, something is caught, etc.) If the symptom continues to occur, go to step 6.
Check the CR scale Contact service support 1. Replace the CR scale. (p. 581)
Visually check the CR scale to confirm that it is not dirty or damaged.
6
(Execute the following items from the service support mode.)
• B21 CR Scale Check (p. 307)

Confidential
PRINT POSITION OFFSET IN FEED DIRECTION

 Symptom
The image is offset in the sub scanning (feed) direction (top and bottom
margins are not equal) and the top or bottom edge of the image is cut off.

Figure 6-8. Print Position Offset in Feed Direction

 Cause
 The paper that is being used is inappropriate
 PE sensor lever
 PE sensor
 PW sensor problem

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the paper Go to step 2 Change the paper to suitable paper.
1 Check that suitable paper (1. paper is not printed. 2. paper don't have punch holes,
etc.) is being used.
Check the settings of the main unit/printer driver listed below.
Main unit settings: Check that the paper settings and automatic size detection settings
2
of the main unit are appropriate.
Driver: Check that a value other than 0 is not input for the offset in the extended
settings.
Check the feed rollers Go to step 4 Cleaning the feed roller.
3
Check that the feed roller is not contaminated and not damaged. Replace the feed rollers
Check the PE sensor lever Go to step 5 Replace the PE sensor lever
Check that the state and movement of the PE sensor lever are normal.
4
(Perform the following item from service support mode)
B23 PE Sensor Check (p. 361)
Check the PE sensor adjustment value Go to step 6 Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment
Check that the PE sensor process adjustment value is appropriate. pattern
5 (Execute the following items from the service support mode.)
1. B52 PE Adjust (ASF) (p. 311)
2. B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p. 311)
Check the PW sensor adjustment value Contact service support Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment
Check that the PW sensor process adjustment value is appropriate. pattern
6 (Execute the following items from the service support mode.)
1. A55 Shutter Check-PW (p. 308)

Confidential
PRINT SMUDGES
 Symptom
Unexpected smudges can be seen somewhere (including back side) on
printouts.
Figure 6-9. Print smudges

 Cause
 Dirt on scanner glass is scanned (when copying)
 Dirt transferred from feed path
 Contact with nozzle surface

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with printing and
 Occurs with copying only
1 Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. copying.
Refer to ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE (→P. 203).
Go to step 2
Check conditions in which error occurred Occurs during both. Occurs only during 2-sided printing.
2 Check whether the error occurred only during 2-sided printing, or whether the error Go to step 3 Check, clean or replace the duplex unit.
occurred during both 2-sided or one-sided printing.
Confirm the contamination adherence. Go to step 4 Clean the corresponding parts.
 Check inside the product * When cleaning the gaps in the SMAP driven roller, you can
Check that there is no noticeable dirt inside the product. raise the driven roller a little to make cleaning easier by
executing
 Check the platen
[Settings] > [Maintenance] > [Remove Scraps of Paper].
Check that there is no noticeable dirt on the platen.
 Check the feed path (roller surfaces)
* If there are large ink deposits, check that there is no ink
3 If there are smudges at the center of the paper, check the various feed rollers.
leaking.
 CR side surface
Check that there is no dust or ink adhered. If there is noticeable dirt on the platen, operation without paper
may have occurred so execute cleaning and check the
following items as well.
1. Paper size setting of main unit / driver
2. Check the PW sensor operation (refer to step 7 below)
Check the paper and settings Go to Step 5 Change the paper or settings.
Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
4
Check whether or not the paper settings are appropriate.

Confidential

Check the Ink System Assy. Go to step 6  When cap/wiper is dirty
Check the following point about the Ink System Assy. • Cleaning the cap surface / wiper part
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” from the” Service Support mode (P. 125)” in advance  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
to release the CR lock before checking the Ink System Assy. • Replace the Ink System Assy. (p. 544)
Ink System Assy is correct condition?
confirmed
5 • Replace the Ink System Assy. (p. 544)
If nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above,
• Hold the CR belt with a hand and move the CR to the home position and visually
go to Step 6.
check that the nozzle surfaces are capped properly.
• With the cap sliders drawn to the right side, rotate the PF gears by hand and check
that the wipers move up and down
Check around the CR Unit Go to step 7 Clean the CR bottom surface.
6
Remove the CR Unit and check that there is no dirt on the bottom surface (p. 597). Note: Be careful not to touch the nozzle surface.
Check the PW sensor Go to step 8  If trouble is occurred in “1”,”2”
(Execute the following items from the service support mode.) Replace the PW sensor
7 1. A55 Shutter Check-PW (p. 308)  In the “3”
2. A30 PW Sensor Solenoid (p. 241) Select and enter an appropriate value from the adjustment
pattern
Check the PG Contact to Service support Perform the PG Adjustment (p. 306).
8 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value
range (1.35 ±0.05 mm).

Confidential
COLOR DEVIATION
 Symptom
 Colors are completely different (1)
 Another color is mixed creating a gradation (2)
 Color is slightly different (3)
(1) (2) (3)

Figure 6-10. Color deviation
 Cause
 Different comparison conditions
 Scanner abnormal condition
 Paper type
 Printer Settings
 FW failure
 Print Head failure
 Ink system assy failure
 Air bubbles in the Ink tube

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the conditions  When the conditions differ
Check that any conditions below the lowest limits are the same when comparing colors The cause is highly likely to be not a failure but one of the
in two or more different printouts. following.
 When conditions
1  Light source of comparison location, printer, paper, print settings, and print date are the same Different light source, color gamut unique to device, paper, ink
and time Go to Step 2 density, aging variation
 Paper type: [Basic Settings] > [Paper Type] Print a document or image from the printer in question and
 Ink density: [Utilities] > [Extended Settings] > [Print Density]. from another printer that has no problems under the same
conditions. Then check if the two printouts differ in color.
Check whether printing or copying  Occurs with  Occurs with copying only
Check whether the symptom occurs with printing or with copying. printing and Refer to ADF/SCANNER TROUBLE (→P. 203).
2
copying.
Go to step 3
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting (answer and handing an Go to step 4 Get a service engineer to perform printing troubleshooting.
incoming call) If the symptom is not resolved even after performing printing
3
Check implementation of printing troubleshooting at an incoming call. troubleshooting, go to step 4.
Has printing troubleshooting been performed?
Check the paper Go to step 5 Print on appropriate paper.
4 1. Check whether or not the front and back sides of the paper match.
2. Check whether or not the result is the same even when printing on plain paper.
Check the settings Go to step 6 • Update the firmware.
5 1. Check whether or not the firmware is the latest version. • Change the settings
2. Check that the paper settings are appropriate.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 7 Obtain the information as follows from the service status sheet
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle missing
Nozzle condition is excellent? state check matrix table.
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the service
6  Normal menu (User Menu) status sheet (P. 760) and execute head cleaning according
 Service Support Mode If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles Missing
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 308) (→P. 200).

Confidential

Check the following point about the Ink system assy. • Cleaning the cap surface / wiper part
(Execute “CR Unlock Power Off” from the “Service Support mode (p. 125)” in  When capping failure of the nozzle surface is confirmed
advance to release the CR lock before checking the Ink system assy. • Replace the Ink system assy. (p. 544)
Ink system assy is correct condition?
confirmed
7 • Replace th Ink system assy. (p. 544)
f nozzle missing is not improved after performing the above, go
• Hold the CR belt with a hand and move the CR to the home position and visually
to Step 8.
check that the nozzle surfaces are capped properly.
• With the cap sliders drawn to the right side, rotate the PF gears by hand and
check that the wipers move up and down
Check the ink tubes Go to step 9 Execute strong head cleaning and then check that the bubbles
Visually check that air bubbles have not collected in the ink tubes. have been removed from inside the tubes
8
If there are parts where the color is unmistakably pale in the supply system ink tubes,
air bubbles may have collected.
Replace the Print head Replace the print head (p. 567).
9 If the symptom is not resolved even after performing the steps above, replace the print If the trouble is not resolved after replacing the Printhead, contact the Epson Service
head. Support department.

Confidential
BLANK PRINTOUT (BLANK PAPER EJECTED)

 Symptom
Blank paper is printed when printing.
Blank paper
Figure 6-11. Blank Printout (Blank Paper Ejected)

 Cause
 Paper (Used paper, heavy paper)
 Print Settings
 Network trouble
 Dirt/wrong installation/wear or damage of the Pickup Roller Assy or
Retard Roller
 Ink System Assy failure
 I/S failure (tube, pump, air release valve, ink end sensor)
 Main Board failure
 Head FFC failure
 Print Head failure

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operation when blank pages are ejected (point: whether blank pages Begins print operation Does not begin print operation (CR does not move)
ejected or blank pages printed) (CR moves) Go to step 2
1 Go to step 6
Check whether the machine begins the print operation (CR moves right and left
multiple times) or not.
Check the paper Go to step 3 • Change the paper.
Check whether or not using paper that is thick such as paper that has already been • Set the edge guide of paper cassette correctly.
2
printed on.
Check whether or not the paper size and edge guide position are appropriate.
3 Check whether or not the paper settings of the main unit and driver are appropriate.
Check whether or not blank paper parts are included in the print data.
Check the network. Go to step 5 If printing wirelessly, check whether prints with a wired
If the data does not arrive for 5 or more minutes after the print command, connection.
4
blank paper is ejected due to a timeout error. If the symptom continues to occur, contact to Service support.
Check whether or not blank print is occur by internal printing (status sheet, etc.).
Check the feed/retard rollers. Go to step 6 If the rollers are not attached appropriately, reattach them.
5 Check whether or not the feed/retard rollers are attached correctly Replace the rollers if necessary when damaged or the symptom
and whether or not the surfaces are dirty. is not resolved by cleaning the surfaces.
Check the nozzle check pattern Go to step 7 Obtain the information as follows from the service status sheet
Print nozzle check patterns and check whether there are nozzles missing or deflection. and execute head cleaning according to the nozzle missing
Nozzle condition is excellent? state check matrix table.
 Nozzle check pattern print method is belows. • Obtain the information of cleaning 1 to 5 from the service
6
 Normal menu (User Menu) status sheet (p. 760) and execute head cleaning according
 Service Support Mode • If nozzle missing is not improved, refer to Nozzles Missing
• B32 Nozzle Check Pattern (p. 308) (→P. 200).
Check the main board. Go to step 8 Replace the main board (p. 528).
7 Check that there is continuity of the head circuit fuses (F700 and F701) on the main
board.
Check the head FFC. Go to step 9 Replace the head FFC.
8
Visually check the FFC terminals to make sure they are not bent up or damaged.
Replace the print head Replace the print head (p. 567).
9 If the symptom is not resolved even after performing the steps above, replace the head. If the trouble is not resolved after replacing the Printhead, contact the Epson Service
Support department.

Confidential
STACKABILITY POOR
 Symptom
 Paper is output with the leading edge curled.
 Alignment property of paper is poor, and varies vertically and
horizontally.
Figure 6-12. Stackability poor

 Cause
 Environment
 Paper
 Print settings
 Output tray

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the stacker position Go to step 2 Reattach the stacker correctly.
1
Check that the stacker is attached correctly.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Explain that the cause is due to external factors and advise the
• Check that the paper is within the specifications. customer to change the paper/environment.
2 • Check that the paper is long grain. Or go to step 3
• Check that the paper is stored appropriately.
• Check that the operating environment is appropriate.
Check the settings Go to step 4 1. Correct the settings.
3 • Check whether or not the paper settings of the driver and main unit are appropriate. 2. Lower the print density.
• Check whether or not the print density is appropriate.
Check the output guide position Go to step 5 Change the output guide height with the output guide lever.
4 Check whether or not the output guides are raised for the paper for which stackability is
poor.
Output tray Contact service Clean if dirty.
5 Check whether or not the output tray/guide is dirty or damaged support If scratched, damaged, etc, replace the output tray if necessary
(p. 415).

Confidential
RULED-LINE DEVIATION AND LINES NOT SMOOTH

 Symptom
 Printed lines are not smooth.
 Lines printed in double in parts (steps 1 and 2)
 Color deviation of part of mixed colors (steps 1 and 2)
Figure 6-13. Ruled-Line Deviation And Lines Not Smooth

 Cause
 Paper state
 Print Settings
 CR scale reading failure
 Foreign matter on CR scanning lines
 Overload when CR operation
 Adjustment value failure
 PG right and left difference

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the paper Go to step 2 Print using standard paper.
1
Check that the paper surface is flat.
Check the settings Go to step 3 Correct the settings.
2 • Check that the paper settings are appropriate.
If the print quality setting is set to give priority to speed,
• Check that the print quality setting is set to standard or to give priority to quality.
change it to standard or to give priority to quality.
Check the CR scale Go to step 4 Replace the CR scale (p. 581).
Visually check the CR scale to confirm that it is not dirty or damaged.
3
• B21 CR Scale Check (p. 307)
Check the CR operation Go to step 5 Clean and apply grease if necessary.
Execute “CR Unlock Power Off2” of the service support mode to release the CR.
1. Move the CR left and right while holding the belt and check that it moves
4 smoothly.
2. Check that there is no foreign mater on or damage to the CR shaft, CR guide
frames, and CR ribs.
3. Check that the CR belt is not damaged or worn out.
Check the Bi-D Adjustment value Go to step 6 Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment pattern
Print adjustment patterns and check that the adjustment values are not deviated.
 When lines are offset overall
5 1. B46 Bi-D Adjust
2. B48 Bi-D Band Adjust
 When the center of the image is correct but both edges of the image (width of about
10 mm) are offset (image 2) even after performing the above
1. B45 PTS Acc And Dec. Adjust
Check the Head Angular Adjustment Mech value Go to step 7 1. Refer to the print patterns and perform CR angular
(Execute the following items from the service support mode.) adjustment.
1. Execute [B43 Head Angular Adjustment Mech] and adjust the CR angular while 2. Enter an appropriate value from the adjustment pattern
6
viewing the printed patterns.
2. After CR mechanism adjustment is completed, execute [B44 Head Angular
Adjustment Soft] and adjust the remaining difference.
Check the PG Contact to service Perform the PG Adjustment (p. 306).
7 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value support.
range (1.35 ±0.05 mm).

Confidential
PAPER DAMAGED OR BENT

 Symptom
 Printed paper is damaged or bent
Figure 6-14. Paper Damaged or Bent

Points for if bent when duplex printing
Timing Way in which bent Cause
Bent by pulling out Bent for one side SMAP driven roller
after printing one Foreign object in path
side Flap
Bent after printing Bent for second side CR
second side EJ holder
 Cause
 Environment
 Paper
 Feed path foreign object
 Flap failure
 Star Wheel Assy failure
 PG value abnormal
 Ink density excessive
etc.

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
1
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Use suitable paper.
• Check that there is no damage to the paper before it pases through. Use the rubbing avoidance mode.
• Check that the paper is in an appropriate state (no curling). *: If the symptom continues even after using the rubbing
2
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing). avoidance mode, refer to the avoidance measures.
*: When, for example, A4 paper is used cut to A5 size, the long grain becomes the
short grain so there is a tendency for edges to bend easily.
Check the feed path Go to step 4 Remove the foreign object and then clean.
• Check that there is no damage to or foreign object on the feed path. If flap damaged or abnormal, contact the service support
3
• Check that the movement of the flap is smooth (returns to original position due to
its own weight after being pushed).
Check the points for if bent when duplex printing Go to step 5 Clean the driven roller.
If bent when duplex printing, compare the conditions with those in the points table. * You can raise the driven roller a little to make cleaning easier
4
by executing [Settings] > [Maintenance] > [Remove Scraps of
Paper].
Check the Star Wheel Assy Go to step 6 Replace the Star Wheel Assy.
 Check that the jagged part of the Star Wheel Assy rotates normally.
 Check that there are no cuts or other damage locally on the EJ roller surface.
5  Execute the following while looking at the EJ holder/roller from the front when the
output tray has been removed.
• A11 PF Motor/SMAP Sensor
Check the PG Contact Service Peform the PG Adjustment (p. 306).
6 Check the PG with the thickness gauge and check that it is within the specified value support.
range (1.35 ±0.05 mm).
If the symptom continues even in the rubbing avoidance mode
1. Reduce the print density (default is -20 for duplex, but -5 or -10 from that).
Avoidance
2. Increase the drying time.
measures
3. Make sure that a high density image does not come at the trailing edge of the first
side (rotate, change the print order, etc.).

Confidential
DOUBLE FEEDING
 Symptom
 Multiple paper sheets are output at the same time.
Figure 6-15. Double Feeding

 Cause
 Environment
 Paper
 Settings
 Wear/wrong installation of the Retard roller

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Check the operating environment Go to step 2 Recommend using in an appropriate environment.
1
Check that the operating environment is within the specifications.
Check the paper Go to step 3 Use suitable paper.
• Check that using suitable paper (not paper already used for printing, paper).
2
• Check that the paper guide positions are appropriate.
• Check that the paper edges are aligned in the cassette.
3
Check that the paper setting size and actual paper size match.
Check the retard unit Contact Service Replace the retard roller (p. 689).
• Check that the retard roller is attached appropriately (tabs and locked) and not worn support.
4
out.
• Rotate the retard roller and check that there is a load.

Confidential
ABNORMAL SOUND  Cause

 Symptom  Gear part on cassette side
 Sound which is normally not emitted from the printer can be heard  Lift motor gear box
 ASF motor gear box
 Rear ASF
 APG gear box
APG Motor CR Motor
 Retard roller
 CR operation
 Insufficient grease for roller shaft and grounding contact point
PF Motor  NIP release solenoid
 Ink system assy
 Supply pump
etc.
Lift Motor
Supply Pump Motors

ASF Motor
FIGURE 6-16. Abnormal Sound

Confidential
 Troubleshooting
Timing of
abnormal Category Frequency How to check Measure
sound
Hopper system operation Always when cassette Perform the following items from “Individual • Apply grease to gear shaft part on cassette side.
sound removed and inserted Action Check” of service support mode. • Replace lift motor Assy.
 A17 Lift Motor/ Lift Phase Sensor (C1)
Rear ASF system Always temporarily when Perform the following items from “Individual • Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 652)
rear feeding Action Check” of service support mode. • Replace the Rear ASF Unit. (p. 643)
 A13 ASF Motor(1st)
 A31 RASF Solenoid
ASF motor related (When printing first sheet) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 652)
Before Action Check” of service support mode.
printing
 A13 ASF Motor (C1)
APG Immediately before printing Perform the following item from “Individual Action • Check the state of the APG gear train gears (no broken teeth, etc.)
Check” of service support mode. • Replace the APG Drive Assy. (p. 554)
 A12 APG Move Check *: Take care that there is no phase shift when removing and attaching
the gear box.
Retard Roller Immediately before printing Visually check the retard roller shape Replace the retard roller. (p. 689)
(no uneven wear, etc.). *: If the retard roller becomes unevenly worn, the friction coefficient
will decrease and the roller will not rotate.

Confidential
Timing of
sound
CR system CR operation Perform the following item from “Individual Action • When sound is output by moving the CR:
Check” of service support mode. Check whether there is a foreign object, and if there is, remove it.
 A10 CR Motor Clean the CR rib, shaft, and guide frame and then apply grease to
them.
• When sound is always output when CR is reversed:
Check whether there is a foreign object, and if there is, remove it.
Check that the CR belt tension is appropriate.
Check that fixing of the CR motor is appropriate.
PF system Always when printing Perform the following item from “Individual Action  Abnormal sound from left side of main unit
Check” of service support mode. • Insufficient grease on SMAP roller or EJ roller ground contact
 A11 PF Motor/Sensor point:
Apply grease.
• Check that the PF timing belt tension is appropriate.
• Check that a rattling sound is not output at the gear fixing E-ring.
If there is rattling, change the orientation.
• Teeth knocking due to gear backlash:
During Apply grease to the idler gear shaft.
printing
 Abnormal sound from right side of main unit
• Abnormal sound from PF gear train gears:
Check the state of the gears (whether or not tilted, etc.). If problem,
reattach or replace them.
• When driving that is supposed to be off is connected:
Check that movement of the Ink system assy is smooth.
*: If necessary, replace the corresponding part.
NIP Release Solenoid Temporarily always only Perform the following item from “Individual Action Check that the solenoid is fixed appropriately.
when feeding (single sound) Check” of service support mode. If necessary, replace the NIP release solenoid. (p. 669)
 B25 Nip Release Solenoid
ASF motor related (When print multiple sheets) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 652)
Action Check” of service support mode.

Confidential
Timing of
sound
NIP release solenoid Temporarily always only Perform the following item from “Individual Action • Check that the solenoid is fixed appropriately.
when feeding (single sound) Check” of service support mode. • If necessary, replace the NIP release solenoid. (p. 669)
 A32 Nip Release Solenoid
ASF motor related (When print multiple sheets) Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the ASF Drive Assy. (p. 652)
Between
Action Check” of service support mode.
pages
PF system When CL suction Perform the following items from service support • Check the pump operation sound immediately after executing
When not mode. cleaning.
printing
 C03 CL1 • If necessary, replace the Ink system assy (p. 544)
When IS system Every time when cover Perform the following items from “Individual Replace the Decompression Pump Unit. (p. 444)
RIPS and closed Action Check” of service support mode.
front cover  A21 Supply Pump Motor1
closed  A22 Supply Pump Motor2

Confidential
6.3 Individual Action Check Function

6.3.1 Overview Back:[*] Run:[#]
The individual action check is a mode to check whether the various motors, Individual Action Check: MENU
sensors, and other parts are operating normally so that service personnel can Maintenance: MENU
investigate the cause of an error on site when there is a service call, etc. and its Printer Status Information
purpose is to reduce the downtime for servicing on site. Swap Mech Unit: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
With regard to electrical components such as motors, sensors, and solenoids, USB FW Update
Counter Reset
this function can operate each of them individually so it can be used to narrow Debug Log Get Mode: MENU
down the cause of a failure.
Service Mode Startup Screen
 How to start the individual action mode
1. Start the printer in the service mode. (Refer to 5.1 Overview)
2. Select “Individual Action Check: MENU” from the service mode menu. Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
3. Select each check item from the “Individual Action Check” menu to
perform the checks of the individual actions of the motors, sensors, and Input A No.-Individual
Output: MENU
solenoids. Input: MENU
Auto Check
CR Unlock Power OFF
Individual Action Check Menu Screen
Figure 6-17. Service Support Mode Screens
Troubleshooting Individual Action Check Function 236

Confidential
6.3.2 Precautions for startup (error display)

The error specifications of the individual action mode differ from those of a normal startup as whether the individual action of each motor, sensor, and solenoid is
acceptable or not is judged so errors other than fatal errors are not displayed.
Instead of displaying errors, dedicated information is displayed in the individual action mode.
The following shows the information displayed in the individual action mode.
Table 6-6. List of information displayed in the individual action mode

Error type Main unit display Description Occurrence timing
Fatal error Fatal_Error Motor related error for which motor control is judged to be unstable Any time
Code:XXXXXXX
No cassette error APG_Error Displayed when APG phase detection load in the APG move check. During APG move check
C1_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C1) is not loaded in the feed operation check item. Main unit cassette
Feed to eject check (single/double)
C2_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C2) is not loaded in the feed operation check item. Additional cassette
C3_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C3) (additional cassette) is not loaded in the feed Additional cassette
operation check item. Feed to eject check (single/double)
C4_Nothing Displayed when the paper cassette (C4) (additional cassette) is not loaded in the feed Additional cassette
operation check item. Feed to eject check (single/double)
Information
Hopper up/down sensor C1_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (C1)) cannot detect correctly in  Main unit cassette
error the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
 Main unit hopper lifting
C2_Lift_Error Displayed when the hopper up/down sensor (paper cassette (C2)) cannot detect correctly in  Additional cassette
the feed/eject check or cassette hopper operation check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
 Additional hopper lifting

Confidential

No paper error C1_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the paper cassette (C1) in the feed/eject check Main unit cassette
item. Feed to eject check (single/double)
C2_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the paper cassette (C2) in the feed/eject check Additional cassette
RASF_Paper_Out Displayed when there is no paper loaded in the rear tray in the feed/eject check item. Rear tray
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_1 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit PE in the feed/eject check. Main unit/additional cassettes and rear
(Not reached PE) tray
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_2 Displayed when the main unit PE sensor could not detect the paper trailing edge in the Main unit/additional cassettes and rear
Information
(PE sensor does not turn feed/eject check. tray

OFF) Feed to eject check (single/double)
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_3 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit PE after double reverse feeding in Main unit/additional cassettes
(Reverse failure, not the feed/eject check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
reached PE)
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_4 Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit feed sensor in the feed/eject check. Additional cassette
(Not reached main unit Feed to eject check (single/double)
feed sensor)
Paper jam error (NF) C1_NF Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit feed sensor when feeding from paper Main unit cassette
cassette (C1). Feed to eject check (single/double)
C2_NF Displayed when the paper did not reach the main unit feed sensor when feeding from paper Additional cassette

Confidential

Paper jam error C1_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper Main unit cassette
(Stack collapsed) cassette (C1). Feed to eject check (single/double)
C2_DF Displayed when the stack is judged to have collapsed when feeding paper from paper Additional cassette
Information

Cassette pull out Pull_Out_The Displayed when the paper cassette is inserted when performing the lift motor/lift phase Lift motor/lift phase sensor operation
instruction Cassette sensor operation check. check
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_15 Displayed when the paper did not reach the RIPS Feed Sensor in the feed/eject check. Additional cassette
(RIPS Feed Sensor not Feed to eject check (single/double)
reached)
Paper jam error Paper_Jam_16 Displayed when the RIPS Feed Sensor could not detect the paper trailing edge in the feed/ Additional cassette
(RIPS Feed Sensor not eject check. Feed to eject check (single/double)
turned OFF)

Confidential
6.3.3 How to perform individual action checks

There are the following two ways to perform individual action checks so select one of the ways to perform the checks.
 Select a check item from the list to execute the check. (Input system parts and output system parts)
 Enter the program number provided for each check item to execute the check
Table 6-7. Check Item List
Program
Type Check item Screen display Description Judgment method
No.
General A01 Auto Check Auto Check Flow Individual Automatically checks the printer The check results are displayed on the panel
Action internal state together with the initial LCD.
operation and displays the mechanical
states determined from the check as
the results on the panel.
 Prerequisites for implementation
Set the one paper to each paper
tray.
 Items checked in auto check
1. Runaway check of various motors
(Is there unintended operation?)
2. Connection state of consumables
and other parts
3. Whether or not jammed paper
remaining
4. Operation check of various motors
5. Check of various sensors
6. Initial operation
7. Judgment and display of
mechanical state
Output A10 CR Motor CR Motor Moves the CR unit back and forth to 1. Visually check that the CR action is
system perform a CR motor failure check. smooth.
2. Check that the CR motor sound is not
abnormal.
A11 PF Motor PF Motor/SMAP Phase Sensor Drives the PF motor for approximately  PF motor
2 seconds to perform a PF motor Check that the PF motor sound is not
failure check. abnormal.
Inspection of the SMAP phase sensor  SMAP phase sensor
is performed automatically while the The inspection result is displayed on the
PF motor is being driven. screen after the check finishes.

Confidential

Program
No.
Output A12 APG Motor APG Move Check Drives the APG motor and performs Visually check that the CR unit and CR shaft
system APG switching to check the APG are operating as follows.
motor operation.  Check operation
1. Lift the CR shaft from the PG1 state (PG
is at narrowest) to the PG7 state (PG is at
widest) and then set it to the release state
on the paper guides.
2. Cancel the release state on the paper
guides and lower the CR shaft from PG7
to PG1.
A13 ASF Motor ASF Motor (C1) C1 Drives each ASF motor for Check that the ASF motor sound is not
A14 Additional ASF C2 approximately 2 seconds to perform an abnormal.
Motor (C2) ASF motor failure check.
A15 Additional ASF C3

Motor (C3)
A16 Additional ASF C4
Motor (C4)
A17 Lift Motor/ Lift (C1) Motor/Lift C1 Check that the lift motor and lift phase  Lift motor
Lift Phase Phase (C1) Sensor sensor have not failed by operating the Check that the lift motor sound is not
A18 Sensor Additional Lift (C2) C2 motor and changing the on/off state of abnormal.
Motor/Lift Phase the sensor.  Lift phase sensor
(C2) Sensor Check that the display changes according
to the inserted/pulled out state of the paper
A19 Additional Lift (C3) C3
cassette.
Motor/Lift Phase
 Paper cassette inserted state
(C3) Sensor
The “Pull_Out_The Cassette” message
A20 Additional Lift (C4) C4 appears on the panel LCD.
Motor/Lift Phase  Paper cassette pulled out state
(C4) Sensor The lift motor operation starts.
A21 Supply Pump Motor 1 Supply Pump Motor 1 Drives the supply pump motor to Check that the supply pump motor sound is
A22 Supply Pump Motor 2 Supply Pump Motor 2 perform a supply pump failure check. not abnormal.
A30 PW Sensor Solenoid PW Sensor Solenoid Operates the PW sensor shutter Check the operation sound of the PW sensor
solenoid to perform the PE sensor shutter solenoid and check that the PE sensor
shutter solenoid failure check. shutter solenoid is operating.

Confidential

Program
No.
Output A31 Rear ASF Solenoid Rear ASF Solenoid Operates the rear ASF solenoid to Check that the rear ASF solenoid is operating
system perform the rear ASF solenoid failure as follows.
check. (The check operation is executed in the
following sequence.)
1. Check the operation of the rear ASF
solenoid visually and by its sound.
2. Check that the LD roller rotates.
3. After the LD roller rotates, check from
the sound that the motor drive one way
clutch is idling due to the one way clutch.
A32 NIP Solenoid/Sensor NIP Solenoid/Sensor Operates the Intermediate Release 1. Check that the solenoid is operating both
Solenoid to perform the Intermediate visually and by its sound.
Release Solenoid and nip release 2. Whether or not the Intermediate Nip
solenoid sensor failure check. Release Sensor is switched ON/OFF
normally is displayed on the panel LCD.
Input A40 ALL Sensor Check ALL Sensor Check Accesses each sensor to check the ON/ Manually switch the target sensor ON/OFF
system OFF of the sensor for each type of and check that the sensor state displayed on
driving and sequence. the panel LCD changes.
Regarding the detail of All sensor check,
refer to “All Sensor Check Items ( p. 245)”.
A41 Feed/Eject Main cassette Simplex-C1 Check that the various sensors related The check results are displayed on the panel
Check Feed - Eject check to the main unit cassette have not LCD.
(Paper pass single (C1) failed and actually pass paper through
A42 check) Main cassette Simplex-C2 and check the ease of feeding and that
Feed - Eject check sensor output is not abnormal.
single (C2)
A43 Main cassette Simplex-C3
Feed - Eject check
single (C3)
A44 Main cassette Simplex-C4
Feed - Eject check
single (C4)

Confidential

Program
No.
Input A45 Feed/Eject Additional cassette Simplex-Rear ASF Check that the various sensors related The check results are displayed on the panel
system Check Feed - Eject check to the main unit cassette have not LCD.
(Paper pass single (RASF) failed and actually pass paper through
A46 check) Additional cassette Duplex-C1 and check the ease of feeding and that
Feed - Eject check sensor output is not abnormal.
Double (C1)
A47 Main cassette Duplex-C2
Feed - Eject check
Double (C2)
A48 Additional cassette Duplex-C3
Feed - Eject check
Double (C3)
A49 Additional cassette Duplex-C4
Feed - Eject check
Double (C4)
A50 Feed/Eject Main cassette C1 Check that the various sensors related The setting state of the current paper cassette
Sensor Check Feed - Eject sensor to the main unit cassette have not is displayed on the panel LCD. Check that
check (C1) failed and actually pass paper through the panel display changes to match the paper
A51 Additional cassette C2 and check the ease of feeding and that cassette state depending on insertion or
Feed - Eject sensor sensor output is not abnormal. pulling out of the paper cassette, movement
check (C2) of the edge guides, and whether or not there
is paper.
A52 Additional cassette C3
Feed - Eject sensor
check (C3)
A53 Additional cassette C4
Feed - Eject sensor
check (C4)
A54 Additional cassette Rear ASF
Feed - Eject check
(RASF)
A55 PW Sensor Shutter Check Shutter Check-PW Check that there is no problem with The check results are displayed on the panel
the operation of the shutter that is LCD.
attached to the CR for reducing the
amount of mist on the PW sensor.

Confidential

Program
No.
Input A56 APG Sensor Check APG Sensor Check that the APG phase sensor has The check results are displayed on the panel
system not failed by changing the on/off state LCD.
of the sensor and checking whether the
sensor is normal or abnormal.
A57 Humidity Sensor Check Temp/hum. Sensor Check that the temperature and 1. Check the output values of the temperature
humidity sensors are operating and humidity sensors. (If there is a sensor
normally. error, use the following values as a guide
for making a judgment.)
 Error judgment guide
• Broken wire : 0°C or lower
• Short : 60°C or higher
2. Touch the temperature and humidity
sensors with a hand and check the change
of the output values.
A58 Ink End Sensor Check Ink End Sensor Check the ink end sensor state with ink Check that the sensor state on the panel LCD
present. changes as a result of moving the ink end
sensor lever.
A62 Ink Leak Sensor Check Ink Leak Sensor Check the state of the ink leak sensor. The check results are displayed on the panel
LCD.
Auxiliary A02 CR Unlock Power OFF CR Unlock Power OFF Turns off the power from the CR
---
functions unlock state.

Confidential
 All Sensor Check Items

Table 6-8. Check items for operation of all sensors
Classification Display How to check
Main Unit (printer) Front Cover Sensor Open/close the corresponding cover, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Rear Unit Cover Sensor
Ink Rear Cover Sensor
Ink Cover Sensor
PE Sensor Press the PE Sensor Lever with the paper, etc., and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Nip Release Sensor Insert and remove the Duplex Print Unit, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Feed Sensor Move the Feed Sensor Lever (machine side) with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Rear Unit Sensor Move the Duplex Unit Paper Detector with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Ink Feed Sensor Move the Ink Feed Sensor with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Ink End Sensor BK Move the Ink End Sensor Lever with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Ink End Sensor MG (At this time, be careful not to damage the buffer.)
Ink End Sensor CY

Ink End Sensor YE
Ink Leak Sensor 1 ---
Ink Leak Sensor 2
Ink Leak Sensor 3
Cassette (C1) Cassette Sensor Insert and remove the paper cassette (C1) by changing the state of paper setting and the edge guide position,
Paper Detector and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Hopper Up/Down Sensor

Papersize Detectors 1/2
Feed Sensor Move the Feed Sensor Lever with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.

Additional Feed Sensor Move the Feed Sensor Lever with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.

Confidential
Table 6-8. Check items for operation of all sensors

Classification Display How to check

C3 Feed Sensor Move the Feed Sensor Lever with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.

C4 Feed Sensor Move the Feed Sensor Lever with your hand, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.
Rear ASF Paper Detector Set paper in the Rear ASF Unit, and make sure the state of the sensor changes.

Confidential
 How to check  Enter the program number provided for each check item to execute the
 Select a check item from the list to execute the check. (Input system check.
parts and output system parts) 1. Select “A00 Individual -Input A Number” from the individual action
1. Select “Output: MENU (output system parts)” or “Input: MENU (input check mode menu.
system parts)” from the individual action check mode menu screen. 2. To enter a number from the state of the Individual Action Check -
2. Select the target check items from the corresponding menu to execute Input A_Number menu screen displayed, press the [*] button to
the checks. display the program number input screen. To return to the previous
menu screen, press the [#] button.
Individual Action Check: MENU Individual Action Check: MENU 3. When the program number input screen appears, refer to the check
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] item list (P. 240) and then enter the program number of the
Back:[*] Run:[#] Back:[*] Run:[#] corresponding check item and press the [OK] button.
Input A No.-Individual CR Motor
(Example: In the case of the CR motor check, enter “10”.)
Output: MENU PF Motor/Sensor * Enter a number of two digits following A of the program number.
Input: MENU APG Operation Check
Auto Check ASF Motor: MENU
CR Unlock Power OFF Lift Motor/Sensor: MENU Input A_Number ୰Ṇ
Supply Pump Motor1
Supply Pump Motor2 INPUT A-XX 2Digit Number. 1 2 3
PW Sensor Solenoid If Wrong,
Rear ASF Solenoid retrun this screen. 4 5 6 C
NIP Solenoid/Sensor
INPUT Number:[#]
- 7 8 9
Back Menu:[*]
0 OK
Individual Action Check - Input Program No. Input Screen
A_Number Menu Screen

Confidential
6.4 FAX Troubleshooting  Output Sample
6.4.1 Outline of the FAX Troubleshooting

(1)
This material describes the information related to “Reports/Logs”, “Error
Codes”, “Service Parameters”, “Basic information”, and “Troubleshooting” (2)
based on these information that can be used to solve the problems related to
FAX. (3)
6.4.2 Reports/Logs related to FAX

6.4.2.1 FAX Communication Log
A history report of sent and received 30 fax jobs.
Settings are available for Display, Auto or Manual Print (every 30/time/off).
Codes of communication error are not displayed on the report by default To
display the error codes, set [Report Format] to [Detail].
 Output Procedure
Manual [FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Report] ⇒ [FAX Log] = Select [Print]
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Auto ⇒ [FAX Log Auto Print]
= [Off] / [On (Every 30)] / [On (Time)]
 Output Settings
[Setup] ⇒ [General Setting] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Report Settings]
Report Format
⇒ [Report Format] = [Simple] / [Detail]
Troubleshooting FAX Troubleshooting 248

Confidential
Title Report name  Indications of destination number (in priority order)

Number of pages to be reported Sender 1. Registered name in the contact list
(1) PAGE
(number of pages/total number of pages) (Send/Polling 2. Dialed telephone number
Date /Time Printed time (yyyy.mm.dd hh:mm) Recive)(*3) 3. Destination fax ID (*1)
Name Sender’s name registered to the product Receiver 1. Sender’s telephone number (when notifying number with the caller
(2) ID)(*2)
Fax Sender’s fax number registered to the product (Receive/Polling
Send)(*3) 2. Destination fax ID (*1)
Job number
Receipt No. Common to other reports and job management. NOTE 1 : Usually the destination fax ID signals (CSI/TSI/CIG) are registered with numbers
This helps to identify the job. (telephone number is used in most cases). If these are registered with
Date / Time Starting time of communication text, the registered text are displayed as they are. When registering in
this product, select [Setup] ⇒ [General Settings] ⇒ [FAX Settings]
Sending/Receiving/Polling Sending/Polling Reception/ ⇒ [Basic Settings] ⇒ [Header] ⇒ [Your Phone Number] (number,
Type
PC Sending/Forwarding space, or + only).
ID See “Indications of destination number” 2 : For a product with Caller ID, the Destination fax ID is displayed when the caller
Duration mm:ss ID is enabled ([Fax settings] > [Basic settings] > [Caller ID display]),
and the sender notifies its telephone number. If the notified telephone
(3) Sending from memory: Number of pages of communication number has been registered in the contact list, the registered name is
succeeded/total number of pages displayed on the panel of the receiver. However, the telephone
Pages
Direct sending/reception: Number of pages of communication number is used for fax log.
succeeded When a fax is sent without notification, the destination fax ID is
displayed.
 Succeeded: OK
3 : Usual settings are Sending/Polling Reception for sender, Receiving/Polling
 Failed: Error details (Line Busy, No answer, Communication sending for receiver. However if Manual send/Manual receive is
Result Error enabled, these settings may be reversed. In addition, if a fax is sent
Line is not connected/Incorrect port connection/ with [Connected telephone] or [On hook dial] and Manual Send/Manual
Cancel, etc.) Receive is turned on, the “destination fax ID” is always displayed.
Error xxx (Report Format = only when set to Detail)
Example)
Case Indications of destination number

When receive a fax through caller ID line, Sender is displayed. However, “sender’s
then response with connected telephone telephone number” is displayed other than
and perform Manual Send; “destination fax ID”.
When send a fax with a connected Receiver is displayed. However, “destination
telephone and perform Manual Send; fax ID” is displayed other than the dialed
telephone number.
When send a fax with on hook dial Receiver is displayed. However,
(Contact list/Direct dial) “destination fax ID” is displayed other than
the registered name in the list or dialed
telephone number.

Confidential
6.4.2.2 Protocol trace  Output Sample

A detailed report for the previous sent or received fax.
Settings are available for Manual Print, or Auto Print after communication by (1)
changing the RAM Edit.
(2)
If a communication does not start until send/receive operation (when it did not
enter Phase B after Phase A), the log is displayed as a blank space. (3)
(4)
 Output Procedure (5)
[FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Report] ⇒ [Protocol trace]
Manual
= Select [Print]
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #006 to automatically print the log
Auto for every communication.
See “Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
 Output Setting
Use FAX parameter setting mode #005 to save and print error
Save / Print
communication only.
error only
See ”Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
Use Fax parameter Setting mode #007 to save one log/ save three log/
Auto print the Protocol trace.
See “Communication Protocol trace” in Service Parameter List.
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log

(2) Name, Fax Sender’s name registered to the product
Receipt No. ~ Logs of the received faxes.
(3)
Communication result Description is same as Fax log.
(4) DIS(DTC) / DCS Refer to “How to use DIS(DTC) / DCS” (p.258)
(5) Command / Response Log Refer to “How to use Command/Response log” (p.260).

Confidential
 How to Analyze DIS (DTC)/DCS

A sending and a receiving fax machines communicate with each other
before sending/receiving a fax in order to compare capabilities and
determine a transmission speed and how to send a fax.
A receiving fax machine tells its capabilities to the sending fax machine by
transmitting DIS signals. The sending fax machine receives the signals and
finds out the best transmission mode and speed that are available with the
receiver, then tells them to the receiver by using DCS signals.
You can know capabilities of a receiving fax machine by analyzing
the DIS(DTC) information, and the transmission mode and speed selected
by the sending fax machine by analyzing the DCS information.
The Protocol trace log is recorded and printed up to one page per
communication. If the log exceeds one page because of transmission of
multiple pages or other reason, the beginning protocol log is deleted and
only the last protocol log is recorded and printed.
The DIS(DTC)/DCS information is recorded and printed over the protocol
logs so that the information is not deleted even if the beginning protocol
log is deleted.
The fax modem conforms to ITU recommendations. Related major
recommendations are T.30 and T.4.
Interpret the FIF (Facsimile Information Field) of DIS(DTC)/DCS by
referring to DIS(DTC)/DCS bit assignment table. The DIS(DTC)/DCS bit
assignment table is provided on the page shown below.

Confidential
 DIS(DTC) Bit Assignment for Capabilities

To find out the bit no., reverse the first two bytes and the next two bytes, and do the same for the followings in the FIF data.
 Example of DIS 8020C28AC480D5838018 FCS=80 FIF=20 C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18
hex 2 0 C 2 8 A
bin 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
bit no. DIS/DTC data Content

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 ITU-T Recommendation V.8 ability 1 Function enabled
7 Frame size 0=256 Octet priority 1=64 Octet priority 0 ECM frame size=256
8 On Hold 0
2 9 Transfer of facsimile document 0 No standard for polling transmission
10 Receive fax operation 1 Ability
11 Data Signal Speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27terFB 0010=Unused 0001=Unused 0011=Unused 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=V.27ter 0100=On hold 0101=On hold 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=V.29 1010=Unused 1001=Unused 1001=Unused bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=V.27ter,V29 1110=Unused 1101=V.27ter,V29,V17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 Ability
16 Encoding method (MR) 0 Ability
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4 10=A4/B4 0 A4/B4/A3
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time capability 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 20/20ms
22 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=2-/10,s
23 1
24 Extended field 1 Extension

Confidential

hex C 4 8 0 D 5
bin 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 Ability
28 Set to 0 0
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 Ability
32 Extended field 1 Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability 0
34 Multiple Polling Capability (DIS) Multiple polling instructions (DIC) 0
35 Polling sub-address capability (DIS) PSA Polling sub -address transmission (DTC) 0
36 Encoding method (T.43) 0
37 Plain interleave 0
38 32 k ADPCM speech coding (TTC JT-G726) 0
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded. 0
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm 1 Ability
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi 0
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi 1 Ability
44 Inch system resolution selection 0
45 Milli-system resolution selection 1 Milli-system resolution selection
46 Minimum scan line time capability at high linear density 0:T15.4=T7.7 1:T15.4=1/2 T7.7 0
47 Selected professional ability (DIS) Select polling sending (DTC) 1 Ability

Confidential

hex 8 3 8 0 1 8
bin 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Sub-address Ability 1 Ability
50 Password / sending identification ability (DIS) Password sending (DTC) 1 Ability
51 Preparation for data file transfer (polling) 0
52 On hold 0
53 Binary file transfer (BFT) 0
54 Document transfer mode (DTM) 0
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI) 0
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM) 0
58 On hold 0
59 Preparation for transferring (polling) documents in character / mixed mode 0
60 Character mode 0
61 On hold 0
62 mixed mode 0
63 On hold 0
9 65 Processable Mode 26 0
66 Digital network capability 0
67 Full duplex /half duplex capability 0:Half duplex control 1: Half duplex/full duplex control 0
68 Encoder mode (JPEG) 1 Ability
69 Full color mode 1 Ability
70 Set to 0 0
71 12 bit pixel / element 0

Confidential
 Example of DIS 8020C28AC480D5838018?FCS=80?FIF=20 C2 8A C4 80 D5 83 80 18

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 Ability bit table of DCS

To refer to the bit allocation table and data, rearrange the following high order bits for every 2 bytes of data.
 Example of DCS 830042F844 FCS=83 FIF=00 42 F8 44
hex 0 0 4 2 F 8
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0
bit no. 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17

1 1 Accumulation exchange Internet facsimile simple mode (TTC standard JT-T37) 0
2 On hold 0
3 Real time Internet facsimile (TTC standard JT-T38) 0
4 Third generation mobile communication network 0
5 On hold 0
6 Invalid 0
7 Invalid 0
8 On hold 0
2 9 Set to 0 0 No polling transmission standard
10 Received fax data 1 Ability
11 Data signal speed 0000=2.4kbps V.27ter 0010=Invalid 0001=14.4kbps V.17 0011=On hold 0 V.27terFB
12 0100=4.8kbps V.27ter 0100=Invalid 0101=12kbps V.17 0111=On hold 0 *When the V8 mode (S-G3) starts, this
1000=9.6kbps V.29 1010=On hold 1001=9.6kbps V.17 1001=On hold bit becomes invalid (0000).
13 1100=7.2kbps V.29 1110=On hold 1101=7.2kbps V.17 1111=On hold 0
14 0
15 Line density (delicate FINE) R8 x 7.7 l/mm or 200 x 200 dpi 1 R8 x 7.7 l/mm
16 Encoding method (MR) 0
3 17 Recording width ability 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4/B4 0 A4
18 01=A4/B4/A3 11=Invalid 0
19 Ability to record length 00=A4(297mm) 10=A4(297mm) and B4(364mm) 0 No limit
20 01=No limit 11=Invalid 1
21 The receiver's minimum scanning time 000=20/20ms 100=5/5ms 101=40/20ms 1 0ms
22 (Line density = Std/Fine) 001=40/40ms 011=10/5ms 111=0/0ms 1
010=10/10ms 110=20/10ms
23 1

Confidential

hex 4 4
bin 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41

4 25 On hold 0
26 Uncompressed mode 0
27 Error correction mode (ECM) 1 ECM
28 Frame size 0= 256 oct 1=-64 oct 0 Frame size 256 oct
29 On hold 0
30 On hold 0
31 Encoding method (MMR T.6) 1 MMR
32 Extended field 0 Non Extended
5 33 Invalid field signal capability
34 Set to 0
35 Set to 0
36 Encoding method (T.43)
37 Plain interleave
38 32 k ADPCM audio coding (TTC JT-G726)
39 Hold for using the extended audio encoded
40 Extended field
6 41 Line density (high delicate / S-FINE) R8 x 15.4 l/mm
42 Line density(300) 300 x 300 dpi
43 Line density (Ultrahigh delicate / E-FINE) R16 x 15.4 l/mm or 400 x 400 dpi
44 Select resolution type 0: inch system resolution 1:milimater resolution
45 unused
46 unused
47 Set to 0
48 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65

7 49 Send Sub-address
50 Sending function identification sending
51 Set to 0
52 On hold
53 Binary file transfer (BFT)
54 Document transfer mode (DTM)
55 EDIFACT transfer mode (EDI)
56 Extended field
8 57 Basic transfer mode (DTM)
58 On hold
59 Set to 0
60 Character mode
61 On hold
62 mixed mode
63 On hold
64 Extended field
9 65 Processable Mode 26
66 Digital network capability
67 Full duplex / half duplex capability 0:half duplex control 1:full duplex control
68 Encoder mode (JPEG)
69 Full color mode
70 Huffman code table for preferential use
71 12 bit pixel / element
72 Extended field

Confidential

hex
bin 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
bit no. 80 79 78 77 76 75 74 73

10 73 No sub-sampling (1:1:1)
74 Nonstandard irradiation light
75 Non-standard color gamut range
76 North American(215.9 ×279.4 mm) letter capacity
77 North American (215.9 × 355.6 mm) legal ability
78 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) basic ability
79 Coding mode (JBIG single layer sequential coding T.85) Optional L = 0 ability
80 Extended field

Confidential
 How to use command/response log

The following explains the T.30 Protocol commands/responses in fax log.
Communication procedure can be checked in details.
Table 6-9. Commands/responses log_ Sample Example (Type = Sending)
Commands/
Time Direc
responses Data Description
(10ms) tion
name
01136 -> CSI 402020202020202020343332312035353520323430 Received a caller subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the receiver is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as TSI)
FCF=40
FIF=020202020202020343332312035353520323430
(ASCII character codes 20=space(S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSS1234S555S240”
If the order is reversed, >”042 555 1234 “
01136 -> DIS 8020C28AC480D5838018 Received a digital identification signal. (receiving capability)
01257 <- TSI 432020202020202020202031333231313233353330 Sent a transmitting subscriber ID (numeric ID).
The value of sender’s number registered in the sender is transmitted.
The number is entered with ASCII character codes. (Same as CSI)
FCF=43
FIF=2020202020202020202031333231313233353330
(ASCII character codes 20=space (S), 30 to 39=0 to 9, 2b=+)
ASCII conversion >“SSSSSSSSSS1321123530”
If the order is reversed, >”0353211231 “
01265 <- DCS 830042F844 Received a digital identification signal. (Sending mode).
<- TCF Sent a training signal (V17/V29/V27ter only)
01268 -> CFR 84 Received a confirmation for receive signal.
01331 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) /MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] The communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) : 33.6kbps(V.34)

Encoding method : MMR
Paper width : A4
Resolution : 8x7.7 (Fine)
Number of line (number of error line): 0(E:0) * when ECM = OFF

Confidential

Commands/
Time Direc
(10ms) tion
name
03130 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000FD Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F?FIF=0000FD (00=1st page, 00=1st block, FD=254 frames)
If the number of frame exceeds 256, separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
The frame size of PPS-NULL is always FF.
PPS-MPS is a signal of ECM mode. MPS is used in non-ECM mode.
03131 -> PPR BC00000000F8FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify the error frame: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Since 254 frames were sent, entry 1 to the 255th to 256th frame.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame. The request starts from 0000 0000 F8FFF FFFF. This
means that 35 frames (1st to 35th) are succeeded, and 259 frames
(the 36th to 254th) are required to retransmit.
03239 <- PIX FF Received a frame retransmission request for the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 0(E:0)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) :33.6kbps(V.34)
Paper width : A4
Number of line (number of error line) : 0(E:0) *. when ECM = OFF
04770 <- PPS-EOP BF2F0000DA Received a end of procedure signal (the 1st page finished without next page).
FCF=BF2F?FIF=0000DA (00=1st page, 00=1st block, DD = 219 frames)
04771 -> PPR BC0000000000000000000000F0FFFFFFFFFFFF Since there was an error in received PIX, specifies the error frame and requests
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF retransmission. (A signal of ECM mode)
How to specify error frames: Regard FFFF as one unit to represent 1 to 16 frames.
16 sets of FFFF mean 256 frames in total.
Entry 1 to the reception error frame.
The request starts from 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 00F0 FFFF.
This means that 57 frames (36th to 92nd) are succeeded, and 162 frames
(the 93rd to 254th) are required to retransmit.

Confidential

Commands/
Time Direc
(10ms) tion
name
03239 <- PIX FF Received the 1st page of image signal.
[33,600 bps(V.34) / MMR / A4 / 8x7.7 / 960(E:1)] Communication status is described within [ ].
Communication speed (Protocol) :33.6kbps (V.34)
Paper width : A4
Number of line (number of error line) : 960(E:1)
⇒ An error occurs after receiving the 960th line.
06612 <- DCN FB The communication became impossible due to the error. It ended in failure by receiving a
disconnect command from the sender.
PROTOCL V.34 Displays the protocol set when starting communication (V.34/V.17/V.29)
SPEED 33.600Bps (3429) Displays the speed of the last communication.
Symbol rates are shown in ()
CODING MMR Displays the encoding method set when starting communication (MMR/MR/MH)

Confidential
 Outline of the Command Response Log

Table 6-10. Outline of the command response log
Item Content
Time (10ms) The time when sent/received the signal. The difference of both time means the time of the signal.
Example) 02467 -> PIX
03289 -> PPS-MPS 03289 – 02467 = 822 x 10 ms = approx. 8.2 s (time of image signal)
Direction Sending or Receiving direction for signals. This differs from that of the sending or receiving in fax communication.
When sending a fax, signals (including image signal) and response signal become sending and receiving respectively.
These are reversed when receiving a fax.
Command/Response Name Defined in the first 2 digits or 4 digits of data in the FCF (Facsimile Control Field).
See “1.4.5.2 Abbreviation list of fax communication (fax recommendation T.30)”.
Data Data is composed of FCF (Facsimile Control Field) and FIF (Facsimile Information Field).
The first 2 digits (8 bits) or 4 digits (16 bits) stands for FCF, the latter means FIF.
Example 1) 03289 -> PPS-MPS?BF4F000031
FCF=BF4F=PPS-MPS
FIF=00=PC (page counter) page 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 pages)
00=BC(block counter) Block in the page is 1 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255= add 1 to make it 1 to 256 blocks)
31=FC(flame counter) number of frame 50 (0x00 to 0xFF=0 to 255=add 1 to make it 1 to 256 frames)
1 block consists of 256 frames.
If the number of frame exceeds 256,separates the page with PPS-NULL to send.
Example 2) PPS-NULL BF00xxxxFF

FCF=BF00
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0000FF=1st page, 1st block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the 2nd PPS-NULL in the 1st page:0001FF=1st page, 2nd block, 256th frame
FIF=FIF of the first PPS-NULL in the 2nd page:0100FF=2nd page, 2nd block, 256th frame

Confidential
6.4.2.3 FAX Function Check Report  Output Sample

Self check of Fax function is available.
Perform Fax Function Check to check the basic items of fax function and line (1)
connection. (2)
 Check Procedure (3)
[FAX] ⇒ [(Menu)] ⇒ [FAX Settings] ⇒ [Check FAX Connection]
Manual
= Perform the check, then select [Print] to print the result.
NOTE : Remote check is also available using FAX Utility. (4)
(5)
(1) Title etc. Same as FAX log.

(2) Name, Fax Same as FAX log.
For the description of check item, see “Fax Function
Check Operation flow”.
(3) Check Items
“5. Dial Tone Detection” is also checked even when it
is disabled in Fax Settings.
(4) Status Displays the check result.
(5) Solution Displays the remedy.

Confidential
6.4.3 FAX Error Code 6.4.3.2 Error code list
6.4.3.1 Overview Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
There are 2 types of error codes; 1) job’s error codes that are displayed in job communication Job history
report
history, 2) Fax communication’s error codes that are shown in fax report.
No tone Failure 203
Job’s error code Error Codes related to FAX Speaking Failure 204
Displayed in job history. Displayed in fax related report (such No response Failure 205
Display
as fax log, communication result Port Failure 206
position
report). inversion
Unit Job Fax Communication No circuit Failure 207
Target All jobs (Fax/Scan/Copy/Print) Fax job only connection
Failure 202 Received document length exceeds the
Format A 3 digit number Text or 3 alphanumeric characters 012 RX C
set value
Before starting fax communication (Phase A, line connected): The same RX/
212 Failure 202 (Modem): Data sending end error
contents of job and fax communication are displayed with different codes. TX
Remark After starting fax communication (Phase B or later): “Failure 202” is 220 Failure 202 An MCF is not sent after receiving data RX D
displayed for all jobs, “communication procedure error” is shown in fax
communication. 400 Failure 202 T1 timer timeout TX B
401 Failure 202 Received a DCN after sending DCS. TX B
Failure 202 Received a DCN during sending the
402 TX B
phase B.
Failure 202 Receiver dose not have polling sending RX
403 B
capability. (POL)
404 Failure 202 No response after sending DCS. TX B
405 Failure 202 Fall back is not possible in sending. TX B
406 Failure 202 A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/
DTC. TX B
(POL)
407 Failure 202 No response or received a DCN after
TX D
sending Postcommand.
408 Failure 202 Received a RTN. TX D
409 Failure 202 Received a PIN. TX D
Failure 202 Received a DCN during receiving
410 RX D
phase D.
Failure 202 Received a DCN after sending DTC. RX
411 B
(POL)

Confidential
Error Code Error Code

Result of Error description TX/RX Phase Result of Error description TX/RX Phase
communication Job history communication Job history
report report
412 Failure 202 Cannot receive DSN after sending FTT. RX B Failure 202 (V.34) Control channel end error V34
503 RX/ B,C,D
Failure 202 No response after sending DTC. RX
414 B TX
(POL)
TX Failure 202 (V.34) Polling sending request is RX
415 Failure 202 No document for polling sending. B 504 B
rejected in step V.8 (POL)
(POL)
416 Failure 202 Cannot receive Postcommand RX D Failure 202 (V.34) Rejected the polling sending TX
505 B
request in step V.8 (POL)
417 Failure 202 Sent RTN RX D
Failure 202 (ECM) No response or received a DCN
420 Failure 202 T1 timer timeout RX B 540 TX D
after sending CTC
422 Failure 202 Settings of DIS/DTC are disabled. TX B
Failure 202 (ECM) No response or received a DCN
541 TX D
427 Failure 202 Received a DCN after sending DIS RX B after sending EOR
Failure 202 (Modem): Frame length error RX/ Failure 202 (ECM) No response or received a DCN
433 B,D 542 TX D
TX after sending RR
Failure 202 (Modem): Frame wait timeout RX/ 543 Failure 202 (ECM) T5 timer timeout TX D
434 B,D
TX
544 Failure 202 (ECM) Sent DCN after sending EOR. TX D
Failure 202 Received a DCN after sending CFR/
436 RX C Failure 202 (ECM) An ERR is sent after receiving
FTT 550 RX C
EOR.
Failure 202 A DCN is sent after receiving DCS/ RX/
438 DTC. TX B Failure 202 The receiver dos not have F code
554 RX D
(POL) (password) capability.
Failure 202 Training error occurs when receiving Failure 202 The receiver (polling sending) does not
459 RX C 580 TX B
PIX. have F code (password) capability.
Failure 202 Number of error line exceeds the limit Failure 202 SUB/SID or SEP/PWD does not match. RX
490 RX C 582 B
value when receiving PIX. (POL)
494 Failure 202 (Modem): Timeout during EOL RX C Failure 202 (ECM) An ERR is sent after receiving RX/
826 EOR. TX B
Failure 202 Carrier disconnection during receiving (POL)
495 RX C
phase D
496 Failure 202 (Modem): Data sending start error TX B,C
Failure 202 (V.34) Modem inconsistency error V.34
501 RX/ B
TX
Failure 202 (V.34) Primary channel end error V3
502 4RX/ C
TX

Confidential
6.4.4 Fax-Related Telephone Line Check Mode 1-3.Push the [#]button after input the ID number, and confirm that
following screen is displayed on panel LCD.
This product is provided with the Line Measurement Mode as a function for
checking the state of the telephone line. UP:[2] / DOWN:[8]
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#]
C H E C K Use of this function allows this product to be used as a simple *****
P O IN T oscilloscope.
OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT
6.4.4.1 How to Start up the Line Measurement Mode

1. Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode”. 1-4.Push the [#]button on confirmation screen, and confirm that
“Authentication Mode” is started.
1-1. From Power Off Condition, push the [#] button and [Power] button
until the message is displayed on Panel LCD. Authentication Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
UP:[2] / DOWN:[8]
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#] 1. FAX Support Mode
2. FAX Maintenance Mode
1-5. Select the “FAX Maintenance Mode”, and push the [#] button.
1-2. Input the ID Number by the following operation method. Authentication Mode
Operation method Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button 1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
C H E C K Enter “91170” when starting the FAX Maintenance Mode.
P O IN T

Confidential
2. Start the “FAX Parameter Settings” 6.4.4.2 How to Check at Each Step of the Line Measurement Mode
2-1. Select the “FAX Parameter Setting”, and push [#] button. C H E C K  After the Line Measurement Mode is started up, perform
P O IN T checks according to the following steps.
FAX Maintenance Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8] 1. No-line Voltage Check
(Voltage check in line connected state
1. Line Measurement Mode
2. FAX Parameter Setting 2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
(Voltage check during on-hook in line connected
state)
3. Line Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook in line connected
2-2. Following screen is displayed on Panel LCD. state)
Waiting until the screen is changed. 4. Line Status DT/BT
Preparation the select mode (Dial tone/busy tone state check)
5. Line Status IR
Please wait. (Call signal state check)
6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook in external call
connected state)
 To skip a check item, press the [*] button in the respective
step screen.
 The check results in the Line Measurement Mode can be
checked as a list after all items have been checked.
Check result data can also be saved on external memory
(USB memory).
 When the following setting is selected, checks in the Line
Measurement Mode cannot be performed correctly.
To perform checks in the Line Measurement Mode,
temporarily change the following settings to values other
than those below:
• Number of calls = 0
• Number display compatibility = "ON"

Confidential
2. Line Voltage (Onhook)

1. No-line Voltage Check
(Line voltage check during on-hook in line connected state)
(Line voltage check in line non-connected state)
2-1. The following [Line Voltage (Onhook)] screen appears.
1-1. After the Line Measurement Mode is started up, the following screen
appears. FAX Line Measurement
2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
FAX Line Measurement
1.No-Line Voltage Check Please contact the line and
push “Run”.
Please remove the line and
push “Run”.
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Run:[#] / Skip:[*] Figure 6-22. Line Voltage (Onhook) Procedure (1)

2-2. Connect the telephone line to the Line port, and press the [*] button.
Figure 6-20. No-line Measurement Check Procedure (1)
2-3.The line voltage check results are displayed as shown below.*1
1-2. Remove the telephone line from the Line port, and press the [*] button.
1-3. The line voltage check results are displayed as shown below.*1 2. Line Voltage (Onhook)
FAX Line Measurement Now measuring...

1.No-Line Voltage Check 48.0 [V]
Now measuring... If you want to go to next step,

0.0 [V] push “Run”.
If you want to go to next step,

Run:[#]
push “Run”.
Figure 6-23. Line Voltage (Onhook) Procedure (2)

Run:[#]
2-4. Press the [*] button and go to the check of the next step.
Figure 6-21. No-line Measurement Check Procedure (2)
C H E C K Press the [*] button a few seconds after line voltage
1-4. Press the [*] button and go to the check of the next step. P O IN T fluctuations have stabilized or when it is known when there
will be a fluctuation if fluctuations continue.
*1: Values in the screen are for reference only.

Confidential
3. Line Voltage (Offhook) 4. Line Status (DT/BT) (Dial tone/busy tone state check)
(Line voltage check during off-hook in line connected state)
C H E C K In this step, check and make a record of the two states, dial
3-1. The [Line Voltage (Offhook)] screen appears. P O IN T tone state and busy tone state.
FAX Line Measurement Record the results of the state checks each time that the [*]
3. Line Voltage (Offhook) button is pressed.
The dial tone transitions to the busy tone after fixed time
Please push “Run”. elapses. For this reason, note that the check results will no
longer be able to be recorded correctly if they are not
recorded during the dial tone.
4-1. The [Line Status (DT/BT)] screen appears.

Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Figure 6-24. Line Voltage (Offhook) Procedure (1) 4. Line Status (DT/BT)
3-2. Check that the telephone line is connected, and press the [*] button.
Please push “Run”
3-3. The line voltage check results are displayed as shown below.*1

3. Line Voltage (Offhook)
Now measuring... Run:[#] / Skip:[*]

6.0 [V]
Figure 6-26. Line Status (DT/BT) Procedure (1)
push “Run”. 4-2. Press the [*] button, and check the DT (dial tone) status.
Run:[#]
Figure 6-25. Line Voltage (Offhook) Procedure (2)

3-4. Press the [*] button and go to the check of the next step.
C H E C K Press the [*] button a few seconds after line voltage

P O IN T fluctuations have stabilized or when it is known when there
will be a fluctuation if fluctuations continue.

Confidential
4-3. When the dial tone status check result appears as shown in the The screen is as follows in the case of an intermittent dial tone on a PBX.
following screen, press the [*] button.*1
C H E C K  The [*] button must be pressed at the same time that 4. Line Status (DialTone)
P O IN T fluctuation of values stabilizes and before the dial Now measuring...
tone transitions to the busy tone. Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
(Although the time is dependent on the printer being On : 120 [ms]
Off : 130 [ms]
replaced, the dial tone normally takes 20 to 30
seconds to transition to the busy tone.) When you save the DT Info,
push “Run”.
 [On: Continuous] appears when the dial tone is a
continuous tone. Run:[#]
 [Lv: Too high] appears when the signal level of the Figure 6-28. Line Status (DT/BT) Procedure (3)
dial tone is too high. 4-4. Then, the following screen appears.
Check that the dial tone has switched to the busy tone, and that the on-
FAX Line Measurement screen values also have changed.*1
4. Line Status (DialTone)
Now measuring... C H E C K  [Lv: Too high] appears when the signal level of the
Lv : -20.0 [dBm] P O IN T busy tone is too high.
On : Continuous [ms]
Off : ----- [ms]
When you save the DT Info,
push “Run”. FAX Line Measurement
4. Line Status (BusyTone)
Run:[#]
Now measuring...
Figure 6-27. Line Status (DT/BT) Procedure (2) Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
On : 500 [ms]
Off : 500 [ms]
When you save the BT Info,
push “Run”.
Then you go to next step.
Run:[#]
Figure 6-29. Line Status (DT/BT) Procedure (4)
4-5. Press the [*] button, and place a call to the telephone number of the
printer fax.

Confidential
5. Line Status (IR) (Call signal state check) 6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
(Voltage check during off-hook in external call connected state)
5-1. The [Line Status (IR)] screen appears.
6-1. The [EXT Voltage (Offhook)] screen appears.
5. Line Status (IR) FAX Line Measurement
6. EXT voltage (Offhook)
Please push “Run” and call it. If you use ext-telephone,
Please connect the telephone.
And pick up the handset,
then push “Run”.
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
Figure 6-30. Line Status (IR) Procedure (1)
Figure 6-32. EXT Voltage (Offhook) Procedure (1)
5-2. Press the [*] button, and place a call to the telephone number of the
6-2. Connect the telephone line to the EXT port on the product, and press
printer fax.
the [*] button with the handset raised.
5-3. Check that the check results are displayed as shown in the following
6-3. The check results appear as follows.*1
screen.*1
6. EXT Voltage (Offhook)
5. Line Status (IR)
Now measuring... Now measuring...
Freq : 16.0 [Hz] 6.0 [V]
On : 1000 [ms]
Off : 2000 [ms]
hang up and push “Run”.
If you want to go to next step.
stop calling and push “Run”.
Run:[#]
Run:[#]
Figure 6-33. EXT Voltage (Offhook) Procedure (2)
Figure 6-31. Line Status (IR) Procedure (2)
6-4. Press the [*] button, and place the handset down.
5-4. Press the [*] button, end the call, and go to the next step.
C H E C K  Press the [*] button a few seconds after line voltage
P O IN T fluctuations have stabilized or when it is known when
there will be a fluctuation if fluctuations continue.

Confidential
7. Check Results List 8. Saving the check results

The following check results list appears after checking of all steps ends.  Data is saved on USB memory as follows:
C H E C K
P O IN T • Data save format: text format (.txt)
C H E C K  [Skipped] is displayed for check items that were skipped. • Filename : LM_RESULT yyymmddhhmmss.TXT
P O IN T ("LM_RESULT" appended with date that data
was saved)
 If a USB memory is not available, manually note down the
check results.
7-1. The check results screen (1st page) appears.  When the [*] button is pressed without a USB memory
Press the [*] button to go to the next page. connected, [Fail] appears.
7-2. The check results screen (2nd page) appears. (If this happens, connect a USB memory. Saving of data
can be retried.)
To go to the next step, press the [#] button, and to return to the
previous page (1st page) of the check results screen, press the [*] 8-1. In the following screen, connect a USB memory, and press the [*]
button. button.
FAX Line Measurement FAX Line Measurement FAX Line Measurement

Result Result Save Result (USB)
No-Line : **.** - **.** [V] IR Freq :
Line (OnHk) : **.** - **.** [V] IR-On :
Line (OffHk) : Skipped IR-Off : Please connect the USB-Memory,
DT Lv : ****** [dBm] EXT (OffHk) : then push “Run”
DT-On : Continuous
DT-Off : Skipped
BT Lv : Too high If you want to go to next step.
BT-On : ****** [ms] push “Run”.
BT-Off : ****** [ms] Run:[#] / Skip:[*]
NextPage:[*] Run:[#] / PrePage:[*]

Figure 6-35. Check Results Save Procedure (1)
Figure 6-34. Check Results Screen Display

Confidential
8-2. The following screen appears to indicate that saving of check results to  Sample saved check data
USB memory is completed.
No-Line : 0.0 - 0.0 [V]
Line (OnHk) : 48.0 - 48.0 [V]
Save Result (USB)
Line (OffHk) : 6.0 - 6.0 [V]
Success!
DT Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
DT-On : Continuous
If you want to go to next step. DT-Off : ------- [ms]
Push “Run”
BT Lv : -20.0 [dBm]
BT-On : ?500 [ms]
Run:[#] BT-Off : 500 [ms]
IR Freq : 16.0 [Hz]
Figure 6-36. Check Results Save Procedure (2) IR-On : 1000 [ms]
8-3. Press the [#] button to go to the final page. IR-Off : 2000 [ms]
8-4. In the final page, press the power button to end [FAX Line EXT(OffHk) : 6.0 - 6.0 [V]
Measurement].
Finish
Figure 6-38. Sample saved check data
Push “Power” to turn off.
Figure 6-37. Check Results Save Procedure (3)

Confidential
6.4.5 FAX Service Parameter  Make sure not to change the parameter before identifying
To support by country or trouble, this product is equipped with the service the phenomenon and cause of the trouble.
parameters in addition to user mode parameters. Make sure to identify the phenomenon and cause of the trouble
before changing the parameter. Otherwise, the essential trouble may
Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode” from the special mode to change settings be hidden that result in recurrence the trouble or cause of another
with the service parameters. problem.
According to the explanation in 6.7.6.1 Basics of FAX
troubleshooting (p.281), perform in the following procedure.
6.4.5.1 Outline of setting change in FAX Maintenance Mode
• Step1: Check the symptom
The following shows the procedure for settings change in FAX Maintenance • Step2: Identify the cause
Mode. • Step3: Correction
1. Enter “FAX Parameter Mode”. When the identification of the cause is difficult, check the symptom
as accurately as possible to acquire setting information of the
2. Start “FAX Parameter Settings”. product, then inquire at support center.
3. Select the item to be changed, then input the value.  Parameters differ from those on the WF-R8590. Do not
use the RAM-Edit mode on this product.
4. Press the [Power] button to turn off the power. Before changing parameters, check the setting items at FAX
Parameter Settings.
 Initialization of fax-related service parameter parameters
At [Return to Default Setting] → [Fax Settings], items whose
settings have been changed in user parameters are initialized but
items whose settings have been changed in service parameters are
not initialized.
At [Return to Default Setting] → [All Settings], items whose
settings have been changed in service parameters also are initialized
but settings other than fax settings and address book information
also are initialized.
To initialize items whose settings have been changed in service
parameters, select [FAX Support Mode] → [FAX All Data Initial].
(By doing this, address information is not initialized.)

Confidential
6.4.5.2 Parameter changing procedure 1-4. Push the [#]button on confirmation screen, and confirm that
“Authentication Mode” is started.
1. Start the “FAX Maintenance Mode”.
1-1.From Power Off Condition, push the [#] button and [Power] button Authentication Mode
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
until the message is displayed on Panel LCD.
1. FAX Support Mode
UP:[2] / DOWN:[8] 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#]
1-5. Select the “FAX Maintenance Mode”, and push the [#] button.
Authentication Mode
1-2. Input the ID Number by the following operation method.
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
Operation method
1. FAX Support Mode
• Number input (move in ascending order) : [2] button 2. FAX Maintenance Mode
• Number input (move in descending order) : [8] button
C H E C K Enter “91170” when starting the FAX Maintenance
P O IN T Mode.
1-3. Push the [#]button after input the ID number, and confirm that
following screen is displayed on panel LCD.
UP:[2] / DOWN:[8]
SHIFT:[6] / Fin:[#]
*****
OK:FIN Retry:SHIFT

Confidential
2. Start the “FAX Parameter Settings” 3. Select the changing item, and enter the setting number.
2-1. Select the “FAX Parameter Setting”, and push [#] button. Enter the number of changing item (3 digit), and push the [#] button.
FAX Maintenance Mode

C H E C K  If “---” is displayed on the right side of the number of
Run:[#] / Select:[2][8]
P O IN T changing number (3 digit), it is an item with no
1. Line Measurement Mode parameter assignment.
2. FAX Parameter Settings
 There are the following two types of setting change
items, and the changing method is different.
• Parameter of selection type :Select Setting value
• Parameter of input type : Enter Setting value
2-2. Following screen is displayed on Panel LCD.
Regarding detail of changing method, refer to the
Waiting until the screen is changed. (About 1 minute)
next pages.
Preparing the Selected Mode
Please Waite
FAX Parameter Setting

[000]
000 PARAMLIST PRINT
001 RAMEDIT PRINT
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT
007 PTCL LOG MULTI SAVE
008 ---
009 ---
Select:[0-9] or [:] / Enter:[#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in selection type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “DIAL TONE DETECT” is changing from [On] when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
to [Off] condition. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number(060), and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
Input number [060]
060 DIAL TONE DETECT Value after 060 DIAL TONE DETECT
061 DT DET TIME Current: Off
change
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX)
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME
065 ---
066 --- Parameter is set
067 ---
068 --- Back to Parameter List : [#]
069 --- Finish: [Power]
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Select the “01. Off” by [*]button, and push the [#]button.

060 DIAL TONE DETECT
Current Current : On
state
Select New Value

[00]
S el ect ion 00. On
items 01. Off
Select: [0-9] or [*] / Enter: [#]

Confidential
 Example of setting change in input type parameter 3. The following complete message is displayed.
 Initial setting value of “TX SIGNAL LEVEL” is changing from when changing the parameter setting continuously, push the [#] button
[-10dBm] to [-15dBm]. and move to the parameter select screen.
When finish the parameter setting, push the [Power] button and turn
1. Input the applicable item’s number, and push the [#]button.
off the printer.
[120]
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
Input number 120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL Current : 15 [-dBm]
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL
122 TX EQUALIZER
123 RX EQUALIZER
124 --- Parameter is set
125 ---
126 ---
127 --- Back to Parameter List: [#]
128 --- Finish: [Power]
129 ---
Select:[0-9] or [*] / Enter:[#]
2. Setting change screen is displayed.

Input the setting value (15) by number key, and push the [#]button.

120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL
Current Current : 10 [-dBm]
state
Input New Value

Input setting
value [ 15] ( 0 - 15)
Settable range
of setting value
Input: [0-9] / Set:[#]

Confidential
6.4.5.3 FAX Service Parameter Table

Table 6-11. FAX Service Parameter Table
No. Parameter Name Setting Range Initial value Unit Remark
000 PARAMLIST PRINT On Off
Off
001 RAMEDIT On Off
Off
002 ---
003 ---
004 ---
005 PTCL LOG ON ERROR On Off When set to ON, only the protocol monitor log of the communication error
Off is saved.
006 PTCL LOG AUTO PRINT On Off When set to on, the protocol monitor log is automatically printed after
Off communication.
007 ---
008 ---
009 ---
010 IR DETECT LEVEL 13 ~ 60 13 Vrms Minimum call signal detection level
It is possible to avoid troubles by changing the setting value in the case
where the call signal is erroneously detected due to the influence of noise.
However, if the set value is set too high, it is impossible to detect the calling
signal itself, so caution is required.
NTT line standard for call signal detection is 75 (65 to 83) Vms, but
generally ONU of PBX / optical line is lower than this standard.
When changing this value, the ringing signal is measured with an
oscilloscope, the ringing signal can be detected and no noise is detected. It
is necessary to search for set values.
[Supplement]
Conversion formula of effective value and call signal value measured by
oscilloscope
Rms value
011 IR DET FRQ MIN 11 ~ 21 12 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
012 IR DET FRQ MAX 27 ~ 80 66 Hz frequency.
In the case of connection line PSTN, the initial value is detected in the
range of 12 to 66 Hz

Confidential

013 IR DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 11 ~ 21 11 Hz Set the lower limit value / upper limit value of the ringing signal detection
014 IR DET FRQ MAX (PBX) 27 ~ 80 80 Hz frequency.
In the case of connection line PBX, the initial value is detected in the range
of 11 to 80 Hz
015 IR ON TIME MIN 9 ~ 30 15 x10ms Minimum time to recognize call signal ON
If it is shorter than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
answer incoming call.
(The ringing tone sounds when ON at 80 ms)
016 IR ON TIME MAX 50 ~ 80 80 x100ms Maximum time to recognize call signal ON
If it is longer than this time, it does not judge it as a call signal and does not
answer incoming call.(The ringing tone sounds)
017 IR OFF TIME MIN 6 ~ 10 10 x100ms Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected, the
calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Do not count if the off interval is shorter than this.
Reference value for connection line PSTN.
018 IR OFF TIME MAX 40 ~ 125 40 x100ms If the off time is longer than this, it is judged that the call signal has
disappeared.
The call signal count is reset, the calling display disappears
019 IR OFF TIME MIN (PBX) 200 ~ 1000 600 ms Call signal off confirmation time
When the calling signal OFF time longer than this setting is detected,
the calling signal is counted as 1 time.
Reference value when connection count = PBX
020 RING DETECT COUNT 0~ 15 1 times Linked with [number of times of call] of fax setting
021 ---
022 ---
023 ---
024 ---
025 ---
026 ---
027 ---
028 ---
029 ---
030 DIAL TYPE Tone Tone Linked with [Dial type] of fax setting
10PPS
20PPS

Confidential

031 DIAL PAUSE TIME 1 ~ 255 30 x100ms Used to register a fax number in the address book.
Changing the pause waiting time to enter with the pause button.
032 FAX SIGNAL WAIT TIME 1 ~ 255 55 sec This function changes when the response of the partner fax is slow and
exceeds the response waiting time.
It is the same effect as putting a pose with a pause button after dialing.
033 BROADCAST INTVAL 1 ~ 65536 6 sec When executing multiple destination sequential broadcasting, if it is only
TIME sending set it short.
If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
Change "038 JOB INTERVALTIME" by a set.
034 REDIAL INTERVAL 0 ~ 15 3 min Linked with [Automatic Redial Interval] of fax setting
035 REDIAL COUNT 0 ~ 15 3 times Linked with [Number of automatic redials] of fax setting
036 FORWARD RETRY 0 ~ 255 0 min In the fax to folder / fax to mail transfer, the transfer retry period and
INTERVAL number setting when a transfer error occurs (server side power off).
037 FORWARD RETRY 0 ~ 255 0 times  Setting Example
COUNT • FORWARD RETRY INTERVAL = 30
• FORWARD RETRY COUNTER = 144
Retry 144 times with 30 minute cycle
Continue retry for 3 days
 Precautions for setting
When multiple transfer destinations are set, one transfer job is in a retry
wait state due to an error
Other jobs are not executed until the retry waiting job is completed
(remain in the execution waiting state)
038 JOB INTERVAL TIME 1 ~ 65536 6 sec In the case of an environment where a plurality of transmission jobs are
always accumulated as execution waiting jobs,
If you only send, set it to shorter.
If you also want to receive, leave a longer interval to set incoming calls
longer.
039 ---
040 DTMF HI SIG LVL 0 ~ 15 8 -dBm Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (high group frequency)

Confidential

041 DTMF LO SIG LVL (DIF) +2.0dB -2.0dB Adjustment of sending level of DTMF transmission (low group
~ frequency)
-5.5dB Difference from high group frequency
 Example
High group frequency transmission level = -8dBm
Difference in low group frequency transmission level= -2dBm
→ Low group frequency transmission level= -10dBm
042 DTMF SEND TIME 5 ~ 25 10 x10ms Transmission time of high group frequency DTMF transmission.
043 DTMF INTER-DIGIT TIME 5 ~ 25 12 x10ms Adjusting inter-digit pause time.
Dial speed can be increased by decreasing set value.
However, too late may cause dial tone false detection, incorrect connection.
Do not set it shorter than 70-70 ms.
Make sure to perform dial confirmation test after change to confirm that
there is no incorrect connection.
044 ---
045 ---
046 ---
047 ---
048 ---
049 ---
050 TONE DETECT LEVEL 28 ~ 43 28 -dBm Share with dial tone / busy tone.
051 TONE DET FRQ MIN 24 ~ 38 30 x10Hz
052 TONE DET FRQ MAX 47 ~ 67 50 x10Hz
053 TONE DET FRQ MIN (PBX) 245 ~ 350 245 Hz
054 TONE DET FRQ MAX 470 ~ 670 670 Hz
(PBX)
055 ---
056 ---
057 ---
058 ---
059 AUTO LINE CHECK On ON If there is no problem with telephone line or telephone line connection, set
OFF to off when [automatic line check function] false detection [line
unconnected] or 'line reverse insertion' error occurs.

Confidential

060 DIAL TONE DETECT On On
OFF
061 DT DET TIME 5 ~ 25 10 x100ms
062 DT OFF IGNR TIME 5 ~ 28 28 x10ms In the initial setting, if the dial tone is detected for 1000 ms, it is judged that
there is a dial tone.
*The dial tone detection waiting time is fixed at 10s.
063 DT OFF IGNR TIME (PBX) 50 ~ 350 320 ms The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as a dial tone
continuation.
‘Connection line = PSTN
064 DT OFF PRE-PAUSE TIME 20 ~ 2550 30 x100ms The dial tone off time of this set value is regarded as continuation of dial
tone.
‘Connection line = PBX
065 ---
066 ---
067 ---
068 ---
069 ---
070 BUSY TONE DETECT On On
Off
071 BT DET ON TIME MIN 5 ~ 65 40 x10ms Minimum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
Shorter than this time does not judge it to be a busy tone.
072 BT DET ON TIME MAX 30 ~ 100 60 x10ms Maximum time to recognize busy tone signal on.
Longer than this time does not judge it as a busy tone.
073 BT DET OFF TIME MIN 4 ~ 65 40 x10ms Busy tone signal off confirmation time.
Upon detecting the busy tone signal off time longer than this setting, the
number of busy tone signals is counted as one.
074 BT DET OFF TIME MAX 30 ~ 100 60 x10ms If the OFF time is longer than this, it is judged that the busy tone signal has
disappeared.
(Busy tone signal count is reset)
075 BT DET COUNT 2~4 4 times
076 ---
077 ---
078 ---

Confidential

079 ---
080 TCF CHECK Normal Normal Level of judgment of line training.
Long If you make it long, more train the line situation. (It makes fall back easier)
081 CED-DIS INTERVAL 75ms 75ms Set the signal interval time between the CED signal and the DIS signal
1sec selected at incoming call.
To disable the echo suppressor overseas communication, set it to 1s.
082 REMOTE RX PB DET TIME 1 ~ 255 3 x10ms Adjust detection time of remote reception push signal.
083 ERROR LINE MODE Rate Line Switching of error judgment mode of No-ECM reception.
Line Select number of error lines or error line rate.
084 ERROR LINE NUM 0 line 0 line If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is
64 line over and turn off the line.
128 line * "0 line" operates with internal initial value = "128 line".
192 line
256 line
1024 line
2048 line
085 ERROR LINE RATE 0% 0% If this setting value is exceeded during reception, judge that the error is
5% over and turn off the line.
10% * "0 %" operates with internal initial value = "10 %".
15%
20%
086 ----
087 ---
088 ---
089 ---
090 RX COLOR SUPPORT Disable A4/B4/A3 Use this when you want to disable color reception.
A4 (Disable)
A4/B4 Drop the color reception capability bit from the DIS signal sent at the
A4/B4/A3 incoming call.
Since the transmitting side has no color receiving ability, color transmission
is not performed.
When you enable "A4" "A4 / B4" "B4 / A3" "A3" paper with fax, reduction
color reception capability bit from DIS signal sent at incoming call.

Confidential

091 RX PAPER WIDTH A4 Auto Regardless of the paper size set in the apparatus,
A4/B4 It is used when you want to specify the paper width to receive fax fixed.
A4/B4/A3 When changed, the receiving sheet width capability bit of the DIS signal to
Auto be sent at the time of incoming call changes.
 Example of use
 When sending an A3 / B4 document on the sender side, judge
whether to transmit with A3 / B4 width or reduced size by looking at
the receiving paper width capability bit of the DIS signal of the
receiver.
When the receiving sheet width capability bit = A 4, the image is
reduced / cut to A 4 and transmitted.
 A3 / B4 paper is not set on the device, but fax reception is done with
A3 / B4 and received as electronic data of A3 / B4 size by external
memory save / transfer
(Used when split printing is performed in full scale with substitution
output)
092 RX MAX LENGTH 1 ~ 65536 650 mm When the received original length exceeds this set value, the reception is
forcibly terminated.
093 ---
094 ---
095 ---
096 ---
097 ---
098 ---
099 ---
100 REDUCT/CUTOUT SEND Reduction Send Reduction Send Process setting when the transmission document width differs from the
CutOut Send LEFT recording width of the receiver at the time of transmission
CutOUT Send CENTER  Reduction Send = Reduction and sending
CutOUT Send RIGHT  CutOut Send LEFT = Cut the Left end, and sending on original size.
 CutOut Send CENTER = Cut the both end, and sending on original size.
 CutOut Send Right = Cut the Right end, and sending on original size.
101 V.29 EP TONE On Off When sending V299600 / 7200 bps, add an echo suppressor tone.
Off It is used when a communication error has occurred due to the influence of
line echo of overseas communication.

Confidential

102 1ST DIS IGNORE On Off Ignore the first DIS at the time of transmission and receive from the second
Off DIS.
103 RTC (EOL x12) On Off Select RTC signal [EOL × 6 / EOL × 12] at the end of the PIX signal
Off (switch from high speed to low speed)
104 ---
105 ---
106 ---
107 ---
108 ---
109 ---
110 COMM MONITOR Until Detect Until Detect  Until Detect
Always The monitor turns on when sending out and turns off when it detects a
facsimile signal.
 Always
The monitor is always on.
Since it is possible to listen to the signal at fax communication from the
monitor speaker, it is used at the time of investigation of image defect
trouble.
After troubleshooting confirmation, remember to return to original.
111 MODEM MODE V.27ter V.34 Linking with communication mode of fax setting
V.17 V.34 requires ECM
V.29
V.34
112 CODING MH MMR MMR requires ECM
MR
MMR
113 ECM Off On It is linked with error correction (ECM) of fax setting.
On When ECM = OFF, V34 / MMR / color communication becomes invalid.
114 SIGNAL INTERVAL 100 ms 100 ms Procedure Adjust signal time between signals.
200 ms When an error occurs in communication procedure due to line echo / delay
300 ms etc.
115 ---
116 ---
117 ---

Confidential

118 ---
119 ---
120 TX SIGNAL LEVEL 0 ~ 15 10 -dBm If communication data error occurs, adjustment will improve symptoms.
121 RX SIGNAL DET LEVEL -48 dBm -43dBm When a communication data error occurs, if the line noise is high,
-43 dBm it is improved by lowering the sensitivity (-43 dBm → -38 dBm, -33 dBm)
-38 dBm
-33 dBm
122 TX EQUALIZER 0 dB 0 dB When a sending error occurs due to poor line characteristics.
1.8 dB
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
123 RX EQUALIZER 0 dB 3.6 dB When there is a reception error due to poor line characteristics.
1.8 dB
3.6 dB
7.2 dB
124 ---
125 ---
126 ---
127 ---
128 ---
129 ---
130 TX SPEED 2400 bps 14400 bps Setting transmission start speed in V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps

Confidential

131 RX SPEED 2400 bps 14400 bps Setting the reception start speed of V17 / V29 / V27ter mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
TC7200 bps
TC9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
132 V.34 TX SPEEED 2400 bps 33600 bps Setting transmission start speed of V34 mode.
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps
133 V.34 RX SPEED 2400 bps 33600 bps Setting the transmission symbol rate of V34 mode
4800 bps
7200 bps
9600 bps
12000 bps
14400 bps
16800 bps
19200 bps
21600 bps
24000 bps
26400 bps
28800 bps
31200 bps
33600 bps

Confidential

134 V.34 TX SYM RATE 2400 sym/s 3429sym/s Setting the reception symbol rate of V34 mode.
2800 sym/s
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s
135 V.34 RX SYM RATE 2400 sym/s 3429 sym/s Setting the reception symbol rate of V34 mode.
2800 sym/s
3000 sym/s
3200 sym/s
3429 sym/s
136 ---
137 ---
138 ---
139 ---

Confidential
6.4.6 Fax related user special parameters 6.4.6.1 Emergency ejection of fax reception document (FAX to PC)
In this product, special parameters are prepared for the following users. Using the PC FAX reception function, urgently remove the received original
document file (.PDF) that can not be printed.
FAX to PC  Emergency ejection of received fax document PC fax reception can be taken out by both USB / network.
FAX to Memory When a facsimile received document becomes unprintable due to a The original file of fax reception is deleted from the product after transfer.
malfunction of the printer function, the fax reception original file
can be urgently taken out.
 FAX to PC  Work Procedure
Install FAX Utility on a PC connected to the product via USB or
network, and take out fax received original file using PC - FAX 1. Start “User Special Mode”.
reception function. 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
 FAX to Memory press and hold the power switch.
Remove the FAX received document to the USB external Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
memory connected to the product.
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate "User Special Mode".
C H E C K When using "user special mode", confirm the ID number

P O IN T to the Service Support.
2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select "FAX to PC" from the menu and press
the [#] button to execute.
User Special Mode

Run : [#] / Select : [2][8]
1. Password Initialization
2. FAX to PC
3. FAX to Memory

Confidential
3. When the following screen is displayed, execute setting of PC FAX 6.4.6.2 Emergency ejection of received fax documents
reception from PC with USB or network connection with product. (FAX to Memory)
Using the USB memory, urgently remove fax received original file (.PDF) that can not
FAX to PC be printed.
The received fax document file is transferred to the "￥ EPFAX RCV" folder
Change save mode from PC. of the USB memory. (Folders are automatically generated)
The fax receiving document is deleted from the product after transfer.
4. After PC FAX reception setting is completed, "Ready" is displayed and  Work Procedure
transfer is started.
1. Start “User Special mode”.
FAX to PC 1-1.Turn off the power of the printer once, hold down the # button and
press and hold the power switch.
Long press until the following message appears on the panel LCD.
Ready
1-2.Enter the ID number and activate "User Special Mode".
C H E C K When using "user special mode", confirm the ID number

5. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed. P O IN T to the Service Support.
Press the [Power] button to turn off the product.
FAX to PC
2. Press the [2] and [8] buttons, select "FAX to Memory" from the menu and
press the [#] button to execute.
Completed. Push [Power]
User Special Mode
Run : [#] / Select : [2][8]
1. Password Initialization
After the transfer of the received original file is completed, 2. FAX to PC
Turn on the power again and turn off PC FAX reception 3. FAX to Memory

Confidential
3. When the following message is displayed on the screen, connect the USB 6. When the transfer is completed, the following message is displayed on the
memory to the product. screen.
Press the "Power" button to turn off the product.
FAX to Memory
FAX to Memory
Insert a Memory Card.
Completed. Push [Power]
4. When the USB memory is detected, the following message is displayed,

so press the [#] button to create the folder.
(If this folder already exists in USB memory, this screen will be skipped)
FAX to Memory
No Folder, Create it [Start]
5. “Storing” is displayed and transfer is started.
FAX to Memory
Storing

Confidential
6.4.7 Fax related troubleshooting  Troubleshoot basic step details
6.4.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics Step 1: Accurately understand and identify trouble symptoms.
In this step we check 5 points.
To troubleshoot fax troubleshooting with the following steps.
1. What is the symptom of the trouble?
 Troubleshooting basic step  Who is reporting the trouble?
(User, administrator, communication partner of the printer)
 Step 1: Accurately grasp and identify trouble symptoms.
 What kind of error code / error message are occurring?
 Step 2: Investigate the trouble error and specify the cause. (Communication management report, job history, protocol monitor log)
 Step 3: Correct the problem.  What kind of trouble is occurring?
(Please understand concretely that you can not transmit, can not receive, can not
send and receive, or the received image is dirty)
Example) Can not sending
In particular, step 1 is very important. → I can dial, but it can not connect with the other party.
Communication is started with the other party but communication
Fax related troubles occur not only in the trouble caused by the own machine,
error occurs.
but also due to troubles caused by the partner machine, troubles caused by the Communication is possible but the image is dirty
telephone line, troubles caused by usage, and the like occur in a combined 2. Where is the trouble occurring?
manner.  Occurred in printer, occurred in application, occurred in specific PC.
When trouble occurs, hear the customer trouble content / situation well  Printer / PC of customer site, printer of customer office, equipment of customer's
communication partner.
"Who is in trouble with what?" 3. When will the trouble occur?
"What is in trouble?"  When has it occurred?
"How can you satisfy our customers?"  Is it occurring at a specific time?
 Frequency of occurrence (always occurring, about once in 10 times).
Accurately understanding and identify.  Before trouble occurrence of environment.
Thereafter, step 2 is performed, and the process proceeds to step 3.  Has the environment changed before the problem occurred?
If troubleshooting in step 3 is skipped by skipping steps 1 and 2, the original (Firm update, replacing ink cartridge, changed telephone line, moved the
installation location)
trouble will not be known.
4. What kind of operations and conditions will cause trouble?
As a result, it may cause trouble recurrence and another trouble to be induced.  When trouble occurs, is it always the same operation?
 Does the problem occur only when a specific event occurs?
 Does the same problem occur with another device or another destination
communication?
5. Can you reproduce the trouble?
 Has the same trouble occurred also at the service base?
 Does the same problem occur with multiple devices and users?
 Can the trouble be reproduced by a specific operation or a specific opponent?

Confidential
Step 2: Determine the cause by investigating the error of the trouble.

When a fax related error occurs, it is not only displayed on the panel but also recorded
as a log / report.
Refer also to these logs / reports and investigate and identify the cause of the trouble.
 Survey and collect communication management reports, protocol monitor
logs, and job history displays.
(Enable error code to be displayed by setting “report format” of communication
management report to “detailed information”)
 In outgoing trouble / communication trouble, in "PCM RECORDER"
communication recording and incoming trouble, “Measure the call signal on the
oscilloscope” is done.
 Investigate the cause based on the survey results.
 It is essential to understand the phase of facsimile transmission / reception in the
investigation of fax communication error.
Investigate with reference to logs / reports as to whether each phase error of
transmission / reception is somewhere.
 Ask the smart charge center as necessary
Step 3: Resolve the problem
If the cause can be identified, implement the countermeasure.
Depending on the cause content, it can be restored by changing the setting of the user /
service parameter.

Confidential
6.4.7.2 Equipment information necessary for fax trouble report. Report /Log name Print Procedure Remark
If it is difficult to identify the cause of the problem, contact the smart charge 6 Usage history “Setup” → “Printing main body
center for the following information. sheet status sheet” → “Specification
history sheet”
 Symptom report of trouble 7 Epson Status “Setup” → “Network Network status sheet
(6.4.7.1 Fax troubleshooting basics) by referring to basic step 1 of fax Sheet information” → “Check network
troubleshooting.) information” → “Print”
8 Sending Communication time is slow,
 Device setting information document, picture quality is bad, etc
(Please see below for contents. sample of
Information 1 to 6 is required to report the fax trouble.) received
document
Report /Log name Print Procedure Remark
1 Communicati “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” Print with report type =
on → “Print” → “Communication “detailed information”.
management management report”. When symptoms rarely occur,
report  Report format automatically print and acquire
“Setup” → “System multiple sheets.
administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Report format” → “Detailed
information”.
 Auto print
“Setup” → “System
administration setting” → “Fax
setting” → “Output setting” →
“Communication management
report automatic printing”→
“On (every 30 items)”
2 Protocol log “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report” Logs that are experiencing
→ “Print” → “Protocol log” trouble symptomatic errors are
preferred.
3 Fax function “FAX” → “Menu” → “Report”
setting list → “Print” → “FAX function
setting list”
4 Consumables “Setup” → “Printing main body status
information sheet” → “Consumables information
sheet sheet”
5 Printer “Setup” → “Printing main body
information status sheet” → “Printer
sheet information sheet”

Confidential
6.4.7.3 Troubleshooting from fax function diagnosis Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure
By conducting fax function diagnosis for diagnosis of trouble, it is possible to An error was found Main base, fax based  As hardware defects are considered,
diagnose basic items of fax function, line connection. in the printer. communication problem repair or product exchange (initial
failure) is carried out.
When an error is displayed in the fax function diagnosis report, the following It is not properly When the modem on hook  Confirm that the telephone line jack
the method are implemented. connected to the of the equipment, the and the LINE port of the equipment
telephone line. voltage of the LINE port are properly connected with the
was less than the specified modular cable.
value. → The stuffing of the modular cable
is broken.
If contact failure or disconnection,
exchange cable.
 Calculate the line voltage with a
tester.
(DC 48V at normal time)
 Connect the external telephone to
the telephone line jack without
going through the device and check
whether telephone reaction,
incoming call, and call can be made
normally.
→ If there is an abnormality in the
telephone line, ask the telephone
line contractor for confirmation.

Confidential
Diagnosis result Judgment contents Measure

The modular cable When the modem on hook  Make sure that the modular cable
is connected to of the equipment, the from the telephone line jack is
the EXT port. voltage of the LINE port connected to the LINE and the
was the specified value, but module cable from the external
if it is set to the off hook, it telephone (if connected) is
becomes less than the connected to the EXT.
specified voltage value of → If the external telephone is
the LINE port connected to the telephone line in
(When multiple modems reverse, correctly connect it again.
are on hook, the EXT port port.
is disconnected.)
Line connection is The on-hook phone was  When a splitter is connected, in case
unstable. measured and it was below of separation, connect the telephone
the specified value. line and the device directly and re-
connect the fax function.
 If it is connected to the TA, check if
it improves by restarting TA.
No dial tone is can not detect the dial tone.  If you hear sound and intermittent
detected. sound by pressing the "on hook"
button, set the connection line to
"private branch exchange (PBX)"
and perform the diagnostic test
again.
 You hear a continuous tone sound
by pressing the “On Hook” button,
but set “Dial tone detection” to
“OFF” when the tone is small.

Confidential
6.4.7.4 Troubleshooting from error code Error code

Judgment contents Measure
display
The trouble can be specified to some extent by the error code of the
communication management report. No circuit No line voltage from  Make sure that the telephone line is properly
connection before transmission connected to the LINE port.
 Connect the phone and check if you can dial
C H E C K In order to display the error code in the communication by dialing or dialing a dial tone.
P O IN T management report, it is necessary to make the following Check the line voltage with a tester.
setting. (48 V DC at on-hook)
 [Setup] → [System administration settings] → [Fax Busy Busy tone is detected  Check if the phone number is wrong.
when dialing  Check whether another signal is erroneously
settings] → [Output settings] → [Report format]
detected as a busy tone.
= [Detailed information] In case of erroneous detection Confirm the
signal that is erroneously detected by
 Phase A trouble (calling system) recording, and set the busy tone detection
function to "OFF" in [FAX Maintenance
Error code
Judgment contents Measure Mode].
display
Or adjust the detection method.
No tone Dial tone can not be  Connect the phone and check whether the
No reply I can not detect the fax  Make sure that the phone number is wrong.
detected when dialing. dial tone from the switchboard is heard,
number from the other  Confirm that the fax signal is coming back
continuous tone or intermittent tone.
machine after dialing. from the other party.
 Check if it is PSTN line or PBX line.
In case of PBX line, change connection line
setting to PBX and check again.
If you can hear the dial tone but can not
detect it , record it and check the signal and
adjust the detection method in [FAX
Maintenance Mode].
At this time, the [OFF] setting of dial tone
detection has a risk of false detection.
Avoid as much as possible.
Port back push Before calling (on
hook) there was a line  Check whether the LINE port and the EXT
voltage but the line port are connected in reverse or check the
voltage was gone when telephone connection
calling (off hook).

Confidential
 Phase B to D trouble
Error code
Judgment contents Measure
display
Error ××× A communication error  Output the communication management
occurred after line report and check the error occurrence status.
connection. In a fax machine that uses a subscribed
telephone line, communication errors may
occur if the status of the picked up telephone
line is bad, and if it is re-communicated by
automatic redial, it will grab a good
telephone line and send it normally.
Since a communication management report
is necessary for trend survey, a
communication management report is
automatically printed.
Have the customer keep it.
Have the customer keep it.
 By outputting the communication protocol
monitor log at the time of error occurrence,
it is possible to investigate where an error
occurred in the communication.
In “FAX Maintenance Mode”, set “error
only” “automatic printing” as necessary.
 Check the error occurrence status by
acquiring the recording data of the
communication at the time of error
occurrence

Confidential
CHAPTER
7
REPAIR WORK
Confidential
7.1 Repair work summary PARTS YOU SHOULD BEWARE OF DURING REPAIR
To prevent injury during disassembly/reassembly of the product, the parts with a

7.1.1 Precautions of repairing the product potential danger when handling them are listed below. Take extra care during
disassembly/reassembly.
DISCHARGING THE STORED ELECTRICITY
 Ink Pack
Immediately after powering off the printer, electricity is stored in the electric circuit of
printer.  Carrying form
If you disassemble the printer in this state, you may get an electric shock. And also, the When carrying Ink Packs, carry them inserted into their individual packing
electrical parts may be damaged. boxes regardless of whether the Ink Packs are new or already in use. (This is
Therefore, make sure to perform the following operation of discharging the stored to prevent Ink Packs from folding or being damaged in other ways.)
electricity before disassembling the printer.
 Operation when ink packs are loaded into the main unit
 Procedure
Install the Ink Packs by the following basic procedure.
1. Power Off the printer, and disconnect the AC Cable form the printer.
2. Push the Power button until Power LED is turned off.  Ink in ink packs must be as level and non lop-sided as possible.
 Bending of Ink Packs is prohibited.
The Power LED lights for a few seconds when the power supply
button is pushed. Make sure to push the Power button until Power
LED is turned off.
When the Power LED is turned off or the Power LED does not light 1. Install Ink Packs according to the method described on the label clearly
even if the Power button is pressed, this operation is finished indicated on the Ink Pack Tray.
2. After attaching the Ink Packs in the Ink Pack Tray, level the ink in the Ink
Pack so that it is not lop-sided.
3. Attach the Ink Pack Tray onto the main unit.
Power LED lights when

power supply button is
pushed.
Figure 7-1. Releasing method of the stored electricity
Repair Work Repair work summary 302

Confidential
7.1.2 Repair Workflow

The workflow for repair work is shown below.
START
Troubleshooting
1 Identify the causes. 1 See Chapter 6 MemoTroubleshooting (p. 131) and troubleshoot the problem.
Repair work
No
2 Preparation necessary?
2
See ’7.2.3 Adjustment and Inspection Table’ (p.316) and check if the
preparation is necessary.
Yes
See ’7.2.4 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections’ (p.319)/’7.2.5 Software
3 Prepare for repair. 3 Adjustments and Inspections’ (p.325) for the procedures. Outline/workflow/
procedure are described in details respectively.
See ’7.3 Repair Work Procedure’ (p.384)and check the disassembly/assembly

4 Replace the parts. 4 procedures. Operation time for each disassembly/assembly or adjustment/
inspection is described in their procedure outline.
No See ’7.2.3 Adjustment and Inspection Table’ (p.316) and check whether
5 Adjustment necessary? 5
adjustment is necessary.
Yes
See ’7.2.4 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections’ (p.319)/’7.2.5 Software
6 Adjustments and Inspections’ (p.325) for the procedures. Outline/workflow/
6 Perform the adjustment.
procedure are described in details respectively.
Perform the final check of the print state by printing the Nozzle Check Pattern in
7 Final check printing 7
the service support mode.
Yes
Any problems?
No
END
Figure 7-2. Repair Workflow

Confidential
7.1.3 Tools  Jigs

Availabi EPSON Part
The following tools and jigs are required for repairing the printer. Name Remarks
lity Code
 Tools Thickness gauge O ---
Availabil EPSON Teflon tape O 1706715
Name Remarks
ity Part Code
LEAK TESTER SHEET FRONT O 1684353
(+) Phillips screwdriver #1 O ---
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2 O --- Note 1 : Some of the tools listed above are commercially available.
(+) Phillips screwdriver #2 O --- Shaft length 250 mm or more 2 : EPSON provides the tools listed with EPSON part code
(+) Stubby screwdriver O --- Total length 47 mm or less

Flathead Precision O ---
screwdriver
Tweezers O ---
Longnose pliers O ---
Cleaning stick O 1709718
Tape O --- Secure the cover open sensor
(adjustment)
Scale O --- Adjustment
Tube Clip O

Confidential
7.2 Adjustment and Inspection Work
7.2.1 Adjustment and Inspection Overview

This product has adjustments and inspections that are performed by mechanically adjusting and inspecting the printer mechanisms (mechanical adjustments and inspections), and
adjustments and inspections that are performed by using an adjustment program (software adjustments and inspections). The adjustment program is incorporated into the main unit
of this product, and each adjustment menu can be used by starting the product in the service support mode. This section explains the adjustments, inspections, and maintenance
required during repair work.
 Adjustment and inspection types
 Mechanical adjustments and inspections
Items to be physically adjusted and inspected on the product main unit.
 Software adjustments and inspections (service support mode)
• Main unit adjustments
Perform the necessary adjustments before and after replacing parts on the main unit.
This includes both the after unit repair operation mode and the individual adjustment mode. In the after unit repair operation mode, the necessary adjustment items
(before and after replacement) for the five main parts (Print Head, Ink Supply Unit, Ink System, Main Board, and Rear ASF Unit) are displayed consecutively; and in
the individual adjustment mode, the adjustment items are selected and executed individually.
 Maintenance (service support mode)
Used to perform maintenance operations such as ink filling and cleaning.
Repair Work Adjustment and Inspection Work 305

Confidential
7.2.2 Adjustment and Inspection List

 Mechanical adjustments and inspections
Adjustment /
inspection
Adjustment name Program No. Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools Reference
paper /
feed tray
Set the clearance of the gap between Place a thickness gauge in the specified
 Thickness gauge.
Adjustment PG Adjustment --- the nozzle surface of the print head and --- location and then move the carriage unit over P. 319
 Teflon tape
the platen to an appropriate amount. the thickness gauge and check the clearance.
To prevent ink leaks, make sure there is When the ink supply unit ink tubes are
no ink leaking from the joints of the attached to the print head, insert the leak check
Inspection Leak Check --- --- --- P. 324
print head and ink supply unit ink jig and determine whether or not there is a leak
tubes. by whether or not ink adheres to it.
 Software adjustments and inspections
Adjustment / Adjustment
Program
Adjustment name Purpose inspection paper / Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No.
feed tray details
Select “Head ID Input” from the service
Input the ID incorporating the support mode menu and execute the item.
Head ID Input B10 correction values for print head --- (Auto input) After the ID is input, check --- P. 325
production variations. that the correct print head ID has been
written in the same menu.
Initial
Reset the deterioration correction Execute “Initialize-PW Sensor” from the
Settings Initialize-PW Sensor B14 --- --- P. 326
counter for the corresponding part. service support mode menu.
Displays the list of the counter
Select “Counter Reset” from the service
value of the replacing parts, and
Counter Reset B16 --- support mode menu and execute the --- P. 326
resets the counter after parts
corresponding counter reset.
replacement.
In order to check the assembly state
Select “APG Operation Check” from the
when replacing APG related parts,
service support mode menu and execute the
check that there is no operation load
Mech Check APG Operation Check B20 --- item, and then visually check that the APG --- P. 359
abnormality and whether the APG
switching operation performs the specified
stops at the specified position when
movement.
switching the APG.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Check that there are no speed
variations or organic variations in
Select “CR Scale Check” from the service
CR Scale Check B21 the CR operation due to damage or --- --- P. 360
support mode menu and execute the item.
deterioration of the CR Scale
surface.
Check that the shutter for reducing Select “Sensor Check-PW” from the
Sensor Check-PW B22 the amount of mist on the PW --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 360
Sensor is operating normally. item.
For poor assembling detection
when replacing the PE sensor part, Paper type: Plain paper
pass paper through and check that Select "PE Sensor Check" from the service
PE Sensor Check B23 Size: A4 --- P. 361
the chattering after detection of the support mode menu and execute the item.
Mech Check
paper trailing edge by the PE sensor Paper source: Paper cassette (1)
stops within the set time.
Select “Temp/hum. Sensor” from the
Check that the temperature and
item, and then determine whether or not the
Temp/hum. Sensor B24 humidity sensors are operating --- --- P. 361
sensor operation is normal or abnormal
normally.
based on the displayed temperature and
humidity information.
Check that the solenoid for
Select “NIP Solenoid/Sensor” from the
releasing the nip for the purpose of
NIP Solenoid/Sensor B25 --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 362
reducing paper skew is operating
item.
normally.
Check that an abnormal signal that
will cause a Nozzle diagnostic Select “Nozzle Noise Check” from the
Nozzle Noise Check B26 function problem is not occurring --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 363
as a result of a part failure or poor item.
assembling.
Printing Set the rank for setting the optimal
Select “Nozzle Rank Categories” from the
Check judgment threshold value of each
Nozzle Rank Categories B27 --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 363
nozzle to ensure Nozzle diagnostic
item.
function detection accuracy.
Select “Nozzle Detect Check” from the
Check that Nozzle diagnostic
Nozzle Detect Check B28 --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 364
function is operating normally.
item.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Paper type: Plain paper
Size: A4, Letter
Print check patterns to check that Select “Check Pattern(A4/LTR)” from the
Check Pattern(A4/LTR) B29 there is no problem with the final Paper source: service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 364
print quality. Any (paper cassette (1) to item to print the check patterns.
paper cassette (4) or rear
tray)
Size: A3
Print check patterns to check that Select “Check Pattern(A3)” from the
Check Pattern(A3) B33 there is no problem with the final Paper source: service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 365
print quality. Any (paper cassette (1) to item to print the check patterns.
tray)
Printing Size: A4, Letter
Check Select “RGB Pattern” from the service
Print patterns for checking the Paper source:
RGB Pattern B30 support mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 365
banding level of each color. Any (paper cassette (1) to print the banding level check patterns.
tray)
Paper type: Plain paper Select “Ruled Line Pattern” from the
Print patterns to check for ruled line service support mode menu and execute the
Ruled Line Pattern B31 Size: A3 --- P. 367
deviation. item to print the ruled line deviation check
Paper source: Paper cassette (1) patterns.
Size: A4 Select “Nozzle Check Pattern” from the
Print patterns for checking for Paper source: service support mode menu
Nozzle Check Pattern B32 --- P. 369
missing nozzles. Any (paper cassette (1) to and execute the item to print the nozzles
paper cassette (4) missing check patterns.
or rear tray)

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Automatically measure the correction value
and perform the operation load check by
selecting “CR Motor Correct” from the
CR Motor Correct B40 --- service support mode menu and executing --- P. 328
the item.

Measure product variations to set and perform the operation load check by
PF Motor Correct B41 the appropriate correction values. --- selecting “PF Motor Correct” from the --- P. 328
Also, make a pass/fail judgment by service support mode menu and executing
Mech Adjust calculating whether or not the the item.
operation load is within the Automatically measure the correction value
expected range from the motor and perform the operation load check by
ASF Motor Correct C1 B42 current value. --- selecting “ASF Motor Correct C1” from --- P. 328
the service support mode menu and
executing the item.
ASF/LIFT Motor Correct
B66 --- selecting “ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C2” --- P. 328
C2
from the service support mode menu and
executing the item.
ASF/LIFT Motor Correct Measure product variations to set
B67 --- selecting “ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C3” --- P. 328
C3 the appropriate correction values. from the service support mode menu and
Also, make a pass/fail judgment by executing the item.
Mech Adjust calculating whether or not the
operation load is within the Automatically measure the correction value
expected range from the motor and perform the operation load check by
ASF/LIFT Motor Correct
B68 current value. --- selecting “ASF/LIFT Motor Correct C4” --- P. 328
C4
from the service support mode menu and
executing the item.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Select “Head Angular Adj. Mech” from the
Mechanically correct the print Paper type: Photo matte paper item to print the adjustment pattern.
offset due to part product variations Determine the adjustment value from the
Head Angular Adj. Mech B43 Size: A4 --- P. 329
and tilting at the time of print head adjustment pattern based on the judgment
attachment. Paper source: Rear tray criteria and then perform adjustment by
turning the adjustment dial provided on the
carriage unit.
Paper type: Business plain paper Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft A” from
the service support mode menu and execute
Size: A4 the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Use software to correct the vertical
Head Angular Adj. Soft A B44 or horizontal tilting that occurs at Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 333
the time of print attachment. Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
tray)
from the Head Angular Adj. Soft A menu.
Paper type: Business plain paper Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft B” from
the service support mode menu and execute
Size: A4 the item to print the adjustment pattern.
Printing Use software to correct the vertical
Adjust Head Angular Adj. Soft B B69 or horizontal tilting that occurs at Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 335
the time of print attachment. Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
criteria and then enter the adjustment value
tray)
from the Head Angular Adj. Soft B menu.
Paper type: Plain paper, Select “PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust” from the service
support mode menu and execute the item to
Correct the impact offset caused by business plain paper
print the adjustment pattern.
a difference in the speed of the low- Size: A4
PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust B45 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 337
speed part and acceleration/ Paper source: adjustment pattern based on the judgment
deceleration part of the CR. Any (paper cassette (1) to
criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
paper cassette (4)) the PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust menu.
Select “Bi-d Adjust” from the service support
Use software to correct the print Paper type: Plain paper mode menu and execute the item to print the
timing for aligning the print Size: A4 adjustment pattern.
Bi-d Adjust B46 position between the outward path Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 339
and return path when bidirectional Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
printing. paper cassette (4)) criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
the Bi-d Adjust menu.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Select “Bi-d Band Adjust” from the service
Use software to correct the print Paper type: Business plain paper support mode menu and execute the item to
timing for aligning the print Size: A4 print the adjustment pattern.
Bi-d Band Adjust B48 position between the outward path Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 341
and return path when bidirectional Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
printing in band feed mode. paper cassette (4) criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
the Bi-d Band Adjust menu.
Select “PW Sensor Correct” from the service
Use software to correct the offset Paper type: Photo matte paper print the adjustment pattern.
PW Sensor Correct B49 due to sensor characteristics and Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 343
attachment variations. Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
the PW Sensor Correct menu.
Select “PE Adjust (ASF)” from the service
Paper type: Plain paper support mode menu and execute the item to
Size: A4 print the adjustment pattern.
Printing
Adjust PE Adjust (ASF) B52 Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 345
Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
Use software to correct the paper paper cassette (4) criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
detection position offset caused by the PE Adjust (ASF) menu.
variations in the PE sensor
attachment position and print head Select “PE Adjust (Rear ASF)” from the service
position. support mode menu and execute the item to
Paper type: Plain paper print the adjustment pattern.
PE Adjust (Rear ASF) B53 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the Ruler P. 345
Paper source: Rear tray adjustment pattern based on the judgment
the PE Adjust (Rear ASF) menu.
Paper type: Plain paper Select “Band Feed Adjust” from the service
Correct the paper feed error that Size: A4 print the adjustment pattern.
occurs due to mechanical variations Paper source:
Band Feed Adjust B55 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 347
or media feed characteristics in Any (paper cassette (1) to
band feed mode. adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper cassette (4) or rear criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
tray) the Band Feed Adjust menu.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Paper type: Plain paper, Select “A - B Band Adjust” from the service
business plain paper support mode menu and execute the item to
Correct the amount of paper feed to Size: A4, Letter print the adjustment pattern.
Printing
A - B Band Adjust B65 match the ink impact state of actual Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 349
Adjust
printing. Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
paper cassette (4) or rear criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
tray) the A - B Band Adjust menu.
Correct the impact offset caused by a Select “PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)” from the
difference in the speed of the low-speed service support mode menu and execute the
part and acceleration/deceleration part of Paper type: Plain paper, item to print the adjustment pattern.
the CR. business plain paper Determine the adjustment value from the
PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S) B61 --- P. 351
Perform adjustment in only a specific Size: A4 adjustment pattern based on the judgment
adjustment area and perform automatic Paper source: Paper cassette (1) criteria and then
calculation for other than that area to enter the adjustment value from the PTS
determine the correction value. ACC/Dec.Adjust (S) menu.
Use software to correct the print timing for Select “Bi-d Adjust (S)” from the service
aligning the print position between the support mode menu and execute the item to
outward path and return path when Paper type: Plain paper print the adjustment pattern.
Simple bidirectional printing. Perform adjustment
adjustment Bi-d Adjust (S) B62 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 353
in only a specific adjustment area and
perform automatic calculation for other Paper source: Paper cassette (1) adjustment pattern based on the judgment
than that area to determine the correction criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
value. the Bi-d Adjust (S) menu.
Use software to correct the print timing Select “Bi-d Band Adjust (S)” from the service
for aligning the print position between support mode menu and execute the item to
the outward path and return path when Paper type: Plain paper print the adjustment pattern.
bidirectional printing in band feed mode.
Bi-d Band Adjust (S) B63 Size: A4 Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 355
Perform adjustment in only a specific
adjustment area and perform automatic Paper source: Paper cassette (1) adjustment pattern based on the judgment
calculation for other than that area to criteria and then enter the adjustment value from
determine the correction value. the Bi-d Band Adjust (S) menu.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Correct the paper feed error that Select “Band Feed Adjust (S)” from the
occurs due to mechanical variations service support mode menu
or media feed characteristics in Paper type: Plain paper and execute the item to print the adjustment
band feed mode. Size: A4 pattern.
Simple
Band Feed Adjust (S) B64 Perform adjustment in only a Paper source: Determine the adjustment value from the --- P. 357
adjustment
specific adjustment area and Any (paper cassette (1) to adjustment pattern based on the judgment
perform automatic calculation for paper cassette (4) criteria and then
other than that area to determine the enter the adjustment value from the Band
correction value. Feed Adjust (S) menu.
Judge whether or not the print head
needs to be replaced when missing
nozzles, unstable discharge, or Select “Print Head Before Repair
Print Head Before Repair misalignment discharge occurs.
B90 --- Operation” from the service support mode --- P. 374
Operation
If replacement is required, perform menu and execute the item.
the preparation required for
replacement.
Select “Print Head After Repair
Sequentially display the Adjustment” from the service support
Print Head After Repair
B80 adjustments required after print --- mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 376
Adjustment
head replacement. perform the adjustments required after print
Main Parts head replacement.
Adjust Perform the operation required
Select “Ink Supply Unit Before Repair
Ink Supply Unit Before before replacing the ink supply unit
Repair Operation because of an ink supply unit
menu and execute the item.
failure.
Select “Ink Supply Unit After Repair
Ink Supply Unit After
B81 adjustments required after ink --- mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 378
Repair Adjustment
supply unit replacement. perform the adjustments required after ink
supply unit replacement.
Select “Ink System Assy Before Repair
Ink System Assy Before Perform the operation required
Repair Operation before replacing the ink system.
menu and execute the item.

Confidential
Program
No.
feed tray details
Select “Ink System Assy After Repair
Ink System Assy After
B82 adjustments required after ink --- mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 380
Repair Adjustment
system replacement. perform the adjustments required after ink
system replacement.
Select “Rear ASF Unit After Repair
Main Parts Rear ASF Unit After
B83 adjustments required after rear tray --- mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 382
Adjust Repair Adjustment
replacement. perform the adjustments required after rear
tray replacement.
Select “Main Board After Repair
Main Board After Repair
B84 adjustments required after main --- mode menu and execute the item to --- P. 382
Adjustment
board replacement. perform the adjustments required after
main board replacement.
Sequentially display the Select “B70 Adjust After Maintenance”
adjustments required after from the service support menu and execute
Adjust After Maintenance B70 --- --- ---
Periodic performing the Routine the item to perform the adjustment required
Maintenance Maintenance. after performing the Routine maintenance.
Change the Display setting of Select “B71 Display Setting” from the
Display Setting B71 --- --- ---
Routine Maintenance warning. service support menu.

Confidential
 Maintenance
Adjustment /
Adjustment
Program inspection
Adjustment name Purpose Adjustment procedure overview Tools procedure
No. paper /
details
feed tray
Select “Head Ink Fill” from the service
Fill the print head and ink channels with ink
Head Ink Fill C01 to enable printing. (Perform this after print --- ---
check the discharge state with the nozzle
head replacement.)
check patterns.
Ink Fill Fill the print head and ink channels with ink P. 371
Select “Initial Fill” from the service
to enable printing.
Initial Fill C02 (Perform this after replacement of the ink --- ---
check the discharge state with the nozzle
supply path parts between the Ink Pack Tray check patterns.
unit and print head.)
CL1 C03
CL2 C04 Select a head cleaning item from the
Head Perform this to recover from missing dots or service support mode menu and execute the
CL3 C05 --- --- P. 371
Cleaning print defects of the print head. item to check the discharge state with the
Strong CL C06 nozzle check patterns.
Refresh CL C07
Maintenance Discharge ink to release the pressure applied
to the ink inside the supply path from the Select “Head Ink Discharge” from the
Head Ink Discharge C08 head for the purpose of preventing ink leaks --- service support mode menu and execute the ---
after print head replacement and ink supply item.
unit.
Discharge the ink inside the supply path
from the ink supply unit to the print head Select “Supply Ink Discharge” from the P. 372
Supply Ink and replace it with air.
Ink C09 --- service support mode menu and execute the ---
Discharge
Discharge *It is necessary to remove the ink pack item.
before execution.
Select “Ink System Ink Discharge” from
Ink System Ink Discharge the waste ink remaining in the
C10 --- the service support mode menu and execute ---
Discharge suction pump (ink system).
the item.
Select “Head Thermistor Check” from the
Head Thermistor
C11 Check the temperature of the Print Head. --- service support mode menu and execute the --- P. 373
Check
item.

Confidential
7.2.3 Adjustment and Inspection Table

The following table lists the adjustment items depending upon the parts being replaced. When you remove or replace multiple parts, refer to adjustment items for all of those parts.
Furthermore, if there are multiple adjustment items for a replaced part, be sure to carry them out in the priority order indicated in the table.
C H E C K Meaning of the marks used in ’Table 7-1 Adjustment Correspondence Table (Printer)’ (p316) is as follows.
P O IN T ○: Required only when replacing
◎: Required when removing and/or replacing
---: No adjustment is required
 Printer (p. 316)
Table 7-1. Adjustment Correspondence Table (Printer)
Intermediate Nip Release Lever .etc
Intermediate Nip Release Sensor
Paper Guide Upper (Left/Right)

Intermediate Release Solenoid
Re le va nt
Option Frame Right Assy

Ink Supply Tube Assy
Power Supply Unit
PW Drive Shutter
Duplex Print Unit
APG Motor Assy
Humidity Sensor
Star Wheel Assy
Ink System Assy
APG Drive Assy
Ink Supply Unit

ASF Drive Assy
CR Motor Assy
Lift Drive Assy
Rear ASF Unit

PF Drive Assy
Priority order
Stacker Assy
Main Board
Adjustment item
PW Sensor
Print Head
CR Scale
CR Unit
Before Repair Adjustment
1 Ink Discharge (Head Ink Discharge) (p. 372) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - ◎ - - - ◎ - -
2 Ink Discharge (Supply Ink Discharge) (p. 372) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - -
3 Ink Discharge (Ink System Ink Discharge) (p. 372) - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
After Repair Adjustment
1 PG Adjustment (p. 321) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - -
2 Head ID Input (p. 325) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - -
3 Ink Fill (Head Ink Fill) (p. 371) - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - -
4 Ink Fill (Initial Fill) (p. 371) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - -
5 Leak Check (p. 324) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - -
6 Counter Reset (PF/EJ counter) (p. 326) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ - - - - - - - - -

Confidential

Re le va nt

Power Supply Unit
PW Drive Shutter
Duplex Print Unit
APG Motor Assy
Humidity Sensor
Star Wheel Assy
Ink System Assy
APG Drive Assy
Ink Supply Unit

ASF Drive Assy
CR Motor Assy
Lift Drive Assy
Rear ASF Unit

PF Drive Assy
Priority order
Stacker Assy
Main Board
Adjustment item
PW Sensor
Print Head
CR Scale
CR Unit
After Repair Adjustment (continued)
7 Counter Reset (ASF counter) (p. 326) ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
8 Counter Reset (RASF counter) (p. 326) - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
9 Initialize-PW Sensor (p. 326) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ -
10 PW Sensor Correct (p. 343) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ -
11 CR Motor Correct (p. 328) - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - ○ - -
12 PF Motor Correct (p. 328) - - ○ - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
13 ASF/LIFT Motor Correct (p. 328) - - ○ ○ - - - - ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○
14 APG Operation Check (p. 359) - - - - ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
15 CR Scale Check (p. 360) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - ◎ ◎ - -
16 Sensor Check-PW (p. 360) - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ -
18 Temp/hum. Sensor (p. 361) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - -
19 NIP Solenoid/Sensor (p. 362) - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - -
20 Nozzle Noise Check (p. 363) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ - -
21 Nozzle Rank Categories (p. 363) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ - -
22 Nozzle Detect Check (p. 364) - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ - -
23 Head Angular Adj. Mech (p. 329) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - - - ◎ - -
24 Head Angular Adj. Soft A (p. 333) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ - -
25 Head Angular Adj. Soft B (p. 335) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - - - -
26 PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S) (p. 351) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ - -
27 PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust (p. 337) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* - -
28 Bi-d Adjust (S) (p. 353) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ - -
29 Bi-D Adjust (p. 339) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* - -

Confidential

Re le va nt

Power Supply Unit
PW Drive Shutter
Duplex Print Unit
APG Motor Assy
Humidity Sensor
Star Wheel Assy
Ink System Assy
APG Drive Assy
Ink Supply Unit

ASF Drive Assy
CR Motor Assy
Lift Drive Assy
Rear ASF Unit

PF Drive Assy
Priority order
Stacker Assy
Main Board
Adjustment item
PW Sensor
Print Head
CR Scale
CR Unit
After Repair Adjustment (continued)
30 Bi-d Band Adjust (S) (p. 355) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ - -
31 Bi-D Band Adjust (p. 341) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎* - - - - - ◎* - -
32 PE Adjust (ASF) (p. 345) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
33 PE Adjust (Rear ASF) (p. 345) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
34 Band Feed Adjust (S) (p. 357) ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ ◎ - - - - - - - -
35 Band Feed Adjust (p. 347) ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○* ○* ◎* - - - - - - - -
36 A-B Band Adjust (p. 349) ○ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ ○ ◎ - - - - - - - -
37 Check Pattern (p. 364), (p. 365) ◎ - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎ -
38 RGB Pattern (p. 365) ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎ -
39 Ruled line pattern (p. 367) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - - ◎ ◎ -
* : Perform the adjustments of the full version for a user who uses special paper.

Confidential
7.2.4 Mechanical Adjustments and Inspections  Tools to use

 Thickness gauge for PG adjustment
PG ADJUSTMENT
 Teflon tape (part code: 1684353)
C H E C K  The standard value of the PG is as shown below.  Adjustment flow
P O IN T 1.35±0.06 mm
 Perform PG adjustment with the PG at the minimum
START
(PG1) before attaching the CR scale.
Do not touch the CR scale during PR adjustment.

" Preparation (p. 320)"
" Adjustment of the 0-digit

side (Right side of printer) (p.

side (Left side of printer) (p.

side (Right side of printer) (p.
" Checking the PG (p. 323)"
No
Is PG within standard?
Yes
PG adjustment is
Figure 7-3. PG Adjustment Flow

Confidential
 Preparation 4. Make sure there are no tears or burrs on the affixed Teflon tape. Preparation
of the thickness gauge is finished.
 Preparing the thickness gauge
Before trimming of Teflon tape Teflon tape
 The print head of this product has a structure with an
integrated print head cover and print head nozzle surface.
Therefore, if the thickness gauge touches the nozzle
surface in the same way as when performed with the
conventional procedure, the nozzle surface of the print
Thickness gauge
head may be damaged.
Fold the Teflon tape at the edges and trim it at
 When performing the PG adjustment or PG check, be the center in the thickness direction.
sure to affix Teflon tape (thickness: 0.08 mm) to the After trimming of
Teflon tape
thickness gauges (1.00 mm) that you will use for the
adjustment or check to prevent damage to the nozzle
surface of the print head.
 When affixing Teflon tape to the thickness gauges, make Teflon tape
Thickness gauge
sure no air or foreign matter enters between the thickness
gauges and tape.
 Procedure for affixing Teflon tape Figure 7-5. Preparing Thickness Gauge (2)
1. Clean the surfaces of the thickness gauge using alcohol, and make sure there
is no dirt or contamination on the surfaces.
2. Affix Teflon tape to the thickness gauge (1.00 mm) as shown below.
Teflon tape
Thickness gauge (1.00
Figure 7-4. Preparing Thickness Gauge (1)

3. Fold the excess portions of Teflon tape along the edges of the thickness
gauge, and trim the portions at about the center in the thickness direction of
the sides.

Confidential
 Checking the APG position  PG adjustment procedure

Check that the APG position is [PG1]. When performing PG adjustment, observe the following points.
• How to check  Move the CR unit left and right by holding the top of the
“1” of the CR bearing is at the bottom. CR timing belt.
 Be careful not to damage the nozzle surface of the print
head with the thickness gauge.
CR  When making the print head touch the thickness gauge,
be careful not to let the print head run onto the thickness
gauge.
1  Adjustment of the 0-digit side (Right side of printer)

Hol 1. Remove the two fixing screws of the PG adjustment cam positioned on the
left and right of the printer.
Left PG adjustment lever (130-digit Right PG adjustment lever (0-digit
PG:
PG: PG: Small
Rib
Screw
Figure 7-6. Checking APG Position
PG:
Holde Screw
Rib
Figure 7-7. PG Adjustment Cam

Confidential
2. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.40 mm thickness 4. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and place the 1.31 mm
gauge (1.32 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position A shown thickness gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position
in Figure 7-8. A shown in Figure 7-8.
5. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle
130-digit side 0-digit side surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
procedure below.
B A 5-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG
adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-7) in the
“+” direction.
5-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment
• If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of
the printer, and repeat the work of Step 5-1 to Step 5-2 until the nozzle
surface does not touch the thickness gauge.
 Adjustment of the 130-digit side (Left side of printer)
1. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.41 mm thickness
Thickness gauge gauge (1.33 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position B shown
Figure 7-8. Placement of Thickness Gauge in Figure 7-8.
3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle 2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle
surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge. surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 4. • If touches the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 3.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the • If does not touch the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the
procedure below. procedure below.
3-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG 2-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG
adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-7) in the adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-7) in the
“-” direction. “-” direction.
3-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not 2-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge. the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
• If touch the thickness gauge: Proceed to step 4. • If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment.
• If does not touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center • If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of
part of the printer, and repeat the work of Step 3-1 to Step 3-2 until the the printer, and repeat Step 5-1 to Step 5-2 until the nozzle surface
nozzle surface touches the thickness gauge. touches the thickness gauge.
3. Move the CR unit to the center of the printer, and place the 1.31 mm thickness
gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at position B shown
in Figure 7-8.
Confidential
4. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check whether or not the nozzle  Checking the PG
surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment.
• If touches the thickness gauge: Perform the adjustment in the 2. Place the 1.31 mm thickness gauge (1.23 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon
procedure below. tape) at the position shown in Figure 7-9.
4-1. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and move the PG
adjustment cam on the 0-digit side by one notch (Figure 7-7) in the
“+” direction.
4-2. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge again and check whether or not
the nozzle surface of the print head touches the thickness gauge.
• If does not touch the thickness gauge: End adjustment
• If touches the thickness gauge: Move the CR unit to the center part of
the printer, and repeat the work of Step 4-1 to Step 4-2 until the nozzle
surface does not touch the thickness gauge.
After adjusting the 0-digit side and 130-digit side in accordance
with the adjustment procedure, adjust the 0-digit side again.
Thickness gauge
Figure 7-9. Checking the PG

3. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of the
print head does not touch the thickness gauge.
If it touches the thickness gauge, the PG is narrower than the standard value so
adjust the PG (adjust the 0-digit side and adjust the 130-digit side).
4. Move the CR unit to the center part of the printer, and place the 1.41 mm thickness
gauge (1.33 mm thickness gauge + 0.08 mm Teflon tape) at the position shown in
Figure 7-9.
5. Move the CR unit to the thickness gauge and check that the nozzle surface of the
print head touches the thickness gauge.

Confidential
INK LEAK CHECK 3. Check the ink adherence state on the cloudy surface of the PET chips to determine
whether or not there is an ink leak.
When the connections between the Print Head and Ink Tubes have been removed,  Judgment criterion of leak check
the ink leak check is required. Check whether or not ink is adhered at a position of 1 mm or more from the
The judgment method of the ink leak check is described below. leading edge of the cloudy surface of the PET chips. (Consider the result to be
a fail if any of the two PET chips for the leak check does not pass the check.)
C H E C K Installing the Leak Check Jig is performed after ink filling is
P O IN T completed after parts replacement. For details on installing the leak • Pass (no ink leak)
check jig, refer to (p. 579). When ink adherence is less than 1 mm from the leading edge of the PET
chip
• Fail (ink leak)
 Leak check procedure When ink adherence is 1 mm or more from the leading edge of the PET
chip
1. Insert the PET chips for the leak check into the clearance in the figure below.
1mm
2. Remove the PET chips for the leak check.
PET chip
Leading edge
Cloudy surface
Gap
NG OK
Figure 7-11. Judgment Criterion of Leak Check

C H E C K If the result is determined to be a fail (ink leak), refer to “Print
PET chips for P O IN T Head (p. 573)” and perform the ink check again.
the leak check
Figure 7-10. Leak Check Procedure (1)

Confidential
7.2.5 Software Adjustments and Inspections 4. Figure 7-12 appears.
7.2.5.1 Initial Setting Menu Head ID Input
HEAD ID INPUT [B10] Update?
Yes:[2]
1. Start the service support mode. No:[8]
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
menu.
3. Select “Head ID Input”.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either

P O IN T procedure A or B below.
Figure 7-12. Head ID Input Screen
5. Press the [2] button. Head ID update is executed. (To not execute it, press the [8]
button to return to the Initial Setting menu)
A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Enter program number “10”.
3-3. Press the [#] button.
B. Selecting from menu

3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Select “Initial Setting: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
3-3. Select “Head ID Input” from the Initialize menu.

Confidential
INITIALIZE-PW SENSOR [B14] COUNTER RESET[B16]
1. Start the service support mode. 1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125)) (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
menu. menu.
3. Select “Initialize-PW Sensor”. 3. Select “Counter Reset”.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below. P O IN T procedure A or B below.
A. Selecting by entering the program number A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu. 3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Enter program number “14”. Enter program number “16”.
3-3. Press the [#] button. 3-3. Press the [#] button.
B. Selecting from menu B. Selecting from menu

3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu. 3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Select “Initial Setting: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu. 3-2. Select “Initial Setting: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
3-3. Select “Initialize-PW Sensor” from the Initialize menu. 3-3. Select “Counter Reset” from the Initialize menu.
4. Initialization is executed.
5. The initialization end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.

Confidential
4. The screen in Figure 7-13 appears. Select the counter to reset, and press the [#]
button.
Counter Reset
Up/Down: [2] [8] Shift:[6]
Back:[*] Run:[#]
Please select the counter
PF/EJ Counter: **********

ASF Counter: ********** The counter values at
RASF Unit: ********** the time that the
Mainte counter: ********** screen appears are
displayed.
Select: [2] [8]
Figure 7-13. Counter Reset Screen (1)

5. [2] Press the button to execute initialization.
(To not execute it, press the [8] button to return to the Initial Setting menu)
Counter Reset
PF/EJ Counter
Value: **
Reset Value?
Done: [2]
Cancel: [8]
Figure 7-14. Counter Reset Screen (2)

6. After counter initialization is executed, check that the values of the initialized
counters have changed to [0] in the counter reset screen (Figure 7-13).

Confidential
7.2.5.2 Mech Adjust: MENU B. Selecting from menu

MOTOR CORRECT [B40][B41][B42][B66][B67][B68]
3-2. Select “Mech Adjust: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
C H E C K Before executing ASF/LIFT motor dispersion correction, the paper
3-3. Select the motor to correct from the Mech Check menu.
P O IN T cassettes must be removed.
• B40 CR Motor Correct
• B41 PF Motor Correct
• B42 ASF Motor Correct C1
1. Start the service support mode. • B66 ASF/Lift Motor Correct C2
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125)) • B67 ASF/Lift Motor Correct C3
• B68 ASF/Lift Motor Correct C4
menu.
4. The correction and motor cycle check results are displayed after correction ends.
3. Select the motor to correct.


Enter the program No. of the motor to correct.
CR Motor Correction: 40
PF Motor Correction: 41
ASF Motor Correction C1: 42
ASF/Lift Motor Correction C2: 66

Confidential
7.2.5.3 Printing Adjust: MENU  Judgment

Make adjustments so that the spacing between the pattern lines when the
HEAD ANGULAR ADJ. MECH [B43] adjustment value is “0” becomes equal.
 Paper and feed tray

• Paper size: A4
• Paper type: Photo matte paper
• Paper feed tray: Rear tray
 Adjustment pattern

Confidential
 Adjustment procedure 4. Figure 7-15 appears.

1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. Head Angular Adj. Mech
125)) Print settings for
adjustment pattern Current Setting
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode printing Feed Tray: Cassette 1
top menu. Select the item whose Paper Size: A4
print settings are to be Paper Type: Plain
3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Mech”. changed.
Change the print Select Item: [2] [8]
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either settings Change Value: [4] [6]
P O IN T procedure A or B below. Print the adjustment

Print: [#] Button
pattern
Print Cancel: [*] Button
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-15. Head angular Adjustment Mech Screen
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern.

3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment
menu.
3-2. Select “Printing Adjust:MENU” from the Individual Adjustment
menu.
3-3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Mech” from the Printing Adjust menu.

Confidential
7. Check the adjustment pattern. 8. Perform the Adjustment.

Check the adjustment pattern and check the adjustment value for which the
line spacing is the most equal. If the tape of the front cover open sensor comes off during the
adjustment, make sure that the CR unit is securely fixed
C H E C K The following two types of patterns are printed in the because it moves to the home position and is dangerous
P O IN T adjustment pattern.
 Coarse adjustment pattern
The adjusted value is printed by five steps 8-1. When the screen in Figure 7-18 appears, press the [2] button. Press the
(-10, -5, 0, +5, +10). [2] button. The carriage unit moves to the maintenance position. (To not
perform adjustment, press the [8] button.)
 Detail adjustment pattern
The adjusted value is printed by three steps
(-5, -3, 0, +3, +5). Head Angular Adj. Mech
Execute Head Adjustment?
Execute: [2]
Cancel: [8]
Figure 7-18. Confirmation Screen (1)
Figure 7-16. Adjustment Pattern (Coarse adjustment pattern)
Figure 7-17. Adjustment pattern (Detail adjustment pattern)

Confidential
8-2. Turn the four print head fixing screws counterclockwise by 90 degrees to Head Angular Adj. Mech
loosen them.
End of Head Adjustment?
8-3. Turn the adjustment dial based on the adjustment value confirmed in Then, Execute End Operation
Step 7. ＆ Print.
Push [#] Button

C H E C K The adjustment dial adjustment method is as follows.
P O IN T  Clockwise (CW) : “+” direction
 Counterclockwise (CCW) : ”－” direction
Figure 7-20. Confirmation Screen (2)

Screws Print head
Head angular adjustment 8-6. Print the adjustment pattern again and check that the lines of the
adjustment pattern of “0” are the most equal.
+5
-5
• When equal:
 CCW: Press the [2] button to end adjustment.
- direction • When not equal:
Press the [8] button and go to Step 8-7.
0 8-7. Perform steps Step 8-1 to Step 8-2 and turn the adjustment dial one
graduation in the deviation direction.
Screw 8-8. Perform steps Step 8-4 to Step 8-6 to check the adjustment pattern.
 CW: Repeat this procedure until the lines of the adjustment pattern of “0”
-5
+5 + direction
become equal.
Screw
Figure 7-19. Print Head Fixing Screws
8-4. Tighten the four fixing screws.
8-5. A confirmation screen appears. Press the [#] button.

Confidential
HEAD ANGULAR ADJ. SOFT A [B44]  Adjustment procedure

 Paper and feed tray (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p.
• Paper size: A4 125))
• Paper type: Business plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (1) to paper cassette (4) or rear tray top menu.
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft A”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft A” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
From among the printed patterns, select the pattern where the above and
below lines are the straightest.

Confidential
4. Figure 7-21 appears.

Head Angular Adj. Soft A
Head Angular Adj. Soft A Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
adjustment pattern Current Setting Displays the entered #1: ---
printing Feed Tray: Cassette 1 adjustment values #2: ---
Select the item whose Paper Size: A4
print settings are to be Paper Type: Plain Select: [2] [8] Input: [6]
changed. Cancel: [*] Finish: [#]
settings Change Value: [4] [6]
Print the adjustment
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the Figure 7-22. Input Screen
Figure 7-21. Head Angular Adj. Soft A Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern. 11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.
7. Check the adjustment pattern.
8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the C H E C K To end adjustment without entering an adjustment value, press
judgment procedure. P O IN T the [#] button in the state without an adjustment value entered
9. Enter the adjustment value. in the adjustment input screen to display the following screen.
If you press the [8] button in the following screen, the
C H E C K  Operation method is belows. adjustment end screen appears and you can end adjustment.
P O IN T  [2] button, [8] button: (To continue adjustment, press the [2] button.)
Select the number.
 [6] button: Head Angular Adj. Soft A
Displays the adjustment value input screen Exist Unset Value

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values. Cancel: [8]
 [*] button:
Cancel inputting the adjustment values.
 In the adjustment value input menu, the software number
key is displayed

Confidential
HEAD ANGULAR ADJ. SOFT B [B69]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper type: Plain paper, Business plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft B”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Head Angular Adj. Soft B” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and
right patterns.

Confidential

Head Angular Adj. Soft B
Head Angular Adj. Soft B Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
Paper Size: A4
Select the item whose
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-23. Head Angular Adj. Soft B Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Head Angular Adj. Soft B

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
PTS ACC./DEC.ADJUST [B45]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper size: A4/Letter 125))
• Paper type: Plain paper, Business plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (1) to paper cassette (4) top menu.
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
right patterns.

Confidential

PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust
PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-25. PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BI-D ADJUST [B46]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper type: Plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Bi-D Adjust”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Bi-D Adjust” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
right patterns.

Confidential

Bi-D Adjust
Bi-D Adjust Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
Select the item whose Paper Size: A4 #3: ---
print settings are to be Paper Type: Plain #4: ---
changed.
Change the print Select Item: [2] [8] Select: [2] [8] Input: [6]
settings Change Value: [4] [6] Cancel: [*] Finish: [#]
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-27. Bi-D Adjust Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Bi-D Adjust

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BI-D BAND ADJUST [B48]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper type: Business plain paper, plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Bi-D Band Adjust”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Bi-D Band Adjust” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
below lines are the straightest.

Confidential

Bi-D Band Adjust
Bi-D Band Adjust Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-29. Bi-D Band Adjust Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Bi-D Band Adjust

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
PW SENSOR CORRECT [B49]  Adjustment procedure
 Paper and feed tray Make sure to perform the initialization PW sensor before
performing the PW Sensor Correct.
• Paper size: A4
• Paper type: Photo matte paper
• Paper feed tray: Rear tray
 Adjustment pattern 1. Start the service support mode.
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p.
125))
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
top menu.
3. Select “PW Sensor Correct”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “PW Sensor Correct” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
From the stepped patterns printed on the bottom, top, left, and right edges of
the paper, select the numerical value that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper
for each of them.

Confidential

PW Sensor Correct
PW Sensor Correct Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

Print settings for
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-31. PW Sensor Correct Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: PW Sensor Correct

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
PE ADJUST [ASF: B52][REAR ASF: B53]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper feed tray: Front paper feed: Paper cassette (1) to cassette (4) top menu.
Rear paper feed: Rear tray 3. Select “PE Adjust”.

Input the program number.
PE Adjust (ASF): 52
PE Adjust (Rear ASF): 53

menu.
menu.
3-3. Select the paper feed direction from the Printing Adjust menu.
• B52 PE Adjust (ASF)
• B53 PE Adjust (Rear ASF)
 Judgment
From the stepped patterns printed on the top and bottom edges (the bottom
edge is for rear paper feeding only) of the paper, select the numerical value
that is 5 mm from the edge of the paper for each of them.

Confidential
4. Figure 7-33 appears,

(Some contents on the screen differ for “PE Adjust (Rear ASF)”) PE Adjust (ASF)
Adjust Setting Area: -128 to 127

PE Adjust (ASF)
Print settings for Displays the entered #1: ---
adjustment pattern Current Setting adjustment values
printing Feed Tray: Cassette 1
Select the item whose Paper Size: A4 Select: [2] [8] Input: [6]
print settings are to be Paper Type: Plain Cancel: [*] Finish: [#]
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing Figure 7-34. Input Screen
and go to the
10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
Figure 7-33. PE Adjust (ASF) Screen and then press the [#] button to end adjustment.
5. Load paper into the paper feed tray. 11. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
6. Press the [#] button to print the adjustment pattern. screen.
7. Check the adjustment pattern. C H E C K To end adjustment without entering an adjustment value, press
8. Check the adjustment pattern and determine the adjustment value based on the P O IN T the [#] button in the state without an adjustment value entered
judgment procedure. in the adjustment input screen to display the following screen.
9. Enter the adjustment value. If you press the [8] button in the following screen, the
adjustment end screen appears and you can end adjustment.
C H E C K  Operation method is belows. (To continue adjustment, press the [2] button.)
P O IN T  [2] button, [8] button:
Select the number. PE Adjust (ASF)
 [6] button: Exist Unset Value

Displays the adjustment value input screen
Continue: [2]
 [#] button: Cancel: [8]
Finishes adjustment and inputs the adjustment values.
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BAND FEED ADJUST [B55]  Adjustment procedure

 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Band Feed Adjust”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Band Feed Adjust” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment
Select the numerical value of the pattern that has no overlapping of the upper
and lower blocks and the least white bands.

Confidential

Band Feed Adjust
Band Feed Adjust
adjustment pattern Current Setting adjustment values #2: ---
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-35. Band Feed Adjust Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Band Feed Adjust

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
A-B BAND ADJUST [B65]  Adjustment procedure

 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “A-B Band Adjust”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “A-B Band Adjust” from the Printing Adjust menu.
 Judgment

Confidential

A-B Band Adjust
A-B Band Adjust
adjustment pattern Current Setting adjustment values
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-37. A-B Band Adjust Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: A-B Band Adjust

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
7.2.5.4 Simple Adjustment: MENU  Adjustment procedure

PTS ACC/DEC.ADJUST (S) [B61] (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p.
 Paper and feed tray 125))
• Paper size: A4/Letter top menu.
• Paper type: Plain paper
3. Select “PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)”.
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4)
 Adjustment pattern C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
Same as PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (P. 337)
 Judgment
Select the pattern for which there is no gap and overlapping of the left and A. Selecting by entering the program number
right patterns.

3-1. Select “Simple Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Select “PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)” from the Simple Adjustment
menu.

Confidential

PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)
PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-39. PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S) Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BI-D ADJUST (S) [B62]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper type: plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4) top menu.
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Bi-d Adjust (S)”.
Same as Bi-D Band Adjust (P. 339) C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
 Judgment
Select the pattern with least visible looking black and white bands.


3-2. Select “Bi-d Adjust (S)” from the Simple Adjustment menu.

Confidential

Bi-d Adjust (S)
Bi-d Adjust (S)
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-41. Bi-d Adjust (S) Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Bi-d Adjust (S)

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BI-D BAND ADJUST (S) [B63]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper type: Business plain paper, plain paper 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
The same paper type as in Bi-d Adjust must be used. top menu.
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4) 3. Select “Bi-d Band Adjust (S)”.
Same as Bi-D Band Adjust (P. 341) P O IN T procedure A or B below.
 Judgment
below lines are the straightest. A. Selecting by entering the program number

3-2. Select “Bi-d Band Adjust (S)” from the Simple Adjustment menu.

Confidential

Bi-d Band Adjust (S)
Bi-d Band Adjust (S)
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-43. Bi-d Band Adjust (S) Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Bi-d Band Adjust (S)

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
BAND FEED ADJUST (S) [B64]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C4), rear tray top menu.
 Adjustment pattern 3. Select “Band Feed Adjust (S)”.
Same as Band Feed Adjust (P. 347) C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
 Judgment

3-2. Select “Band Feed Adjust (S)” from the Simple Adjustment menu.

Confidential

Band Feed Adjust (S)
Band Feed Adjust (S)
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
Figure 7-45. Band Feed Adjust (S) Screen 10. Check that an adjustment value is entered for all of the adjustment input items
screen.
Select the number.
 [6] button: Band Feed Adjust (S)

 [#] button:
Continue: [2]
 [*] button:
key is displayed

Confidential
7.2.5.5 Mech Check: MENU 4. Visually check that the CR Unit and CR Shaft are operating as follows.
4-1. The CR Shaft lifts from PG1 (state with CR unit at very bottom) to PG7
APG OPERATION CHECK [B20] (state with CR unit at very top).
1. Start the service support mode. 4-2. The paper guide transitions to the release state (state where raised from
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125)) paper feed roller).
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top 4-3. The paper guide transitions to the release cancel state (state where touching
paper feed roller).
menu.
4-4. The CR Shaft is lowered from PG7 to PG1.
3. Select “APG Operation Check”.
5. Adjustment is finished if operation is performed normally. If there was something
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either abnormal, reassemble the related parts.
C H E C K When the motor drive check result is NG or when there is a motor
P O IN T error, check the APG motor.


3-2. Select “Mech Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
3-3. Select “APG Operation Check” from the Mech Check menu.

Confidential
CR SCALE CHECK [B21] SENSOR CHECK-PW [B22]
menu. menu.
3. Select “CR Scale Check”. 3. Select “Sensor Check-PW”.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
P O IN T procedure A or B below. P O IN T procedure A or B below.
A. Selecting by entering the program number A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu. 3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Enter program number “21”. Enter program number “22”.
3-3. Press the [#] button. 3-3. Press the [#] button.
B. Selecting from menu B. Selecting from menu

3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu. 3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
3-2. Select “Mech Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu. 3-2. Select “Mech Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
3-3. Select “CR Scale Check” from the Mech Check menu. 3-3. Select “Sensor Check-PW” from the Mech Check menu.
4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, replace the CR Scale with a new 4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, check whether the shutter
one. mechanism of the CR Unit is assembled correctly. If there is a problem, replace
the CR Unit with a new one.

Confidential
PE SENSOR CHECK [B23] TEMP/HUM. SENSOR [B24]
 Paper and feed tray  Adjustment procedure

• Paper size: A4 1. Start the service support mode.
• Paper type: Plain paper (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p.
• Paper feed tray: Paper Cassette (C1) 125))
 Adjustment procedure 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
top menu.
3. Select “Temp/hum. Sensor”.
125).) C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode P O IN T procedure A or B below.
top menu.
3. Select “PE Sensor Check”.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either A. Selecting by entering the program number
Enter program number “23”. 3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment
menu.
3-3. Select “Temp/hum. Sensor” from the Mech Check menu.
 Judgment
menu.
1. Check the output values of the temperature and humidity sensors and confirm
whether or not they are normal.
3-3. Select “B23 PE Sensor Check” from the Mechanical Operation Check
menu. C H E C K Error judgment guide is belows.
P O IN T  Broken wire:0 ºC or less is indicated
4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, check whether the PE
 Short:60 ºC or more is indicated
sensor lever is assembled correctly. If there is a problem, replace the PE
sensor lever wi881 a new one.

Confidential
2. Touch the temperature sensor and check that there is a change to the output NIP SOLENOID/SENSOR [B25]
value.
3. If NG, check the connection state of the temperature and humidity sensors. If 1. Start the service support mode.
there is a problem, replace the temperature and humidity sensors with new (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
ones.
menu.
3. Select “NIP Solenoid/Sensor”.



3-3. Select “NIP Solenoid/Sensor” from the Mech Check menu.
4. Check the operation of the nip release solenoid visually and by its sound.
5. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, check whether the Intermediate
Release Solenoid Lever and Intermediate Release Solenoid are assembled
correctly. If there is a problem, replace the Intermediate Release Solenoid Lever
and Intermediate Release Solenoid with new ones.

Confidential
7.2.5.6 Printing Check: MENU NOZZLE RANK CATEGORIES [B27]
NOZZLE NOISE CHECK [B26] C H E C K Start operation with all nozzles dispensing normally. Clean any
P O IN T defective nozzles beforehand.
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top 1. Start the service support mode.
menu. (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
3. Select “Nozzle Noise Check”. 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
menu.
P O IN T procedure A or B below. 3. Select “Nozzle Rank Categories”.

3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. A. Selecting by entering the program number
B. Selecting from menu Enter program number “27”.
3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu. 3-3. Press the [#] button.
3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu. B. Selecting from menu
3-3. Select “Nozzle Noise Check” from the Printing Check menu. 3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu.
4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, check whether the Print Head 3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu.
and Head FFC are assembled correctly. If there is a problem, replace the Print
3-3. Select “Nozzle Rank Categories” from the Printing Check menu.
Head and Head FFC with new ones.
4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, perform head cleaning to enable
the state where all nozzles discharge ink normally.

Confidential
NOZZLE DETECT CHECK [B28] CHECK PATTERN(A4/LTR) [B29]
C H E C K Start operation with all nozzles dispensing normally. Clean any  Paper and feed tray
P O IN T defective nozzles beforehand.
• Paper size: A4
• Paper type: Plain paper
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1), rear tray
1. Start the service support mode.  Adjustment procedure
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p.
menu. 125))
3. Select “Nozzle Detect Check”. 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode
top menu.
C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either 3. Select “Check Pattern(A4/LTR)”.

3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu. A. Selecting by entering the program number
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment menu.
3-3. Press the [#] button. Enter program number “29”.
B. Selecting from menu 3-3. Press the [#] button.
3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment menu. B. Selecting from menu
3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment menu. 3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment
3-3. Select “Nozzle Detect Check” from the Printing Check menu. menu.
4. The check result is displayed on the panel. If NG, perform head cleaning to enable 3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment
the state where all nozzles discharge ink normally. menu.
3-3. Select “Check Pattern(A4/LTR)” from the Printing Check menu.
5. Press the [#] button to print the check patterns.
6. Check the check patterns and take a measure based on the judgment
procedure.

Confidential
CHECK PATTERN(A3) [B33] RGB PATTERN [B30]
 Paper and feed tray  Paper and feed tray

• Paper size: A3 • Paper size: A4/Letter
• Paper type: Plain paper • Paper type: Plain paper
• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C2) • Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C2), rear tray
 Adjustment procedure  Check pattern
125))
top menu.
3. Select “Check Pattern(A3)”.



menu.
3-2. Select “Printing Check: MENU” from the Individual Adjustment
menu.
3-3. Select “Check Pattern(A3)” from the Printing Check menu.
4. Load paper into the paper feed tray.  Judgment
5. Press the [#] button to print the check patterns. Visually check the banding levels of the check pattern to confirm that there is
6. Check the check patterns and take a measure based on the judgment no problem.
procedure.

Confidential

(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. RGB Pattern
3. Select “RGB Pattern”. changed.

Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-47. RGB Pattern Screen
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 6. Press the [#] button to print the check patterns.
3-3. Press the [#] button. procedure.
B. Selecting from menu No. Symptom Suspected cause Measure
3-1. Select “Individual Adjustment: MENU” from the Adjustment 1 Multiple white bands are Nozzles missing 1. Check the head state.
menu. occurring. 2. Perform cleaning in
diagnostic mode.
3. Perform manual cleaning,
menu.
etc.
3-3. Select “RGB Pattern” from the Printing Check menu.
2 The banding level differs LUT_POL adjustment Perform adjustment again.
depending on the color. value is incorrect. (LUT_POL adjustment (easy
Adjustment value is not adjustment, adjustment by
suited to environmental paper type))
changes.
3 White bands are occurring Adjustment is incorrect. Perform adjustment again. If
overall. (Band adjustment, easy this does not rectify problem,
adjustment, adjustment by a probable cause is a
paper type) defective mechanism.

Confidential
No. Symptom Suspected cause Measure RULED LINE PATTERN [B31]

4 Black bands are occurring Adjustment is incorrect. Perform adjustment again. If
overall. this does not rectify problem,
 Paper and feed tray
(Band adjustment, easy
adjustment, adjustment by a probable cause is a • Paper size: A3 (x2)
paper type) defective mechanism. • Paper type: Plain paper
4 White banding or black Adjustment is incorrect. Perform band feed • Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (1) to paper cassette (4) or rear tray
banding is occurring at the top adjustment again.  Check pattern
and middle of the pattern.
5 White banding or black Adjustment is incorrect. Perform band feed and band
banding is occurring at the adjustment again.
bottom edge.
 Judgment
Visually check the check patterns to confirm that there is no ruled line offset.

Confidential

(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. Ruled line pattern
3. Select “Ruled line pattern”. changed.

Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-48. Ruled line pattern Screen
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. 6. Press the [#] button to print the check patterns.
3-3. Press the [#] button. procedure.
menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Ruled Line Pattern” from the Printing Check menu.

Confidential
NOZZLE CHECK PATTERN [B32]  Adjustment procedure

• Paper feed tray: Paper cassette (C1) to paper cassette (C2), rear tray top menu.
 Check pattern 3. Select “Nozzle Check Pattern”.



menu.
menu.
3-3. Select “Nozzle Check Pattern” from the Printing Check menu.
 Judgment
Visually check the check patterns to confirm that there are no nozzles missing

Confidential
Nozzle Check Pattern

Print settings for
changed.
Print: [#] Button
pattern
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-49. Nozzle Check Pattern Screen
procedure.

Confidential
7.2.5.7 Maintenance: MENU HEAD CLEANING [CL1: C03][CL2: C04][CL3: C05]

[STRONG CL: C06][REFRESH CL: C07]
INK FILL [HEAD INK FILL:C01][INITIAL FILL:C02]
 Adjustment procedure (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
1. Start the service support mode. 2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
125)) 3. Select cleaning (CL1, CL2, CL3, Strong CL, Refresh CL).
2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select ink filling (Head Ink Fill or Initial Fill). P O IN T procedure A or B below.

3-1. Select “Input C No._Maintenance” from the Adjustment menu.
A. Selecting by entering the program number 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
0-1. Select “Input C No._Maintenance” from the Adjustment menu. Enter program number “03”, “04”, “05”, “06”, “07”.
CL1: 03
CL2: 04
CL3: 05
0-3. Press the [#] button. Strong CL: 06
Refresh CL: 07
0-1. Select “Ink Fill: MENU” from the maintenance menu.
0-2. Select an item from the Ink Fill menu.
•C01 Head Ink Fill 3-1. Select “Head Cleaning: MENU” from the maintenance menu.
•C02 Initial Fill
1. Press the [2] button to start ink filling.

Confidential
3-2. Select the cleaning level. INK DISCHARGE [HEAD INK DISCHARGE: C08][SUPPLY INK
•C03 CL1: When there are slight nozzle disconnection DISCHARGE: C09][INK SYSTEM INK DISCHARGE: C10]
and defective discharge
•C04 CL2: When there is nozzle disconnection that
allows air bubbles to enter between
the nozzle and reservoir 2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
•C05 CL3: When there is nozzle disconnection caused 3. Select ink discharge (Head Ink Discharge or Supply Ink Discharge or Ink System
by air bubbles accumulating under the filter Ink Discharge).
in the head
•C06 Strong CL: When there are residual air bubbles in C H E C K Select and execute the corresponding adjustment item using either
the head filter upper section to supply P O IN T procedure A or B below.
system, or when there is a nozzle
disconnection occurring with paper dust
stuck inside the nozzle section
•C07 Refresh CL: When there is nozzle disconnection that A. Selecting by entering the program number
makes restore difficult in strong cleaning 3-1. Select “Input C No._Maintenance” from the Adjustment menu.
such as when paper dust is still stuck inside 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
the nozzle Enter program number.
4. Press the [2] button to start head cleaning. Head Ink Discharge: 08
Supply Ink Discharge: 09
Ink System Ink Discharge: 10

3-1. Select “Ink Discharge: MENU” from the maintenance menu.
3-2. Select the part to discharge ink.
•C08 Head Ink Discharge
•C09 Supply Ink Discharge
•C10 Ink System Ink Discharge
C H E C K When executing C09, it is necessary to remove the ink pack from the
P O IN T product. (When executing C08, there is no need to remove the ink
pack from the product.)

Confidential
HEAD THERMISTOR CHECK [C11]

2. Select “Maintenance: MENU” from the service support mode top menu.
3. Select “Head Thermistor Check”.


3-1. Select “Input C No._Maintenance” from the Adjustment menu.

3-1. Select “Ink Discharge: MENU” from the maintenance menu.
3-2. Select “Head Thermistor Check” from the Ink Discharge menu.
4. The Print Head temperature is displayed.

Confidential
7.2.5.8 Main Parts Adjust: MENU B. Selecting from menu

3-1. Select “Main Parts Adjust: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit
BEFORE REPAIR OPERATION [B90] (PRINT HEAD) menu.
This operation is necessary to performing the “ Head Replace 3-2. Select “Print Head: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
Sequence (B80)” correctly.
3-3. Select “Before Repair Operation” from the Print Head menu.
Make sure to perform the This operation before the print head
replacement. 4. When the screen in Figure 7-50 appears, select whether or not to perform the print
head replacement judgment (print head replacement judgment cleaning).
 When you wish to perform print head replacement immediately
(wish to not perform the print head replacement judgment):
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top Press the [2] button and go to Step9.
menu.  When you wish to not perform print head replacement immediately
3. Select “Print Head: MENU” - “Before Repair Operation”. (wish to perform the print head replacement judgment):
Press the [8] button and go to Step5.
P O IN T procedure A or B below. Before Repair Operation
Do you replace
Proceed to Step9 the print head immediately
without performing
the print head without performing
A. Selecting by entering the program number replacement head repair judgment?
judgment.
3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment Main Perform the print
Yes: [2]
No: [8]
Unit menu. head replacement
judgment.
3-3. Press the [#] button. Figure 7-50. Before Repair Operation (1)

Confidential
5. The print head replacement judgment cleaning is performed in accordance with

Continue Before Repair Operation
the nozzles missing state. Print the nozzle check pattern after replacement preparation before
judgment cleaning. print head Is head exchange necessary?
replacement. Go to
Step9.
Yes: [2]
End preparation No: [8]
Nozzle Check Pattern before print head
Print settings for replacement.
changed.
Figure 7-52. Before Repair Operation (2)
pattern Print: [#] Button 9. The Head Ink Discharge is executed.(p. 372)
Skip adjustment 10. Check that Figure 7-53 is displayed and then press the power button to turn off the
pattern printing
power. (The power turns off in the CR unlock state.)
and go to the
Figure 7-51. Nozzle Check Pattern Screen Before Repair Operation
Finish
7. Press the [#] button to print the check patterns. Please Power Off
8. Check the nozzle check pattern to confirm the nozzles missing state and then make Push [Power] Button
a judgment of whether to replace the print head.

 If the nozzles missing state is not resolved (state in which print head
replacement is required):
Press the [2] button and go to Step9.
 When the nozzles missing state is resolved Figure 7-53. Before Repair Operation (3)
(state in which recovery is possible by cleaning):
Press the [8] button to end the preparation before print head replacement.

Confidential
AFTER REPAIR ADJUSTMENT [B80] (PRINT HEAD) 4. The inspections and ink filling are executed in the following sequence.
1. Head ID Input (p. 325)
 If “Before Repair Operation” (Print Head) is not performed
before Print Head replacement, Ink charge of “After Repair 2. CR Scale Check (p. 360)
Adjustment” may do not perform correctly. 3. Nozzle Noise Check (p. 363)
Therefore, make sure to perform the “Before Repair 4. Head Ink Fill or Initial Fill (p. 371)
Operation” (Print Head) before Print Head replacement. *If “Before Repair Operation” (Print Head) is not performed before Print
 When “Before Repair Operation” (Print Head) is not Head replacement, the Head ink Fill will be executed.
performed, perform the Ink Charge (C01 Head Ink Fill) 5. After ink filling completes, adjustment is executed in the following order.
individually from Maintenance Menu.
1. Head Angular Adj. Mech (p. 329)
1. Start the service support mode. 2. Head Angular Adj. Soft A (p. 333)
3. Head Angular Adj. Soft B (p. 335)
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top 4. PTS Acc./Dec.Adjust(S) (p. 337)
menu.
5. Bi-d Adjust (S) (p. 353)
3. Select “Print Head: MENU” - “After Repair Operation”. 6. Bi-d Band Adjust (S) (p. 355)
7. Band Feed Adjust (S) (p. 357)
P O IN T procedure A or B below. 8. A-B Band Adjust (p. 349)
6. Perform check pattern printing, check that there is no problem, and end the
adjustments for after print head replacement.
A. Selecting by entering the program number 1. Check Pattern(A4/LTR) (p. 364)

2. Check Pattern(A3)(p. 365)
3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment Main
Unit menu. C H E C K When an NG result appears in the printed diagnostics pattern, a full
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. P O IN T adjustment not a simple adjustment must be performed.

menu.
3-2. Select “Print Head: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
3-3. Select “After Repair Operation” from the Print Head menu.

Confidential
BEFORE REPAIR OPERATION [B91] (INK SUPPLY UNIT) 4. The Head Ink Discharge is executed.(p. 372)
5. Check that Figure 7-54 is displayed and then press the power button to turn off the
1. Start the service support mode. power.
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top Before Repair Operation
menu.
Finish
3. Select “Ink Supply Unit: MENU” - “Before Repair Operation”. Please Power Off
Push [Power] Button


3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment Main Figure 7-54. Before Repair Operation Screen
Unit menu.

menu.
3-2. Select “Ink Supply Unit: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
3-3. Select “Before Repair Operation” from the Ink Supply Unit menu.

Confidential
AFTER REPAIR ADJUSTMENT [B81] (INK SUPPLY UNIT) 4. When the screen in Figure 7-55 appears, press the [#] button to perform ink
filling.
(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125)) After Repair Adjustment
2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top Execute Ink fill
menu. Push [#] Button
3. Select “Ink Supply Unit: MENU” - “After Repair Operation”.

A. Selecting by entering the program number Figure 7-55. After Repair Adjustment Screen (1)
5. After performing ink filling, the screen in Figure 7-56 appears.
Unit menu.
3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD. Print settings for
Enter program number “81”. adjustment pattern Current Setting
3-3. Press the [#] button. Select the item whose Paper Size: A4
B. Selecting from menu changed.
3-1. Select “Main Parts Adjust: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit settings Change Value: [4] [6]
menu. Print the adjustment

Print: [#] Button
pattern
3-2. Select “Ink Supply Unit: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu. Skip adjustment
3-3. Select “After Repair Operation” from the Ink Supply Unit menu. pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-56. After Repair Adjustment Screen (2)

Confidential
8. When the screen in Figure 7-58 appears, check the nozzle check result. BEFORE REPAIR OPERATION [B92] (INK SYSTEM ASSY)
If there is no problem, press the [2] button to end the I/S Unit Replace Sequence.
After Repair Adjustment (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
Nozzle Check OK? 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
Yes: [2]
menu.
No: [8]
3. Select “Ink System Assy: MENU” - “Before Repair Operation”.

Figure 7-57. After Repair Adjustment Screen (3) A. Selecting by entering the program number
Unit menu.

menu.
3-2. Select “Ink System Assy: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
3-3. Select “Before Repair Operation” from the Ink System Assy menu.

Confidential
4. When the screen in Figure 7-58 appears, press the [#] button to discharge ink from AFTER REPAIR ADJUSTMENT [B82] (INK SYSTEM ASSY)
inside the exhaust pump.
Before Repair Operation (Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125))
Discharge ink from Pump 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
Push [#] Button
menu.
3. Select “Ink System Assy: MENU” - “After Repair Operation”.

Figure 7-58. Before Repair Operation Screen (1) A. Selecting by entering the program number
5. Check that the screen in Figure 7-59 is displayed and then press the power button
to turn off the power. (Turn off the power in the CR unlock state.) 3-1. Select “Input B No.-Main Unit Adjust” from the Adjustment Main
Unit menu.
Before Repair Operation 3-2. Press the [#] button and software number key is displayed on LCD.
Finish Enter program number “82”.
Please Power Off
Push [Power] Button
menu.
3-2. Select “Ink System Assy: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
Figure 7-59. Before Repair Operation Screen (2) 3-3. Select “After Repair Operation” from the Ink System Assy menu.

Confidential
4. In the following screen, press the [#] button to perform the Mainte Unit Replace 8. When the screen in Figure 7-62 appears, check the nozzle check result.
Sequence. If there is no problem, press the [2] button to end the I/S Unit Replace Sequence.
After Repair Adjustment After Repair Adjustment
Execute Ink fill Nozzle Check OK?
Push [#] Button Yes: [2]

No: [8]
Figure 7-60. After Repair Adjustment Screen (1) Figure 7-62. After Repair Adjustment Screen (3)
5. After performing ink filling, the screen in Figure 7-61 appears.

Print settings for
changed.
pattern Print: [#] Button
Skip adjustment
pattern printing
and go to the
Figure 7-61. After Repair Adjustment Screen (2)


Confidential
AFTER REPAIR ADJUSTMENT [B83] (REAR ASF UNIT) AFTER REPAIR ADJUSTMENT [B84] (MAIN BOARD)
menu. menu.
3. Select “Main Parts Adjust: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit menu. 3. Select “Main Parts Adjust: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit menu.
4. Select “Rear ASF Unit: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu. 4. Select “Main Board: MENU” from the Main Parts Adjust menu.
5. Select “After Repair Adjustment” from the Rear ASF Unit menu. 5. Select “After Repair Adjustment” from the Main Board menu.
6. The following is performed. 6. The following is performed.
1. Counter Reset (Rear ASF Unit) (p. 326) 1. Ink Leak Sensor Check
2. Counter Reset (ASF) (p. 326) 2. Nozzle Noise Check (p. 363)
7. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu 7. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen. screen.

Confidential
7.2.5.9 Periodic Maintenance:MENU DISPLAY SETTING [B71]
ADJUST AFTER MAINTENANCE [B70] 1. Start the service support mode.

(Refer to “5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures”(p. 125)) 2. Select “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode top
menu.
menu. 3. Select “Periodic Maintenance: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit
menu.
3. Select “Periodic Maintenance: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit
menu. 4. Select “Display Setting”.
4. Select “Adjust After Maintenance”. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to change the periodic maintenance display
settings.
5. The following adjustments are performed.
6. The setting completion screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
1. After Repair Adjustment (Ink System Assy) (p. 380) screen.
2. Counter Reset (PF/EJ) (p. 326)
3. PTS ACC/Dec.Adjust (S)
4. Bi-d Adjust (S)
5. Bi-d Band Adjust (S)
6. Band Feed Adjust (S)
6. The adjustment end screen appears. Press the [#] button to return to the menu
screen.

Confidential
7.3 Repair Work Procedure
7.3.1 Parts/Components Location

No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component No. Part/Component
1 Left SC Cover (p. 406) 4 Right SC Cover (p. 406) 7 Front Right Cover (p. 415) 10 Stacker Assy (p. 415)
2 Left Housing (p. 406) 5 Right Housing (p. 406) 8 Front Right Housing (p. 415) 11 Front Cover Assy (p. 415)
3 Paper Guide Support (p. 415) 6 Upper Middle Housing (p. 406) 9 Panel Unit (p. 406) 12 ---
2
1 3
11
10
9
8
Figure 7-63. Housing (1)
Repair Work Repair Work Procedure 384

Confidential

1 Front Housing (p. 421) 4 Rear Cover Assy (p. 421) 7 --- 10 ---
Cassette Papersize Detector Assy (p.
2 Paper Support Assy (p. 421) 5 8 --- 11 ---
421)
3 Upper Rear Housing (p. 421) 6 Front Left Housing (p. 421) 9 --- 12 ---
3
1
4
6
Figure 7-64. Housing (2)

Confidential

1 Ink Pack Cover Belt (p. 455) 4 Right RIPS Housing Assy (p. 455) 7 --- 10 ---
2 Left RIPS Housing Assy (p. 433) 5 Front RIPS Housing (p. 433) 8 --- 11 ---
3 Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor (p. 455) 6 Ink Pack Cover (p. 455) 9 --- 12 ---
6 3
5
4
1
Figure 7-65. Ink Supply (1)

Confidential

Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever Assy (p.
1 CSIC FFC (p. 444) 4 7 Decompression Pump Unit (p. 444) 10 ---
433)
2 CSIC Relay Board (p. 455) 5 Ink Leak Sensor Assy (p. 444) 8 Ink Supply Unit (p. 444) 11 ---
3 Ink End Sensor (p. 444) 6 Decompression Tube Assy (p. 444) 9 --- 12 ---
1
3
7
5

Confidential

1 Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt (p. 463) 4 Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder (p. 433) 7 --- 10 ---
2 Rear RIPS Housing (p. 463) 5 Paper Jam Clear Cover (p. 463) 8 --- 11 ---
Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor (p.
3 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
433)
3
5

Confidential

1 ADF Pad Assy (p. 489) 4 ADF Hinge (p. 469) 7 ADF/SCN Unit (p. 469) 10 ---
2 ADF Pick Up Roller Assy (p. 489) 5 ADF Document Size Sensor (p. 469) 8 --- 11 ---
3 ADF Document Size Sensor (p. 469) 6 ADF Cover Assy (p. 489) 9 --- 12 ---
4
3
2
1 4
Figure 7-68. ADF/SCN (1)

Confidential

1 Front ADF Base (p. 496) 4 ADF PF Support Guide (p. 489) 7 Rear ADF Cover (p. 500) 10 Document Stopper (p. 500)
Top ADF Document Support Assy (p.
2 Front ADF Cover (p. 496) 5 Rear ADF Base (p. 500) 8 11 Document Mat Cover Assy (p. 489)
469)
3 ASF Cover (p. 489) 6 Screw Cover Seal (p. 500) 9 Right ADF Cover (p. 500) 12 ---
4
5
3 6
7
2 6
1 9
10
11
Figure 7-69. ADF/SCN (2)

Confidential

1 Power Supply Unit (p. 508) 4 Wi-Fi Board (p. 508) 7 Humidity Sensor (p. 528) 10 ---
2 PCB Mechanism Relay Board (p. 508) 5 Connector Cover (p. 508) 8 --- 11 ---
3 PCB Head Relay Board (p. 508) 6 USB Host Assy (p. 528) 9 --- 12 ---
1
2
Figure 7-70. Electrical Components (1)

Confidential

1 Main Board (p. 528) 4 FAX Board Assy (p. 517) 7 --- 10 ---
2 PDL Board Assy (p. 517) 5 PCB Rom (p. 517) 8 --- 11 ---
3 PDL SD Card (p. 517) 6 CR Ferrite Core Holder (p. 517) 9 --- 12 ---
2
1 3
Figure 7-71. Electrical Components (2)

Confidential

1 Ink System Assy (p. 544) 4 --- 7 --- 10 ---
2 MB CSIC Assy (p. 544) 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
3 --- 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
Figure 7-72. Ink System Mechanism

Confidential

1 PW Drive Shutter (p. 554) 4 APG Motor Assy (p. 554) 7 CR Scale (p. 581) 10 Print Head (p. 567)
2 APG Phase Sensor (p. 554) 5 APG Encoder (p. 554) 8 CR Motor Assy (p. 581) 11 PW Sensor (p. 597)
3 APG Drive Assy (p. 554) 6 CR Timing Belt (p. 597) 9 CR Unit (p. 597) 12 ---
4 5
10
3
6
1
11
Figure 7-73. Carriage Mechanism (1)

Confidential

1 Duplex Print Unit (p. 622) 4 Rear Band (p. 629) 7 --- 10 ---
2 Mounting Plate Assy (p. 629) 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
3 Duplex Print Cover Assy (p. 629) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
1
2
Figure 7-74. Paper Feed Mechanism (1)

Confidential

1 Pickup Roller (p. 622) 4 Middle Duplex Print Guide (p. 622) 7 Paper Size Sensor (p. 622) 10 ---
2 Paper Detector (p. 629) 5 Feed Lever (p. 622) 8 --- 11 ---
3 Hopper Up/down Sensor (p. 629) 6 Feed Sensor (p. 622) 9 --- 12 ---
3 4
2
6

Confidential

1 SMAP Phase Sensor (p. 635) 4 PF Drive Assy (p. 652) 7 Rear ASF Clutch Gear (p. 643) 10 Rear ASF Unit (p. 643)
2 PF Encoder Assy (p. 635) 5 PF Belt Tension Stopper (p. 635) 8 ASF Encoder (p. 652) 11 Link Lever (p. 643)
3 PF Timing Belt (p. 635) 6 ASF Drive Assy (p. 652) 9 Rear ASF Solenoid (p. 643) 12 ---
8 9
7
6 10
5
4
2
11

Confidential

1 Nip Release Sensor (p. 669) 4 --- 7 --- 10 ---
2 Intermediate Release Solenoid (p. 669) 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
3 Paper Jam Sensor (p. 669) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---

Confidential

1 End Guide (p. 689) 4 Cassette Assy (p. 689) 7 --- 10 ---
2 Retard Roller (p. 689) 5 --- 8 --- 11 ---
3 Paper Label (p. 689) 6 --- 9 --- 12 ---
3
Figure 7-78. Paper Cassette

Confidential

1 Option Rear Belt Cover (p. 695) 4 Option Pick Up Roller (p. 695) 7 Option Right Frame (p. 706) 10 Lower Connector (p. 706)
2 Vertical Roller (p. 717) 5 Spur Gear (with E-ring) (p. 717) 8 Lift Drive Gear (p. 717) 11 ---
3 Option Rear Cover (p. 695) 6 Separate Roller Drive Gear (p. 717) 9 Upper Connector (p. 706) 12 ---
2
3
1 4
10
Figure 7-79. Option Cassette (1)

Confidential

Cassette Detection Sensor Feed Sensor/
Cassette Paper Size Sensor/ Paper Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor
1 4 7 --- 10 ---
Detection Sensor/ Hopper Up/down Holder (p. 733)
Sensor (p. 717)
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor (p.
2 Option Feed Lever (p. 706) 5 8 --- 11 ---
733)
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor
3 Option Rear Cover Sensor (p. 717) 6 9 --- 12 ---
Lever (p. 733)
1 3
Figure 7-80. Option Cassette (2)

Confidential
7.3.2 How to Read This Chapter  Disassembly Procedure Page
CONTENTS EXPLANATION
Guide Part or Component Final Procedure
 Section Top Page The capital letters Indicates a target part to Pink-colored guide indicates that
represent parts/ be removed, or work to be the disassembly of the part
components, and the performed with the represented by the capital letter
number indicates the instructions in this box. ends here.
order of disassembly.
Part Name/Guide
Disassembly procedure of the listed parts or components are given in the section. Procedure
The capital letters in the “Guide” column are shown in the disassembly procedure pages Describes the disassembly procedure.
with a number. Follow the disassembly instructions on the pages with a capital letter for When reassembling, follow the disassembly procedure in reverse order.
your target part in numerical order.

Confidential
3. Find the “Guide” (the capital letter) in the disassembly procedure pages. Then follow the
EXAMPLE FOR READING DISASSEMBLY PROCEDURE
instructions on the pages with the Guide indication in numerical order.
1. Find your target part or component in the table.
2. See the Guide column, and remember the Guide (a capital letter) for the part/component. Example: To remove the PCB Rom, find pages with the “A” guide.
If A1, A2, A3, and A8 are found, start from the A1 page, then
Example: The Guide for the PCB Rom is “A”.
proceed in numerical order.

Confidential
7.3.3 Preparation for Servicing 7.3.3.2 Removing the Maintenance Box

1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
7.3.3.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
2. Remove the Maintenance Box.
HOW TO UNLOCK USING SERVICE SUPPORT MODE
1. Start the printer in the service support mode.

(See “5.1 Overview”(p. 125))
Maintenance Box
2. Select “CR unlock power off” from the service support mode top menu.
3. The CR Unit is unlocked and the printer turns off.
HOW TO UNLOCK MANUALLY

Duplex Print Cover
1. Remove the Front Cover Assy. (→P. 415)
2. While holding down the CR lock lever, move the CR Unit.
CR is locked CR is unlocked
Figure 7-82.
CR lock lever
Figure 7-81.

Confidential
7.3.3.3 Removing the Ink Packs 2. Push the Ink Pack Tray and then pull it out.
1. Move the lock lever in the direction of the arrow, and open the Ink Pack Cover.
Lock lever
Ink Pack Tray
Figure 7-84.
3. Remove the Ink Packs.
Ink Packs
Ink Pack Cover
Figure 7-83.
Figure 7-85.

Confidential
7.3.4 Repair Work Details

7.3.4.1 Housing 1
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component Guide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
Reassembly Inspection
Right SC Cover A 39 sec --- 39 sec
Left SC Cover B 37 sec --- 39 sec
Left Housing C 2 min 30 sec --- 2 min 30 sec
Right Housing D 2 min 19 sec --- 2 min 19 sec
Panel Unit E 5 min 26 sec --- 5 min 26 sec
Upper Middle Housing F 11 min 15 sec --- 11 min 15 sec

Confidential
DISASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 D1 Right SC Cover B1 Left SC Cover

E1 F1 (→P. 408) C1 (→P. 414)
E2 Left SC Cover D2 Right Housing C2 Left Housing

F2 (→P. 409) (→P. 408) (→P. 414)
E3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit

F3 (→P. 409)
E4 Front Right Cover

F4 (→P. 410)
E5 Panel Unit F5 Move the Panel Unit

(→P. 411) (→P. 411)
F6 Stacker Assy
(→P. 412)
F7 Front Housing Assy

(→P. 413)
F8 Upper Middle Housing

(→P. 413)

Confidential
A1
Right SC Cover Right Housing
D1 E1 F1 D2
Dent Tabs
Dowel
Right Housing
Hook B
Right SC Cover Hook A
Rib
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
1. Remove one screw (S1: ). 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing.
2. Slide the Right SC Cover while pushing the dent of Right SC Cover, and release the three 2. Release the hook A.
tabs. 3. Remove the two dowels.
3. Remove the Right SC Cover. 4. Release the four hooks B.

Confidential
Left SC Cover Open the ADF/SCN Unit

E2 F2 E3 F3
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right side

1. Remove one screw (S1: ) 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate.
2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it. 2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the
screw (S1: ).
3. Remove the screw (S4: ).

Confidential
Front Right Cover

ADF/SCN Unit E4 F4
Front Right Cover
Support Stand
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

Switch S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the
5. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the hook, and remove the front right cover. and remove the front right cover.
ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
Make sure that the support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two triangle
P O IN T

Confidential
Panel Unit Move the Panel Unit

E5 F5
Panel FFC

Grounding
Wire FFC Clamp
CN302
FFC Clamps Guide
Panel FFC
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding
Wire
Grounding Wire
Panel Unit
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
Ground wire S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). 1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). (Tightened together with the panel grounding wire at
2. Disconnect the FFC from the connector (CN302) of the Main Board. some locations)
3. Remove one screw (S1: ), then release the grounding wire. 2. Remove the two FFC clamps.
4. Remove the two FFC Clamps. 3. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide.
5. Release the Panel FFC and the grounding wire from the guide of the housing. 4. Open the Front Cover Assy.
6. Open the front cover. 5. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it.
7. Slide the panel unit rightward to remove it. Note that at some locations, the Panel Grounding Wire is tightened together with the

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit
Stacker Assy
F6
Panel Unit
Stacker Assy
6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.

Confidential
Front Housing Assy Upper Middle Housing

F7 F8
Upper Middle Housing

S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S10 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S10: ), then remove the Upper Middle Housing.

Confidential
B1 C1 C2
Left SC Cover Left Housing
Dent
Dowel
Left SC Cover
Left Housing
Hook
Rib
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type Rib
1. Remove one screw (S1: ) 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Left Housing.
2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it. 2. Remove the two dowels.

Confidential
7.3.4.2 Housing 2
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Stacker Assy A 10 sec --- 10 sec
Paper Guide Support B 18 sec --- 18 sec
Front Cover Assy C 36 sec --- 36 sec
Front Right Cover D 41 sec --- 41 sec
Front Right Housing E 1 min 53 sec --- 1 min 53 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 Stacker Assy B1 Paper Guide Support C1 Front Cover Assy D1 Front Right Cover
(→P. 417) (→P. 417) (→P. 418) E1 (→P. 418)
E2 Stacker Assy
(→P. 419)
E3 Cassette Assy
(→P. 419)
E4 Front Right Housing

(→P. 415)

Confidential
A1 B1
Stacker Assy Paper Guide Support
Paper Guide Dowel

Dowel
Paper Guide Support
Stacker Assy
1. Remove the Stacker Assy. 1. Pull out the paper guide.

2. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Paper Guide Support.

Confidential
C1
Front Cover Assy Front Right Cover
D1 E1
Front Right Cover

Boss Hook Hook
Hook
No. Screw Type

Front Cover Assy
1. Open the Front Cover Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the
2. Disengage the boss of the Front Cover Assy. hook, and remove the front right cover. and remove the front right cover.
3. Disengage the left hook using a flathead screwdriver.
4. Disengage the right hook, them remove the Front Cover Assy.

Confidential
Stacker Assy Cassette Assy

E2 E3
Cassette Assy
Stacker Assy

Confidential
Front Right Housing

E4
Front Right Housing
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing.

Confidential
7.3.4.3 Housing 3
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Upper Rear Housing A 7 min 23 sec --- 7 min 23 sec
Front Left Housing B 9 min 12 sec --- 9 min 12 sec
Rear Cover Assy C 5 min 12 sec --- 5 min 12 sec
Paper Support Assy D 7 min 32 sec --- 7 min 32 sec
Cassette Papersize
E 10 min --- 10 min
Detector Assy
Front Housing F 11 min 49 sec --- 11 min 49 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover B4 Front Right Cover

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 423) E4 F4 (→P. 427)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover B5 Move the Panel Unit

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 423) E5 F5 (→P. 427)
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B6 Front Housing Assy

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 424) E6 F6 (→P. 428)
A4 C4 Rear Housing Assy B7 Stacker Assy F7 Front Inner Housing

D4 (→P. 425) E6 (→P. 429) (→P. 431)
A5 C5 Paper Guide Support B8 Cassette Assy F8 Panel Frame

D5 (→P. 425) E6 (→P. 429) (→P. 431)
A6 C6 Upper Rear Housing B9 Front Left Housing F9 Front Cover Assy

D6 (→P. 426) E6 (→P. 430) (→P. 432)
E6 Cassette Papersize Detector Assy F10 Front Housing

(→P. 430) (→P. 432)
C7 Rear Cover Assy D7 Paper Support Assy

(→P. 426) (→P. 426)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Right SC Cover Left SC Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover

1. Remove one screw (S1: ). 1. Remove one screw (S1: )

2. Slide the Right SC Cover while pushing the dent of Right SC Cover, and release the three 2. Slide the Left SC Cover while pushing the dent of Left SC Cover, and remove it.
tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
D3 E3 F3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

S4 C.SHOULDER S-TITE,3X5 Switch
1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate. 4. Open the ADF/SCN Unit.
2. Reattach the Lower SC Reinforcing Plate in its portrait orientation, then secure it with the 5. Open the ADF/SCN Unit and extend the support stand as far as it goes, then support the
screw (S1: ). ADF/SCN Unit with the support stand.
3. Remove the screw (S4: ). Make sure that the support stand is fixed with the two hooks, and the two triangle
P O IN T

Confidential
A4 C4 A5 C5
Rear Housing Assy Paper Guide Support
D4 D5
Top
Rear Housing Assy
Paper Guide Dowel

Dowel
Interfering Place
Duplex Print Cover Hook

Paper Guide Support
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Pull out the paper guide.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ). 2. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Paper Guide Support.
3. Press the Rear Housing Assy in the direction of the arrow, then release the hook.
4. Remove the Rear Housing Assy while releasing the place interfering with the Rear ASF
Unit.

Confidential
A6 C6 C7 Rear Cover Assy

Upper Rear Housing
Paper Support Assy
D6 D7
Front Front
Rear Cover Assy
Paper Support Assy
Upper Rear Housing
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Upper Rear Housing. 1. Remove the Paper Support Assy from the Rear Cover Assy.

Confidential
B4 B5
Front Right Cover Move the Panel Unit
E4 F4 E5 F5
Front Right Cover
FFC Clamp
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Hook
Panel Unit
1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the 1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). (Tightened together with the panel grounding wire at
hook, and remove the front right cover. and remove the front right cover. some locations)

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

B6
Front Housing Assy
E6 F6
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type

6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer. 1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy.

Confidential
B7 B8
Stacker Assy Cassette Assy
E7 E8
Cassette Assy
Stacker Assy

Confidential
B9
Front Left Housing Cassette Papersize Detector Assy
E9 E10
Positioning
Front Left Housing
Cable Connector Cassette Papersize

Detector Assy

S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing. 1. Remove the cable from the connector.
2. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Cassette Papersize Detector Assy.
Set the positioning of cable following the above figure.

Confidential
Front Inner Housing Panel Frame

F7 F8
Front Inner Housing
Panel Frame

S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Front Inner Housing. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ), then remove the Panel Frame.

Confidential
Front Cover Assy Front Housing

F9 F10
Boss Hook Hook
Front Housing
Front Cover Assy

2. Disengage the boss of the Front Cover Assy.
3. Disengage the left hook using a flathead screwdriver.
4. Disengage the right hook, them remove the Front Cover Assy.

Confidential
7.3.4.4 Ink Supply 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Paper Jam Clear Cover
A 31 sec --- 31 sec
Holder
B 57 sec --- 57 sec
Open Sensor
Left RIPS Housing Assy C 4 min 24 sec --- 4 min 24 sec
Ink Pack Cover Lock

D --- --- TBD
Lever Assy
Front RIPS Housing E 11 min 47 sec --- 11 min 47 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Open the Paper Jam Clear

D1 E1 Cover (→P. 435)
A2 B2 C2 Paper Jam Clear Cover

D2 E2 Holder (→P. 435)
C3 D3 Rear RIPS Housing Assy B2 Paper Jam Clear Cover

E3 (→P. 436) Open Sensor (→P. 436)
C4 D4 Ink Pack Cover Belt E9 Right SC Cover

E4 (→P. 437) (→P. 440)
C5 D5 Ink Pack Cover E10 Right Housing

E5 (→P. 437) (→P. 441)
C6 D6 Left SC Cover E11 Right RIPS Housing Assy

E6 (→P. 438) (→P. 441)
C7 D7 Left Housing E12 Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor

E7 (→P. 438) Holder (→P. 442)
C8 D8 Left RIPS Housing Assy E13 Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
E8 (→P. 439) (→P. 442)
D9 Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever E14 Front RIPS Housing

Assy (→P. 440) (→P. 443)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Open the Paper Jam Clear Cover Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear
Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder

No. Screw Type
1. Open the Paper Jam Clear Cover. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder.

Confidential
B3 C3
Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor Rear RIPS Housing Assy
D3 E3
Rear Paper Jam Clear

Cover Sensor
Hook Hole Cable
Rear
Rear RIPS Housing Assy
Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor
Connector
No. Screw Type
S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the two hooks and remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Paper Jam Clear Cover Sensor.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor and 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the two screws (S2: ) that secure the Rear RIPS
remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor. Housing Assy.
3. Remove the Rear RIPS Housing Assy pulling out the cable through the hole of the assy.
Before reinstalling the Rear RIPS Housing Assy, remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover
Sensor. After connecting the cable, install the sensor to the Rear RIPS Housing Assy.

Confidential
C4 C5
Ink Pack Cover Belt Ink Pack Cover
D4 E4 D5 E5
Front Hinge Hinge
Ink Pack Cover Belt
Hook Hook
Ink Pack Cover
Hinge Cover
No. Screw Type

Hook
1. Remove the two screws on each side (S2: ). 1. Release each hook and remove the two Hinge Covers.
2. Release the two hooks on each side and remove the two Ink Pack Cover Belts. 2. Remove the Ink Pack Cover from the three hinges.

Confidential
C6 C7
D6 E6 D7 E7
Dent
Dowel
Left SC Cover
Left Housing
Hook
Rib
No. Screw Type

Confidential
Left RIPS Housing Assy

C8
D8 E8 Interfering Unit
Left side
Rib
Left RIPS Housing Assy Lock lever
Hook
Receiving Part
No. Screw Type

S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Lock Lever Shaft
1. Move the Lock Lever in the direction of the arrow to set the Ink Pack Cover lock in the 3. Lift the Left RIPS Housing Assy and rotate in the direction of the arrow while releasing the
released state. two hooks to release the interfering unit behind the Left RIPS Housing Assy.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) fastening the Left RIPS Housing Assy, and remove the 4. Remove the three ribs and remove the Left RIPS Housing Assy.
two screws (S2: ). When mounting the Left RIPS Housing Assy, mount by aligning the Lock Lever Shaft
and the receiving part.

Confidential
D9
Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever Assy Right SC Cover
E9
Dent Tabs
Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever Assy Left RIPS Inner Housing
Right SC Cover
No. Screw Type

S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
1. Remove the seven screws (S2: ) and remove the Left RIPS Inner Housing. 1. Remove one screw (S1: ).
2. Remove the four screws (S2: ) and remove the Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever Assy. 2. Slide the Right SC Cover while pushing the dent of Right SC Cover, and release the three
tabs.

Confidential
Right Housing Right RIPS Housing Assy

E10 E11
Interfering Unit
Dowel
Rib
Right Housing
Hook B
Right
side
Hook
Hook A
Rib Right RIPS Housing Assy
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) fastening the Right RIPS Housing Assy.
2. Release the hook A. 2. Lift the Right RIPS Housing Assy and rotate in the direction of the arrow while releasing
3. Remove the two dowels. the two hooks to release the interfering unit behind the Right RIPS Housing Assy.
4. Release the four hooks B. 3. Remove the three ribs and remove the Right RIPS Housing Assy.

Confidential
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
E12 E13
Hook
Hook
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
Ink Pack Cover
Connector
1. Open the Ink Pack Cover. 1. Release the two hooks and remove the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor.
2. Release the hook by inserting a narrow-tipped object, such as tweezers or the like, as 2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor, and remove the
shown above, and remove the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder. Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
Front RIPS Housing

E14
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Cable
Color Label
No. Screw Type

Front RIPS Housing S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Cable from the Front RIPS Housing.
2. Peel away the three color labels on the Front RIPS Housing.
3. Remove the four screws (S4: ), the two screws (S2: ), and the three screws (S1: ) and
remove the Front RIPS Housing.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Decompression Tube Assy A --- --- TBD
Ink End Sensor B 3 min 51 sec --- 3 min 51 sec
Ink Supply Unit C 6 min 24 sec 13 min 4 sec 19 min 28 sec
Decompression Pump Unit D 5 min --- 5 min
Ink Leak Sensor Assy E --- --- TBD
CSIC FFC F --- --- TBD

Confidential
Start
Preparation Preparation work before repair

work before Ink Supply Unit (→P. 377)
repair
A1 B1 C1 Open the Paper Jam Clear

D1 E1 F1 Cover (→P. 446)
A2 B2 C2 Paper Jam Clear Cover

D2 E2 F2 Holder (→P. 446)
A3 B3 C3 Rear RIPS Housing Assy

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 447)
A4 E4 Decompression Tube Assy B4 Ink End Sensor C4 Ink Supply Unit D4 Decompression Pump Unit
F4 (→P. 447) (→P. 448) (→P. 448) (→P. 450)
E5 F5 Ink Supply Unit

(→P. 451)
E6 F6 Ink Leak Sensor Assy

(→P. 452)
F7 CSIC FFC Make sure to perform “Preparation work

(→P. 454) before repair Ink Supply Unit (P. 377)” before
disassembly.
And, make sure to remove the ink pack
before removing Ink Supply Unit from the product.

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Rear

No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4
Rear RIPS Housing Assy Decompression Tube Assy
D3 E3 F3 E3 F4
Paper Jam Clear

Cover Sensor Left side Right side
Tube Joint Tube Joint
Hole Cable
Rear
Decompression Tube Assy
No. Screw Type

S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Decompression Pump Unit Ink Supply Unit Connecting Port Decompression Pump Unit
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Paper Jam Clear Cover Sensor. 1. Pull the Decompression Tube from the four Connecting Ports on the Ink Supply Unit.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the two screws (S2: ) that secure the Rear RIPS 2. Pull the Decompression Tube in the Decompression Pump Unit from the two Tube Joints.
Housing Assy. 3. Release the Decompression Tube from the Tube Guide in the Ink Leak Sensor Assy, and
3. Remove the Rear RIPS Housing Assy pulling out the cable through the hole of the assy. remove the Decompression Tube Assy.

Confidential
B4 C4
Ink End Sensor Ink Supply Unit
Rear
Ink End Sensor
Ink Supply Unit
Decompression
Tube
Connector
Hook
Ink Tube Holder

Hook
No. Screw Type

Ferrite Core Ink End Sensor
1. Release the cable from the two hooks and remove the ferrite core. 1. Remove the screw (S2: ) that secures the Ink Tube Holder.
2. Remove the Ink End Sensor by releasing the hook. When removing or attaching the Ink Tube Holder, move it straight up or down to
3. Remove the cable from the connector of the Ink End Sensor and remove the Ink End prevent its inlet from being tilted.
Sensor.
2. Rotate the Ink Tube Holder counterclockwise, and then remove the Ink Tube Holder.
3. Pull out the Decompression Tube.
4. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit Ink Supply Unit
CSIC FFC Rear
Ferrite Core
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Connector
Black
Connector Ferrite Core
Ink End Sensor

Cable
Hook
Holder
5. Disconnect the CSIC FFC from the connector. As shown above, arrange the Ink Tubes in the order of Black, Yellow, Magenta, and
6. Disconnect the Ink End Sensor Cable from the connector. Cyan, from the back face side.
7. Remove the ferrite core from the Ink End Sensor Cable.
8. Release the Ink End Sensor Cable from the hook of the holder.

Confidential
Decompression Pump Unit
Decompression Pump Unit

D4 Rear
Rear Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Relay Connector Decompression Pump Unit
Black
Decompression Tube
No. Screw Type
1. Pull out the Decompression Tube. As shown above, arrange the Ink Tubes in the order of Black, Yellow, Magenta, and
2. Remove the cable of the Decompression Pump Unit from the Relay Connector. Cyan, from the back face side.
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ) and remove the Decompression Pump Unit.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit
Ink Supply Unit

E5 F5 CSIC FFC
Ferrite Core
Rear
Ink Supply Unit
Decompression
Tube
Connector
Connector Ferrite Core
Ink Tube Holder Ink End Sensor

Cable
Hook
No. Screw Type
S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C Holder
1. Remove the screw (S2: ) that secures the Ink Tube Holder. 5. Disconnect the CSIC FFC from the connector.
When removing or attaching the Ink Tube Holder, move it straight up or down to 6. Disconnect the Ink End Sensor Cable from the connector.
prevent its inlet from being tilted. 7. Remove the ferrite core from the Ink End Sensor Cable.
8. Release the Ink End Sensor Cable from the hook of the holder.
2. Rotate the Ink Tube Holder counterclockwise, and then remove the Ink Tube Holder.
3. Pull out the Decompression Tube.
4. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Supply Unit.

Confidential
Ink Supply Unit
Ink Leak Sensor Assy

Rear E6 F6
Yellow
Relay Connector
Magenta
Cyan
Rear
Relay Cable
Black
Relay Connector
Relay Connector No. Screw Type

As shown above, arrange the Ink Tubes in the order of Black, Yellow, Magenta, and 1. Remove the two cables on the Decompression Pump Unit from the two Relay Connectors.
Cyan, from the back face side. 2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and pull the Ink Leak Sensor Assy out.
3. Remove the two Relay Cables from the two Relay Connectors.

Confidential
Ink Leak Sensor Assy Ink Leak Sensor Assy
Center Right side Right side

Ink Leak Sensor Ink Leak Sensor Ferrite Core Holder
Hook Hook
Hook
Right side

Left side Ink Leak Sensor
Hook
4. Release the Ink End Sensor Cable from each hook and remove it from the Ink Leak Sensor. 6. Release the cable by releasing the hook on the Ferrite Core Holder and remove the Ink
5. Release all cables from the Ink Leak Sensor Assy. Leak Sensor Assy.

Confidential
CSIC FFC
F7
Relay Board
CN5
CN2 CN3 CN4
1. Remove the CSIC FFC from the connector of the Relay Board.
 CN2: Yellow
 CN4: Magenta
 CN3: Black
 CN5: Cyan
2. Peel away the double-sided tape and remove the CSIC FFC.
When mounting the CSIC FFC, attach along the ruled line on the frame.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink Pack Cover Belt A 54 sec --- 54 sec
Ink Pack Cover B 26 sec --- 26 sec
Ink Pack Cover Open

C 32 sec --- 32 sec
Sensor
Right RIPS Housing Assy D 4 min 1 sec --- 4 min 1 sec
CSIC Relay Board E 5 min 21 sec --- 5 min 21 sec

Confidential
Start
D1 Open the Paper Jam Clear A1 Ink Pack Cover Belt C1 Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
E1 Cover (→P. 459) B1 (→P. 457) Holder (→P. 458)
D2 Paper Jam Clear Cover B2 Ink Pack Cover C2 Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
E2 Holder (→P. 459) (→P. 457) (→P. 458)
D3 Rear RIPS Housing Assy

E3 (→P. 460)
D4 Right SC Cover
E4 (→P. 460)
D5 Right Housing
E5 (→P. 461)
D6 Right RIPS Housing Assy

E6 (→P. 461)
E7 CSIC Relay Board

(→P. 462)

Confidential
A1 B1 B2
Ink Pack Cover Belt Ink Pack Cover
Front Hinge Hinge
Ink Pack Cover Belt
Hook Hook
Ink Pack Cover
Hinge Cover
No. Screw Type

Hook
1. Remove the two screws on each side (S2: ). 1. Release each hook and remove the two Hinge Covers.
2. Release the two hooks on each side and remove the two Ink Pack Cover Belts. 2. Remove the Ink Pack Cover from the three hinges.

Confidential
C1 C2
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
Hook
Hook
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor
Ink Pack Cover
Connector
1. Open the Ink Pack Cover. 1. Release the two hooks and remove the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor.
2. Release the hook by inserting a narrow-tipped object, such as tweezers or the like, as 2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor, and remove the
shown above, and remove the Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor Holder. Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
D1 E1 D2 E2
Rear

No. Screw Type

Confidential
Rear RIPS Housing Assy Right SC Cover

D3 E3 D4 E4
Paper Jam Clear

Cover Sensor
Dent Tabs
Hole Cable
Rear
Right SC Cover

S4 C.SHOULDER S-TITE,3X5 S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the Paper Jam Clear Cover Sensor. 1. Remove one screw (S1: ).
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the two screws (S2: ) that secure the Rear RIPS 2. Slide the Right SC Cover while pushing the dent of Right SC Cover, and release the three
Housing Assy. tabs.
3. Remove the Rear RIPS Housing Assy pulling out the cable through the hole of the assy. 3. Remove the Right SC Cover.

Confidential
Right Housing Right RIPS Housing Assy

D5 E5 D6 E6
Interfering Unit
Dowel
Rib
Right Housing
Hook B
Right
side
Hook
Hook A
Rib Right RIPS Housing Assy
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing. 1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) fastening the Right RIPS Housing Assy.
2. Release the hook A. 2. Lift the Right RIPS Housing Assy and rotate in the direction of the arrow while releasing
3. Remove the two dowels. the two hooks to release the interfering unit behind the Right RIPS Housing Assy.
4. Release the four hooks B. 3. Remove the three ribs and remove the Right RIPS Housing Assy.

Confidential
CSIC Relay Board

E7
CSIC Relay Board
CN1 CN2
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the CRCM FFC from the connectors (CN1, CN2) of the CSIC Relay Board.
2. Remove the two screws (S1: ), and remove the CSIC Relay Board.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
A 1 min 6 sec --- 1 min 6 sec
Belt
Paper Jam Clear Cover B 1 min 6 sec --- 1 min 6 sec
Rear RIPS Housing C 1 min 52 sec --- 1 min 52sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Open the Paper Jam

C1 Clear Cover (→P. 465)
A2 B2 Paper Jam Clear Cover

C2 Assy (→P. 465)
A3 B3 Paper Jam Clear Cover C3 Paper Jam Clear Cover

Belt (→P. 466) Holder (→P. 467)
B4 Paper Jam Clear Cover C4 Paper Jam Clear Cover

(→P. 466) Open Sensor (→P. 467)
C5 Rear RIPS Housing

(→P. 468)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Open the Paper Jam Clear Cover Paper Jam Clear Cover Assy
Right side Tab
Rear RIPS Housing
Dowel
Hook
Dowel Hook
Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt

Paper Jam Clear Cover Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt
No. Screw Type
Paper Jam Clear Cover Assy S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the Paper Jam Clear Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ).
2. Release the two hooks and remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt from the Rear RIPS
Housing.
3. Remove the right-side Dowel while pushing the tab on the Paper Jam Clear Cover, and
remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Assy by removing the left-side Dowel.

Confidential
A3 B3 B4
Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt Paper Jam Clear Cover
Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt
Hook Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Remove each screw (S2: ) and remove the two Paper Jam Clear Cover Belts by releasing
each hook.

Confidential
C3 C4
Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor
Rear
Rear
Hook
Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Holder. 1. Release the two hooks and remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor.
2. Remove the cable from the connector of the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor and
remove the Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor.

Confidential
Rear RIPS Housing

C5
Rear RIPS Housing
Rear
Yellow
Magenta
Cyan
Rear RIPS Housing

Hole
Black
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the two screws (S2: ) fastening the Rear RIPS Before mounting the Rear RIPS Housing, see the picture above to check that the Ink
Housing. Tubes are arranged in the order of Black, Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan, from the back
2. Remove the Rear RIPS Housing while pulling the cable from the hole in the Rear RIPS face side. If the Ink Tubes are not arranged in order, arrange them correctly.
Housing.

Confidential
7.3.4.8 ADF/SCN 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF/SCN Unit A 5 min 51 sec --- 5 min 51 sec
ADF Hinge B 26 min 55 sec --- 26 min 55 sec
Top ADF Document

C 28 min 47 sec --- 28 min 47 sec
Support Assy
ADF Document Size
D 30 min 18 sec --- 30 min 18 sec
Sensor
ADF Document Size
E 31 min 9 sec --- 31 min 9 sec
Sensor

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover B10 C10 ASF Cover B13 Left Hinge Assy/
D1 E1 (→P. 471) D10 E10 (→P. 478) Right Hinge Assy
(→P. 480)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover B11 C11 Screw Cover Seal

(→P. 471) (→P. 479) B14 Left Hinge Frame/
D2 E2 D11 E11
Right Hinge Frame
(→P. 481)
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B12 C12 Rear ADF Cover Assy
D3 E3 (→P. 472) D12 E12 (→P. 479)
B15 ADF Hinge
(→P. 481)
A4 B4 C4 ADF/SCN Unit C13 D13 Front ADF Base
D4 E4 (→P. 473) E13 (→P. 482)
B5 C5 ADF/SCN Board Protective C14 D14 Front ADF Cover D19 Bottom ADF Document
D5 E5 Sheet (→P. 474) E14 (→P. 482) E19 Support (→P. 486)
B6 C6 Scanner Relay Cable C15 D15 Cable Holder D20 ADF Document Size Sensor
D6 E6 (→P. 475) E15 (→P. 483) (→P. 487)
B7 C7 ADF/SCN Harness Holder C16 D16 ADF PF Support Guide E20 Sensor Holder Assy
D7 E7 (→P. 475) E16 (→P. 484) (→P. 487)
B8 C8 ADF Unit C17 D7 ADF Hinge Guide E21 ADF Document Size Sensor
D8 E8 (→P. 477) E17 (→P. 484) (→P. 488)
B9 C9 ADF Cover Assy C18 D18 Top ADF Document Support

D9 E9 (→P. 478) E18 Assy (→P. 485)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
D3 E3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
A4 B4 C4
ADF/SCN Unit
D4 E4
Hook ADF/SCN Unit
ADF/SCN Cable
Scanner Grounding Wire
Hook Scanner Grounding Wire

Upper spring
ADF/SCN Cable (CN103)

(With hook)
Lower spring
Clamp
Grounding Wire and Cable

Clamp
ADF/SCN Cable
Main Board (USB) (CN104)
No. Screw Type

1. Separate the upper spring and the lower spring. 6. Wind the Scanner Grounding Wire around the ADF/SCN cable, and secure it on the two
2. Disconnect the following cables from the connector of the Main Board. hooks together with the two ADF/SCN Cables.
• ADF/SCN Cable (USB) (CN104) 7. Release the Grounding Wire and Cable from the clamp.
• ADF/SCN Cable (CN103) (With hook) 8. Close the ADF/SCN Unit.
3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the Scanner Grounding Wire. When opening the ADF/SCN Unit, the upper spring and lower spring become
4. Release the five clamps, and then release the two ADF/SCN cables and the Scanner separated. Be careful because even if the ADF/SDN Unit is pushed all the way, the
Grounding Wire. Support Stand will not open automatically.
5. Release the ADF/SCN cable from the hooks of the center cable cover.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Unit
B5 C5
ADF/SCN Board Protective Sheet
D5 E5
Marking
ADF/SCN Unit ADF/SCN Board Protection Sheet ADF/SCN Cable
Hook

9. Remove the six screws (S1: ). 1. Release the two ADF/SCN cables from the two hooks.
C H E C K The screws to be removed have a triangle mark. 2. Remove the three screws (S2: ), and then remove the ADF/SCN Board Protection Sheet.
P O IN T
10. Pull the ADF/SCN Unit upward to remove it.

After replacing the ADF/SCN Unit, a fatal error (1000050) may occur due to a
difference in version between the printer firmware and the scanner firmware.
Therefore, make sure to update the firmware after replacing the ADF/SCN Unit.

Confidential
B6 C6 B7 C7
Scanner Relay Cable ADF/SCN Harness Holder
D6 E6 D7 E7
Cable Guide CN458 CN422

CN130 CN36 CN37 CN22 CN32 CN31
Cable Band
CN131 CN38 CN21

CN464
ACN/SCN Cable CN465
No. Screw Type

ADF/SCN Board
1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the cable band. 1. Remove the cables and FFCs from the connector (CN21, CN22, CN31, CN32, CN36,
2. Disconnect the ACN/SCN cable from the following connectors of the ADF/SCN board. CN37, CN38, CN130, CN131, CN464, CN465) of the ADF/SCN Board.
• ADF/SCN cable (USB) (CN458)
• ADF/SCN Cable (CN422) (With hook)
3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the grounding wire.
4. Release the ACN/SCN cable and the Scanner Grounding Wire from the cable guide.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Harness Holder ADF/SCN Harness Holder
FFC (CN464)
Pull out the FFC

(CN464) from the slit
of the ADF/SCN
Harness Holder.
FFC (CN465)
Double-side tape
No. Screw Type

2. Remove all the cables and FFCs from the ADF/SCN Harness Holder. Check the following points, and route the cables and FFCs.
3. Remove the three screws (S2: ), then remove the ADF/SCN Harness Holder.  Pull out the FFC (CN464) from the slit of the ADF/SCN Harness Holder.
 Stick the FFCs with the double side tapes.

Confidential
ADF/SCN Harness Holder

B8 C8
ADF Unit
D8 E8
CN21 CN22
Bottom of the SCN Unit
Cables and
Grounding Wire of
the CN36, CN37,
CN38
Flathead
Hook Screwdriver
ADF Unit
CN146 CN147
Left Hinge
Right Hinge
SCN Unit
 Set the ferrite core of each cable in the position shown above. 4. Open the ADF Unit.
 Set the surplus of the cable and the grounding wire in the position shown above. 5. Pull the ADF Unit upward to remove it while pushing up the hooks fixing the left hinge
and right hinge from the bottom of the SCN Unit with the flathead screwdriver.

Confidential
B9 C9 B10 C10
ADF Cover Assy ASF Cover
D9 E9 D10 E10
ADF Cover Assy
ASF Cover
Dowel
Dowel
Dowel
1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ASF Cover Assy.

Confidential
B11 C11 B12 C12

Screw Cover Seal Rear ADF Cover Assy
D11 E11 D12 E12
Rear ADF Cover Assy
Screw Cover Seal
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two Screw Cover Seals. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ) and the screw (S1: ).

Confidential
Rear ADF Cover Assy

B13
Left Hinge Assy/Right Hinge Assy
Left side Right side

Left ADF Hinge
Assy
Hooks
Hook
Right ADF Hinge

Assy
No. Screw Type

S14 C.B.P-TITE SCREW,4X12,F/ZN-3C
S20 C.B.SCREW-3x6-W2-F.ZN-3C
2. Disengage the three hooks, and remove the Rear ADF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the four screws (S14: ) and the screw (S20: ), and remove the left ADF Hinge
Assy.
2. Remove the four screws (S14: ), then remove the Right ADF Hinge Assy.

Confidential
B14 B15
Left Hinge Frame/Right Hinge Frame ADF Hinge
Left ADF Hinge

Frame ADF hinge ADF hinge
Left ADF Hinge
Right ADF
Hinge Frame
Right ADF Hinge

No. Screw Type
S19 C.B.SCREW,3X12,F/ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S19: ), then remove the Left ADF Hinge Frame from the Left
ADF Hinge.
2. Remove the four screws (S19: ), then remove the Right ADF Hinge Frame from the
Right ADF Hinge.

Confidential
C13 C14
Front ADF Base Front ADF Cover
D13 E13 D14 E14
ADF Cover
Assy
Front ADF Base
Bottom
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
S15 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-W2-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Front ADF Base. 1. Remove the three screws (S2: ) and the screw (S15: ).

Confidential
Front ADF Cover

C15
Cable Holder
Hooks
D15 E15
Hooks
Grounding Wire
Cable Holder
Hook
Cables of the Top ADF
Document Support Assy
Hooks
No. Screw Type

2. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the Front ADF Cover. 1. Release the cables of the grounding wire and the Top ADF Document Support Assy from
the Cable Holder.
2. Remove the screw (S7: ), then remove the Cable Holder.

Confidential
C16 C17
ADF PF Support Guide ADF Hinge Guide
D16 E16 D17 E17
ADF PF Support Guide
Dowel
Hook
Dowel
Hook
ADF Hinge Guide
1. Disengage the two dowels, and then remove the ADF PF Support Guide. 1. Disengage the two hooks and separate the ADF Hinge Guide.
 Route the cable without slackness when installing the ADF Hinge Guide.
 Take care not to catch the cables during installation.

Confidential
ADF Hinge Guide

C18
Top ADF Document Support Assy
D18 E18
FFC
Grounding Wire
Cable Holder
Cables

No. Screw Type

2. Release the cables and FFCs from the ADF Hinge Guide. 1. Release the cables of the Top ADF Document Support Assy.
3. Release the cables of the grounding wire and the Top ADF Document Support Assy from
the Cable Holder.

Confidential
Top ADF Document Support Assy
Bottom ADF Document Support

ADF Base Unit
Top ADF Document D19 E19
Support Assy
Cables and
Grounding Wire

Bottom ADF Document
Support
Open the Right ADF

Base Gear Cover
Shaft No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type Top ADF Document

S16 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-W2-3x8-F.ZN-3C Support Assy
4. Remove the screw (S16: ). 1. Remove the three screws (S3: ), then remove the Bottom ADF Document Support.
5. Remove the shaft of the Top ADF Document Support Assy from the hole of the Right
Route the cables of the Top ADF Document Support Assy through the Top ADF
ADF Base Gear Cover.
Document Support Assy as shown above.
6. Pull out the cables and the grounding wire through the hole of the ADF Base Unit, and
remove the Top ADF Document Support Assy.

Confidential
ADF Document Size Sensor Sensor Holder Assy

D20 E20
ADF Document
Size Sensor
Sensor Holder Assy
Connector
Hooks
Cable
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage the four hook, then remove the two ADF Document Size Sensors. 1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Sensor Holder Assy.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.

Confidential
ADF Document Size Sensor

E21
ADF Document
Size Sensor
Hooks
Connector
Cable
1. Disengage the four hook, then remove the two ADF Document Size Sensors.

Confidential
7.3.4.9 ADF/SCN 2
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ADF Cover Assy A 14 sec --- 14 sec
ASF Cover B 25 sec --- 25 sec
ADF Pad Assy C 19 sec --- 19 sec
ADF PF Support Guide D 18 sec --- 18 sec
Document Mat Cover

E 40 sec --- 40 sec
Assy
ADF Pick Up Roller Assy F 1 min 5 sec --- 1 min 5 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 ADF Cover Assy

F1 (→P. 491)
B1 ASF Cover
(→P. 491)
F2 LD Roller C1 ADF Pad Assy

(→P. 494) (→P. 492)
F3 Extension Spring D1 ADF PF Support Guide

(→P. 495) (→P. 492)
F1 ADF Pick Up Roller Assy E1 Document Mat Cover Assy

(→P. 495) (→P. 493)

Confidential
A1 B1
F1
ADF Cover Assy
ASF Cover
Dowel
Dowel
Dowel

Confidential
C1
ADF Pad Assy ADF PF Support Guide
D1
ADF Pad Assy ADF PF Support Guide
Dowels
Dowel
Hook
Dowel
Hook
1. Open the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Disengage the two dowels, and then remove the ADF PF Support Guide.
2. Disengage the two hooks and dowels, then remove the ADF Pad Assy.

Confidential
Document MAT Cover Assy
Document Mat Cover Assy

E1 Left side Top side
1mm 1mm
ADF/Scanner Unit
Document Mat Cover Assy
Put the document cover so that the notch

of the cover faces the left side.
1. Open the ADF/Scanner unit. Install the Document Mat Cover Assy in the following procedure.
2. Remove the Document Mat Cover Assy. 1. Peel off the Protection material of Double side tape of Document MAT cover Assy.
2. Put the Document MAT cover Assy on Scanner glass.(Note the following points)
 Put scanner mat cover Assy in the direction of the above figure.
 Separate the top and left sides of the scanner mat cover 1 mm from the scanner glass frame.
3. Close the ADF/SCN Unit slowly, then install the ADF/SCN Document MAT cover
Assy to ADF Unit.

Confidential
LD Roller
LD Roller
F2 LD Roller
Hook
ADF Pick Up Roller
Assy ADF Housing Upper
Hook
ADF Cover
Open Lever
Bearing
Hooks
Hooks
No. Screw Type Sh

1. Remove the four screws (S2: ). 3. Extract the LD Roller in the direction of the arrow.
2. Remove the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy from the six hooks of the ADF housing upper.  Set the shaft of the ADF cover open lever in the bearing.
 Confirm the behavior of the ADF Cover Open Lever after installing it.

Confidential
Extension Spring ADF Pick Up Roller Assy

F3 F4
ADF Pick Up Roller Assy
Extension Spring
Stopper
Hooks
1. Remove the Extension Spring from the two hooks. 1. Slide the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy to direction of arrow while pushing down the stopper,
then release the hook.
2. Remove the ADF Pick Up Roller Assy.

Confidential
7.3.4.10 ADF/SCN 3
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Front ADF Base A 39 sec --- 39 sec
Front ADF Cover B 2 min 5 sec --- 2 min 5 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 ADF Cover Assy

B1 (→P. 498)
A2 Front ADF Base

B2 (→P. 498)
B3 Front ADF Cover

(→P. 499)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
ADF Cover Assy Front ADF Base
ADF Cover Assy Front ADF Base
Dowel
Dowel
Bottom
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the ADF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Front ADF Base.

Confidential
Front ADF Cover

B3
Front ADF Cover
Hooks
Hooks
ADF Cover
Assy
Hook
Hooks
No. Screw Type
S15 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-W2-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the three screws (S2: ) and the screw (S15: ). 2. Disengage the four hooks, and remove the Front ADF Cover.

Confidential
7.3.4.11 ADF/SCN 4
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Screw Cover Seal A 49 sec --- 49 sec
Rear ADF Cover B 2 min 40 sec --- 2 min 40 sec
Rear ADF Base C 2 min 40 sec --- 2 min 40 sec
Document Stopper D 3 min 33 sec --- 3 min 33 sec
Right ADF Cover E 3 min 33 sec --- 3 min 33 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 ADF Cover Assy

D1 E1 (→P. 502)
A2 B2 C2 ASF Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 502)
A3 B3 C3 Screw Cover Seal

D3 E3 (→P. 503)
B4 C4 Rear ADF Cover Assy

D4 E4 (→P. 503)
D5 Screw Cover Seal B5 Rear ADF Cover C5 Rear ADF Base

E5 (→P. 505) (→P. 504) (→P. 505)
D6 Right ADF Cover Assy

E6 (→P. 506)
D7 Document Stopper
E7 (→P. 506)
E8 Right ADF Cover

(→P. 507)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
ADF Cover Assy
ASF Cover
Dowel
Dowel
Dowel

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 B4 C4
Screw Cover Seal Rear ADF Cover Assy
D3 E3 D4 E4
Rear ADF Cover Assy
Screw Cover Seal
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two Screw Cover Seals. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ) and the screw (S1: ).

Confidential
Rear ADF Cover Assy

B5
Rear ADF Cover
Rear ADF Cover
Left side Right side
Hooks
Hook
Rear ADF Base
No. Screw Type

2. Disengage the three hooks, and remove the Rear ADF Cover Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Rear ADF Base from the Rear ADF Cover.

Confidential
C5
Rear ADF Base Screw Cover Seal
D5 E5
Rear ADF Cover
Screw Cover Seal
Rear ADF Base
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Rear ADF Base from the Rear ADF Cover. 1. Remove the Screw Cover Seal.

Confidential
Right ADF Cover Assy Document Stopper

D6 E6 D7 E7
Back
Dowel
Dowel
Document Stopper
No. Screw Type
1. Remove the two screws (S2: ) and the screw (S3: ), then remove the Right ADF Cover 1. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Document Stopper.
Assy.

Confidential
Right ADF Cover

E8
Right ADF Cover

Confidential
7.3.4.12 Electric Components 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Wi-Fi Board A 3 min 8 sec --- 3 min 8 sec
Power Supply Unit B 6min 59 sec --- 6 min 59 sec
Connector Cover C 5 min 55 sec --- 5 min 55 sec
PCB Mechanism Relay

D 10 min 3 sec --- 10 min 3 sec
Board
PCB Head Relay Board E 5 min 43 sec --- 5 min 43 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 (→P. 510)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 510)
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit

D3 E3 (→P. 511)
E4 Disconnect the FFCs D4 Relay Harness Cover B4 Rear Housing Assy A4 Wi-Fi Board
(→P. 515) (→P. 514) C4 (→P. 512) (→P. 512)
E5 PCB Head Relay Board/ D5 B5 C5

PCB Mechanism Relay Power Supply Unit Connector Cover
with Mounting Plate
Board (→P. 514) (→P. 513) (→P. 513)
(→P. 515)
E6 Mounting Plate
(→P. 516)
E7 PCB Head Relay Board

(→P. 516)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
D3 E3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4
Wi-Fi Board Rear Housing Assy
Top
Wi-Fi Board
Rear Housing Assy
Interfering Place

S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the cables from the connector of the Wi-Fi Board. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Wi-Fi Board. 2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ).
Unit.

Confidential
B5 C5
Power Supply Unit Connector Cover
Connector
Clamps
Cable
Connector Cover
Power Supply Unit

1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Connector Cover.
2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.

Confidential
Relay Harness Cover PCB Mechanism Relay Board

D4 D5
PCB Mechanism Relay Board
Clamp
Relay Harness Cover Hook
Relay Cable
ADF/SCN Cable
1. Release the ADF/SCN cable from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover. 1. Disconnect the all cables and FFCs from the connectors on the PCB Mechanism Relay
2. Release the two relay cables from the clamp. Board.
3. Release the three relay cables from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover. 2. Remove the five screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
4. Remove the two screws (S1: ), and remove the Relay Harness Cover.

Confidential
PCB Head Relay Board

Disconnect the FFCs
(with Mounting Plate)
E4 E5
Head Relay FFC Head FFC

PCB Head Relay Board
PCB Head Relay

Board
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the five Head FFCs and Head Relay FFCs from the connector of the PCB Head 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Head Relay Board (with Mounting
Relay Board. Plate).

Confidential
Mounting Plate PCB Head Relay Board

E6 E7
PCB Head Relay Board PCB Head Relay Board
Mounting Plate
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the two Mounting Plates from the PCB Head
Relay Board.
Electric Components 2

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
PCB Rom A 15 min 49 sec --- 15 min 49 sec
FAX Board Assy B 16 min 51 sec --- 16 min 51 sec
PDL SD Card C 15 min 56 sec --- 15 min 56 sec
CR Ferrite Core Holder D 16 min 55 sec --- 16 min 55 sec
PDL Board Assy E 16 min 47 sec --- 16 min 47 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Right SC Cover
D1 E1 (→P. 519)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover
D2 E2 (→P. 519)
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B8 FAX Board Assy

D3 E3 (→P. 520) (→P. 525)
A4 B4 C4 Rear Housing Assy

D4 E4 (→P. 521)
A5 B5 C5 PS Harness Holder C8 PDL SD Card D8 CR Ferrite Core Holder

D5 E5 (→P. 521) E8 (→P. 526) (→P. 526)
A6 B6 C6 Main Board Unit E9 PDL Board Assy

D6 E6 (→P. 522) (→P. 527)
A7 B7 C7 Shield Plate MB Upper Assy

D7 E7 (→P. 524)
A8 PCB Rom
(→P. 525)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
D3 E3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Rear Housing Assy PS Harness Holder
D4 E4 D5 E5
Top
Rear Housing Assy
PS Harness Holder
Interfering Place
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PS Harness Holder.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ).
Unit.

Confidential
Main Board Unit

A6 B6 C6
Main Board Unit
Top
D6 E6
Panel FFC
Grounding Wire
FFC Clamp
CN101, CN102, CN103,

CN104, CN109
CN102 CN302 CN106
CN601
Panel Cable
Guide
Ferrite Core
CN705 CN707 CN104 CN401, CN402, CN403
Holder
CN103
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-
F.ZN-3C
MB CSIC FFC C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-
S1
F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs from the Main Board. 3. Remove the two FFC clamps, then release the panel FFC and grounding wire.
• Panel FFC (CN302) 4. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the grounding wire.
• USB Host Cable (CN106) 5. Remove the ferrite core from the Panel FFC.
• Wi-Fi Module Cable (CN102) 6. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Panel Cable Guide.
• Power Supply Unit Cable (CN601) (With hook) 7. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs.
• CRCM FFC (CN705) • Head Relay FFC (CN101, CN102, CN103, CN104, CN109)
• MB CSIC FFC (CN707) • Relay Cable (CN401, CN402, CN403) (With hook)
2. Put the MB CSIC FFC under the holder. • ADF/SCN Cable (USB) (CN104)

Confidential
Main Board Unit Main Board Unit
Main Board Unit
FFC Clamp
Relay Harness Cover Clamp
Hook
ADF/SCN Cable
CN501, CN502
Relay Cable
No. Screw Type

8. Remove the FFC clamp, then release the head relay FFC. 14. Remove the two screws (S1: ), remove the Main Board Unit in the direction of the arrow.
9. Release the ADF/SCN cable from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover.
10. Release the two relay cables from the clamp.
11. Release the three relay cables from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover.
13. Remove the two cables (with hooks) from the connectors (CN501, CN502) of the Main
Board.

Confidential
Main Board Unit

A7 B7 C7
Shield Plate MB Upper Assy
Hole
D7 E7
FFC
Clamp
Shield Plate MB
Upper Assy
Relay Board Assy
Head Relay FFC
No. Screw Type

 When connecting the Head Relay FFC, follow the procedure below for connection to prevent 1. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), then remove the Shield Plate MB Upper Assy.
the FFC from being damaged.
1. Remove the FFC clamp.

2. Remove the two screws, then remove the Relay Board Assy.
3. Insert the two tabs of the Relay Board Assy frame into the holes on the main frame
to temporarily secure the Relay Board Assy with the assy facing upward.
4. Connect the head relay FFC. (Take care not to connect obliquely.)

Confidential
A8 B8
PCB Rom FAX Board Assy
FAX Board Assy
ROM Support
FFC
Hook Hook
PCB ROM
CN1
No. Screw Type

Recess Recess
1. Disengage the hooks by pressing the ROM support, and pull the PCB ROM upward to 1. Disconnect the FFC from the connectors (CN1).
remove it. 2. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the FAX Board Assy.

Confidential
C8
PDL SD Card CR Ferrite Core Holder
E8 D8
Main Board
CR Ferrite Core
Holder Holder
CN705
CN404
CN703
PDL SD Card CN704
CN702
CN701
No. Screw Type

1. Slide the holder in the direction of the arrow. 1. Disconnect the FFCs from the connectors (CN404, CN701, CN702, CN704, CN705)
2. Raise the holder, then remove the PDL SD Card. 2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the CR Ferrite Core Holder.

Confidential
PDL Board Assy

E9
PDL Board Assy
CN102
FFC
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the FFCs from the connectors of the PDL Board Assy.
2. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PDL Board Assy.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Main Board A 17 min 48 sec 1 min 12 sec 19 min
Humidity Sensor B 12 min 16 sec --- 12 min 16 sec
USB Host Assy C 19 min 13 sec --- 19 min 13 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover B4 Move the Panel Unit

C1 (→P. 530) C4 (→P. 538)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover B5 Front Right Cover

C2 (→P. 530) C5 (→P. 539)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B6 Stacker Assy

C3 (→P. 531) C6 (→P. 539)
A4 Rear Housing Assy B7 Front Housing Assy

(→P. 532) C7 (→P. 540)
A5 PS Harness Holder B8 Cassette Assy

(→P. 532) C8 (→P. 540)
A6 Main Board Unit B9 Front Left Housing C9 Front Right Housing

(→P. 533) (→P. 541) (→P. 542)
A7 Shield Plate MB Upper Assy B10 Humidity Sensor C10 Right Housing
(→P. 535) (→P. 541) (→P. 543)
A8 Connector Cover A10 PCB Rom C11 USB Host Assy

(→P. 536) (→P. 537) (→P. 543)
A9 PDL FAX Assy A11 Main Board

(→P. 536) (→P. 537)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 A5
Rear Housing Assy PS Harness Holder
Top
Rear Housing Assy
PS Harness Holder
Interfering Place
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the PS Harness Holder.
Unit.

Confidential
Main Board Unit

A6
Main Board Unit
Top
Panel FFC
Grounding Wire
FFC Clamp
CN101, CN102, CN103,

CN104, CN109
CN102 CN302 CN106
CN601
Panel Cable
Guide
Ferrite Core
CN705 CN707 CN104 CN401, CN402, CN403
Holder
CN103
No. Screw Type
S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-
F.ZN-3C
MB CSIC FFC C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-
S1
F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs from the Main Board. 3. Remove the two FFC clamps, then release the panel FFC and grounding wire.
• Panel FFC (CN302) 4. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the grounding wire.
• USB Host Cable (CN106) 5. Remove the ferrite core from the Panel FFC.
• Wi-Fi Module Cable (CN102) 6. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Panel Cable Guide.
• Power Supply Unit Cable (CN601) (With hook) 7. Disconnect the following cables and FFCs.
• CRCM FFC (CN705) • Head Relay FFC (CN101, CN102, CN103, CN104, CN109)
• MB CSIC FFC (CN707) • Relay Cable (CN401, CN402, CN403) (With hook)
2. Put the MB CSIC FFC under the holder. • ADF/SCN Cable (USB) (CN104)

Confidential
Main Board Unit Main Board Unit
Main Board Unit
FFC Clamp
Relay Harness Cover Clamp
Hook
ADF/SCN Cable
CN501, CN502
Relay Cable
No. Screw Type

8. Remove the FFC clamp, then release the head relay FFC. 14. Remove the two screws (S1: ), remove the Main Board Unit in the direction of the arrow.
9. Release the ADF/SCN cable from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover.
10. Release the two relay cables from the clamp.
13. Remove the two cables (with hooks) from the connectors (CN501, CN502) of the Main
Board.

Confidential
Main Board Unit

A7
Shield Plate MB Upper Assy
Hole
FFC
Clamp
Shield Plate MB
Upper Assy
Relay Board Assy
Head Relay FFC
No. Screw Type

 When connecting the Head Relay FFC, follow the procedure below for connection to prevent 1. Remove the seven screws (S1: ), then remove the Shield Plate MB Upper Assy.
the FFC from being damaged.
1. Remove the FFC clamp.

2. Remove the two screws, then remove the Relay Board Assy.
3. Insert the two tabs of the Relay Board Assy frame into the holes on the main frame
to temporarily secure the Relay Board Assy with the assy facing upward.
4. Connect the head relay FFC. (Take care not to connect obliquely.)

Confidential
A8 A9
Connector Cover PDL FAX Assy
Main Board
PDL-FAX Assy
CN107
Connector Cover
CN203

1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Connector Cover. 1. Disconnect the two FFCs from the connectors of the Main Board.
2. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the PDL-FAX Assy.

Confidential
A10 A11
PCB Rom Main Board
Main Board
ROM Support
Hook Hook
PCB ROM
Recess Recess
1. Disengage the hooks by pressing the ROM support, and pull the PCB ROM upward to
remove it.

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

B4 C4
Move the Panel Unit
FFC Clamp Panel Unit
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). (Tightened together with the panel grounding wire at 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
some locations)

Confidential
B5 C5 B6 C6
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
Front Right Cover
Hook
No. Screw Type Stacker Assy

1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.
hook, and remove the front right cover. and remove the front right cover.

Confidential
B7 C7 B8 C8
Front Housing Assy Cassette Assy
Cassette Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Remove the Cassette Assy.

Confidential
B9 B10
Front Left Housing Humidity Sensor
Humidity Sensor
Connector
1st Paper Size

Front Left Housing Detector Assy
Hook
Clamp
No. Screw Type

Positioning Sponge Sheet
1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing. 1. Turn over the sheet, then remove the sponge of the Humidity Sensor.
2. Release the cable of the Humidity Sensor and the 1st Paper Size Detector Assy from the
clamp and the hook of the housing.
When routing the cable of the 1st paper size detection Assy, make sure that the
positioning of the cable is in front of the hook.

Confidential
Lower Left Housing Assy

C9
Front Right Housing
Back side
Front Right Housing
Hooks
Humidity Sensor
No. Screw Type

3. Remove the Humidity Sensor while pushing the fixing hook of Humidity sensor by using 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing.
the small flat-head driver.
4. Disconnect the cable from Humidity sensor.

Confidential
C10 C11
Right Housing USB Host Assy
CN106
Main Board
Dowel
Cable
Right Housing
Hook B USB Host Assy
Hook A Clamps
Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type Hook
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing. 1. Disconnect the cable from the connector (CN106) of the Main Board.
2. Release the hook A. 2. Remove the screw (S1: ).
3. Remove the two dowels. 3. Release the cable from the four clamps, then remove the USB Host Assy.
4. Release the four hooks B. Route the USB cable through the hook of the USB Connector Assy.

Confidential
7.3.4.15 nk System Mechanism
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Ink System Assy A 9 min 20 sec 6 min 54 sec 16 min 14 sec
MB CSIC Assy B 14 min 28 sec --- 14 min 28 sec

Confidential
Start
Preparation Preparation work before

work before repair Ink System Assy A9 Right Housing
repair (→P. 379) B9 (→P. 550)
A1 Right SC Cover A10 IS Holder Plate

B1 (→P. 546) B10 (→P. 551)
A2 Left SC Cover A11 Ink System Assy

B2 (→P. 546) B11 (→P. 551)
A3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B12 Rear Housing Assy

B3 (→P. 547) (→P. 552)
A4 Front Right Cover B13 Maintenance Box Holder

B4 (→P. 548) (→P. 553)
A5 Stacker Assy B14 MB CSIC Assy

B5 (→P. 548) (→P. 553)
A6 Cassette Assy
B6 (→P. 549)
C H E C K Perform the “Preparation work before repair Ink System Assy”

A7 Front Right Housing
P O IN T (→P. 379) when the Ink System Assy is replaced.
B7 (→P. 549)
A8 Front Middle Frame

B8 (→P. 550)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
Front Right Cover Stacker Assy
Front Right Cover
Hook

1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.

Confidential
A6 B6 A7 B7
Cassette Assy Front Right Housing
Front Right Housing
Cassette Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Cassette Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Right Housing.

Confidential
A8 B8 A9 B9
Front Middle Frame Right Housing
Dowel
Right Housing
Front Middle Frame
Hook B
Hook A
Rib

S21 C.C.S-TITE-SCREW-3x5-F.ZN-3C S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S21: ), then remove the Front Middle Frame. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing.
2. Release the hook A.

Confidential
A10 B10 A11 B11

IS Holder Plate Ink System Assy
Right side
Screwdriver Insertion Hole
IS Holder Plate
Ink System Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the IS Holder Plate in the direction of the arrow. 1. Insert the screwdriver into the hole and turn each of the two screws that secure the Ink
System Assy until you feel the screw is spinning free.
C H E C K  Before removing the Ink System Assy, make sure to unlock the CR Unit and move the unit to
P O IN T
the center of the product.
 Because the screws are captive screws, they do not come off.

Confidential
Ink System Assy

B12
Rear Housing Assy
Top
Rear Housing Assy
Interfering Place
Ink System Assy

No. Screw Type

2. Remove the Ink System Assy frontward. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
Unit.

Confidential
B13 B14
Maintenance Box Holder MB CSIC Assy
Back Face Left Side CN707

MB CSIC FFC
Maintenance Box Holder Assy Maintenance Box

Holder
Hook Hook
Ferrite Core MB CSIC Assy

1. Remove the MB CSIC FFC from the connector (CN707) of the Main Board. 1. Remove the FFC and the ferrite core from the Maintenance Box Holder.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ). 2. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the MB CSIC Assy.
3. Release the four hooks by pulling the Maintenance Box Holder Assy toward the rear of the
product, and remove the Maintenance Box Holder Assy.

Confidential
7.3.4.16 Carriage Mechanism 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
APG Drive Assy A 17 min 30 sec 7 sec 17 min 37 sec
APG Phase Sensor B 17 min 40 sec --- 2 min 40 sec
PW Drive Shutter C 18 min 55 sec 12sec 19 min 7 sec
APG Motor Assy D 19min 18 sec --- 2 min 40 sec
APG Encoder E 19min 59 sec 7 sec 20 min 6 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 C1 C1 Right SC Cover A10 B10 C10 APG Drive Assy

D1 E1 (→P. 556) D11 E10 (→P. 561)
A2 B2 C2 Left SC Cover D11 Mounting Plate Assy B11 APG Phase Sensor
D2 E2 (→P. 556) E11 (→P. 563) (→P. 562)
A3 B3 C3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit D12 Rear ASF Unit C11 PW Drive Shutter
D3 E3 (→P. 557) E12 (→P. 564) (→P. 563)
A4 B4 C4 Rear Housing Assy D13 APG Motor Assy

D4 E4 (→P. 558) E13 (→P. 565)
A5 B5 C5 Power Supply Unit E14 APG Encoder

D5 E5 (→P. 558) (→P. 566)
A6 B6 C6 Left Housing
D6 E6 (→P. 559)
A7 B7 C7 P/S Unit Mounting Plate

D7 E7 (→P. 559)
A8 B8 C8 Move the Tube Guide

D8 E8 (→P. 560)
A9 B9 C9 PF Brush Assy
D9 E9 (→P. 561)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 E1 D2 E2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
D3 E3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Rear Housing Assy Power Supply Unit
D4 E4 D5 E5
Top
Connector
Rear Housing Assy Clamps
Cable
Interfering Place
Power Supply Unit
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit.
2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ). 2. Release the cable from the two clamps.
3. Press the Rear Housing Assy in the direction of the arrow, then release the hook. 3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it.
Unit.

Confidential
A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7
Left Housing P/S Unit Mounting Plate
D6 E6 D7 E7
Dowel
Left Housing
Hook
Power Supply Unit

Mounting Plate
Rib

Rib
S1 S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Left Housing. 1. Remove the six screws (S1: ) fastening the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate.

Confidential
Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate

A8 B8 C8
Move the Tube Guide
Dowel (Step 2) Inside D8 E8
Interfering
Unit
Interfering Unit
Tube Guide
Side Frame
Dowel
No. Screw Type
Rib
2. Lift up the frame and remove a dowel. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ) fastening the Tube Guide.
3. Lift up the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate, turn it in the direction of the arrow, and 2. Remove the interfering unit, and retract the Tube Guide to the back side.
remove the two ribs while releasing the unit interfering with the Side Frame.
4. Remove the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate.
Before tightening the screws, make sure the positioning points are correctly
assembled with reference to the figure above.

Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

PF Brush Assy APG Drive Assy
D9 E9 D10 E10
APG Drive Assy
PF Brush Assy

1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy.

Confidential
APG Drive Assy

B11
APG Phase Sensor
APG Drive Assy
Cable
Hook
Connector
Pin on the Upper

Paper Guide
Groove on the Release

Shaft Holder
Spur Gear 14.4

Left APG Cam
Marking
Hole
APG Phase Sensor
Combination
Gear Triangle marks
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 1. Release the four hooks and remove the APG Phase Sensor.
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen
through the hole on the APG Drive Assy.
• Insert the pin on the upper paper guide into the groove on the release shaft holder of the APG
Drive Assy.

Confidential
C11
PW Drive Shutter Mounting Plate Assy
D11 E11
PW Drive Shutter
Cable
Clamp
Relay Connector Mounting Plate Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Release the cable of the PW Drive Shutter from the clamp. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy.
2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the PW Drive Shutter.

Confidential
Rear ASF Unit
Rear ASF Unit

D12 E12
Top
Rear ASF Unit

Grounding Wire
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Disconnect the two cables from the connectors. 4. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Rear ASF Unit.
2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then release the Grounding Wire.
3. Release the cables and the grounding wire from the clamp.

Confidential
APG Motor Assy
APG Motor Assy

D13 E13
APG Motor Assy APG Encoder Sensor Cable
Rear Hook Connector
APG Motor Cable APG Motor Assy
APG Encoder
Sensor Cable
Clamp
Clamp Relay Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the APG Motor Cable from the Relay Connector and free it from the clamp. The APG Encoder Cable is routed to the inside of the printer so when implementing
2. Release the APG Encoder Cable from the clamp. the next step, be careful not to pull strongly on the APG Motor Assy.
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ) fastening the APG Motor Assy.
4. Pull the APG Motor Assy slowly to the front by releasing the hook, remove the cable from
the connector of the APG Encoder and remove the APG Motor Assy.

Confidential
APG Encoder
APG Encoder
E14
APG Encoder
Frame
APG Motor Sensor
Holder
Positioning Points
Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S3: ). 1. Remove the APG Encoder from the frame.
2. Disengage the hook, then remove the APG Motor Sensor Holder. There are two positioning points on the APG Encoder.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Print Head A 14 min 2 sec 26 min 52 sec 40 min 54 sec

Confidential
Start
Procedure A9 Print Head (Preparation

Preparation Preparation work before of before reassembly)
work before repair Print Head reassembly (→P. 576)
repair (→P. 374)
A10 Installing the Print Head

A1 Right SC Cover (→P. 576)
(→P. 569)
A11 Confirmation after replace
A2 Left SC Cover the Print Head (→P. 577)
(→P. 569)
A12 Preparation before
A3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit Adjustment (→P. 578)
(→P. 570)
A13 Adjustment after replacing
A4 Front Right Cover the Print Head
(→P. 571) (Inspection& Ink Charge)
(→P. 578)
A5 Move the Panel Unit

(→P. 571) A14 Installing the Leak Check
Jig (→P. 579)
A6 Stacker Assy C H E C K Print Head needs a special reassembly procedure.

(→P. 572) A15 Leak Check Judgment Therefore, make sure to reassemble the Print Head
P O IN T
(→P. 580) following the above flowchart.
A7 Front Housing Assy
(→P. 573) A16 Adjustment after replacing
the Print Head
(Adjustment) Make sure to perform “Preparation work before
A8 Print Head (→P. 580) repair Print Head (P. 374)” before disassembly.
(→P. 573)

Confidential
A1 A2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 A5
Front Right Cover
FFC Clamp
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Hook
Panel Unit

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

A6
Stacker Assy
Panel Unit
Stacker Assy

Confidential
A7 A8
Front Housing Assy Print Head
CR Unit
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Move the CR Unit to the print head replacement position.

Confidential
Print head Print head
Front Hook
Top
Connector
FFC
Ink Tube
Connector
No. Screw Type

S25 C.B.S2-3x12-F.ZN-3C Frame of the ink tube
joint portion
S13 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-2.5x10-F.ZN-3C
2. Remove the two screws (S25: ) and the screw (S13: ) that secure the joint portion of To prevent the ink tube joint portion from being damaged, hold the frame of the ink
ink tube. tube joint portion with both hands and remove the joint portion straight upward.
3. Remove the ink tube joint portion.

4. Attach the ink tube joint portion to the hook on the frame.
5. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the CR encoder sensor.

Confidential
Print head Print head
Head FFC
Print head
Head FFC
Head FFC
FFC
2 Print head
Head FFC
No. Screw Type

S24 SCREW,MOUNT,HEAD,ASSY 1
6. Remove the three screws (S24: ). then remove the Print Head. Follow the procedure below to install the Print Head.
7. Disconnect the four Head FFCs from the connectors of the Print Head. 1. Connect the four Head FFCs to the connector of the Print Head.
2. Press the Print Head in the direction of the arrow in order to set it in the CR Unit, and then
secure it with the three screws (S31).
3. Connect the FFC to the connector of the CR encoder sensor.

Confidential
A9 Print Head A10

Installing the Print Head
(Preparation before reassembly)
Head FFC
Ink Tube Joint Part Head FFC
FFC
2
Print Head
Wiping area
C H E C K Make sure to clean the Ink tube joint part by using the Cleaning stick, because Follow the procedure below to install the Print Head.
P O IN T
perform the Ink Leak Check correctly. 1. Connect the four Head FFCs to the connector of the Print Head.
2. Press the Print Head in the direction of the arrow in order, set it to the CR Unit, and fix it with
the three screws (S6).
If ink is remained to Ink tube joint part, Ink Leak Check can not perform correctly. 3. Connect the FFC to the connector of the CR encoder sensor.
Therefore cleaning the ink surely.

Confidential
Installing the Print Head

A11 Confirmation after replace
the Print Head
Top
Step 1 Cap
Ink System
Ink Tube
Connector
Step 2
No. Screw Type

S25 C.B.S2-3x12-F.ZN-3C
4. Set the Ink Tube Connector at the Print Head, and fasten it using three screws (S25/S13). In this printer, the cap of the ink system follows the inclination of the Print Head. However, if
hardened ink is accumulated on the cap, capping may not be done properly and printing failure
may result. After the adjustment is complete, make sure to perform the operation check of the
cap following the procedure below.
1. Push the cap of the ink system to the rear and confirm the cap surely returns to the original
position.
2. Push the cap of the Cap Unit to the home position and confirm the cap surely returns to the
original position.
3. Repeat Step 1 to Step 2 a few times. If the action of the cap is too slow or awkward, or does
not return to the original position, replace the ink system with a new one.
4. Turn the printer on in service support mode.

Confidential
A12 A13 Adjustment after replacing the Print Head

Preparation before Adjustment
(Inspection& Ink Charge)
Front Cover Open Sensor
1. Wrap the front cover open sensor with tape, and disable the sensor function. 1. Select the “Adjustment Main Unit: MENU” from the service support mode menu.
2. Install the ink pack and the Maintenance Box. 2. Select the “Main Parts Adjust: MENU” from the Adjustment Main Unit: MENU.
3. Start the printer in service support mode. (Refer to Service Support Mode (p. 124)) 3. Select the “Print Head: MENU” and execute the “B80 After Repair Adjustment”.
Wrap the front cover sensor with tape surely. C H E C K Execute the nozzle check after the initial ink charge because the ink leak check is
P O IN T
(When the adhesive tape peels off, the CR unit unintentionally moving.) performed after this.

Confidential
Ink leak measurement jig installation

A14
Installing the Leak Check Jig
Ink Tube Connector
Types of Ink Leak Measurement Jig

Part Name Part Code Photo Remark
LEAK TESTER 1684353 Smoked
SHEET FRONT Face
10mm
90°
Ink Leak Measurement Jig
The smoked face is put
toward the upside.
90°
Ink Leak Measurement Jig
C H E C K In this product, Ink Leak Check is necessary to prevent the ink leakage due to 1. Set the ink leak measurement jig to the ink tube connector of the Print Head.
P O IN T
assembly mistake. The smoked face of ink leak measurement jig is put toward the upside.
Therefore, make sure to install the ink leak measurement jig when installing the Ink
Tube to Print Head.
Before using the Leak Check Jig, push the ink leak measurement jig along the folds
until the fold angle become 90 degrees.

Confidential
A15 A16 Adjustment after replacing the Print Head

Leak Check Judgment
(Adjustment)
1. Perform the Ink Leak Check based on the determination criteria of the Ink Leak Check 1. Perform the adjustment in order from the head angular mecha adjustment. (Refer to After
(p.324). Repair Adjustment [B80] (Print Head) (p.376))

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Part or Component GUide Disassembly/ Adjustment/
Total
CR Scale A 21 min 33 sec --- 21 min 33 sec
CR Motor Assy B 22 min 7 sec --- 22 min 7 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 Right SC Cover B8 Right Housing B17 Remove the USB Host Assy
B1 (→P. 583) (→P. 589) (→P. 595)
A2 Left SC Cover B9 Rear Housing Assy B18 CR Motor Assy

B2 (→P. 583) (→P. 590) (→P. 595)
A3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit B10 Power Supply Unit

B3 (→P. 584) (→P. 590)
A4 Front Right Cover B11 Left Housing

B4 (→P. 585) (→P. 591)
A5 Move the Panel Unit B12 P/S Unit Mounting Plate

B5 (→P. 585) (→P. 591)
A6 Stacker Assy B13 Move the Tube Guide

B6 (→P. 586) (→P. 592)
A7 Front Housing Assy B14 PF Brush Assy

B7 (→P. 587) (→P. 593)
A8 Ink Holder Cover B15 APG Drive Assy

(→P. 587) (→P. 593)
A9 CR Scale B16 Remove the CR Timing Belt

(→P. 588) from the CR Motor
(→P. 594)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
Front Right Cover
FFC Clamp
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Hook
Panel Unit

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

A6 B6
Stacker Assy
Panel Unit
Stacker Assy

Confidential
A7 B7 A8
Front Housing Assy Ink Holder Cover
Ink Holder Cover

S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S1 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.

Confidential
CR Scale
A9
CR Scale
Full side
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Side view
CR Unit
CR Scale
Hooks
Home side
Hook Slit
 The CR Scale is made of SUS and very fragile. Therefore, take extreme care when handling 4. Pull out the CR Scale from the slit of the CR Unit.
one.
 If you disassemble the CR Scale, exchange it for the new CR scale.
1. At the full side, disengage the Extension Spring from the hook of the frame.
2. Remove the CR Scale from the hook of frame.
3. At the home side, remove the CR Scale from the hook of the frame.

Confidential
CR Scale
B8
Right Housing
CR Scale
Dowel
Extension Spring
Right Housing
Step 1 Step 2
Hook B
Hook A
Step 4 to 5 Rib
Hook
No. Screw Type

Follow the procedure below to install the CR Scale. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing.
1. At the full side, hook the CR Scale on the frame. 2. Release the hook A.
2. Hook the Extension Spring on the frame. 3. Remove the two dowels.
3. Route the CR Scale through the slit on the CR unit. 4. Release the four hooks B.
4. At the home side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
5. Check the hook is inserted all the way.

Confidential
B9 B10
Top
Connector
Cable
Interfering Place
Power Supply Unit
Unit.

Confidential
B11 B12
Dowel
Left Housing
Hook
Power Supply Unit

Mounting Plate
Rib

Rib

Confidential

B13
Move the Tube Guide
Dowel (Step 2) Inside
Interfering
Unit
Interfering Unit
Tube Guide
Side Frame
Dowel
No. Screw Type
Rib

Confidential
B14 B15
PF Brush Assy APG Drive Assy
APG Drive Assy
PF Brush Assy

1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy.

Confidential
APG Drive Assy

B16 Remove the CR Timing Belt from
APG Drive Assy the CR Motor
Cable
Connector
CR Timing Belt
Pin on the Upper Pinion Gear

Paper Guide

Shaft Holder
Spur Gear 14.4

Left APG Cam Hook
Marking Driven Extension Spring
Hole
Combination
Gear Triangle marks
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 1. Remove the driven extension spring from the hook on the frame, and loosen the tension on
• Align the triangle mark on the left APG cam with the triangle mark on the spur gear 14.4 on the CR Timing Belt.
the APG Drive Assy. At this point, make sure the mark on the combination gear can be seen 2. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the pinion gear of the CR motor.
Drive Assy.

Confidential
B17 B18
Remove the USB Host Assy CR Motor Assy
USB Host Assy
USB Cable
No. Screw Type

S12 C.P-SCREW-3x5-F.ZN-3C
CR Motor Assy
Cable
Hook
Relay Connector
No. Screw Type Ferrite Core

Clamp
1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the USB Host Assy. (Do not remove the cable.) 1. Remove the two screws (S12: ).
Route the USB cable through the hook of the Connector Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
3. Release the ferrite core from the clamp, then remove the CR Motor Assy.

Confidential
CR Motor Assy
Slit
CR Motor Assy
Set the CR Motor Assy so that the slit part faces upside.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
CR Unit A 57 min 35 sec --- 57 min 35 sec
CR Timing Belt B 57 min 50 sec --- 57 min 50 sec
PW Sensor C 58 min 2 sec --- 58 min 2 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover A10 B10 Left Housing A19 B19 Move the Left PG Cam to
C1 (→P. 600) C10 (→P. 605) C19 lower side (→P. 612)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover A11 B11 P/S Unit Mounting Plate A20 B20 Left PG Torsion Spring
C2 (→P. 600) C11 (→P. 606) C20 (→P. 613)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit A12 B12 Move the Tube Guide A21 B21 Left Mounting Plate
C3 (→P. 601) C12 (→P. 607) C21 (→P. 613)
A4 B4 Front Right Cover A13 B13 PF Brush Assy A22 B22 Left PG Cam (with E-ring)
C4 (→P. 602) C13 (→P. 607) C22 (→P. 614)
A5 B5 Move the Panel Unit A14 B14 APG Drive Assy A23 B23 Right Housing
C5 (→P. 602) C14 (→P. 608) C23 (→P. 614)
A6 B6 Stacker Assy A15 B15 Ink Holder Cover A24 B24 Right PG Torsion Spring
C6 (→P. 603) C15 (→P. 609) C24 (→P. 615)
A7 B7 Front Housing Assy A16 B16 CR Scale A25 B25 CR Shaft Spring Mounting
C7 (→P. 604) C16 (→P. 609) C25 Plate (→P. 615)
A8 B8 Rear Housing Assy A17 B17 Driven Pulley Holder & A26 B26 Right APG Cam
C8 (→P. 604) C17 Driven Pulley Spring (→P. 616)
C26
(→P. 611)
A9 B9 Power Supply Unit

A18 B18 a (→P. 599)
C9 (→P. 605) Left PG Cam Screw Holder
C18 (→P. 612)

Confidential
a (→P. 598)
A27 B27 Right PG Cam

C27 (→P. 616)
A28 B28 Right Scale Mounting Plate/

C28 with E-ring (→P. 617)
A29 B29 Right Bearing Mounting

C29 Plate (→P. 617)
A30 B30 CR Guide Frame

C30 (→P. 618)
A31 B31 Remove the USB Host Assy

C31 and CR Motor (→P. 618)
A32 B32 CR Scale Mounting Plate

C32 (→P. 619)
A33 B33 CR Unit/with CR Shaft

C33 (→P. 619)
B34 CR Unit B34 CR Timing Belt C34 PW Sensor Cover

(→P. 620) (→P. 620) (→P. 621)
C35 PW Sensor
(→P. 621)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Front Right Cover
FFC Clamp
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Hook
Panel Unit

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

A6 B6 C6
Stacker Assy
Panel Unit
Stacker Assy

Confidential
A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8
Front Housing Assy Rear Housing Assy
Top
Rear Housing Assy
Interfering Place

1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
Unit.

Confidential
A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10

Power Supply Unit Left Housing
Connector
Dowel
Clamps
Left Housing
Cable
Hook
Power Supply Unit
Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type Rib
1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Left Housing.
2. Release the cable from the two clamps. 2. Remove the two dowels.
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it. 3. Remove the rib on the front side while lifting up the Left Housing.

Confidential

A11 B11 C11
P/S Unit Mounting Plate
Interfering
Unit
Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate

Mounting Plate
Side Frame
Dowel
No. Screw Type

Rib
1. Remove the six screws (S1: ) fastening the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate. 2. Lift up the frame and remove a dowel.
3. Lift up the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate, turn it in the direction of the arrow, and

Confidential
A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13

Move the Tube Guide PF Brush Assy
Interfering Unit
PF Brush Assy
Tube Guide

1. Remove the screw (S1: ) fastening the Tube Guide. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy.
2. Remove the interfering unit, and retract the Tube Guide to the back side.

Confidential
APG Drive Assy

A14 B14 C14
APG Drive Assy
APG Drive Assy
Cable
APG Drive Assy
Connector
Pin on the Upper

Paper Guide

Shaft Holder
Spur Gear 14.4

Left APG Cam
Marking
Hole
No. Screw Type

Combination
S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C Gear Triangle marks
1. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the APG Drive Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
Drive Assy.

Confidential
A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16

Ink Holder Cover CR Scale
Full side
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Ink Holder Cover
Hooks
Home side
Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Ink Holder Cover.  The CR Scale is made of SUS and very fragile. Therefore, take extreme care when handling
one.
 If you disassemble the CR Scale, exchange it for the new CR scale.
1. At the full side, disengage the Extension Spring from the hook of the frame.
2. Remove the CR Scale from the hook of frame.
3. At the home side, remove the CR Scale from the hook of the frame.

Confidential
CR Scale CR Scale
CR Scale
Side view
CR Unit
Extension Spring
CR Scale
Step 1 Step 2
Slit
Step 4 to 5
Hook
4. Pull out the CR Scale from the slit of the CR Unit. Follow the procedure below to install the CR Scale.
1. At the full side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
2. Hook the Extension Spring on the frame.
3. Route the CR Scale through the slit on the CR unit.
4. At the home side, hook the CR Scale on the frame.
5. Check the hook is inserted all the way.

Confidential
Driven Pulley Holder & Driven Extension Spring

A17 B17 C17 Driven Pulley Holder &
Driven Pulley Spring
Driven Extension Spring
CR Timing Belt
Driven Extension Spring Hook Drive Extension Holder
Drive Extension Holder
1. Remove the driven extension spring from the hook on the frame, and loosen the tension on 3. Remove the driven extension holder with the driven extension spring.
the CR Timing Belt.
2. Remove the CR Timing Belt by sliding the driven extension holder in the direction of the
arrow.

Confidential
A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19

Left PG Cam Screw Holder Move the Left PG Cam to lower side
Left PG Cam
No. Screw Type

S22 C.C.SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S22: ), then remove the Left PG Cam Screw Holder with the screw. 1. Slide the left PG cam downward.

Confidential
A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21

Left PG Torsion Spring Left Mounting Plate
Left PG Torsion Spring
Left Mounting Plate
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Left PG Torsion Spring. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Left Mounting Plate.

Confidential
A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23

Left PG Cam (with E-ring) Right Housing
Left PG Cam
E-ring Dowel
Bush
Parallel Pin Right Housing
PF Scale Hook B
Hook A
Rib
No. Screw Type

 When removing the APG gear, be careful not to touch the PF scale. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Right Housing.
 Be careful not to drop the parallel pin. 2. Release the hook A.
1. Remove the E-ring and the Bush, then remove the left PG cam and the parallel pin.

Confidential
A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25

Right PG Torsion Spring CR Shaft Spring Mounting Plate
Right PG Torsion Spring
CR Shaft Spring
Mounting Plate
Inside
No. Screw Type

Right PG Torsion Spring S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the Right PG Torsion Spring. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the CR Shaft Spring Mounting Plate.

Confidential
A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27

Right APG Cam Right PG Cam
Parallel Pin
Right APG Cam
Right PG Cam
Plastic Washer
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the plastic washer, then remove the Right APG Cam and the parallel pin. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Right PG Cam.

Confidential
A28 B28 C28 Right Scale Mounting Plate/ A29 B29 C29
Right Bearing Mounting Plate
with E-ring
Right Bearing
E-ring Mounting Plate
Right Scale
Mounting Plate
Plastic Washers
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the E-ring and the two plastic washers, then remove the right scale mounting 1. Remove the seven screws (S3: ), then remove the Right Bearing Mounting Plate.
plate.

Confidential
A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 Remove the USB Host Assy and
CR Guide Frame
CR Motor
USB Host Assy
CR Guide Frame
No. Screw Type

CR Motor Assy
No. Screw Type

S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C No. Screw Type
S12 C.P-SCREW-3x5-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S5: ), then remove the CR Guide Frame. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the USB Host Assy.
2. Remove the two (S12: ), then remove the CR Motor Assy.

Confidential
A32 B32 C32 A33 B33 C33

CR Scale Mounting Plate CR Unit/with CR Shaft
CR Scale Mounting Plate
E-ring
CR Unit (with CR Shaft)

CR Shaft
CR Shaft
Shaft
Holes on
Frame the frame
CR Scale Mounting Plate
1. Remove the E-ring. 1. Pull out the CR shaft from the printer, them remove the CR Unit (with CR Shaft).
2. Lift the CR Scale Mounting Plate, then remove the CR shaft.
When installing the CR Scale Mounting Plate, set the shaft of the CR Scale Mounting
Plate into the hole of the frame, and fix it with the E-ring.

Confidential
A34 B34
CR Unit CR Timing Belt
CR Unit
CR Unit
CR Shaft
CR Timing Belt
1. Pull out the CR shaft from the CR Unit. 1. Remove the CR Timing Belt from the CR Unit.

Confidential
C34 C35
PW Sensor Cover PW Sensor
PW Sensor Cover
FFC
PW Sensor
Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the screw (S13: ), then remove the PW Sensor Cover. 2. Remove the PW Sensor with the long nose pilers.
3. Disconnect the FFC from the connector of the PW Sensor.

Confidential
7.3.4.20 Paper Feed Mechanism 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Duplex Print Unit A 16 sec --- 16 sec
Middle Duplex Print Guide B 30 sec --- 30 sec
Feed Sensor C 2 min 4 sec --- 2 min 4 sec
Paper Size Sensor D 2 min 4 sec --- 2 min 4 sec
Pickup Roller E 1 min 15 sec --- 1 min 15 sec
Feed Lever F 2 min 29 sec --- 2 min 29 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Duplex Print Unit

D1 E1 F1 (→P. 624)
B2 Middle Duplex Print Guide C2 D2 Left Duplex Print Guide

E2 (→P. 624) F2 (→P. 625)
E3 Cassette Assy C3 Feed Sensor

(→P. 626) (→P. 625)
E4 Pickup Roller D3 Paper Size Sensor

(→P. 627) (→P. 626)
F3 Middle Duplex Print Guide

(→P. 627)
F4 Feed Lever
(→P. 628)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2
Duplex Print Unit Middle Duplex Print Guide
D1 E1 F1 E2
Duplex Print Unit
Middle Duplex Print Guide
Angle Hole
Duplex Print Cover
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Lift the Middle Duplex Print Guide by hooking a finger on the angle hole, and remove it.
2. Remove the Duplex Print Unit.

Confidential
C2 D2 C3
Left Duplex Print Guide Feed Sensor
F2
Left Duplex Print Guide Hooks

Feed Sensor
Cable
Connector
No. Screw Type

C H E C K When removing the screw in the step below, use a stubby screwdriver whose total 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
P O IN T
length is 40 mm or shorter. 2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector.
1. Remove the three screws (S2: ), then remove the Left Duplex Print Guide.

Confidential
D3
Paper Size Sensor Cassette Assy
E3
Paper Size Sensor Hooks

Cable
Connector Cassette Assy
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor. 1. Remove the Cassette Assy.

Confidential
Pickup Roller Middle Duplex Print Guide

E4 F3
Pickup Rollers
Middle Duplex Print Guide
Angle Hole
Hooks
1. Disengage the hooks, then remove the two Pickup Rollers. 1. Lift the Middle Duplex Print Guide by hooking a finger on the angle hole, and remove it.

Confidential
Feed Lever
F4
Engage long leg here.
Engage short leg here.
Feed Lever Hole
Spring
1. Slide the Feed Lever leftward, then pull it out through the hole of the base.
Make sure to attach the spring as shown above.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Duplex Print Cover Assy A 48 sec --- 48 sec
Mounting Plate Assy B 1 min 11 sec --- 1 min 11 sec
Rear Band C 1 min 31 sec --- 1 min 31 sec
Hopper Up/down Sensor D 2 min 10 sec --- 2 min 10 sec
Paper Detector E 2 min 10 sec --- 2 min 10 sec

Confidential
Start
B1 D1 Duplex Print Assy A1 Duplex Print Cover Assy

E1 (→P. 631) C1 (→P. 631)
D2 Right Duplex Print Guide B2 Mounting Plate Assy C2 Rear Band

E2 (→P. 633) (→P. 632) (→P. 632)
D3 Hopper Up/down Sensor E3 Paper Detector

(→P. 633) (→P. 634)

Confidential
A1 C1 B1
Duplex Print Cover Assy Duplex Print Assy
D1 E1
Duplex Print Unit
Dowel
Dowel
Duplex Print Cover Assy No. Screw Type

Duplex Print Cover
1. Remove the two screws (S2: ). 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Disengage the two dowels, then remove the Duplex Print Cover Assy. 2. Remove the Duplex Print Unit.

Confidential
B2 C2
Mounting Plate Assy Rear Band
Mounting Plate Assy

Rear Band
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the two Rear Bands.

Confidential
Right Duplex Print Guide Hopper Up/down Sensor

D2 E2 D3
Hopper Up/ Hooks Connector

down Sensor
Right Duplex Print Guide
Cables
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Right Duplex Print Guide. 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.

Confidential
Paper Detector
E3
Hooks Connector
Paper Detector
Sensor
Cable
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.


Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
PF Belt Tension Stopper A 10 min 7 sec --- 10 min 7 sec
SMAP Phase Sensor B 10 min 57 sec --- 10 min 57 sec
PF Encoder Assy C 11 min 2 sec --- 11 min 2 sec
PF Timing Belt D 13 min 46 sec --- 13 min 46 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Left SC Cover
C1 D1 (→P. 637)
A2 B2 Left Housing
C2 D2 (→P. 637)
C3 Left PG Cam Screw Holder B3 Spur Gear & E-ring A3 PF Belt Tension Stopper
D3 (→P. 640) (→P. 638) (→P. 638)
C4 Anti Static Brush Plate B4 SMAP Phase Sensor

D4 (→P. 640) (→P. 639)
C5 PF Encoder Assy
D5 (→P. 641)
D6 PF Belt Tension Stopper

(→P. 641)
D7 Spur Gear & E-ring

(→P. 642)
D8 PF Timing Belt
(→P. 642)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
D1 D2
Dent
Dowel
Left SC Cover
Left Housing
Hook
Rib
No. Screw Type

Confidential
A3 B3
PF Belt Tension Stopper Spur Gear & E-ring
Spur Gear
PF Drive Pulley Holder
Marking
PF Belt Tension Stopper
Leg
No. Screw Type E-ring

S17 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on 1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear.
the contact point.
2. Loosen the screw (S17: ) that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper.
3. Release the leg of the PF Belt Tension Stopper from the frame, then slide the PF Belt
Tension Stopper rearward to remove it.

Confidential
SMAP Drive Sensor

B4
SMAP Phase Sensor
Hole
SMAP Drive Sensor
Sensor Holder
Dowel
Cable
Connector
Sensor Holder
Hooks
SMAP Drive Sensor
1. While pressing the dowel of the sensor holder, remove the holder in the direction of the 2. Pull out the SMAP Drive Sensor together with the sensor holder through the cutout of the
arrow. frame.
3. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.
4. Disengage the four hooks.

Confidential
C3 D3 C4 D4
Left PG Cam Screw Holder Anti Static Brush Plate
Anti Static Brush Plate

S22 C.C.SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S22: ), then remove the Left PG Cam Screw Holder with the screw. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the Anti Static Brush Plate.

Confidential
C5
PF Encoder Assy PF Belt Tension Stopper
D5 D6
FFC PF Drive Pulley Holder

PF Encoder Assy
Marking
Leg

S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C S17 C.B.S-TITE.P4.SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Disconnect the FFC from the PF Encoder Assy. 1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on
2. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Encoder Assy. the contact point.
2. Loosen the screw (S17: ) that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper.

Confidential
Spur Gear & E-ring PF Timing Belt

D7 D8
Spur Gear
PF Belt Tension Lever
Pinion Gear PF Timing Belt

E-ring
1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear. 1. Press the PF Belt Tension Lever downward to loosen the PF Timing Belt, then release the
belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor.
2. Remove the PF Timing Belt.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Rear ASF Unit A 7 min 57 sec 49 sec 8 min 46 sec
Link Lever B 9 min 29 sec --- 9 min 29 sec
Rear ASF Solenoid C 8 min 55 sec --- 8 min 55 sec
Rear ASF Clutch Gear D 8 min 3 sec --- 8 min 3 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover
C1 D1 (→P. 645)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover
C2 D2 (→P. 645)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit

C3 D3 (→P. 646)
A4 B4 Rear Housing Assy

C4 D4 (→P. 647)
A5 B5 Mounting Plate Assy

C5 D5 (→P. 647)
A6 B6 Rear ASF Unit

C6 D6 (→P. 648)
B7 Link Lever C7 Rear ASF Solenoid D7 Rear ASF Clutch Gear

(→P. 649) (→P. 650) (→P. 650)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 D1 C2 D2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3
C3 D3 ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 A5 B5
Rear Housing Assy Mounting Plate Assy
C4 D4 C5 D5
Top
Rear Housing Assy
Interfering Place

Mounting Plate Assy
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy.
Unit.

Confidential
Rear ASF Unit

A6 B6
Rear ASF Unit
C6 D6
Top
Rear ASF Unit

Grounding Wire
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
Link Lever
B7
Link Lever
Cable
Link Lever
Shaft
Clamps
Mounting Plate
Hole
Dowel
No. Screw Type

1. Release the cable from the two clamps. 3. Rotate the Link Lever until its hole aligns with the dowel of the shaft, then remove the
2. Remove the screw (S3: ), then slide the Mounting Plate in the direction of the arrow. Link Lever.

Confidential
Rear ASF Solenoid Rear ASF Clutch Gear

C7 D7
Relay Connector
Rear ASF Solenoid
Cable
Rear ASF
Clutch Gear
Tab
Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Disconnect the cable of the Rear ASF Solenoid from the relay connector. 1. Release the hook, then remove the Rear ASF Clutch Gear disengaging its tooth from the
2. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the Rear ASF Solenoid. tab of the actuator.

Confidential

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
ASF Drive Assy A 18 min 41 sec --- 18 min 41 sec
ASF Encoder B 18 min 51 sec --- 18 min 51 sec
PF Drive Assy C 31 min 53 sec --- 31 min 53 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover C9 PF Brush Assy C14 Stacker Assy

C1 (→P. 654) (→P. 660) (→P. 663)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover C10 APG Drive Assy C15 Cassette Assy

C2 (→P. 654) (→P. 661) (→P. 664)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit C11 PW Drive Shutter C16 Front Right Cover
C3 (→P. 655) (→P. 662) (→P. 664)
A4 B4 Rear Housing Assy C12 Spur Gear 56.8 C17 Move the Panel Unit
C4 (→P. 656) (→P. 662) (→P. 665)
A5 B5 Power Supply Unit C13 ASF Drive Assy C18 Front Housing Assy
C5 (→P. 656) (→P. 663) (→P. 666)
A6 B6 Left Housing A9 Spur Gear 56.8 C19 Front Left Housing

C6 (→P. 657) B9 (→P. 659) (→P. 666)
A7 B7 P/S Unit Mounting Plate A10 ASF Drive Assy C20 PF Belt Tension Stopper
C7 (→P. 657) B10 (→P. 659) (→P. 667)
A8 B8 Move the Tube Guide B11 ASF Encoder C21 PF Drive Assy
C8 (→P. 658) (→P. 660) (→P. 667)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5
Top
Connector
Cable
Interfering Place
Power Supply Unit
Unit.

Confidential
A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7
Dowel
Left Housing
Hook
Power Supply Unit

Mounting Plate
Rib

Rib

Confidential

A8 B8 C8
Move the Tube Guide
Interfering
Unit
Interfering Unit
Tube Guide
Side Frame
Dowel
No. Screw Type
Rib

Confidential
A9 B9 A10 B10
Spur Gear 56.8 ASF Drive Assy
ASF Drive Assy
E-ring Spur Gear 56.8
Motor Cable
Sensor Cable
Connector
Clamp
Relay Connector
No. Screw Type

Ferrite Core S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the E-ring and remove the spur gear 56.8. 1. Release the ferrite core from the clamp.
2. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from the connector.
4. Remove the four screws (S5: ), then remove the ASF Drive Assy.

Confidential
B11 C9
ASF Encoder PF Brush Assy
ASF Encoder
PF Brush Assy

1. Remove the screw (S18: ), and remove the ASF Encoder. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy.

Confidential
APG Drive Assy

C10
APG Drive Assy
APG Drive Assy
Cable
APG Drive Assy
Connector
Pin on the Upper

Paper Guide

Shaft Holder
Spur Gear 14.4

Left APG Cam
Marking
Hole
No. Screw Type

Combination
Drive Assy.

Confidential
C11 C12
PW Drive Shutter Spur Gear 56.8
PW Drive Shutter
E-ring Spur Gear 56.8
Cable
Clamp
Relay Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Release the cable of the PW Drive Shutter from the clamp. 1. Remove the E-ring and remove the spur gear 56.8.
2. Disconnect the cable from the relay connector.
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the PW Drive Shutter.

Confidential
C13 C14
ASF Drive Assy Stacker Assy
ASF Drive Assy
Motor Cable
Sensor Cable
Connector
Clamp
Relay Connector

Ferrite Core S5 C.B.S-TITE-R-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the ferrite core from the clamp. 1. Remove the Stacker Assy.
2. Disconnect the motor cable from the relay connector.
3. Disconnect the sensor cable from the connector.
4. Remove the four screws (S5: ), then remove the ASF Drive Assy.

Confidential
C15 C16
Cassette Assy Front Right Cover
Front Right Cover
Cassette Assy
Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Cassette Assy. 1. Remove the screw (S1: ) and slide the front right cover to the right while releasing the

Confidential
Move the Panel Unit

C17
Move the Panel Unit
FFC Clamp Panel Unit
Guide
Grounding Wire
Grounding Wire
Panel Unit
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the five screws (S1: ). (Tightened together with the panel grounding wire at 6. Put the panel unit at the rear side of the printer.
some locations)

Confidential
C18 C19
Front Housing Assy Front Left Housing
Front Left Housing

1. Remove the seven screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Housing Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Front Left Housing.

Confidential
C20 C21
PF Belt Tension Stopper PF Drive Assy
Left side Acetate Tape Relay Connector
Clamp
PF Drive Pulley Holder
Marking
PF Drive Pulley Holder PF Timing Belt

Leg
No. Screw Type

1. The PF Belt Tension Stopper is in contact with the PF Drive Pulley Holder. Put a mark on 1. Remove the PF Timing Belt from the PF Drive Pulley Holder.
the contact point. 2. Remove the cable from the relay connector.
2. Loosen the screw (S17: ) that secures the PF Belt Tension Stopper. 3. Peel away the acetate tape and release the two cables from the clamp.

Confidential
PF Drive Assy
Front
PF Drive Assy
No. Screw Type

4. Remove the four screws (S5: ), and remove the PF Drive Assy.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Intermediate Release
A 16 min 51 sec --- 16 min 51 sec
Solenoid
Nip Release Sensor B 17 min 33 sec --- 17 min 33 sec
Paper Jam Sensor C 43 min 22 sec --- 43 min 22 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Right SC Cover C6 Rear Housing Assy C15 APG Drive Assy

C1 (→P. 671) (→P. 677) (→P. 683)
A2 B2 Left SC Cover C7 Duplex Print Unit C16 APG Motor Assy

C2 (→P. 671) (→P. 678) (→P. 684)
A3 B3 Open the ADF/SCN Unit C8 Mounting Plate Assy C17 Uway Drive Assy
C3 (→P. 672) (→P. 678) (→P. 685)
A4 B4 Relay Harness Cover C9 Rear ASF Unit C18 Intermediate Release

C4 (→P. 673) (→P. 679) Solenoid (→P. 686)
A5 B5 PCB Head Relay Board C10 Power Supply Unit C19 Plunger
C5 (with Mounting Plate) (→P. 680) (→P. 687)
(→P. 673)
C11 Left Housing C20 Front Duplex Paper Guide

A6 Intermediate Release (→P. 680) Assy (→P. 687)
B6 Solenoid (→P. 676)
C12 P/S Unit Mounting Plate C21 Paper Jam Sensor

B7 Nip Release Sensor (→P. 681) (→P. 688)
(→P. 677)
C13 Move the Tube Guide

(→P. 682)
C14 PF Brush Assy

(→P. 682)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Dent Tabs
Dent
Left SC Cover
Right SC Cover


tabs.

Confidential

A3 B3 C3
ADF/SCN Unit
Support Stand
Right side
C H E C K
P O IN T
Hook
Triangle
mark
Hook
No. Screw Type

P O IN T

Confidential
A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 PCB Head Relay Board

Relay Harness Cover
Relay Cable
Clamp
Relay Harness Cover Hook
Relay Cable
ADF/SCN Cable
Relay Cable
No. Screw Type
1. Release the ADF/SCN cable from the hooks of the Relay Harness Cover. 1. Remove the five relay cables between the Main Board and the PCB Mechanism Relay
2. Release the two relay cables from the clamp. Board from the connector of the PCB Relay Board.

Confidential
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
Clamp Hook
CN14
Lumirror
CN16 Cable Holder
CN15 CN44
CN19
PCB Mechanism Relay Board
Clamp
CN11
ADF/SCN Cable
CN9 CN8
CN46
CN104 CN103
No. Screw Type

2. Remove the cables on the front side of the product (near the cable holder) according to the 3. Remove the cable on the back side of the product (1) according to the procedure below.
procedure below. 3-1. Remove the ADF/SCN cable from the connectors (CN103 (with hooks), CN104) of
2-1. Release the three hooks of the lumirror covering the cable holder to open the lumirror. the Main Board.
2-2. Remove the cables from the connectors (CN11, CN15, CN16, CN44, CN42) of the 3-2. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the Scanner Grounding Wire.
PCB Mechanism Relay Board. 3-3. Remove the cables from the connectors (CN8, CN9, CN14, CN19 (with hooks)) of
2-3. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. the PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
2-4. Release the cable from the clamp. 3-4. Release the cable from the two clamps.

Confidential
PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate) PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with Mounting Plate)
PCB Mechanism Relay

Board (with Mounting Plate)
Grounding Wire
Clamp

4. Remove the cables on the back side of the product (2), and the other cables according to 5. Remove the three screws (S1: ), then remove the PCB Mechanism Relay Board (with
the procedure below. Mounting Plate).
4-1. Release the cable from the three clamps.
4-2. Remove the cable/FFC from all connectors of the PCB Mechanism Relay Board.
4-3. Remove the screw (S1: ), then remove the grounding wire.

Confidential

A6 B6
Cable Holder
Cable
Clamp
Grounding Wire Intermediate

Plunger Release Solenoid Hole
No. Screw Type

1. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. Insert the plunger into the hole on the Intermediate Release Solenoid.
2. Release the cable from the clamp.
4. Remove the three screws (S9: ) and remove the Intermediate Release Solenoid. C H E C K When replacing the Intermediate Release Solenoid, replace the plunger too
P O IN T
simultaneously.

Confidential
B7 C6
Nip Release Sensor Rear Housing Assy
Top
Cable Rear Housing Assy
Hooks
Interfering Place

Nip Release Sensor
Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the Nip Release Sensor. 1. Open the Duplex Print Cover.
2. Disconnect the cables from the sensor connector. 2. Remove the seven screws (S1: ).
Unit.

Confidential
C7 C8
Duplex Print Unit Mounting Plate Assy
Duplex Print Unit
Mounting Plate Assy
No. Screw Type

Duplex Print Cover
1. Open the Duplex Print Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S1: ), then remove the Mounting Plate Assy.
2. Remove the Duplex Print Unit.

Confidential
Rear ASF Unit

C9
Rear ASF Unit
Top
Rear ASF Unit

Grounding Wire
Clamp
Cable
Cable (CN41)
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type

Confidential
C10 C11
Power Supply Unit Left Housing
Connector
Dowel
Clamps
Left Housing
Cable
Hook
Power Supply Unit
Rib
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type Rib
1. Disconnect the cables from the Power Supply Unit. 1. Remove the four screws (S1: ) fastening the Left Housing.
2. Release the cable from the two clamps. 2. Remove the two dowels.
3. Remove the three screws (S1: ), pull the Power Supply Unit forward to remove it. 3. Remove the rib on the front side while lifting up the Left Housing.

Confidential

C12
P/S Unit Mounting Plate
Interfering
Unit
Power Supply Unit Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate

Mounting Plate
Side Frame
Dowel
No. Screw Type

Rib
1. Remove the six screws (S1: ) fastening the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate. 2. Lift up the frame and remove a dowel.
3. Lift up the Power Supply Unit Mounting Plate, turn it in the direction of the arrow, and

Confidential
C13 C14
Move the Tube Guide PF Brush Assy
Interfering Unit
PF Brush Assy
Tube Guide

1. Remove the screw (S1: ) fastening the Tube Guide. 1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the PF Brush Assy.
2. Remove the interfering unit, and retract the Tube Guide to the back side.

Confidential
APG Drive Assy

C15
APG Drive Assy
APG Drive Assy
Cable
APG Drive Assy
Connector
Pin on the Upper

Paper Guide

Shaft Holder
Spur Gear 14.4

Left APG Cam
Marking
Hole
No. Screw Type

Combination
Drive Assy.

Confidential
APG Motor Assy

C16
APG Motor Assy
APG Motor Assy APG Encoder Sensor Cable
Rear Hook Connector
APG Motor Cable APG Motor Assy
APG Encoder
Sensor Cable
Clamp
Clamp Relay Connector
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the APG Motor Cable from the Relay Connector and free it from the clamp. The APG Encoder Cable is routed to the inside of the printer so when implementing
2. Release the APG Encoder Cable from the clamp. the next step, be careful not to pull strongly on the APG Motor Assy.
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ) fastening the APG Motor Assy.
4. Pull the APG Motor Assy slowly to the front by releasing the hook, remove the cable from
the connector of the APG Encoder and remove the APG Motor Assy.

Confidential
Uway Drive Assy

C17
Uway Drive Assy
Cable Holder
Relay Cable
Solenoid Cable
Clamp
Uway Drive Assy
Cable No. Screw Type

1. Release the relay cable and Intermediate Release Solenoid Cable from the cable holder. C H E C K When removing the screw A in the step below, use a stubby screwdriver whose total
P O IN T
2. Release the cable from the two clamps. length is 40 mm or shorter.
3. Remove the four screws (S3: ), and then remove the Uway Drive Assy.

Confidential

C18
Cable Holder
Cable
Clamp
Grounding Wire Intermediate

Plunger Release Solenoid Hole
No. Screw Type

1. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. Insert the plunger into the hole on the Intermediate Release Solenoid.
2. Release the cable from the clamp.
4. Remove the three screws (S9: ) and remove the Intermediate Release Solenoid. C H E C K When replacing the Intermediate Release Solenoid, replace the plunger too
P O IN T
simultaneously.

Confidential
C19 C20
Plunger Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy
Plunger
Spring
Pump Mounting Plate Assy
Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy
Shaft
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the spring from the plunger. 1. Remove the four screws (S5: ), then remove the Front Duplex Paper Guide Assy from
2. Pull out the shaft from the plunger, then remove the Nip Release Lever. the Pump Mounting Plate Assy.

Confidential
C21
Paper Jam Sensor
Paper Jam Sensor
Connector
Cable
Hooks
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the Paper Jam Sensor.
用紙カセット

Confidential
7.3.4.26 Paper Cassette
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Cassette Assy A 10 sec --- 10 sec
Retard Roller B 21 sec --- 21 sec
Paper Label C 26 sec --- 26 sec
End Guide D 30 sec --- 30 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Cassette Assy
C1 D1 (→P. 691)
B2 Retard Roller C2 Papersize Cassette Holder D2 End Guide

(→P. 691) (→P. 692) (→P. 693)
B2
C3 Paper Label
(→P. 692)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 B2
Cassette Assy Retard Roller
D1
Lever
Retard Roller
Cassette Assy
1. Remove the Cassette Assy. 1. Move the lever upward, then remove the Retard Roller.

Confidential
C2 C3
Papersize Cassette Holder Paper Label
Paper Label
Paper Size Holder

Paper Size Holder
1. Pull the Paper Size Holder upward to remove it. 1. Pull the Paper Label out of the Paper Size Holder.

Confidential
End Guide
End Guide
D2
Paper Size Sensor Lever Drive Part B

Paper Cassette lower Frame
positioning of paper size
sensor lever drive part
Dowel Paper Size Sensor Lever Drive Part A
Dowel End guideof

positioning Gear
paper size
sensor lever drive part
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the five screw (S1: ). 3. Remove the Paper size sensor lever drive part A and the Paper size sensor lever drive
2. Slide the paper cassette lower frame to arrow direction while holding up it and releasing part B.
the dowel. 4. Remove the end guide gear.
Confirm the following point when installing the paper size sensor drive part A and
paper size sensor drive part B.
 Dowel of end guide is inserted to groove of the paper size sensor drive part A.
 Align the positioning of paper size sensor lever drive part A and paper size sensor lever drive
part B.

Confidential
End Guide
End Guide
5. Move the End Guide to the position of above figure.

6. Hold up the tip of end guide, then remove it.
Option Cassette Unit 1

Confidential
7.3.4.27 Option Cassette Unit 1
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Option Pick Up Roller A 1 min 49 sec --- 1 min 49 sec
Option Rear Cover B 17 min 34 sec --- 17 min 34 sec
Option Rear Belt Cover C 17 min 34 sec --- 17 min 34 sec

Confidential
Start
B1 Remove the Print main Unit A1 Option Upper Rear Housing

C1 (→P. 698) (→P. 697)
B2 Option Right Cover A2 Option Paper Cassette

C2 (→P. 699) (→P. 697)
B3 Option Left Cover A3 Option Pickup Roller

C3 (→P. 699) (→P. 698)
B4 Option Rear Fitting Frame

C4 (→P. 700)
B5 Option Paper Cassette

C5 (→P. 700)
B9 Option Left Housing &
B6 Grounding Frame Assy C9 Front Option Frame Assy
(→P. 701) (→P. 704)
C6
B7 Option Dirve Frame Assy B10 Option Rear Cover

C7 (→P. 701) C10 (→P. 704)
B8 Option Front Cover C11 Option Rear Cover Belt

C8 (→P. 703) (→P. 705)

Confidential
A1 A2
Option Upper Rear Housing Option Paper Cassette
Option Upper Rear Housing
Option Rear Cover
No. Screw Type Option Paper Cassette

S23 C.P.SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Open the Option Rear Cover. 1. Remove the Option Paper Cassette.
2. Remove the three screws (S23: ), then remove the Upper Rear Housing.

Confidential
A3 B1
Option Pickup Roller Remove the Printer Main Unit
C1
Option Pick Up Roller
Hooks
Option Cassette Unit
1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Option Pick Up Roller. 1. Remove the Printer main Unit from Option Cassette Unit.

Confidential
B2 B3
Option Right Cover Option Left Cover
C2 C3
Option Right Cover
Option Left Cover
No. Screw Type

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Right Cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Left Cover.

Confidential
B4 B5
Option Rear Fitting Frame Option Paper Cassette
C4 C5
Option Rear Fitting Frame
No. Screw Type Option Paper Cassette

1. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame. 1. Remove the Option Paper Cassette.

Confidential
B6 B7
Grounding Frame Assy Option Drive Frame Assy
C6 C7
Cassette Drawer Assy

and Mounting Cover
Grounding Frame Assy
No. Screw Type

S6 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the two screws (S3: x1, S6: x1), and remove the Grounding Frame Assy. 1. Open the Option Rear Cover.
2. Remove the five screws (S2: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers.

Confidential
Option Drive Frame Assy Option Drive Frame Assy
No. Screw Type Cable

S11 C.POLWAVE.D-TITE-A-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN3C
S6 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
Option Drive
Option Drive Frame Assy
Frame Assy
Option Rear Cover
3. Remove the four screws (S11: ) and one screw (S6: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame 4. Disconnect the two cables from Option Cassette Board.
Assy.

Confidential

B8
Option Front Cover
C8
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Front Cover
No. Screw Type

S8 C.B.S-TITE(P4), SCREW, 3X10, F/ZN-3C
S4 C.SHOULDER S-TITE, SCREW, 3X5
5. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy. 1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and the two screws (S4: ) then remove the Option Front
Cover.

Confidential
B9 B10
Option Left Housing & Front Option Frame Assy Option Rear Cover
C9 C10
Option Rear
Cover Belt
Sensor Cable
Clamps
Option Left Housing/
Option Front Frame Assy Option Rear Cover
Clamps
Option Rear
Cover Belt
No. Screw Type
No. Screw Type
1. Release the sensor cable from the four clamps. 1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), then remove the Option Rear Cover Belt.
2. Remove the two screws (S4: ) and the two screws (C11: ) fixing the Option Left 2. Remove the screw (S2: ), then remove the Option Rear Cover.
Housing and the Option Front Frame Assy.
3. Pull the Option Left Housing and the Option Front Frame Assy upward to remove it.

Confidential
Option Rear Cover Belt

C11
Option Rear Cover Belt
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), then remove the two Option Rear Cover Belts.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Option Feed Lever A 3 min 40 sec --- 3 min 40 sec
Option Right Frame B 14 min 7 sec 34 sec 14 min 41 sec
Upper Connector C 11 min 49 sec --- 11 min 49 sec
Lower Connector D 11 min 49 sec --- 11 min 49 sec

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 Remove the Printer Main

C1 D1 Unit (→P. 708)
B2 Option Right Cover A2 Option Feed Lever Cover

C2 D2 (→P. 709) (→P. 708)
B3 Option Left Cover A3 Option Feed Lever

C3 D3 (→P. 710) (→P. 709)
B4 Rear Option Mounting Plate

C4 D4 (→P. 710)
B5 Option Paper Cassette

C5 D5 (→P. 711)
B6 Grounding Frame Assy

C6 D6 (→P. 711)
B7 Option Drive Frame Assy

C7 D7 (→P. 712)
B8 Option Rear Frame Assy C8 Connector Assy

(→P. 714) D8 (→P. 715)
B9 Connector Assy C9 Upper Connector D9 Lower Connector

(→P. 714) (→P. 716) (→P. 716)
B10 Option Right Frame

(→P. 715)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2
Remove the Print Main Unit Option Feed Lever Cover
C1 D1
Option Feed Lever Cover

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the Printer main Unit from Option Cassette Unit. 1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), then remove the Option Feed Lever Cover.

Confidential
A3 B2
Option Feed Lever Option Right Cover
C2 D2
Option Feed Lever
Hole
Spring
Hole
Option Right Cover

No. Screw Type

Engage long leg here. S2 C.B.P-TITE-SCREW-3x10-F.ZN-3C
1. Release the Option Feed Lever from the holes of the cover. 1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Right Cover.
2. Remove the Option Feed Lever with the spring.

Confidential
B3 B4
Option Left Cover Rear Option Mounting Plate
C3 D3 C4 D4
Option Left Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Left Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame.

Confidential
B5 B6
Option Paper Cassette Grounding Frame Assy
C5 D5 C6 D6
No. Screw Type

Option Paper Cassette S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the Option Paper Cassette. 1. Remove the two screws (S3: x1, S6: x1), and remove the Grounding Frame Assy.

Confidential

B7
C7 D7 No. Screw Type
Cassette Drawer Assy S6 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
and Mounting Cover
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Rear Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Option Rear Cover. 3. Remove the four screws (S11: ) and one screw (S6: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame
2. Remove the five screws (S2: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers. Assy.

Confidential
Cable
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Drive
Frame Assy
4. Disconnect the two cables from Option Cassette Board. 5. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy.

Confidential
B8 B9
Option Rear Frame Assy Connector Assy
Option Rear Frame Assy Connector Assy
CN2
CN1
Cable Holder
CN7 Board
No. Screw Type Option Drive

S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C CN10 Frame Assy
1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN7, CN10) of the board. 1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN1, CN2) of the board.
2. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. 2. Slide the Option Drive Frame Assy in the direction of the arrow, and remove the
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the Option Rear Frame Assy. Connector Assy.

Confidential
B10
Option Right Frame Connector Assy
C8 D8
Connector Assy
Option Right Frame
CN2
CN1
Board
Option Drive
Frame Assy
1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN1, CN2) of the board.
2. Slide the Option Drive Frame Assy in the direction of the arrow, and remove the
Connector Assy.

Confidential
Upper Connector Lower Connector

C9 D9
Cassette Assy
Lower Connector
Upper Connector
Hook Hook
Cassette Assy
Hook
Hook
Cable
Cable
1. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the Upper Connector from the Cassette Assy. 1. Disengage the two hooks, then remove the Lower Connector from the Cassette Assy.
2. Remove the cable from the Upper Connector. 2. Disconnect the cables from the Lower Connector.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Option Rear Cover Sensor A 13 min 55 sec --- 13 min 55 sec
Separate Roller Drive Gear B 13 min 45 sec --- 13 min 45 sec
Lift Drive Gear C 14 min 6 sec --- 14 min 6 sec
Spur Gear (with E-ring) D 17 min 37 sec --- 17 min 37 sec
Vertical Roller E 18 min 22 sec --- 18 min 22 sec
Cassette Detection Sensor

Feed Sensor/
Cassette Paper Size Sensor/ F 17 min 33 sec --- 17 min 33 sec
Paper Detection Sensor/
Hopper Up/down Sensor

Confidential
Start
A1 B1 C1 Remove the Printer Main D9 E9 Option Feed Lever Cover A9 Option Rear Cover Sensor
D1 E1 F1 Unit (→P. 720) F9 (→P. 727) (→P. 725)
A2 B2 C2 Option Right Cover D10 E10 Option Feed Lever

D2 E2 F2 (→P. 720) F10 (→P. 727)
A3 B3 C3 Option Left Cover D11 E11 Option Cassette Grounding

D3 E3 F3 (→P. 721) F11 Plate (→P. 728)
a (→P. 719)
A4 B4 C4 Option Rear Fitting Frame D12 Option Pickup Holder Assy
D4 E4 F4 (→P. 721) E12 (→P. 728)
A5 B5 C5 Option Paper Cassette D13 Spur Gear (with E-ring) B9 Separate Roller Drive Gear
D5 E5 F5 (→P. 722) E13 (→P. 729) (→P. 726)
A6 B6 C6 Grounding Frame Assy E14 Vertical Roller C9 Lift Drive Gear

D6 E6 F6 (→P. 722) (→P. 729) (→P. 726)
A7 B7 C7 Option Drive Frame Assy

D7 E7 F7 (→P. 723)
A8 B8 C8 Option Rear Frame Assy

D8 E8 F8 (→P. 725)

Confidential
a (→P. 718)
F12 Option Pick Up Holder Assy

(→P. 730)
F13 Cassette Detection Sensor F13 Cassette Paper Size Sensor F13 Feed Sensor F13 Paper Detection Sensor
(→P. 730) (→P. 731) (→P. 731) (→P. 732)
F13 Hopper Up/down Sensor

(→P. 732)

Confidential
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2
Remove the Printer Main Unit Option Right Cover
D1 E1 F1 D2 E2 F2
Option Right Cover

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the Printer main Unit from Option Cassette Unit. 1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Right Cover.

Confidential
A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4
Option Left Cover Option Rear Fitting Frame
D3 E3 F3 D4 E4 F4
Option Left Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the four screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Left Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Rear Fitting Frame.

Confidential
A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6
Option Paper Cassette Grounding Frame Assy
D5 E5 F5 D6 E6 F6
No. Screw Type

Option Paper Cassette S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the Option Paper Cassette. 1. Remove the two screws (S3: x1, S6: x1), and remove the Grounding Frame Assy.

Confidential

A7 B7 C7
D7 E7 F7 No. Screw Type
Cassette Drawer Assy S6 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
and Mounting Cover
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Rear Cover
No. Screw Type

1. Open the Option Rear Cover. 3. Remove the four screws (S11: ) and one screw (S6: ) fixing the Option Drive Frame
2. Remove the five screws (S2: ) fixing the Cassette Drawers. Assy.

Confidential
Cable
Option Drive
Frame Assy
Option Drive
Frame Assy
4. Disconnect the two cables from Option Cassette Board. 5. Remove the Option Drive Frame Assy.

Confidential
A8 B8 C8 A9
Option Rear Frame Assy Option Rear Cover Sensor
D8 E8 F8
Option Rear Frame Assy
Hook
Option Rear
Cover Sensor
Cable Holder
CN7
Cable Connector
No. Screw Type

S3 C.B.S-TITE-SCREW-3x6-F.ZN-3C CN10
1. Remove the cable from the connector (CN7, CN10) of the board. 1. Disengage the hook, then remove the Option Rear Cover Sensor.
2. Release the cables from the Cable Holder. 2. Disconnect the cables from the connector.
3. Remove the two screws (S3: ), then remove the Option Rear Frame Assy.

Confidential
B9 C9
Separate Roller Drive Gear Lift Drive Gear
Separate Roller Drive Gear
Lift Drive Gear
Hook
No. Screw Type

1. Release the hook, and remove the Separate Roller Drive Gear. 1. Remove the screw (S2: ), and remove the Lift Drive Gear.

Confidential
Option Feed Lever Cover Option Feed Lever

D9 E9 F9 D10 E10 F10
Option Feed Lever
Hole
Spring
Option Feed Lever Cover
Hole
No. Screw Type

Engage long leg here.
1. Remove the two screws (S6: ), then remove the Option Feed Lever Cover. 1. Release the Option Feed Lever from the holes of the cover.
2. Remove the Option Feed Lever with the spring.

Confidential
Option Cassette Grounding Plate Option Pickup Holder Assy

D11 E11 F11 D12 E12
Hooks
Option Pick Up
Holder Assy
Option Cassette Ground Plate
Hooks
S3 S32 C.C.P-TITE-SCREW-3x8-F.ZN-3C
1. Remove the screw (S3: ), then remove the Option Cassette Ground Plate. 1. Remove the two screws (S32: ).
2. Disengage the six hooks, then remove the Option Pick Up Holder Assy.

Confidential
Spur Gear (with E-ring) Vertical Roller

D13 E13 E14
Bush
Spur Gear
Vertical Roller
E-ring
E-ring
& Bush
1. Remove the E-ring, then remove the Spur Gear. 1. Remove the E-ring.
2. Remove the two bushes.
3. Pull out the Vertical Roller.

Confidential
Option Pickup Holder Assy Cassette Detection Sensor

F12 F13
Back
Hook
Hooks
Option Pick Up
Holder Assy
Cable
Connector
Hooks
No. Screw Type

1. Remove the two screws (S32: ). 1. Disengage the hook and remove the sensor.
2. Disengage the six hooks, then remove the Option Pick Up Holder Assy. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.

Confidential
Cassette Paper Size Sensor Feed Sensor

F13 F13
Feed Sensor
Cassette paper size sensor
Connector
Cable
Connector
Hooks
Hooks Cable
1. Disengage the hook and remove the sensor. 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.

Confidential
Paper Detection Sensor Hopper Up/Down Sensor

F13 F13
Paper Detection Sensor

Connector Connector
Hooks Hooks
Cable Cable
1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor. 1. Disengage the four hooks and remove the sensor.
2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor. 2. Disconnect the cable from the connector of the sensor.

Confidential
OUTLINE
Time
Total
Option Cassette Paper Size
A 8 min 32 sec --- 8 min 32 sec
Sensor
B 8 min 41 sec --- 8 min 41 sec
Sensor Lever
C 8 min 41 sec --- 8 min 41 sec
Sensor Holder

Confidential
ASSEMBLY FLOWCHART
Start
A1 B1 Remove the Printer Main

C1 Unit (→P. 735)
A2 B2 Option Right Cover

C2 (→P. 735)
A3 B3 Option Left Cover

C3 (→P. 736)
A4 B4 Option Front Cover

C4 (→P. 736)
A5 B5 Option Paper Cassette

C5 (→P. 737)
A6 B6 Option Cassette Paper Size

C6 Sensor Assy (→P. 737)
A7 B7 Option Cassette Paper Size

C7 Sensor (→P. 738)
B8 Option Cassette Paper Size

C8 Sensor Lever (→P. 738)
C9 Option Cassette Paper Size

Sensor Holder (→P. 739)

Confidential
A1 B1 A2 B2
Remove the Printer Main Unit Option Right Cover
C1 C2
Option Right Cover

No. Screw Type
1. Remove the Printer main Unit from Option Cassette Unit. 1. Remove the four screws (S2: ), then remove the Option Right Cover.

Confidential
A3 B3 A4 B4
Option Left Cover Option Front Cover
C3 C4
Option Front Cover
Option Left Cover
No. Screw Type

S8 C.B.S-TITE(P4), SCREW, 3X10, F/ZN-3C
No. Screw Type
S4 C.SHOULDER S-TITE, SCREW, 3X5
1. Remove the four screws (S8: ), then remove the Option Left Cover. 1. Remove the two screws (S8: ), and the two screws (S4: ) then remove the Option Front
Cover.

Confidential
A5 B5 A6 B6
Option Paper Cassette Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Assy
C5 C6

Sensor Assy

Sensor Cable
Option Paper Cassette No. Screw Type

1. Remove the Option Paper Cassette. 1. Disconnect the Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Cable from Option Cassette Board.
2. Send the Option Cassette Paper size Sensor Cable to direction of the arrow.
3. Remove two screws (S2: ), and Pull out the Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Assy.
4. Disconnect the Option Cassette paper Size Sensor Cable from the Option Cassette Paper
Size Sensor Assy.

Confidential
A7 B7 B8
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Lever
C7 C8
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor
Hook
Hook
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Lever
1. Release the hook, and remove the Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor. 1. Release the hook, and remove the Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Lever.

Confidential
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Holder

C9
Option Cassette Paper Size Sensor Holder

Confidential
CHAPTER
8
MAINTENANCE/INSPECTION
Confidential
8.1 Cleaning 8.2 Lubrication

Excepting the Print Head, there is no parts or components that need to be The type and amount of the grease used to lubricate the printer parts are
cleaned on a regular basis. Clean the printer as need arises. When cleaning, determined based on the results of the internal evaluations. Therefore, refer to
make sure to observe the methods and cautions described below. "8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions (p. 742)" for the repairing
procedures below, and apply the specified type and amount of the grease to the
 Cleaning Method (general)
specified part of the printer mechanism.
 Exterior parts such as housing
Wipe the surface using a soft clean cloth moistened with water. Use of an  Grease
unwoven cloth is recommended for coated or transparent part to prevent
damaging the surface. Type Name EPSON Part Code Supplier
 Inside the printer Grease G-96 1590700 EPSON
Use a vacuum cleaner for removing paper dust.
Grease G-97 1635441 EPSON
 Rubber or plastic rollers in the paper feed mechanism such as LD Roller/
Pickup Roller  Tools
If paper dust adhered to the roller surface drops the frictional force and causes
paper feed problems, moisten a cloth with water and wring the water out, then Name Availability EPSON Part Code
wipe the dust off the roller using the cloth.
Injector ○* ---
 Scanner Glass
Brush ○* ---
Wipe the scanner glass using a soft clean cloth.
When oil stain or stubborn stains are attached, clean with a small amount of Use tools whose specifications are specified in 8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions (P.
glass cleaner attached to a soft cloth. 742).
 Do not wipe transparent parts with a cloth moistened with

alcohol or diluted alcohol. Doing so may make the transparent
parts cloudy.
 When wiping paper dust off the LD Roller/Pickup Roller, do
not wipe against the grain of the roller surface.
Maintenance/Inspection Cleaning 741

Confidential
8.2.1 Lubrication Points and Instructions <Lubrication Point>

CR Shaft
CR Shaft
<Lubrication Point>
CR Guide Frame <Type>
G-97
<Type>
G-97 <Application Amount>
Appropriate amount
<Application Amount>
Appropriate amount <Remarks>
Apply with brush.
<Remarks>
Lubricate with injector on
CR Guide Frame
the contact surface between
CR Guide Frame and CR
Unit.
Application point Application point
Figure 8-1. Lubrication of the CR Guide Frame Figure 8-3. Lubrication of the CR Shaft
<Lubrication Point> <Lubrication Point>

Right PG Adjustment Lever Right PG Adjustment Lever Left PG Adjustment Lever
<Type> Left PG Adjustment Lever <Type>
G-97 G-97
<Application Amount> <Application Amount>
Appropriate amount Appropriate amount
<Remarks> <Remarks>
Lubricate with brush on the Lubricate with brush on the
contact surface between contact surface between Left
Right PG Adjustment Lever PG Adjustment Lever and
and CR Bearing. CR Bearing.
Application point
Figure 8-2. Lubrication of the Right PG Adjustment Lever Application point
Figure 8-4. Lubrication of the Left PG Adjustment Lever
Maintenance/Inspection Lubrication 742

Confidential
<Lubrication Point>
Transmission Gear
<Type>
G-96
0.1g
<Remarks>
Lubricate with brush on the
entire circumference of
Transmission Gear.
Transmission Gear Application point
Figure 8-5. Lubrication of the Transmission Gear
<Lubrication Point>
CR Driven Pulley
<Type>
G-97
φ 1 mm × 1 mm
<Remarks>
Lubricate with injector on
the hole on CR Driven
Pulley.
CR Driven Pulley
Figure 8-6. Lubrication of the CR Driven Pulley
Maintenance/Inspection Lubrication 743

Confidential
8.3 Periodic Replacement Parts 8.3.2 How to Reset the Counter for Periodic Replacement
Parts
8.3.1 Overview 8.3.2.1 Printer Main Unit/Additional Cassettes Roller Counter
The parts listed below need to be replaced periodically. 1. Select [Settings] from the home screen.
 Make sure to replace the each Pickup Roller and the

Retard Roller together.
 After replacing them, make sure to reset the counter for
the parts using the service support mode.
Table 8-1. List of Periodic Replacement Parts
ASP Threshold value

Part name
Code Near-End End
Pickup Roller
Main 194,000 sheets 200,000 sheets
Retard Roller Figure 8-7. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (1)
Ink System Ink System Assy Refer to Parts 291,000 sheets 300,000 sheets 2. Select [Maintenance].
Pickup Roller List *1
Optional Cassette 194,000 sheets 200,000 sheets
Retard Roller
Rear ASF Unit Rear ASF Unit 48,500 sheets 50,000 sheets
*1 : Check the part code from the corresponding product parts list.
Figure 8-8. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (2)
Maintenance/Inspection Periodic Replacement Parts 744

Confidential
3. Select [Maintenance Roller Information]. 5. Select the cassette of the paper feed roller that was replaced.
Figure 8-9. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (3) Figure 8-11. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (5)
4. Select [Reset Maintenance Roller Counter]. 6. Select [Yes] to reset the counter.
Figure 8-10. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (4) Figure 8-12. Periodic Replacement Parts Counter Reset Screen (6)

Confidential
8.3.2.2 Rear ASF Unit/ Ink System Assy

1. Start the printer in service support mode.
(Refer to "5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures" (p. 125))
2. From the service support mode top menu, select “Counter Reset”.

Back:[*] Run:[#]

Maintenance: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Debug Log Get Mode: MENU]

3. Select the item according to the part that was replaced, and reset the counter.
Example: When resetting the RASF Unit Counter

B16 Counter Reset B16 Counter Reset
Please select the counter
RASF Unit
PF/EJ Counter: ********** Value: **
ASF Counter: **********
RASF Unit: ******** Reset Value?
Mainte counter: **********
Done: [2]
Select: [2][8] Cancel: [8]
Reset:[6] Back:[*]

Confidential
8.4 Printer Status Information 3. The printer status information is displayed as shown below.

This printer allows you to check the current firmware version and the latest Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6]
error histories when printing cannot be made due to Fatal Error or the like. Back:[*] Run:[#]
ROM Version Information

C H E C K  Types of the error history are as follows. Mech Fatal Error : MENU
SCN Fatal Error : MENU
P O IN T • Printer Fatal Error System Error : MENU
(The last 5 error histories and dates)
• SCN Fatal Error
(The last 5 error histories and dates)
• System Error
(The last 5 error histories and dates) Figure 8-16. Printer Status Information Screen (2)
 If there is no error history, “---” is displayed.
4. When you select each item, the information is shown below.
HOW TO CHECK THE PRINTER STATUS INFORMATION Mech Fatal Error : MENU
1. Start the printer in service support mode. Back:[*] Run:[#]
(Refer to "5.1.1 Service mode startup and operating procedures" (p. 125)) Mech Fatal Error 1 (new)
Mech Fatal Error 2
2. Select “Printer Status Information” from service support mode top menu. Mech Fatal Error 3
Mech Fatal Error 4
Service Support Mode Mech Fatal Error 5
Back:[*] Run:[#]

ADF/SCN: MENU
Mech Fatal Error 1 ( 最新 )
Maintenance: MENU
Code :
Total number of prints:
Date :
CR Unlock Power Off
Time :
USB FW Update
Humidity :
Counter Reset
Temperature :
Back Menu: [#]
Figure 8-15. Printer Status Information Screen (1)
Figure 8-17. Printer Status Information Screen (3)
Maintenance/Inspection Printer Status Information 747

Confidential
8.5 USB F/W Update 1-2. Copy firmware data& license data into the folder.
By using USB Memory, WF-C878R/WF-C878Ra can be updated firmware  Both of firmware data& license data must be copied
without Internet connection. in the folder.
Do not copy any other data in the folder.
Refer to USB F/W Update procedure below.  Each of firmware data& license data must be the
name of
Be sure to get agreement with customer before execute F/W
Firmware data: FW3170TL.efu
update.
License data: license.txt
 Use firmware data& license data with original
(delivered) combination as they have combination
USB F/W UPDATE PROCEDURE limitation.
1. USB setup
1-1. Insert USB memory to PC, and create new folder.
 Folder name must be FW3170TL.

 Folder must be directly below USB memory.
FW3170TL
Figure 8-19.
Figure 8-18.
Maintenance/Inspection USB F/W Update 748

Confidential
2. Execute firmware update. 2-4. Firmware Update execute screen will be shown.
(Current firmware data version and update data version will be shown)
2-1. Boot up the printer in service support mode.
Push the [#] button and execute firmware update.
2-2. Select the “USB FW Update”. USB FW Update
Current Ver.: ******

Update Ver.: ******
Up/Down:[2][8] Shift:[4][6] Update?
Back:[*] Run:[#] Done: Push [#]
Cancel: Push [*]
Maintenance: MENU
CR Unlock Power Off
USB FW Update
Counter Reset
Figure 8-22.
2-5.Firmware update process screen will be shown.
Do not remove USB memory, or power off the printer during

Figure 8-20.
firmware update.
2-3. Insert USB memory and push [#] button when below screen shown.
USB FW Update
Connect USB Memory USB FW Update

Then, Push [#]
Now FW Updating…
Please Wait.
Figure 8-21.
Figure 8-23.

Confidential
2-6. Below screen will be shown after complete firmware update.

Push [0] button and finish firmware update when it's shown.
EPSON PRINTER
Program Update Mode
FINISHED MAIN
ROM VERSION xxxxxxxxxxxxx
ROM1 FIXSUM xxxx
ROM2 FIXSUM xxxx
ROM3 FIXSUM xxxx
Figure 8-24.

Confidential
8.6 Product Swap  This procedure must be performed as the various information
settings cannot be taken over to the new product.
8.6.1 Overview  To take over the data of the PDL card, this card must be
This section explains how to take over various setting information when the removed. For this reason, move the card together with the
printer is swapped over to a new product. PCB Rom.
When the printer main unit must be swapped due to a product malfunction, for
example, the various information settings of the malfunctioning printer can be
taken over to the normally working hardware (hardware to swap with). This
eliminates the need to reset the various settings and allows settings to be PDL Card
restored quickly.
The various information of the product are stored in PCB Rom. This
information can be taken over by moving the PCB Rom to a normally working
hardware (hardware to swap with) from the malfunctioning printer.
The following information is stored on PCB Rom:
 PCB Rom stored information
The following two types of information are stored on the PCB Rom:
 Mech Unique data (Adjustment value etc.)
 User Setting Data (User Setting data, Serial Number etc)
When perform the product swap, it is necessary to take over the “user setting
data” only to swapping product. Figure 8-25. PDL Card
Therefore, you need over write the “Mech Unique data” of swapping product
after moving the PCB ROM.
The work procedure at product swap will be explained from the next section.
Maintenance/Inspection Product Swap 751

Confidential
8.6.2 Working procedure of Product Swap 8.6.2.2 Detail of procedure
8.6.2.1 Flowchart DATA BACKUP
 Overview
Start Before swapping the product, temporarily back up the printer specific
information (mechanical adjustment values, etc.) saved in the PCB Rom of
the normally working hardware to backup area on the normally working
Data Backup hardware.
(→P. 752)
 Execution timing
 Before swapping the product
Move the PCB ROM
(→P. 517)
Data Restore
(→P. 753)
Finish

Confidential
 Working procedure DATA RESTORE

1. Start the Printer by Service Support Mode.  Overview
Restore the backed-up printer specific information from the back up area to
2. Select the “Swap Mech Unit: MENU” from Service Support Mode Top menu.
the PCB Rom that was moved from the faulty printer.
3. Select the “Data Backup” from Swap Mech Unit:Menu.
4. Push [#] Button, and execute the data back up.
5. When the following data backup contemplate screen is displayed, turn off the  After swapping the product
printer and remove the PCB ROM, and then install it to the new printer.
Data Backup
Backup Finish!!.
Please Power off,

and please restore,
after swap ROM Board.
C H E C K If the following message is displayed, the backup data is

P O IN T already saving to the backup storage area of Main Board.
In this case, delete the backup data of backup storage area,
and execute the data backup again.
(Refer to Data delete (p. 754))
Data Backup
File Write Error.
Already input Backup Data

Please Push [*]

Confidential
 Working procedure DATA DELETE

1. Start the Printer by Service Support Mode.
 Overview
2. Select the “Swap Mech Unit: MENU” from Service Support Mode Top menu. Delete the backup data in the backup storage area of Main Board.
3. Select the “Data Restore” from Swap Mech Unit:Menu.
Perform this item when backup data already exists in backup
4. Push [#] Button, and execute the data Restore. area and data cannot be backed up.
5. When Data restore is complete, following message is displayed.
Data Restore
Restore Finish!!  When backup can not be executed
(Backup data is already saves to backup storage area of Main Board)
Please push [*]
 Working procedure
1. Start the Printer by Service Support Mode.
2. Select the “Swap Mech Unit: MENU” from Service Support Mode Top menu.
3. Select the “Data Delete” from Swap Mech Unit:Menu.
C H E C K  If backup data is not saving to the backup storage area of
P O IN T Main Board, following message is displayed. 4. Push [#] button, and execute the backup data delete.
Data Restore
Error!!
Backup Data noting

Please Push [*]
 When Data restore is finished correctly, backup data is

deleted automatically

Confidential
CHAPTER
9
APPENDIX
Confidential
9.1 Connection Diagram

Feed Sensor
SMAP Phase Sensor
Lift Phase Sensor Duplex Unit Paper Detector
Hopper Up/down Sensor Rear Cover Open Sensor
ASF Encoder Paper Detector (C1)
PF Motor Cassette Paper Size Detector (2)
ASF Motor PE Sensor
Lift Motor Humidity Sensor
ADF Cover Open Sensor
PW Solenoid
ADF Close Sensor SCN CISM ADF CISM
ADF Document Sensor
PF Encoder ADF Document Length Detector
CN9 CN16 CN58 CN15 CN44 CN11 CN45 CN7 Ink Supply Feed Sensor
CN19 APG Encoder
CN32 CN63 APG Phase Sensor
CN53 CN36 CN38 CN39 CN130 CN462 CN463 CN464 CN465
Intermediate NIP Release sensor
CN54
CN55 CN52 CN33 SCN Document Length Detector
APG Motor
Mechanism Relay Board
Supply Pump Motor 0 CN34 SCN Document Length Detector
CN51 Cassette Paper Size Detector (1) ADF PE Sensor A/B CN37
Supply Pump Motor 1 Ink Leak Sensor 1 CN35 SCN Document Length Detector
Rear ASF Sorenoid
ADF PE Sensor C CN31
Ink Leak Sensor 2
CN42
Ink Leak Sensor 3 μSD CN10 CN30 SCN Encoder
Ink Pack Cover Open Sensor CN59
LED Board ADF/SCN Board CN31 ADF PF Encoder
CN32 ADF Pickup Encoder

CN8 CN56 CN46 CN14 CN41 CN64
CR Motor Ink End Sensor (C)
CN22 ADF PF Motor
Ink End Sensor (M)
Ink End Sensor (Y) CN21 ADF Pickup Motor
Ink End Sensor (K) CN432 CN458
Front Cover Sensor CN20 SCN motor
Paper Detector (Rear ASF Unit)
Cassette Paper Size Detector (1) CN8 CN4 Lift Phase Sensor Speaker
Paper Jam Clear Cover Sensor CN5 CN13 ASF Motor

ASF Encoder CN6 CN12 Lift Motor
Wireless LAN PDL Board
CN3 Cassette Paper Size Detector (2) Module
CN7 Feed Sensor Panel Board USB-Host
CN3
Cassette Detection Sensor
Paper Detector
CN302 CN106 CN601 Power Supply Unit
CN102 CN103 CN104
Additional Cassette
Board CN2
CN1 Additional Bin Drawer (bottom)
PCL Board
CN107 CN102
㻯㻾㻯㻹㻌㻲㻲㻯
CN1 CN705 CN105 Authentication device stand port
Main Board
B CN3 CN101 USB
CN1 CN2
CN201 Ethernet
CN701 CN702 CN704 CN703 CN404
Ink Packs CSIC
Y CN2
M CN4
CSIC (CRCM) Relay Board
C CN5
CSIC (CRCM) Board

CN202 CN914
CN707 Maintenance box CSIC
CN101 CN102 CN104 CN103 CN109 FAX Board CN4 CN1 CN5 CN1
Head Relay Board PCB ROM
CN105 CN106 CN108 CN107 CN110
CR Encoder
PW Sensor FAX Outrigger

Board
Print Head
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 756

Confidential
9.2 Part Names Conversion Table Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
163 LABEL,PRECISIONCORE;B TBD
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual 164 HOUSING,FRONT,ASSY.CG68,IEI TBD
101 PANEL ASSY.,*,CH60,ASP Panel Unit 165 HOUSING,FRONT,RIGHT,UPPER TBD
103 BAND,COVER,REAR,OPT Paper Jam Clear Cover Belt 200 MB ASSY.,CH60,ASP Main Board
COVER,FRONT,ASSY.,ASP Ink Pack Cover 300 BOARD ASSY.,POWER SUPPLY Power Supply Unit
104
COVER,FRONT,RIPS,CH60,ASP 351 WIRELESS LAN USB MODULE Wi-Fi Board
105 STACKER ASSY.,CH60,ASP Stacker Assy 352 BOARD ASSY.,MAIN PDL Board
106 COVER,REAR,RIPS ASSY.,CH60,ASP Paper Jam Clear Cover 353 BOARD ASSY.,PROG TBD
PAPER SUPPORT,MIDDLE, TBD 356 BOARD ASSY.,INTERFACE TBD
107
ASSY.CF34.,B;IEI
357 HARNESS TBD
108 HOUSING,RIGHT Right Housing
358 HARNESS TBD
109 HOUSING,RIGHT,RIPS ASSY.,ASP Right RIPS Housing Assy
360 BOARD ASSY.,SUB TBD
110 USB HOST ASSY.,CH60,ASP USB Host Assy
361 BOARD ASSY.,INTERFACE TBD
112 COVER,CONNECTOR,MFP,ASP Connector Cover
362 HARNESS TBD
113 COVER,REAR,ASF,ASSY.,ASP TBD
363 HARNESS TBD
116 BELT,STOPPER,MSF Ink Pack Cover Belt
364 BOARD ASSY.,SUB TBD
118 COVER,FRONT,ASSY.,ASP Front Cover Assy
365 MEMORY CARD TBD
120 COVER,INNER,LEFT TBD
501 PW SHUTTER.,ASSY.CG68;IEI PW Drive Shutter
121 HOLDER LEVER LOCK ASSY.,ASP Ink Pack Cover Lock Lever Assy
502 MOTOR,APG.,ASSY.CG68;IEI APG Motor Assy
122 HOUSING,LEFT,RIPS,ASSY.,ASP Left RIPS Housing Assy
503 MOTOR DRIVE APG,ASSY.,ASP APG Drive Assy
134 HOUSING,FRONT,MIDDLE Upper Middle Housing
BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF, PF Encoder Assy
135 HOUSING,FRONT,LEFT Front Left Housing 504
ASSY.CG68;IEI
136 HOUSING,FRONT,RIGHT Front Right Housing 505 TIMING BELT,PF PF Timing Belt
137 DECORATION,LEFT,SC Left SC Cover 506 DRIVE,PF ASSY.,IEI PF Drive Assy
138 DECORATION,RIGHT,SC Right SC Cover 507 DRIVE ASF,ASSY.,ASP ASF Drive Assy
140 HOUSING,REAR ASSY.;C,ASP Rear Housing Assy 508 IS DECOMP PUMP ASSY .,CH35,;IEI Decompression Pump Unit
150 HOUSING,LEFT Left Housing Assy TUBE ASSY Ink Supply Tube Assy
509
155 LABEL,BLIND,SCREW --- SUPPLY,UNIT,CH35,ASP
160 COVER,FRONT,RIPS,CH60,ASP TBD 510 CABLE,CSIC,INK EJECT,ASP Maintenance Box CSIC
161 GUIDE,PAPER SUPPORT;B TBD 511 HOLDER,STARWHEEL Star Wheel Assy
162 ASSY.,CH35;IEI
HOUSING,REAR,UPPER TBD
512 CARRIAGE,ASSY.CF34;IEI CR Unit
APPENDIX Part Names Conversion Table 757

Confidential
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
513 SCALE,CR,ASSY.,ASP CR Scale HOLDER,DETECTOR,PAPER Cassette Papersize Detector Holder
553
515 LEVER,BLOCK,COVER,REAR,ASF TBD LENGTH
516 554 LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER LENGTH Cassette Papersize Detector Lever
TORSION SPRING,FE LEVER,RIPS Torsion Spring
517 555 CABLE,CSIC,M CSIC FFC
INK SYSTEM ASSY.,ASP Ink System Assy
518 556 CABLE,CSIC,BK CSIC FFC
LEVER,FE DETECTOR,RIPS RIPS Feed Sensor Lever
520 557 ROLLER,DRIVEN,PF,;IEI ---
PHOTO INTERRUPTER TBD
521 PAPER GUIDE,UPPER, Paper Guide Upper Left
BOARD ASSY.,DETECTOR,PW;B PW Sensor 558
LEFT.,ASSY,CF34,B;IEI
523 DUCT PUMP,ASSY.,UNIT,ASP Ink Supply Unit
PAPER GUIDE,UPPER, Paper Guide Upper Right
524 AMADOI ASSY.,CH35,ASP Ink Leak Sensor Assy 559
RIGHT.,ASSY,CF34,B;IEI
525 SUPPLY,ROLLER,ASSY.;C,SEC Pickup Roller PAPER GUIDE,UPPER, Paper Guide Upper Center Right
560
LEVER,DETECTOR,PAPER TBD RIGHT.,ASSY,;IEI
526
GUIDE,REAR,ASF;B 561 CABLE,CSIC,C CSIC FFC
528 BOARD ASSY.,SUB CSIC Relay Board 562 CABLE,CSIC,Y CSIC FFC
529 TIMING BELT,CR CR Timing Belt 567 SPUR GEAR,20,LIFT,ASF Lift Gear
530 MOUNTING PLATE,HOLDER, TBD 568 BOARD ASSY.,SENSOR TBD
ROLLER,2ND ASSY
570 POROUS PAD,CR CR Unit Porous Pad
531 BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER APG Encoder
571 LEVER,PAPER DETECT,MIDDLE TBD
532 TUBE MOTOR DECOMP,ASP Decompression Tube Assy
700 PRINT HEAD,HOP3;ASP Print Head
533 SHOULDER BOLT,3X4,RASF TBD
701 REAR,ASF,ASSY.,ASP Rear ASF Unit
MOUNTING PLATE,SOLENOID, TBD
534 702 SHEET,GUIDE,ROOLER,RASF Rear ASF Upper Cover
ASSY.,ASP
705 LEVER,CLUTCH,ASSY.,SEC Rear ASF Solenoid
536 COMPRESSION SPRING, Compression Spring
2.7,RETARD 706 CLUTCH,LD,ASSY.,SEC Rear ASF Clutch Gear
543 HARNESS,GROUNDING,RASF TBD 715 CASSETTE ASSY.,ASP Cassette Assy
SENSOR,TEMPERATURE,HUMIDIT Humidity Sensor 718 DUP ASSY.,ASP Duplex Print Unit
547
Y,HSHCAA106F 720 LEAF SENSOR,P599 TBD
548 LIFT DRIVE ASSY.,ASP Lift Drive Assy COVER,OPEN DETECTOR,
721 Paper Jam Clear Cover Open Sensor
PAPER GUIDE,UPPER, Paper Guide Upper Center Left REAR,RIPS
549
LEFT.,ASSY,;IEI
722 HOLDER,RETARD,CASSETTE,ASSY Retard Roller
550 PAPER GUIDE,UPPER,CENTER TBD .;IEI
ASSY,;IEI 723 HOUSING,REAR,RIPS Rear RIPS Housing
551 MOTOR ASSY.,CR CR Motor 726 TRAY,INK PACK,CL,ASP Ink Pack Tray (CL)
552 4 LINE SWITCH Cassette Papersize Detector

Confidential
Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual Ref# ASP Name Name used in This Manual
729 TRAY,INK PACK,BK,ASP Ink Pack Tray (BK) 930 PHOTO INTERRUPTER TBD
732 COVER,FRONT,INNER,RIPS TBD 931 HOUSING,REAR,LEFT,ADF TBD
741 COVER,ASF,CH60,ASP TBD 932 HOUSING,REAR,RIGHT,ADF TBD
752 BAND,COVER,REAR,OPT Option Rear Cover Belt 933 SHOULDER BOLT,3X4,RASF TBD
763 LABEL,PAPER SIZE,CASSETTE Paper Label
766 LABEL,CASSETTE POSITION ---
770 SCREW MOUNT HEAD ASSY.,ASP Screw
771 HOUSING,FRONT,RIPS,ASP Front RIPS Housing
800 ADF SCANNER ASSY ADF/SCN Unit

UNIT,CH60,ASP
902 COVER,REAR,ADF,ASP TBD
903 DECORATION,REAR,ADF;B TBD
904 COVER,FRONT,ADF,CH60,ASP Front ADF Cover
905 DECORATION,FRONT,ADF;B TBD
906 DOC,SUPPORT,ADF ASSY.,ASP Top ADF Document Support Assy
907 DOCUMENT,SUPPORT,LOWER,ADF Bottom ADF Document Support

;B
908 DOCUMENT GUIDE,LOWER,ADF TBD

ASSY.,IEI
909 PAD,ADF ASSY,;SEC TBD
910 HINDGE ASSY.,RIGHT;B TBD
911 HINDGE ASSY.,LEFT;B TBD
912 MAT,COVER DOCUMENT Document Mat Cover Assy
914 COVER,ASF,CH60,ASP TBD
915 LD ASSY,;SEC TBD
916 COVER,RIGHT,ADF TBD
918 LABEL,BLIND,PANEL;B ---
919 LABEL,FUNCTION,ADF ---
921 PRESSING PLATE,RIGHT,SC TBD
924 LABEL,CAUTION,ADF ---
925 LABEL,EDGE GUIDE OPERATION ---
926 LABEL,ACCESS,POINT,SET ---

Confidential
9.3 Status Sheet Information

The following status sheets can be printed from the printer.
This section explains about each item printed on the status sheets.
 Overview of Status Sheets
 Printer information sheet: printer settings information
 Consumables information sheet: supported model numbers of consumables or periodic replacement parts, and the total number of sheets fed into the printer.
 Usage history sheet: usage history such as the total number of printed pages per function.
 Service status sheet: in addition to the information included in the above three sheets, information required for servicing is also provided.
 Status Sheet Items
 Service Status Sheet (total pages: 11 sheets)
Item Explanation
Device ID Device ID (product name) is displayed.
Serial Number The serial number of the product is displayed.
MAC Address MAC address of the product is displayed.
Internal Memory Capacity of the memory inside the product is displayed.
<H/W>
ID card reader status Connection condition of a device for user authentication is displayed.
Hardware
Firmware Version of the firmware is displayed.
Main Firmware Version of the main firmware is displayed.
<Version Information> NW Firmware Version of the NW firmware is displayed.
PDL Version of the PDL is displayed.
QPIT Version of the QPIT is displayed.
APPENDIX Status Sheet Information 760

Confidential
Item Explanation
Screen language Currently selected screen language is displayed.
Mute*1 Whether the mute function is enabled or not is displayed.
Button press sound
ADF set sound
Normal end sound
Error sound
<Sound settings> Fax received sound
Normal Sound level setting (0 to 10) is displayed.
Fax sent sound
Basic settings
Fax printed sound
Fax incoming sound
Speaker volume for dial tone
Sound type
Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed. When enabled, the time
Sleep timer setting
period before the product enters sleep mode is also displayed.
Whether the auto power off setting is enabled or not is displayed. When
Auto power off setting enabled, the time period before the printer automatically turns off is also
displayed.
USB I/F timeout setting USB I/F time out settings are displayed.
USB
Print language Print language settings are displayed.
Network 1
Auto error resolver Whether the auto error resolver options are enabled or not is displayed.
External memory Whether the external memory setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printer setting External memory settings*1 The file sharing setting (which connection way of computers, USB or
File sharing
network, is allowed to access the external memory) is displayed.
Ink drying time for 2-sided printing Ink drying time setting for 2-sided printing is displayed.
PC connection via USB Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Rubbing reduction Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Operation sound reduction mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Paper size Paper size settings of each paper cassette are displayed.
Paper cassette 1 to paper
Paper type Paper type settings of each paper cassette are displayed.
Paper cassette cassette 4, rear MP tray
Whether the auto paper size detection is enabled or not for each of the paper
Paper size auto detection
cassettes is displayed.
User-defined sizes favorites If registered, the registration contents are displayed.
1 to 20
If not registered, "-----" is displayed.
Copy
Paper source cassette 4, rear MP tray
settings Paper cassette 1 to paper Whether the auto paper source selection setting for each of the functions is
Auto paper source selection Fax
cassette 4, rear MP tray enabled or not is displayed.
Others Paper cassette 1 to paper

cassette 4, rear MP tray
A4/LTR auto switching Whether the A4/LTR auto switching function is enabled or not is displayed.
MP tray priority Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper size error notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper type error notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Upper print position adjust
Left print position adjust
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Back upper print position adjust
Back left print position adjust
Paper width check Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
External device Skip blank page Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
(PC) print Main unit color correction Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
settings Brightness
Chromaticity
Main unit color correction Contrast
The correction value (-25 to 25) is displayed.
Color adjustmentRed
Color adjustmentGreen
Color adjustmentBlue

Confidential
Item Explanation
Paper size Paper size setting is displayed.
Paper type Paper type setting is displayed.
Paper orientation The orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Print quality The print quality setting (Draft, Standard, or Best) is displayed.
Ink save mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Common settings
Print order The print order setting (print from the first page or last page) is displayed.
Number of copies Standard number of copies (1 to 999) is displayed.
Binding position The binding setting (Left/Right/Top/Bottom) is displayed.
Auto paper ejection Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Font Source
Font Number
PDF print Pitch
settings Height
<PCL Menu> Symbol Set PCL setting contents are displayed.
Form
CR Function
LF Function
Paper Source Assign
PS3 error sheet Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Coloration The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
<PS Menu>
Binary Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
PDF page size The PDF paper size setting is displayed.
PCL*1
<Printer language version> PS The version of each of the printer language is displayed.
PDF

Confidential
Item Explanation
Color The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
Document open password Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Permission for printing Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Security password
Permission for editing Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Resolution The resolution setting (200 dpi/300 dpi/600 dpi) is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the setting is 1-sided or 2-sided is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of 1-sided scanning)) is
Binding position
displayed.
Frame width The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case the shadow remove setting is
disabled)) is displayed.
<Common settings> Remove shadow
The center value setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove setting
Center value
is disabled)) is displayed.
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in case of the remove
Erasing setting
punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Remove punch holes
Scan settings Erase amount The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes setting
is disabled)) is displayed.
The document orientation setting (reading direction/portrait/landscape) is
Document set orientation
displayed.
Quality The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Mixed documents Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
File format File format setting is displayed.
Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
<Scan to Email>
<Scan to Folder> Compression ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The data compression ratio setting (Low/Middle/High) is displayed.
<Scan to Memory> Attached file max size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
<Scan to Cloud>
File - prefix (not provided for *“Scan to Cloud”) File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Time Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Administrator lock setting Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
User access control Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Administrator settings Color counts (Copy)
Whether the setting (auto detection or fix to color) is displayed.
Color counts (Others)
Main unit life warning display Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Version The version is displayed.
Epson Open Platform information
Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).
Option settings Page Count Setting The setting is displayed.

Confidential
 Configuration Status Sheet (total pages: 4 sheets)

Item Explanation
<H/W>
Counter value The ink level is displayed.
Black Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Manufacturer's serial number Manufacturer's serial number of each of the ink cartridges is displayed.
Hardware Counter value The ink level is displayed.
Cyan Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
<Ink Packs>
Magenta Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Yellow Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Counter value The remaining space in Maintenance Box is displayed.
Maintenance Box
Model number The model number of the Maintenance Box is displayed.
Model number The model number of the paper feed roller is displayed.
Paper feed roller 1 to paper
Periodic replacement parts Number of sheets of paper fed
feed roller 4 The number of sheets fed by each of the paper feed rollers is displayed.
in the printer

Confidential
Item Explanation
Number of sheets of paper fed
Customer engineer periodic Rear MP tray Number of sheets of paper fed in the printer is displayed.
in the printer
replacement parts
Hardware Ink System Assy Counter The counter value is displayed.
Paper source information Paper cassette 2 to Paper

Firmware version Firmware version of each of the paper cassette units is displayed.
cassette 4

Confidential
 Supply Status Sheet (total pages: 2 sheets)

Item Explanation
<H/W>
Hardware
Usage history Date and time of first printing The data and time the printer printed for the first time are displayed.
Total printed pages The total number of printed pages is displayed.
Total printed pages in monochrome The total number of pages printed in monochrome is displayed.
Total printed pages in color The total number of pages printed in color is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in the current month in monochrome at
Total printed pages of current month in monochrome
<Per function> the time of printing is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in the current month in color at the time
Total printed pages of current month in color
of printing is displayed.
Total printed 2-sided pages The total number of printed 2-sided pages is displayed.
Number of Total printed one-sided pages The total number of printed one-sided pages is displayed.
printed pages
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5
A6/Hagaki The total number of printed pages for each paper size is displayed.
<By paper size> (Detailed count per function (1-sided/2-sided, monochrome/color) is
B4/Legal displayed.)
B5
Envelope
Others

Confidential
Item Explanation
Monochrome copy
Color copy
Monochrome fax print
Color fax print
<Per purpose> Monochrome printing from a computer or smart device The total number of printed pages for each of the purposes is displayed.
Color printing from a computer or smart device
Number of Monochrome printing using the other functions or from an
printed pages external memory
Color printing using the other functions or from an external
memory
ESC/P-R
PCL The total number of pages printed using each of the printer languages is
<Per printer language>
PS / PDF displayed.
Others
Monochrome scan
Number of scanned pages The number of scanned pages is displayed.
Color scan
Monochrome sending completed
The number of pages for which sending is complete is displayed.
Color sending completed
Fax page counts
Monochrome reception completed
The number of pages for which reception is complete is displayed.
Color reception completed

Confidential
 Usage History Sheet (total pages: 2 sheets)

Item Explanation
<H/W>
Hardware
Screen language Currently selected screen language is displayed.
Mute Whether the mute function is enabled or not is displayed.
Button press sound
ADF set sound
Normal end sound
Error sound
<Sound settings> Fax received sound
Normal Sound level setting (0 to 10) is displayed.
Fax sent sound
Basic settings
Fax printed sound
Fax incoming sound
Speaker volume for dial tone
Sound type
Whether the sleep timer is enabled or not is displayed. When enabled,
Sleep timer setting
the time period before the product enters sleep mode is also displayed.
Whether the auto power off setting is enabled or not is displayed. When
Auto power off setting enabled, the time period before the printer automatically turns off is also
displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
USB I/F timeout setting USB I/F time out settings are displayed.
USB
Print language Print language settings are displayed.
Network 1
Auto error resolver Whether the auto error resolver options are enabled or not is displayed.
External memory Whether the external memory setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Printer setting External memory settings The file sharing setting (which connection way of computers, USB or
File sharing
network, is allowed to access the external memory) is displayed.
Ink drying time for 2-sided printing Ink drying time setting for 2-sided printing is displayed.
PC connection via USB Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Rubbing reduction Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Operation sound reduction mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper size Paper size settings of each paper cassette are displayed.
Paper type Paper type settings of each paper cassette are displayed.
Paper cassette cassette 4, rear MP tray
Whether the auto paper size detection is enabled or not for each of the
Paper size auto detection
paper cassettes is displayed.
User-defined sizes favorites If registered, the registration contents are displayed.
1 to 20
If not registered, "-----" is displayed.
Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 4,
Copy
rear MP tray
Paper source
Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 4, Whether the auto paper source selection setting for each of the functions
settings Auto paper source selection Fax
rear MP tray is enabled or not is displayed.
Others Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 4,

rear MP tray
Whether the A4/LTR auto switching function is enabled or not is
A4/LTR auto switching
displayed.
MP tray priority Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper size error notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Paper type error notice Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Upper print position adjust
Left print position adjust
The offset setting (-30 to 30) is displayed.
Back upper print position adjust
Back left print position adjust
Paper width check Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
External device Skip blank page Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
(PC) print Main unit color correction Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
settings Brightness
Chromaticity
Main unit color correction Contrast
The correction value (-25 to 25) is displayed.
Color adjustmentRed
Color adjustmentGreen
Color adjustmentBlue
Paper size Paper size setting is displayed.
Paper type Paper type setting is displayed.
Paper orientation The orientation setting (portrait or landscape) is displayed.
Print quality The print quality setting (Draft, Standard, or Best) is displayed.
Ink save mode Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
PDF print
Common settings The print order setting (print from the first page or last page) is
settings Print order
displayed.
Number of copies Standard number of copies (1 to 999) is displayed.
Binding position The binding setting (Left/Right/Top/Bottom) is displayed.
Auto paper ejection Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Font Source
Font Number
Pitch
Height
<PCL Menu>*1 Symbol Set PCL setting contents are displayed.
Form
PDF print
CR Function
settings
LF Function
Paper Source Assign
PS3 error sheet Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Coloration The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
<PS Menu>
Binary Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
PDF page size The PDF paper size setting is displayed.
IP address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Primary DNS server
Network settings Secondary DNS server The various network settings are displayed.
Proxy server settings
Proxy server
Proxy server port number
DNS domain name

Confidential
Item Explanation
Color The color setting (Color or Mono) is displayed.
Document open password Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Permission for printing Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Security password
Permission for editing Whether the password setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Resolution The resolution setting (200 dpi/300 dpi/600 dpi) is displayed.
2-Sided Whether the setting is 1-sided or 2-sided is displayed.
Binding position of documents (left/top/--- (in case of 1-sided scanning))
Binding position
is displayed.
Frame width The frame width setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case the shadow remove
setting is disabled)) is displayed.
<Common settings> Remove shadow
The center value setting (0 to 40 mm/---(in case of the shadow remove
Center value
The erasing setting (left edge/right edge/top edge/bottom edge/--- (in
Erasing setting
case of the remove punch holes setting is disabled)) is displayed.
Remove punch holes
Scan settings Erase amount The erasing amount (0 to 20 mm/--- (in case of the remove punch holes
The document orientation setting (reading direction/portrait/landscape)
Document set orientation
is displayed.
Quality The quality setting (Text/Text & Image/Photo) is displayed.
Mixed documents Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Density The density setting (-4 to 4) is displayed.
Subject (“Scan to Email” only) The subject of email is displayed.
File format File format setting is displayed.
Scan area Original document size setting is displayed.
<Scan to Email>
<Scan to Folder> Compression ratio (not provided for “Scan to Cloud”) The data compression ratio setting (Low/Middle/High) is displayed.
<Scan to Memory> Attached file max size (“Scan to Email” only) The maximum file size that can be attached to an email is displayed.
<Scan to Cloud>
File - prefix (not provided for *“Scan to Cloud”) File name prefix setting for scanned file is displayed.
Date Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Time Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
Administrator lock setting Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
User access control Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Administrator settings Color counts (Copy)
Whether the setting (auto detection or fix to color) is displayed.
Color counts (Others)
Main unit life warning display Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Version The version is displayed.
Epson Open Platform information
Product key The product key is displayed (“---” is displayed when it is not set).
Fax feature Whether the setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Option cassette 1 FW version
Option cassette 2 FW version Firmware version of each of the option cassettes is displayed.
Option cassette 3 FW version
Option settings Page Count Setting The setting is displayed.
The settings (enabled (connected), disabled (not connected), unavailable
HDD (Hard Disk Drive)
(connected), unavailable (not connected)) are displayed.
Ink low display setting Whether the ink low display setting is enabled or not is displayed.
Ink level display setting Whether the ink level display setting is enabled or not is displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
The display is in the order of <Number of replacements of new part>-
Black
<Remaining count>
Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
Cyan
<Remaining count>
<Ink Packs>
Magenta
<Remaining count>
Yellow
<Remaining count>
Consumables Model number The model number of the ink pack is displayed.
information Manufacturer's serial number Manufacturer's serial number of each of the ink cartridges is displayed.
Maintenance Box
<Maintenance Box> <Remaining count>
Model number The model number of the Maintenance Box is displayed.
Model number The number of sheets fed by each of the paper feed rollers is displayed.
Paper feed roller 1 to paper Number of sheets of paper fed in
The model number of the paper feed roller is displayed.
Periodic replacement parts feed roller 4 the printer
The number of replacements (the number of times the counter is reset) of
Number of replacements
each of the paper feed rollers is displayed.
Number of sheets of paper fed in
Number of sheets of paper fed in the printer is displayed.
Rear MP tray the printer
Customer engineer periodic Number of replacements The number of replacements is displayed.

replacement parts Counter The counter value is displayed.
Ink System Assy Number of replacements The number of replacements is displayed.
Error notification The number of error notifications is displayed.
Consumables
Print head serial ID (ID of the mounted head) The print head ID is displayed
information

Confidential
Item Explanation
Date and time of first printing The data and time the printer printed for the first time are displayed.
Total printed pages The total number of printed pages is displayed.
Total printed pages in monochrome The total number of pages printed in monochrome is displayed.
Total printed pages in color The total number of pages printed in color is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in the current month in monochrome
Total printed pages of current month in monochrome
<Per function> at the time of printing is displayed.
The total number of pages printed in the current month in color at the
Total printed pages of current month in color
time of printing is displayed.
Total printed 2-sided pages The total number of printed 2-sided pages is displayed.
Total printed one-sided pages The total number of printed one-sided pages is displayed.
A3/Ledger
A4/Letter
A5
A6/Hagaki The total number of printed pages for each paper size is displayed.
<By paper size> (Detailed count per function (1-sided/2-sided, monochrome/color) is
B4/Legal displayed.)
B5
Usage history
Envelope
Others
Monochrome copy
Color copy
Monochrome fax print
Color fax print
<Per purpose> Monochrome printing from a computer or smart device The total number of printed pages for each of the purposes is displayed.
Color printing from a computer or smart device
Monochrome printing using the other functions or from an
external memory
Color printing using the other functions or from an external
memory
ESC/P-R
PCL The total number of pages printed using each of the printer languages is
<Per printer language>
PS / PDF displayed.
Others

Confidential
Item Explanation
Plain paper
Letterhead paper
Recycled paper
Colored paper
Pre-print
Business plain paper
Thick paper 1
Thick paper 2
Thick paper 3 The total number of pages printed on each of the paper types is
<Per paper type>
Superfine paper displayed.
Photo matte paper
Double-sided matte business card paper
Photo paper
Usage history
CRISPIA photo paper
Light photo paper
Postcard
Postcard (inkjet paper)
Envelopes
Others Number of paper jams The total number of times a paper jam error occurs is displayed.
Scanner glass (pages)
The total number of pages scanned on each scanner glass is displayed.
ADF (pages)
Number of scan operations ADF (number of sheets) The total number of document sheets fed by the ADF is displayed.
Monochrome scan The number of pages scanned in monochrome is displayed.
Color scan The number of pages scanned in color is displayed.
Number of printed pages per paper
Paper cassette 1 to paper cassette 5, rear MP tray The total number of printed pages per paper source is displayed.
source
Setting change Adjustment name and execution date and time of last five adjustments
User adjustment history 01 to 05
history executed by the user are displayed.
Cleaning type and execution date and time of last five cleaning
Cleaning History 01 to 05
operations are displayed.
A number that represents the level of nozzle clogging (from 0) is
Nozzles clogging level Rank
displayed.

Confidential
Item Explanation
<Printer error> 01 to 10 The history when the error occurred is displayed below.
<Printer paper jam error> 01 to 10 • Error code
• Sub code
• Date and time of occurrence
• Number of printed pages
<Printer filter error> 01 to 05 • Internal temperature
• Internal humidity
• Paper feed path
Error history <Scanner error> 01 to 10 The history when the error occurred is displayed below.
• Error code
<Scanner fatal error> 01 to 05 • Date and time of occurrence
• Number of scanned pages
<Fax error> 01 to 10
<Network error> 01 to 10 The history when the error occurred is displayed below.
• Error code
<System error> 01 to 05 • Date and time of occurrence
<Other errors> 01 to 10
Ink coverage of print jobs finished before printing this status sheet is
PD1 level displayed according to the rule below.
L: less than 5%, M: 5% to 20%, H: more than 20%
Coverage Coverage Ratio
Ink coverage of the last print job is displayed according to the rule
PD2 level below.
L: less than 20%, M: 20% to 50%, H: more than 50%
Printer error The current printer status (errors) is displayed.
Scanner error "------" is displayed at all times
Status Fax error*1 The current printer status (errors) is displayed.
Network error The current printer status (errors) is displayed.
Other error The current printer status (errors) is displayed.

Confidential
9.4 WebConfig Reference Information 3. Click [Transmission of Main Unit Information].
C H E C K WebConfig is set and checked by the customer, and so, in

P O IN T principle, is not dealt with by service engineers.
9.4.1 Checking Operation of Main Unit Information

Transmission Function (WebConfig)
1. Enter the IP address of the printer in the web browser.
2. Check that the WebConfig top screen is displayed.
Figure 9-2. Checking Operation of Main Unit Information Transmission Function

(WebConfig) (2)
4. Wait for transmission to complete.

(WebConfig) (1)

(WebConfig) (3)
APPENDIX WebConfig Reference Information 780

Confidential
5. Check the transmission completed message. If an error message is displayed, refer 9.4.2 How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission
to Troubleshooting. Time (WebConfig)

(WebConfig) (4)
Figure 9-5. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time

(WebConfig) (1)
3. Click and move the device management tab.
Table 9-1. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time

(WebConfig) (2)

Confidential
4. Click [Main Unit Information Transmission Settings]. 6. Select [Settings].
Figure 9-6. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time Figure 9-8. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time
(WebConfig) (3) (WebConfig) (5)
5. Click [Main Unit Information Transmission Settings], and select the time zone. 7. Check that setting is completed.
Figure 9-7. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time Figure 9-9. How to Check Main Unit Information Transmission Time
(WebConfig) (4) (WebConfig) (6)

Confidential
9.4.3 Checking Number of Print Sides (WebConfig) 4. Check that the number of print pages is displayed.

Figure 9-12. Checking Number of Print Sides (WebConfig) (3)

3. Click [Usage Status].

Confidential

MT WF-C878R WF-C878Ra Rev.D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MT WF-C878R WF-C878Ra Rev.D

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MT WF-C878R WF-C878Ra Rev.D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

Color Inkjet Printer

Copyright © 2020 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT OUTLINE

CHAPTER 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 5. SERVICE SUPPORT MODE

CHAPTER 7. REPAIR WORK

Revision Date of Issue Description

Revise the content

1.1 Product Summary

* : The ADF/SCN mechanism, carriage mechanism, paper feeding and paper

Product Outline Product Summary 12

2.1 Product Hardware Specifications

Without consumables and options 59.7 kg

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 14

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 15

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 16

Product Specifications Product Hardware Specifications 17

2.2 Printing Specifications 2.3 Copying Specifications

Number of ink colors 4 color  Standard copy

Printer languages ESC/P Raster, ESC/P-R, ESC/P-RJ, Postscript3

Product Specifications Printing Specifications 18

Item Specification 2.4 ADF Specifications

Remove 600dpi monochrome 0.8 msec/line

Product Specifications ADF Specifications 19

2.5 Scanner Specifications 2.6 Options Specifications

Product Specifications Scanner Specifications 20

2.7 Network Specifications/Fax Specifications  FAX specifications

Product Specifications Network Specifications/Fax Specifications 21

3.1 Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) No. Name Explanation

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 23

No. Name Explanation

An exclusive printer stand (with casters) to

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 24

No. Name Explanation

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 25

No. Name Explanation

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 26

No. Name Explanation

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 27

Configuration Product Configuration (Name of Each Part) 28

3.2 Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications

Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 29

3.2.1 Printer Main Unit (Motors)

Supply Pump Motors

Figure 3-7. Printer Main Unit (Motors)

Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 30

3.2.2 Printer Main Unit

Ink Pack Cover Ink Cartridge Ink Cartridge

Figure 3-8. Ink Detection and Cover Detection System Sensors

Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 31

3.2.3 Printer Main Unit (CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids)

Figure 3-9. CR Mechanism Sensors and Solenoids

Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 32

3.2.4 Printer Main Unit

Transparent type ASF Encoder

Lift Phase Sensor

Configuration Motor, Sensor, Clutch, and Solenoid Specifications 33

3.2.5 Printer Main Unit